Construction Standards Rev.3

JANUARY 28, 2016
Construction Standards
Revision History
Rev Description Date Revised By Approved Approved By

Issued Procedure for revision of
0 1/15/16 K. Schedel 1/15/16 O. Perez
specific Division Documents
1/20/16
1 Marquee Sign Requirements 1/18/16 K. Schedel O. Perez
2 IDF Liebert Mini Mate Units 1/18/16 K. Schedel 1/20/16 O. Perez
Added Sign Off Sheet and Revised
3 1/28/16 K. Schedel 1/28/16 O. Perez
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Section 00
Construction Standards Revision Procedure

Revision History Log
Revision Procedure
Division Section/Sub-Division Approval Record
Approved Modifications Log
Approved Modification Documents
Division 02 - Existing Conditions

02 00 00 - General Requirements for Existing Conditions
02 20 00 – Existing Conditions Assessment
02 30 00 - Subsurface Investigations
02 40 00 - Demolition and Structure Moving
02 50 00 - Site Remediation
02 60 00 - Contaminated Site Material Removal
02 70 00 - Water Remediation
02 80 00 - Facility Remediation
Division 03 - Concrete
03 00 00 - General Requirements for Concrete
03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories
03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 40 00 - Precast Concrete
03 50 00 - Cast Decks and Underlayment
03 60 00 - Grouting
03 80 00 - Concrete Cutting and Boring
Division 04 - Masonry
04 00 00 - General Requirements for Masonry
04 20 00 - Unit Masonry Assemblies
04 40 00 - Stone Assemblies
04 70 00 - Manufactured Masonry
Division 05 - Metals
05 00 00 - General Requirements for Metals
05 10 00 - Structural Metal Framing
05 20 00 - Metal Joists
05 30 00 - Metal Decking
05 40 00 - Cold Formed Metal Framing
05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications
05 70 00 - Decorative Metal
Division 06 - Wood, Plastic, Composites

Page 1 of 5
06 00 00 - General Requirements for Wood, Plastics, and Composites
06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
Division 06 - Continued
06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
06 40 00 - Architectural Woodwork
06 50 00 - Structural Plastics
06 60 00 - Plastic Fabrications
06 80 00 - Composite Fabrications
Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection

07 00 00 - General Requirements for Thermal and Moisture Protection
07 10 00 - Damp-proofing and Waterproofing
07 20 00 - Thermal Protection
07 30 00 - Steep Slope Roofing
07 40 00 - Roofing and Siding Panels
07 50 00 - Membrane Roofing
07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metals
07 70 00 - Roof & Wall Specialties and Accessories
07 80 00 - Fire and Smoke Protection
07 90 00 - Joint Protection
Division 08 - Openings
08 00 00 - General Requirements for Openings
08 10 00 - Doors and Frames
08 30 00 - Specialty Doors and Frames
08 40 00 - Entrances, Storefronts, and Curtain Walls
08 50 00 - Windows Openings
08 60 00 - Roof Windows and Skylights
08 70 00 - Hardware
08 71 00 – Door Hardware
08 71 00 - FBISD Guideline Specification for Door Hardware
08 80 00 - Glazing
08 90 00 - Louvers and Vents
Division 09 - Finishes
09 00 00 - General Requirements for Finishes
09 20 00 - Plaster and Gypsum Board
09 30 00 - Tiling
09 50 00 - Ceilings
09 60 00 - Flooring Finishes
09 65 66 - Resilient Athletic Flooring
09 70 00 - Wall Finishes
09 80 00 - Acoustic Treatment
09 90 00 - Paintings and Coating
Division 10 - Specialties
Page 2 of 5
10 00 00 - General Requirements for Specialties
10 10 00 - Information Specialties
10 20 00 - Interior Specialties
10 40 00 - Safety Specialties
10 50 00 - Storage Specialties
10 70 00 - Exterior Specialties
10 80 00 - Other Specialties
Division 11 - Equipment
11 00 00 - General Requirements for Equipment
11 10 00 - Vehicle and Pedestrian Equipment
11 15 00 - Security, Detention, and Banking Equipment
11 20 00 - Commercial Equipment
11 30 00 - Residential Equipment
11 40 00 - Food Service Equipment
11 50 00 - Educational and Scientific Equipment
11 60 00 - Entertainment Equipment
11 65 00 - Athletic and Recreational Equipment
11 70 00 - Healthcare Equipment
11 90 00 - Other Equipment
Division 12 - Furnishings
12 00 00 - General Requirements for Furnishings
12 10 00 - Art
12 20 00 - Window Treatments
12 30 00 - Casework
12 40 00 - Furnishings and Accessories
12 50 00 - Furniture
12 60 00 - Multiple Seating
12 90 00 - Other Furnishings
Division 13 - Special Construction

13 00 00 - General Requirements for Special Construction
13 10 00 - Special Facility Components
13 20 00 - Special Purpose Rooms
13 30 00 - Special Structures
13 34 24 – Outdoor Covered Play Structure
13 40 00 - Integrated Construction
13 50 00 - Special Instrumentation
Division 14 - Conveying Systems

14 00 00 - General Requirements for Conveying Systems
14 20 00 - Elevators
14 40 00 - Lifts
Page 3 of 5
Division 21 - Fire Protection
21 00 00 - General Requirements for Fire Suppression
21 10 00 - Water Based Fire Suppression Systems
21 20 00 - Fire Extinguishing Systems
21 30 00 - Fire Pumps
21 40 00 - Fire Suppression Water Storage
Division 22 - Plumbing
22 00 00 - General Requirements for Plumbing
22 05 00 – Common Work Results
22 10 00 - Plumbing Piping and Pumps
22 20 00 - Natural Gas Systems
22 30 00 - Plumbing Equipment
22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
Division 23 - HVAC
23 00 00 - General Requirements for HVAC
23 20 00 - HVAC Piping and Pumps
23 30 00 - HVAC Air Distribution
23 40 00 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices
23 50 00 - Central Heating Equipment
23 60 00 - Central Cooling Equipment
23 70 00 - Central HVAC Equipment
23 80 00 - Decentralized HVAC Equipment
Division 25 - Building Automation

25 00 00 - General Requirements for Building Automation
25 10 00 - Integrated Automation Network Equipment
25 30 00 - Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices
25 50 00 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls
25 90 00 - Integrated Automation Control Sequences
FBISD Division 25 Specification Guideline
Division 26 - Electrical
26 00 00 - General Requirements
26 20 00 - Low Voltage Electrical Transmission
26 30 00 - Facility Electrical Power Generating and Storing Equipment
26 40 00 - Electrical and Cathodic Protection
26 50 00 - Lighting
Division 27 - Communication
27 00 00 - General Requirements
27 10 00 - Structured Cabling
27 20 00 – Data Communications
27 30 00 - Voice Communications
Page 4 of 5
27 40 00 - Audio Video Communications
27 50 00 - Distributed Communication & Monitoring Systems
27 51 16 - Public Address and Sound System
27 51 17 - Sound Reinforcement System
27 51 23 - Building Paging / Bell / Tones
27 53 15 - Wireless Clock System
27 53 19 - Antenna Systems
Division 28 - Safety and Security

28 00 00 - General Requirements for Safety and Security
28 10 00 - Electronic Access Control & Intrusion Detection
28 20 00 - Electronic Surveillance
28 30 00 - Electronic Detection and Alarm
Division 31 - Earthwork
31 00 00 - General Requirements for Earthwork
31 10 00 - Site Clearing
31 20 00 - Earth Moving
31 30 00 - Earthwork Methods
31 40 00 - Shoring and Underpinning
31 50 00 - Excavation Support and Protection
31 60 00 - Special Foundations & Load Bearing Elements
Division 32 - Exterior Improvements

32 00 00 - General Requirements for Exterior Improvements
32 10 00 - Bases, Ballasts, and Paving
32 30 00 - Site Improvements
32 30 00 - Playground Equipment Design
32 70 00 - Wetlands
32 80 00 - Irrigation
32 90 00 - Planting
Division 33 - Utilities
33 00 00 - General Requirements for Utilities
33 10 00 - Water Utilities
33 20 00 - Wells
33 30 00 - Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
33 40 00 - Storm Drainage Utilities
Page 5 of 5
PURPOSE:
To provide a standard procedure for review and approval of all requested modifications to the FBISD
Construction Standards.
PROCESS:
 A request to modify the FBISD Construction Standards can be initiated by Using Agent, A/E, or
Project Manager during the design and construction phase of a project.
 It is the responsibility of the FBISD Project Manager to compile all supporting documentation
associated with the modification request.
 The Project Manager initiating the modification request is responsible for transmitting the modified
document to Construction Standards Coordinator for completing the Modification Review and
Approval Record document which will define the Modification Request number, a Modification
description, and signature of the initiator of the request and associated cost impact.
 A FBISD Construction Standard Modification Log will be maintained by the Construction
Standards Coordinator. The Modification Request number can be obtained from this individual.
 The completed Modification Review and Approval Record form shall be submitted to the FBISD
Executive Director Design and Construction for review and approval.
 All approved modifications will be transmitted to FBISD Project Managers to implement the
modification into their projects. It is the responsibility of the PM to notify the appropriate project
Architects to implement the change.
 All approved FBISD Construction Standards modification will be implemented in the electronic
copy in SharePoint and a hard copy in the Construction Standards Manual located at the
Program Manager’s Admin Assistant desk.
 For Non-Bond projects all modifications should be submitted through Executive Director Design
and Construction.
ATTACHMENTS:
1.01.1 FBISD Construction Standard Modification Log

1.01.2 FBISD Construction Standard Modification Review and Approval Form
Page 1 of 1 MODULE: GENERAL

Date Issued: January 15, 2016 SECTION: 1.01 Procedure for Construction
Standards 1.01
Revision Date: TASK/DOCUMENT:
FBISD Construction Standard Modification Approval Form
DGCS Modification # Submission Date:
The following modification to the Construction Standards is being submitted for FBISD approval. No
modifications can be issued for use in projects without Executive Director Design and Construction approval.
Org. #: _________ School Name: __________________________________ BP #:

Description of Change: (Include drawings,
_____
sketches and other required backup)
You are hereby directed to make the above referenced changes in this contract. Authorized to Proceed By:
Copy:
R. Holleyhead
____________________________________________ Date: ______________ O. Saenz
PMT Project Manager K. Johnson
Chuck Dunham
Keith Schedel
____________________________________________ Date: ______________ Gaurav Agarwal
Executive Director Design & Construction Randy Long
Kevin Hitchcock
Bill Lyle
Tom Cooper
Not valid until approved by District
Page 1 of 1 MODULE: DG&CS Revision

Date Issued: January 15, 2016 Section: 1.01.1 Construction Standards Modification
Approval Form.
Revision Date: TASK/DOCUMENT:

1.01
Fort Bend ISD Construction Standards
FBISD 02 00 00
Division #02 – Existing Conditions (Introduction)
(January 20, 2016 Update)
DIVISION 02 INTENT:
This section includes all information related to current condition of site and building, including
hazardous material surveys and abatement protocols. Also included is specific information
concerning demolition (full or selective) including coordination with other existing conditions.
Separate sections have been prepared for all sub-categories of work within this division,
including:
1) General Requirements for Division 02 (This Section)

2) Assessment Information (02 20 00)
3) Subsurface Investigation (02 30 00)
4) Demolition and Structure Moving (02 40 00)
5) Site Remediation (02 50 00)
6) Contaminate Site Material Removal (02 60 00)
7) Water Remediation (02 70 00)
8) Facility Remediation (02 80 00)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
General:
Provide Phasing Plans for all Addition-Renovation projects (include suggested access,
egress, lay-down), include photos on demo plans to help show unique areas
Include information on scheduling of phases (durations, coordination with campus

semesters/session)
02 01 00 Maintenance of Existing Conditions – NOT USED
02 05 00 Common Work Results for Existing Conditions – NOT USED
02 06 00 Schedules for Existing Conditions – NOT USED
END OF SECTION 02 00 00
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 02 20 00
Division #02 – Existing Conditions (Assessment)
Assessment (02 20 00)
Surveys (02 21 00)
Include in drawings (Site, Boundary and Survey, Archeological and Historical)
Existing Condition Assessment (02 22 00)
Include if available (Movement and Vibration, Acoustic, Traffic, Accessibility)
Environmental Assessment (02 24 00)
Phase 1 Environmental Assessment by FBISD, not required for inclusion with contract
documents. A/E is strongly encouraged to review report and discuss findings with
FBISD during Pre-Design
Existing Material Assessment (02 25 00)
Include if relevant to completion of current scope of work
Hazardous Material Assessment (02 26 00)
Include (abatement and remediation protocols included in 02 80 00):
• Asbestos Survey
• Lead Survey
• Mold Survey and Reports
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 02 30 00
Division #02 – Existing Conditions (Subsurface Investigations)
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS (02 30 00)
Geophysical Investigations (02 31 00) – NOT USED
Geotechnical Investigations (02 32 00)
Conducted by FBISD vendor, add to drawings and specs to ensure coordination
Add entire report, including any supplements and/or addenda
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 02 40 00
Division #02 – Existing Conditions (Demolition and Structure Moving)
DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING (02 40 00)
General:
Provide detailed Demolition plans in contract documents, including photos
Minimize use of “Verify in Field” and other General Notes when preparing Demolition
Plans and Specifications
Demolition (02 41 00)
Selective Site Demolition (02 41 13)
Structure Demolition (02 41 16)
Selective Demolition (02 41 19)
Selective Historic Demolition (02 41 91)
Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials (02 42 00)
Includes Deconstruction and Salvage, Removal of elements from historic facilities
Structure Moving (02 43 00) – RARE, RESERVE
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 02 50 00
Division #02 – Existing Conditions (Site Remediation)
SITE REMEDIATION (02 50 00)
Physical Decontamination (02 51 00)
General – Most Types excluded
Surface Cleaning Decontamination (02 51 29) and Surface Removal Decontamination

(02 51 33)
Includes mildew, bird excrement, sand/soil, and others, removed by high

pressure water, solvents, vacuum, grinding, sand blasting, or ultrasound.
All below not anticipated on FBISD projects:
Chemical Decontamination (02 52 00)
Thermal Decontamination (02 53 00)
Biological Decontamination (02 54 00)
Remediation Soil Stabilization (02 55 00)
Site Containment (02 56 00)
Sinkhole Remediation (02 57 00)
Snow Control (02 58 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 02 60 00
Division #02 – Existing Conditions (Contaminated Site Material Removal)
CONTAMINATED SITE MATERIAL REMOVAL (02 60 00)
Removal and Disposal of Contaminated Soils (02 61 00)
Identify within Phase 1 Environmental Survey, protocol to be written by abatement or

remediation specialist
Fort Bend ISD will contract with outside vendor to document and abate all hazardous
materials. Reports and Abatement Protocols will be made available to General
Contractors and A/E upon request
Underground Storage Tank Removal (02 65 00)
Likely never needed, but there are specific TCEQ requirements for this, regardless of
what it was used for (example: Grease trap tanks, fuel tanks, etc.) This will require
specialty consultant.
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 02 70 00
Division #02 – Existing Conditions (Water Remediation)
WATER REMEDIATION (02 70 00)
02 71 00 Groundwater Treatment – NOT USED
02 72 00 Water Decontamination – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 02 80 00
Division #02 – Existing Conditions (Facility Remediation)
FACILITY REMEDIATION (02 80 00)
General Information:
Fort Bend ISD will contract with outside vendor to document and abate all hazardous
materials. Reports and Abatement Protocols will be made available to General
Contractors and A/E upon request
Transportation and Disposal of Hazardous Materials (02 81 00)
BY FBISD PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
Asbestos Remediation (Abatement) (02 82 00)
Only required if abatement completed as part of GC contract, this section should be

prepared by FBISD vendor, included similar to Geo-tech report, included as reference
(not written by A/E or FBISD)
FBISD direct
Lead Remediation (02 83 00)
Only required if remediation completed as part of GC contract, this section should be

Polychlorinate Biphenyl Remediation (PCB) (02 84 00) – NOT REQUIRED
Mold Remediation (02 85 00)
Only required if remediation completed as part of GC contract, this section should be

Hazardous Waste Drum Handling (02 86 00) – NOT REQUIRED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 03 00 00
Division #03 – Concrete (Introduction)
DIVISION 03 INTENT: CONCRETE
This section outlines all uses for concrete, including cast-in-place and pre-cast. Specific uses
are also indicated, including details where applicable.
Separate sections have been prepared for all sub-categories within this division, including:

2) Concrete Forming and Accessories (03 10 00)
3) Concrete Reinforcing (03 20 00)
4) Cast-in-Place Concrete (03 30 00)
5) Cold Weather Concreting (03 30 00.13)
6) Hot Weather Concreting (03 30 00.16)
7) Pre-Cast Concrete (03 40 00)
8) Cast Decks and Underlayment (03 50 00)
9) Grouting (03 60 00)
10) Concrete Cutting and Boring (03 80 00)
11) Cartoon form slab and beam concrete construction
General Design Criteria for Concrete:
Generally, mechanical rooms, custodial closets, and unfinished storage areas, etc. shall
have hard-trowelled concrete floors, finished with a concrete sealer. Verify with
Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines.
Walls in wet areas, such as restrooms and kitchens, shall have 4 inch (nominal,
average) concrete curbs under gypsum board walls (3.5” or 5.5” recommended, lumber
dimensions) (Refer to Diagram 03_01)
Provide concrete curbs at all mechanical rooms, especially at second floor. If curb
installed after slab, provide reinforcement for connection to curb, including application of
water-stop. It is preferred for slab and curb to be monolithic
Slope concrete in toilet rooms and mechanical rooms from corner of room to drain, no
36” sweeps only at drain. Indicate slope on foundation plans (Refer to Diagram 03_01)
A/E shall provide dimensions to all floor drains, same as other plumbing fixtures.
Exception is at mechanical rooms where coordination is required with GC-proposed
housekeeping pad layout (see below for additional information)
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 03 00 00
Diagram 03_01 – Foundation Detail at Toilet Rooms
GC shall provide proposed housekeeping pad layouts for all mechanical areas to A/E for
review prior to slab placement. This will allow for coordination with floor drains, so that
pad/drain conflicts are minimized
Provide 1 ½” to 2” recess in plumbing chase at Pre-K Toilet Rooms to accommodate

carrier (Refer to Diagram 03_01)
Provide clear vapor retarding poly under slab (10mil minimum) so that city and A/E
inspectors can verify substrate condition prior to concrete placement
NO CONDUIT RUNS in slab, no exceptions
Provide pest sleeves at all vertical pipe penetrations in slabs
A/E show actual piping size at verticals on foundation plan, coordinate to relocate
penetration away from grade beams and steel beams supporting second floor slabs
Edges of all housekeeping pads to be chamfered
Provide recess for walk-off mats at new construction, not required at existing
construction
Provide 4’ concrete sidewalk directly adjacent to ENTIRE ) building perimeter. Sidewalk

helps ensure accessible route to all building entrances and exits and help reduce
foundation problems by directing water away from the building. Provide irrigation at ALL
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 03 00 00
areas immediately adjacent to buildings, ALL sides (Coordinate with Irrigation Standards
in Division 32).
Show slope % on foundation drawings, slope to be appropriate to the condition
ALL exterior concrete to be sidewalk, even at covered areas, not part of building slab.
Foundation (grade beams) for overhangs to be lowered to ensure no conflicts with
sidewalk placement. It is recommended that all sidewalk be placed towards END of
construction
Maintenance of Concrete (03 01 00)
Protect stained or polished concrete during construction with masonite or other solid
durable covering, including sealed edges (tape).
Common Work Results for Concrete (03 05 00)
Testing Requirements:
- Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; for each class of concrete

poured in any one day, one set for each day’s pour exceeding 5 cu.
yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu.
yd. of each concrete test placed in any one day; one specimen tested
at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen
retained in reserve for later testing if required.
Five (5) test cylinders for elevated cast-in-place concrete is acceptable, with
additional cylinder for 3-day break. Structural Engineer to verify strength
requirements for 3-day test
Schedule for Concrete (03 06 00)
Provide grade beam schedule in drawings
Provide slab schedule in drawings
Provide footing schedule in drawings.
Commissioning of Concrete (03 08 00) – NOT REQUIRED
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 03 10 00
Division #03 – Concrete (Concrete Forming and Accessories)
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES (03 10 00)
Concrete Forming (03 11 00)
General:
Fully formed grade beams are NOT required on Fort Bend ISD Projects;
however, ENTIRE outside face of exterior grade beams MUST BE fully formed.
Earth-form of interior grade beams is acceptable; however, Jurisdictional

Authority, Architect, Engineer, and FBISD Project Manager may require full form
of all or portions of grade beams where width/depth of beam varies from
specified by more than 6”
Carton forms are not preferred if slab must be suspended due to expansive soil
conditions, consider the use of hollow-core pre-cast instead (refer to 03 41 00)
Foundation designs must be approved by soils engineer, with any approved

deviations from original geotechnical report recorded as Addenda by soils
engineer. This includes any deviations related to forming and/or placement
requirements that appear in geotechnical report.
Concrete Accessories (03 15 00)
Concrete masonry blocks or clay bricks are NOT ALLOWED as substitute for plastic or
steel chairs
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 03 20 00
Division #03 – Concrete (Concrete Reinforcing)
CONCRETE REINFORCING (03 20 00)
Reinforcement Bars (03 21 00)
General:
Use of steel mesh reinforcing not allowed except at housekeeping pads
Plain Steel (03 21 11)
Minimum #3, all locations, however, it is preferred that #4 or greater be utilized

for greater stability and strength
Galvanized Steel (03 21 13) – NOT USED
Epoxy-Coated Steel (03 21 16) – NOT USED
Stainless Steel (03 21 19) – NOT USED
Composite (03 21 21) – NOT USED
Fabric and Grid Reinforcing (03 22 00)
Galvanized Welded Wire Fabric (03 22 13) – NOT USED
Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric (03 22 16) – NOT USED
Composite Grid (03 22 19) – NOT USED
Stressed Tendon Reinforcing (03 23 00) – NOT USED
Fibrous Reinforcing (03 24 00) – NOT ALLLOWED
Composite Reinforcing (Glass Fiber, Organic Fiber, Carbon Fiber) (03 25 00)
Allowed for use in topping slabs only
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 03 30 00
Division #03 – Concrete (Cast-in-Place Concrete)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (03 30 00)
General:
Refer to Division 03 Introduction for general design and detailing information regarding
cast-in-place concrete foundations
Structural Concrete (All Types) (03 31 00)
Refer to General Notes (This Section) and Introduction (03 00 00)
Where historic performance data available, consider concrete mixes with reclaimed
aggregate or crushed concrete aggregate
Use of fly ash is permitted, provided that historic performance data is available for
mix intended for use
Architectural Concrete (Lightweight and Heavyweight) (03 33 00) – NOT USED
Low Density Concrete (03 34 00) – NOT USED
Concrete Finishing (03 35 00)
General:
Indicate where special finishes are required. Indicate to provide site mock-ups
for any specialty finishes, such as broom-finish at ramps.
Integral colored concrete to be specified at ramps, not dust-on, or applied. Verify

color with Owner prior to installation
VOCOMP-20 is ONLY approved curing and sealing compound or equal
http://www.wrmeadows.com/wrm00026.htm
FOR ALL BELOW, VERIFY INTENDED USE WITH FBISD PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
BEYOND DESIGN DEVELOPMENT:
- High Tolerance Concrete Finishing (03 35 13)

- Heavy Duty Concrete Finishing (03 35 16)
- Colored Concrete Finishing (03 35 19)
- Exposed Aggregate Concrete Finishing (03 35 23)
- Grooved Concrete Finishing (03 35 26)
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 03 30 00
Division #03 – Concrete (Cast-in-Place Concrete)
- Tooled Concrete Finishing (03 35 29)

- Stamped Concrete Finishing (03 35 33)
- Polished Concrete Finishing (03 35 43)
Specialty Placed Concrete (03 37 00) – NOT USED
- Shotcrete
- Pumped Concrete (Refer to Cast-in-Place Concrete)
- Pneumatically Placed
- Roller-Compacted
- Underwater Placed
Post-Tensioned Concrete (03 38 00) – NOT USED
Concrete Curing (Water, Sand, Membrane) (03 39 00)
Curing compounds should be specified carefully where bonded finishes are to be used
(such as tile, or epoxy finishes), ensure compatible with adhesives and/or membranes
required for installation of final finish
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 03 40 00
Division #03 – Concrete (Precast Concrete)
PRECAST CONCRETE (03 40 00)
Precast Structural Concrete (03 41 00)
- Hollow Core Planks

- Slabs
- Stairs
- Pre-Tensioned
- Post-Tensioned
Precast Architectural Concrete (Faced, Post-Tensioned, and Pre-Tensioned) (03 45 00)
Confirm intended uses with FBISD Project Manager before proceeding beyond Design
Development
Site-Cast Concrete (Tilt-Up and Lift-Slab) (03 47 00)
Require Subcontractor to have MINIMUM 5 years of experience with site-cast concrete
Precast Concrete Specialties (03 48 00)
- Bollards
- Splash Blocks
- Stair Treads
Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete (Column Covers, Spandrels, Trim) (03 49 00)
No special considerations. Verify intended use with FBISD Project Manager before
including beyond Design Development
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 03 50 00
Division #03 – Concrete (Cast Decks and Underlayment)
CAST DECKS AND UNDERLAYMENT (03 50 00)
General:
Underside of deck should always be job-painted when exposed (such as at gyms)
Cast Roof Decks (03 51 00)
Cementitious Wood Fiber Decks (03 51 13)
Tectum. Prohibit use as a deck, not as a sound control material.
Gypsum Concrete Roof Decks (03 51 16) – NOT USED
Lightweight Concrete Roof Insulation (03 52 00)
Composite Concrete Roof Insulation (03 52 13) – NOT USED
Lightweight Insulating Concrete (Cellular and Aggregate) (03 52 16)
FBISD preference, ensure perforated vented deck is provided.
In areas with exposed decking (gymnasiums), revise from lightweight insulating

concrete to standard steel decking with insulation board.
Waterborne shop primer on bearing surface of steel joists may become

emulsified when in contact with excess water from insulating concrete. Remove
primer from bearing surface, or specify oil based primer.
Concrete Topping (Emery-Aggregate and Iron-Aggregate) (03 53 00)
For use over Pre-Cast Planks or as slab leveler in Renovations ONLY
Cast Underlayment (Gypsum Cement and Hydraulic Cement) (03 54 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 03 60 00
Division #03 – Concrete (Grouting)
GROUTING (03 60 00)
Cementitious Grouting (Dry-Pack) (03 61 00)
No Special Considerations
Non-Shrink Grouting (Non-Metallic and Metallic) (03 62 00)
Epoxy Grouting (03 63 00) – NOT USED
Injection Grouting (Epoxy) (03 64 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 03 80 00
Division #03 – Concrete (Concrete Cutting and Boring)
CONCRETE CUTTING AND BORING (03 80 00)
Concrete Cutting (Sawing, All Types) (03 81 00)
No special considerations.
Refer to Division 07 for additional information on type and installation of water stop at
areas where saw-cut concrete intended for replacement
Concrete Boring (Core Drilling) (03 82 00)
Core drilling for handrails is acceptable, however A/E to consider this during design,
adjusting reinforcement AWAY from final rail location
If handrail shop drawings are available at time of concrete placement, it is preferred to

install steel sleeves in lieu of core drilling
Ensure escutcheons are provided at all cored rails
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 04 00 00
Division #04 – Masonry (Introduction)
DIVISION 04 INTENT:
This section includes information on selection, installation, and maintenance of all forms of
masonry, including exterior veneers and interior architectural finishes.
Separate sections have been prepared for all sub-categories of work within this division,
including:

2) Unit Masonry (04 20 00)
3) Stone Assemblies (04 40 00)
4) Manufactured Masonry (04 70 00)
Use of durable masonry materials in all public areas is required. For middle and high schools in
particular, this includes all corridors, locker rooms, and toilet rooms.
Exposed CMU at inside of open mechanical courtyards should be painted with an elastomeric
paint, and the top of wall covered with a pre-finished metal cap in order to avoid efflorescence in
the finished brick face (cast stone less desirable due to flashing issues as well as discoloration
of material over time)
All wire ties, steel straps, locking channels and screws shall be hot dipped galvanized
Any addition to an existing building which is lower than the existing building shall have through-
wall flashing or cladding down the higher wall from existing cap to lower roof. This will require
removal of masonry or other veneer in order to properly install. Cut-in flashing alone is not
acceptable
A/E to provide elevation of preferred mock up in drawings. Mock-up will include:
Masonry Selections
Waterproofing details at window
Substrate preparation
Control joint sealant (provide up to 6 selections for A/E and Owner approval)
Maintenance of Masonry (04 01 00)
Clean with detergent mix only, no power wash
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 04 00 00
Division #04 – Masonry (Introduction)
No attic stock is required
Common Work Results for Masonry (04 05 00)
Provide color match for existing buildings, including requirement for contractor to
construct up to TWO (2) mock-up panels for verification of matching masonry material.
“MATCH EXISTING” WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED
Consider sand-filled walls or fully-grouted walls where acoustic separation is required
Mortar net required in all wall cavities
Provide raked mortar joint in masonry walls where paint wainscot provided (typical in
CMU corridors, dark paint below, light paint above)
Provide raked mortar joint and SEALANT where dissimilar masonry materials abut,
including horizontal joints (such as cast stone to brick or split face CMU to brick)
Masonry Control Joints:
Review information in Geotechnical Report and consider potential for foundation

movement (settlement and potential vertical rise, PVR) when locating masonry
expansion and control joints (interior and exterior)
Provide masonry control joints over all exterior doors and windows, ensure no
space between control joints is greater than 20’
Maximum spacing is 30 feet at interior masonry walls and at doors and window
openings. Verify with current BIA and NCMA recommendations
Schedules for Masonry (04 06 00)
No special requirements, not needed
Commissioning of Masonry (04 08 00) – NOT REQUIRED
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 04 20 00
Division #04 – Masonry (Unit Masonry)
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES (04 20 00)
Mockup Quality Requirements:
When required at a minimum construct cavity wall mockup, 4 feet long by 4 feet high, including
masonry, mortar and accessories, structural backup, flashings, wall insulation, and weeps.
1. Structural backup wall to consist of CMU and cold formed metal framing.
2. Include a sealant–filled control joint.
3. Omit masonry above flashing to leave a 12 inch length of the flashing exposed to view.
4. Clean face of mockup with masonry cleaner using methods anticipated for the work.
5. Furnish removable cover to protect completed mock-up from rain or other environmental or
site conditions that may alter its appearance.
6. Locate in a well-lit area where approved Architect/Engineer.
7. Remove mockup when directed by Architect/ Engineer, unless part of permanent
construction.
Clay Unit Masonry (04 21 00)
Brick Masonry (04 21 13)
No FBISD preference for modular vs. king-size. Avoid use of utility and other
brick sizes larger than king-size
No custom shapes allowed, consider only field cut
Consider minimum cuts of standards sizes when designing exterior (including

opening sizes and accents/banding). Example: Size windows to 30” wide X 36”
tall, considering king size brick coursing
Ceramic Glazed Clay Masonry (04 21 16)
No special considerations
Clay Tile Masonry (04 21 19)
Structural Clay Tile Masonry (04 21 23) – NOT USED
Glazed Structural Clay Tile Masonry (04 21 26) – NOT USED
Terra Cotta Masonry (04 21 29) – NOT USED
Concrete Unit Masonry (04 22 00)
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 04 20 00
No 4” CMU shall be used, except at column wraps. Do not use at chase walls
Provide bullnose at all outside corners where interior CMU scheduled (except where
additional material intended as final finish, CT on tile)
Provide sound block or acoustic wall panels at gymnasiums. Wall panels preferred,
allow for acoustic tuning of space
Always use starter course to avoid 4” door head
Use of split face CMU, smooth face CMU, and burnished CMU for interior veneer
applications is acceptable. Confirm intended used with FBISD Project Manager prior to
commencing beyond Design Development
When utilizing Split Face CMU as water table (base) on exterior of building, reverse
bottom course so that concrete sidewalk can be poured evenly against face of building
(provide for expansion). See below Exhibit 04-20-01. Also ensure that flashing and
weeps are raised to allow for condensation to escape ABOVE adjacent sidewalks and/or
concrete mow strips.
Exhibit 04-20-01 – Reversed Split Face CMU at Exterior
Glass Unit Masonry (04 23 00)
Vertical Glass Unit Masonry (04 23 13)
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 04 20 00
Glass block masonry shall not be used on the exterior of a building without prior
written permission of FBISD Project Manager
Glass Unit Masonry Floors (04 23 16) – DO NOT USE
Glass Unit Masonry Skylights (04 23 19) – DO NOT USE
Adobe Unit Masonry (04 24 00) – DO NOT USE
Unit Masonry Panels (04 25 00) – NOT USED
Single-Wythe Unit Masonry (04 26 00)
Refer to individual materials for installation, use, and maintenance
Multiple-Wythe Unit Masonry (04 27 00)
ALWAYS apply damproofing on inside face at multi-wythe masonry walls having

dissimilar materials (CMU and brick)
Provide sheet metal in lieu of cast stone at screen wall cap to help ensure no
efflorescence. If cast stone used, ensure positive slope, drip lip with undercut, and
continuous flashing between stone and masonry below
ALWAYS provide weeps in masonry screen walls and masonry wraps on building
exterior. Ensure coordinated with final grade
Concrete Form Masonry Units (04 28 00)
Insulated Concrete Form (ICF) should not be considered
Reinforced Unit Masonry (04 29 00) – NOT USED
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 04 40 00
Division #04 – Masonry (Stone Assemblies)
STONE ASSEMBLIES (04 40 00)
Dry-Placed Stone (04 41 00) – DO NOT USE
Exterior Stone Cladding (04 42 00)
OK to use, verify proposed applications with FBISD Project Manager, ensure approval
by home-owner associations or other jurisdictional authorities
Stone Masonry (Veneer) (04 43 00)
Veneer only. Adhered application acceptable
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 04 70 00
Division #04 – Masonry (Manufactured Masonry)
MANUFACTURED MASONRY (04 70 00)
Manufactured Brick Masonry (04 71 00) – Not Used
Cast Stone Masonry (04 72 00)
Limit use
Coordinate with structural for anchoring
Provide saw cut for drip control at overhangs
Manufactured Stone Masonry (04 73 00)
Ariscraft or equal. Verify all intended use with FBISD Project Manager prior to including
within documents
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 05 00 00
Division #05 – Metals (Introduction)
DIVISION 05 INTENT:
This division outlines the selection, installation, and other uses for metal products, including
structural, light-gauge framing, rails, and decorative architectural applications.

2) Structural Metal Framing (05 10 00)
3) Metal Joists (05 20 00)
4) Metal Decking (05 30 00)
5) Cold Formed Metal Framing (05 40 00)
6) Metal Fabrications (05 50 00)
7) Metal Stairs (05 51 00)
8) Metal Railings (05 52 00)
9) Decorative Metal (05 70 00)
References:
Decorative Column Covers are addressed in Division 09 – Finishes
Expansion Joints are addressed in Division 07 – Moisture and Thermal Protection
Maintenance of Metals (05 01 00)
All steel products delivered to project site must be stored appropriately, in properly
drained area, preferably on concrete paving or slab. Ensure 6” clear from ground
Remove all rust from steel, and re-prime (with galvanizing primer, if appropriate) before
installation of additional materials (finish paint, fire-proofing, drywall).
Common Work Results for Metals (05 05 00)
Exterior steel shall be galvanized (G60 minimum), no exceptions (including lintels,

handrails, bollards)
Schedules for Metals (05 06 00) – RESERVE, NOT REQUIRED
Commissioning of Metals (05 08 00) – NOT REQUIRED
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 05 00 00
Division #05 – Metals (Introduction)
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 05 10 00
Division #05 – Metals (Structural Metal Framing)
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING (05 10 00)
General:
Furnish certification that all bolts are domestic in origin
Consider use of tube steel columns, or other readily available shapes/sizes to reduce
fabrication time (in lieu of S or W Sections).
Avoid use of non-standard (and non-domestically available) sizes
If BIM model prepared by A/E, consider transfer of file to Steel Fabricator to assist with
detailing as well as reducing fabrication time. Transfer of BIM files would require release
from General and Sub-Contractors AND appropriate credit for detailing labor
Structural Steel Framing (05 12 00) – Refer to above
For all below, not typical in K-12 construction, verify intended use with FBISD Project Manager
prior to including in design documents:
Structural Stainless Steel Framing (05 13 00) – NOT USED
Structural Aluminum Framing (05 14 00) – NOT USED
Wire Rope Assemblies (05 15 00) – NOT USED
Structural Cabling (05 16 00) – NOT USED
Structural Rod Assemblies (05 17 00) – NOT USED
Tension Rod and Cable Truss Assemblies (05 19 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 05 20 00
Division #05 – Metals (Metal Joists)
METAL JOISTS (05 20 00)
General:
Allow camber of joists, HOWEVER, consider single slope of all joists during roof design
to minimize cost and fabrication time
Steel Joist Framing (05 21 00)
No specific requirements
Refer to Section 05 00 00 for information on protection of metals during construction
Aluminum Joist Framing (05 25 00) – DO NOT USE
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 05 30 00
Division #05 – Metals (Metal Decking)
METAL DECKING (05 30 00)
General:
Field touch-up all decking with zinc-rich primer at roof deck welds and where galvanizing
is damaged
Steel Decking (05 31 00)
At roof AND floors, when designing for lightweight insulating or lightweight concrete
(support span and gauge), consider installation live load of multiple workers in common
structural bay
Always use vented deck for lightweight insulated concrete at roof
Add the following to Specifications:
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all construction loading of the
structural decks complies with the metal deck manufacturer’s allowable loading criteria.
The storage of materials and the use of mechanical lifts or other heavy moveable or
stationary equipment utilized on elevated concrete slabs to perform work shall be
conducted in a safe manner so as to not cause any damage or deformation to steel
decks or other portions of the structure. The Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions, including hiring a structural engineer when necessary to evaluate the
imposed loadings on elevated slabs from materials, manpower, lifts, and equipment, in
order to comply with the deck manufacturer’s safe loading criteria and deflection
limitations. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage caused to elevated
slabs or other portions of the Work as a result of construction-imposed loads utilized in
performing the Work. The Contractor shall include adequate provisions in his bid to
accommodate any limitations, restrictions, or additional costs that are necessary to meet
the deck manufacturer’s requirements for the metal deck type, spans, and materials
specified in the bid documents.
Aluminum Decking (05 33 00) – NOT USED
Acoustical Metal Decking (05 34 00) – Consider use on Gymnasiums and other exposed
structure high traffic, high use areas
Raceway Decking Assemblies (05 35 00) – NOT USED
Composite Metal Decking (05 36 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 05 40 00
Division #05 – Metals (Cold Formed Metal Framing)
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING (05 40 00)
General:
Subcontractor shall provide engineered, stamped shop drawings for all CFMF, verify
gauge and spacing
Documents provided by CFMF subcontractor-engineer should indicate specifically how

structural stud tracks are fastened to concrete slab perimeter, including fastener types
and spacing
Provide for live load expansion (slip track at head)
Brace all walls to structure
Provide bank-rails (4” tube steel with base plate) at all partial height walls and ribbon
windows (greater than 8’-0”) with framing below
Structural Metal Stud Framing (05 41 00) – Refer to above
Cold-Formed Metal Joist Framing (05 42 00) – NOT USED
Slotted Channel Framing (05 43 00) – NOT USED
Cold-Formed Metal Trusses (05 44 00)
For use on small stand-alone buildings only. Verify intended use with FBISD Project
Manager before proceeding beyond Schematic Design
Metal Support Assemblies (05 45 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 05 50 00
Division #05 – Metals (Metal Fabrications)
METAL FABRICATIONS (05 50 00)
General:
Consider maintenance access when designing mechanical areas and roof, providing
stairs in lieu of ships-ladder or alternating tread devices
Metal Stairs (05 51 00)
All exterior ladders (and those providing direct access to roof or exterior from interior)
shall be galvanized, UNPAINTED
Provide safety cages on all ladders per OSHA 3124 (Generally, bottom of cage 8’ from
lower level, top of cage 42” from upper level). District to provide “non-locking clasp”
http://www.osha.gov/Publications/osha3124.pdf
Metal Railings (05 52 00)
Provide galvanized UNPAINTED rails at building exterior
Provide brushed aluminum or stainless steel at high traffic interior stairs (in lieu of
painted) to reduce maintenance
Metal Gratings (05 53 00)
Acceptable only at catwalks (including stage rigging loading platforms and grid floors),
not mechanical mezzanines
Metal Floor Plates (05 54 00) – NOT USED
Metal Stair Treads and Nosings (05 55 00)
Metal pan, review intended finish with Owner. Provide inset for nosing in terrazzo
Metal Castings (05 56 00) – NOT USED
Formed Metal Fabrications (05 58 00) – NOT USED
Metal Specialties (05 59 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 05 70 00
Division #05 – Metals (Decorative Metal)
DECORATIVE METAL (05 70 00)
General:
All below sections are reserved. Any proposed use must be approved by Fort Bend ISD
before including beyond Design Development
Decorative Metal Stairs (05 51 00)
Decorative Metal Railings (05 73 00)
Decorative Metal Castings (05 74 00)
Decorative Formed Metal (05 75 00)
Decorative Forged Metal (05 76 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 06 00 00
Division #06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Introduction)
DIVISION 06 INTENT:
Information within this section includes FBISD specific material and detail preferences with
regards to wood, plastics and other composite materials (including synthetic resins and
fiberglass). Information, details, and material selections required by code (or other industry
standard items) are not addressed, except for items routinely missed by A/E.

2) Rough Carpentry (06 10 00)
3) Finish Carpentry (06 20 00)
4) Architectural Woodwork (06 40 00)
5) Structural Plastics (06 50 00)
6) Plastic Fabrications (06 60 00)
7) Structural Composites (06 70 00)
8) Composite Fabrications (06 80 00)
Maintenance of Wood, Plastics, and Composites (06 01 00)
Maintenance, Cleaning, Rehabilitation, Restoration, and/or Preservation of existing

materials, is rarely required, but includes work on:
- Rough Carpentry
- Finish Carpentry
- Architectural Woodwork
- Plastics
- Other Composite Materials
If most cases, these materials (usually within Addition-Renovation projects) are

replaced, in lieu of re-furbished in any way.
Common Work Results for Wood, Plastics, and Composites (06 05 00)
Generally, ALWAYS utilize fire retardant wood blocking within building for wall-mounted
accessories. Code requirement for this can depend on building type, but it is best to
specify for all applications. Exterior grade fire retardant wood blocking to be used at
building exterior and on millwork base (or any location where moisture could be present).
Consider susceptibility to termites when locating wood blocking near building perimeter.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 06 00 00
Division #06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Introduction)
Provide wood blocking or 20 gauge galvanized steel strap at the following locations:
- PLAM Wall Panels (6” wide, CL on top and bottom of final panel, coordinated
with manufacturers anchor locations)
- Door Hardware Impact (minimum 12” x 12” where door hardware strikes wall,
in event of floor stop failure, or for installation of wall stop)
- Toilet Accessories (in rooms w/o CMU)
- Upper Cabinet Casework
- Window shading devices (blinds)
- Toilet Partitions (CMU walls, not needed)
Schedule for Wood, Plastics, and Composites (06 06 00)
A/E to provide schedule within design documents for all wood beams, wood trusses, and
laminated beams to ensure size and configuration match design intent.
Commissioning of Wood, Plastics, and Composites (06 08 00) – NOT REQUIRED
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 06 10 00
Division #06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Rough Carpentry)
ROUGH CARPENTRY (06 10 00)
General:
Consider use of galvanized angles around windows in lieu of exterior grade fire resistant
wood blocking
Provide wood blocking or galvanized steel strap at window openings for attachment of
blinds
Provide PAINTED fire treated ¾” plywood (8’X4’) in main technology room (MDF)
All interior wood blocking shall be fire retardant, all exterior shall be exterior grade fire
resistant (FRT)
Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry (06 10 53) – SEE ABOVE
Exterior Rough Carpentry (06 10 63) – SEE ABOVE
Wood Framing (06 11 00) – NOT USED
Structural Panels (06 12 00) – NOT USED
Heavy Timber Construction (06 13 00)
Heavy Timber Framing and Trusses (06 13 23 and 06 13 26)
A/E include specific routes for fire suppression, electrical, and plumbing on
reflected ceiling plans where exposed wood construction present
Treated Wood Foundations (06 14 00) – NOT USED
Wood Decking (06 15 00)
Wood Floor and Roof Decking (06 15 13 and 06 15 16)
Verify use with FBISD before including
Sheathing (06 16 00)
Gypsum Sheathing (06 16 46)
If asphalt-impregnated sheathing is encountered within existing facilities, during

renovations and/or construction of building addition, it is recommended that
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 06 10 00
Division #06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Rough Carpentry)
areas directly affected by new work be replaced with glass-mat sheathing, as

identified below
Moisture-Resistant Sheathing Board (06 16 53)
Provide glass-mat reinforced (paperless) sheathing on outside face of all exterior

CFMF walls. Tape all joints.
Note: In addition to Dens-Glass Gold by USG, there are now several

manufacturers that can be listed to ensure competitive pricing. Dens-Armor and
Dens-Shield (impact-resistant and wet-area) drywall products are included within
Division 09
Cementitious Sheathing (06 16 63)
Consider for use in soffit applications, in lieu of metal panel
Includes “Hardi-board”, recommended for use on small maintenance and other

out-buildings
Shop-Fabricated Structural Wood (06 17 00) – NOT USED
Glued-Laminated Construction (06 18 00)
Verify all use with FBISD before proceeding
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 06 20 00
Division #06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Finish Carpentry)
FINISH CARPENTRY (06 20 00)
Exterior Finish Carpentry (06 20 13)
Review proposed uses with FBISD
Interior Finish Carpentry & Millwork (06 20 24)
Provide 3 coats of polyurethane on all unpainted interior architectural woodwork (for

durability). Finish to be selected by architect, verified by FBISD (matte, eggshell, semi-
gloss, gloss). Minimize or eliminate use of wood in high traffic areas
Millwork (06 22 00)
Standard Pattern Wood Trim (06 22 13)
Review proposed uses with FBISD
Prefinished Paneling (06 25 00)
No known uses. A/E provide information to FBISD on suggested uses prior to including
in design documents
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 06 40 00
Division #06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Architectural Woodwork)
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK (06 40 00)
Exterior Architectural Woodwork (06 40 13)
Interior Architectural Woodwork (06 40 23)
Refer to 06 20 23 for finishing requirements
Architectural Wood Casework (06 41 00)
General:
Refer to Division 12 for additional information on use of Wood Veneer and

PLAM-Clad casework
Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets (06 41 13)
Wood Veneer Science Casework included in Division 12
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets (06 41 16)
All science labs (all grade levels) shall have epoxy resin tops
Clinic can have standard laminate countertops, epoxy resin not required
¾” minimum for all plywood used on cabinet bodies and shelves
Do not specify use of particleboard, melamine, or MDF
Minimum ply on cabinet bodies and doors = 7 ply
Provide only moisture resistant dimensional lumber for toe-kicks and cabinet
bases (no plywood)
Provide marine grade plywood core at countertops and within entire body of
millwork where sinks present (bottom, back, and sides)
Round outside corners on countertops – Not needed with PVC edge
Provide 3mm PVC on:
- Leading edges of countertops

- Perimeter of doors and drawers
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 06 40 00
- Top edge of backsplash – NOT REQUIRED

- Leading edges at all open cabinets, including shelves
- All adjustable shelves in closed cabinets (1mm)
*** Consider quantity of material needed when selecting color of 3mm

PVC edge banding. Some color selections are not readily available and
require minimum order. If millwork is of large quantity, custom match is
acceptable. If millwork is of small quantity, select from standard available
colors
No need to laminate back and side edges of shelving. Clear seal or paint to
match shelving color
Limit shelf spans to 30”. If over 30”, increase thickness to 1”
Only hardwood bottoms allowed on drawers
Diagram 06_01 – Typical Millwork
Cabinet and Drawer Hardware (06 41 93)
NO European Style Hinges allowed
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 06 40 00
Preferred Hardware is as follows
• Hinges, 5 knuckle, brushed chrome

• Door and Drawer pulls, 5”, brushed chrome
• Drawer Slides – Ball Bearing Type Only
Minimize number of cabinets requiring locks, key to room. Coordination will be

needed with hardware specifier and supplier to ensure all items are covered.
Likely locking device by Millwork Sub, with cores, keying, and installation by
Hardware Sub
Wood Paneling (06 42 00)
Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Paneling (06 42 19)
Provide 3mm edge on all panels for durability and to facilitate ease in
replacement, in lieu of concealed spline joints
Consider in lieu of CMU for corridor walls (less labor and construction time, future
program flexibility). Provide at lower heights for ES, higher for HS. Consider
height of backpacks when determining appropriate height of panels.
Wood Stairs and Rails (06 43 00)
Wood Stairs (06 43 13)
NOT USED, refer to Division 09 for wood flooring on treads (and risers) at
auditoriums and stages
Wood Railings (06 43 16)
Avoid use due to maintenance, high abuse
Ornamental Woodwork (06 44 00) – NOT USED
Wood Trim (06 46 00) – NOT USED
Wood Frames (06 48 00) – NOT USED
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 06 50 00
Division #06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Structural Plastics)
STRUCTURAL PLASTICS (06 50 00) – NO REQUIREMENTS
A/E must review any suggested uses with FBISD prior to incorporation in design documents
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 06 60 00
Division #06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Plastic Fabrications)
PLASTIC FABRICATIONS (06 60 00)
Simulated Stone Fabrications (06 61 00)
Consider for use in Life Skills demonstration/cooking areas as countertop
Minimize use, but consider for reception desks, other high abuse, and high traffic areas:
• Cultured Marble Fabrications (06 61 13)

• Solid Surfacing Fabrications (06 61 16)
• Quartz Surfacing Fabrications (06 61 19)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 06 80 00
Division #06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites (Composite Fabrications)
COMPOSITE FABRICATIONS (06 80 00)
Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling (FRP) (06 83 16)
Refer to FBISD Educational Specifications for additional information on acceptable use

and locations
Provide on wall(s) adjacent to mop sinks in Custodial areas. If corner floor sink, install
on both walls to nearest inside corner
Provide in Food Service areas over steel framing assemblies (where masonry or CMU
not provided)
DO NOT install on exterior walls or on walls between conditioned and non-conditioned

spaces (or in any location where condensation due to dew point is possible behind FRP)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 07 00 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Introduction)
DIVISION 07 INTENT:
Two of the most critical aspects of any building are the thermal and moisture envelopes. For
protection from the elements and from the risks associated with incorrect installation, care must
be taken to ensure expectations are clear to both A/E (during design) and GC (during
construction).
Included within Division 07 sub-sections are specific guidelines for materials and installation.
Although there may be variations in the details used, the performance expectations should be
clear.
1) General Requirements for Thermal and Moisture Protection (This Section)

2) Dampproofing and Waterproofing (07 10 00)
3) Thermal Protection (07 20 00)
4) Steep Slope Roofing (07 30 00)
5) Roofing and Siding Panels (07 40 00)
6) Membrane Roofing (07 50 00)
7) Flashing and Sheet Metal (07 60 00)
8) Roof and Wall Specialties and Accessories (07 70 00)
9) Fire and Smoke Protection (07 80 00)
10) Joint Protection (07 90 00)
The following building envelopes must be completely closed:
- Thermal Envelope (Protection of Contents and Occupant Comfort)

- Moisture Envelope (Protect Interior from Condensation as Result of Dewpoint)
- Architectural Veneer Envelope (Shed Moisture)
Consider ease in construction when choosing exterior materials and detailing all exterior walls.
Minimize start-stop time for alternate trades to complete work. Examples:
- Consider common thermal protection for entire building (rigid insulation vs. batt)
- Consider common moisture protection for entire building (membrane vs. applied
dampproofing)
Page 1 of 4
FBISD 07 00 00
General Roof Design:
Locate roof drains to minimize piping (towards building perimeter). Refer to Diagrams
07_01 and 07_02
Scuppers or overflow drains must be provided
Locate overflows and scuppers in locations AWAY from main entrances and exits
Ensure access to all locations on roof while minimizing number of roof hatches and
scuttle ladders
No rock ballast is allowed
Provide walk pads around all equipment, including path from each to roof access
hatches/ladders
Screen all equipment from view (city requirements)
Diagram 07_01 – Roof Drain Locations to Avoid
Page 2 of 4
FBISD 07 00 00
Diagram 07_02 – Recommended Roof Designs
Operation and Maintenance of Thermal and Moisture Protection (07 01 00)
Specific warranty durations are noted in each sub-section along with material
references. General performance is as follows:
- 20 years for roof

- 10 years for flashing (including thru-wall)
- 5 years for joint sealants
Common Work Results for Thermal and Moisture Protection (07 05 00)
Intention is for Architectural Envelope to be inconsequential, removed without affecting

building’s ability to protect against extreme temperatures and moisture (both within
assembly, condensation/dewpoint, and from outside weather).
Page 3 of 4
FBISD 07 00 00
CONCEPT: Building veneer could be removed and moisture envelope water-tested with
no failures
Schedules for Thermal and Moisture Protection (07 06 00) – NOT USED
Commissioning of Thermal and Moisture Protection (07 08 00)
Not required, however, FBISD retains the right to contract with Building Envelope
Specialist if provisions outlined within the section are not complied with during design
and construction. In extreme cases, payment for these additional services may be the
responsibility of A/E or Contractor at no expense to FBISD.
Page 4 of 4
FBISD 07 10 00
Division #07 – Thermal & Moisture Protection (Dampproofing & Waterproofing)
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING (07 10 00)
General:
Unoccupied below grade areas (such as elevator pits) shall have a passive drainage-
cavity-type membrane to ensure moisture is ‘pulled away’ from surface. Occupied
spaces below grade (such as Orchestra Pit) shall have reactive moisture-stopping
membrane (bentonite).
Dampproofing (07 11 00)
General:
Provide on CMU, but also on glass-mat sheathing. Consider use of one material
on entire exterior (one trade)
Bituminous Dampproofing (07 11 13)
Cementitious Dampproofing (07 11 16)
Sheet Dampproofing (07 11 19)
Sheet Waterproofing (07 13 00)
General:
All types below are acceptable for use, provided use ensures protection as
outlined in introduction to this section and as indicated elsewhere in Division 07
Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing (07 13 13)
Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing (07 13 26)
Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing (07 13 52)
Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing (07 13 53)
Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing (07 13 54)
Fluid-Applied Waterproofing (07 14 00) – NOT USED
Sheet Metal Waterproofing (Lead) (07 15 00)
Cementitious and Reactive Waterproofing (07 16 00)
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 07 10 00
Division #07 – Thermal & Moisture Protection (Dampproofing & Waterproofing)
Bentonite Waterproofing (07 17 00)
Traffic Coatings (07 18 00)
Water Repellants (07 19 00)
General:
Verify use of any listed below with FBISD. Must be maintained once applied
Most masonry veneers now have integral repellants, ensure
Acrylic Repellants (07 19 13)
Concrete floor Sealer and Finish (07 19 16)
Silicone Repellants (07 19 19)
Siloxane Repellants (07 19 23)
Stearate Repellants (07 19 26)
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 07 20 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Thermal Protection)
THERMAL PROTECTION (07 20 00)
General:
Roofing: All thermal insulation for the roof should be incorporated in the roof system and
installed above the roof deck (keeping heat from entering the building envelope).
Exceed minimum requirements of Energy Code
Special Conditions: Batt insulation should not be installed below the roof deck or on the
back (top) of a ceiling. Exterior alcoves should be considered as exterior with envelopes
closed around them (walls to deck above door and on sides). Provide vented perimeter
with sprayed on insulation at deck where conditioned spaces occur above exterior-soffit
spaces.
Diagram 07_03 – Completion of Moisture and Thermal Envelopes at Exterior Alcoves
Exterior Walls: Due to the large amount of heat transfer through metal studs, installing
board insulation on the outside face of the sheathing in lieu of batt insulation between
the studs is the preferred method. This also leaves the stud cavity open for future wiring
drops.
Ensure wall cavity is not continuous from interior to exterior conditions
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 07 20 00
Thermal Insulation (07 21 00)
Board Insulation (Foam, Fibrous, Mineral) (07 21 13)
Recommend using foam board insulation on all areas, provide tight joints
between boards, taping of joints not required
Blanket Insulation (07 21 16)
Use in transition areas, parapets ONLY
Foamed-in-Place Insulation (07 21 19)
Only acceptable use is within single wythe masonry
Loose Fill Insulation (07 21 23) – DO NOT USE
Blown Insulation (07 21 26) – DO NOT USE
Sprayed Insulation (07 21 29)
Recommended for use on underside of decking at alcove areas with occupied,

conditioned spaces above
Roof and Deck Insulation (07 22 00)
Asphaltic Perlite Concrete Deck (07 22 13)
Roof Board Insulation (07 22 16)
For use below standing seam metal roofs only
Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (07 24 00) – NOT RECOMMENDED
Weather Barriers (07 25 00)
Vapor Retarders (07 26 00)
Above-Grade Vapor Retarders (07 26 13)
Below-Grade Vapor Retarders (07 26 16)
Under-slab application (10mil minimum)
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 07 20 00
Air Barriers (07 27 00)
General: Avoid use of all below
Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers (07 27 13)
Sheet Metal Membrane Air Barriers (07 27 16)
Plastic Sheet Air Barriers (07 27 19)
Board Product Air Barriers (07 27 23)
Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers (07 27 26)
Sprayed Foam Air Barrier (07 27 36)
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 07 30 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Steep Slope Roofing)
STEEP SLOPE ROOFING (07 30 00)
Canvas Roofing (07 30 91) – DO NOT USE
Shingles and Shakes (07 31 00)
General:
Limited use, architectural elements only, or out-buildings
Asphalt Shingles (07 31 13)
No special requirements
All below are NOT ALLOWED:
Metal Shingles (07 31 16)
Mineral Fiber Cement Shingles (07 31 19)
Porcelain Enamel Shingles (07 31 23)
Slate Shingles (07 31 26)
Wood Shingles and Shakes (07 31 29)
Composite Rubber Shingles (07 31 33)
Plastic Shakes (07 31 53)
Roof Tiles (07 32 00) – NOT USED
Clay Roof Tiles (07 32 13)
Concrete Roof Tiles (07 32 16)
Metal Roof Tiles (07 32 19)
Mineral Fiber Cement Roof Tiles (07 32 23)
Plastic Roof Tiles (07 32 26)
Rubber Tiles/Panels (07 32 29)
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 07 30 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Steep Slope Roofing)
Natural Roof Coverings (07 33 00) – NOT USED
Sod Roofing (07 33 13)
Thatched Roofing (07 33 16)
Vegetated Roofing (07 33 63)
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 07 40 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Roofing and Siding Panels)
ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS (07 40 00)
Roof Panels (07 41 00)
General:
The recommended standard for steep slope roofing is structural standing seam
metal panel roofing with a Kynar finish and a 20-year weather tightness warranty
and a 20-year finish warranty.
For maximum protection and extended warranty, metal roofing should be applied
over a membrane (100% deck coverage) such as WR Grace’s “Ice and Water
Shield”.
Provide striations to prevent oil-canning. Do not skimp on gauge
Curved elements to be avoided with metal roof. If used, panels must be tapered
for max weather-tightness
Metal Roof Panels (07 41 13) – SEE ABOVE
Wood Roof Panels (07 41 23)
Plastic Roof Panels (07 41 33)
Composite Roof Panels (07 41 43)
Fabricated Roof Panels (07 41 63)
Wall Panels (07 42 00)
Metal Wall Panels (07 42 13)
General:
R-Panel, U-Panel, S-Panel, mechanically-seamed
Other profiles are acceptable, subject to FBISD approval. Pre-insulated

are acceptable with approval of FBISD
Do not rely on metal wall panels for thermal and moisture protection.
Design to shed water only, with thermal and moisture protection
envelopes covered by means indicated elsewhere in Division 07
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 07 40 00
Wood Wall Panels (07 42 23)
Terra Cotta Wall Panels (07 42 29) – Likely never used
Plastic Wall Panels (07 42 33)
Composite Wall Panels (07 42 43)
Fabricated Wall Panel Assemblies (07 42 63)
Alucobond-types
Soffit Panels (07 42 93)
Faced Panels (07 44 00) – DO NOT USE
Aggregate Coated Panels (07 44 13)
Porcelain Enameled Faced Panels (07 44 16)
Tile-Faced Panels (07 44 19)
Ceramic Tile-Faced Panels (07 44 23)
Metal Faced Panels (07 44 33)
Glass Fiber Reinforced Cementitious Panels (07 44 53)
Mineral Fiber Reinforced Cementitious Panels (07 44 56)
Fabricated Faced Panel Assemblies (07 44 63)
Siding (07 46 00)
Aluminum Siding (07 46 16)
Steel Siding (07 46 19)
Wood Siding (07 46 23)
Hardboard Siding (07 46 26)
Plywood Siding (07 46 29)
Plastic Siding (07 46 33)
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 07 40 00
Composition Siding (07 46 43)
Fiber-Cement Siding (07 46 46)
Fabricated Panel Assemblies with Siding (07 46 63)
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 07 50 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Membrane Roofing)
MEMBRANE ROOFING (07 50 00)
General:
Refer to Division 07 Introduction (07 00 00) for additional information concerning roof
design on all Fort Bend ISD projects, including new construction and additions-
renovations.
Coordinate with Fort Bend ISD Project Manager on modifications and/or repairs to
existing roofs that do not comply with standards below. Depending on cost, and
specifics of project, some roofs may be completely replaced to comply with new
standards, and others repaired to match existing.
Warranty:
Provide for 20 year No Dollar Limit (NDL) Warranty on all new roof, no exceptions. Goal
is to minimize maintenance by selecting roof types according to requirements below,
designing and detailing roofs according to General Requirements in 07 00 00, with a
warranty covering most problems typically encountered over the life of the roof.
Further, it is the goal of Fort Bend ISD to select roof types that will not need replacement
prior to maturity of bonds being sold to fund construction of them.
Built-Up Bituminous Roofing (07 51 00)
Built Up Asphalt Roofing (07 51 13)
Preferred FBISD Roof is 3-ply Built-Up plus elastomeric finish membrane cap
with flood coat and gravel surfacing, complying with UL Class A and ASCE-7
wind uplift criteria. See below for additional information on Coal-Tar Elastomeric
Membrane (CTEM)
Built Up Coal Tar Roofing (07 51 16) – NOT ALLOWED
Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Asphalt Emulsion Roofing (07 51 23) – NOT ALLOWED
Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing (07 52 00)
APP or SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing (07 52 13 or 07 52 16)
Cold Adhesive NOT ALLOWED, NO Torch Applied
Heat Adhesive, Mechanically Fastened ONLY
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 07 50 00
Elastomeric Membrane Roofing (07 53 00)
Coal Tar Elastomeric Membrane Roofing – PREFERRED by FBISD
Minimum 60-mil overall calendared thickness
High performance elastomeric membrane incorporating DuPont Elvaloy KEE

(ketone ethylene ester, copolymer), extended with coal tar pitch and reinforced
with polyester fibers
All base flashing shall be same material as the CTEM
*None of the roofing types indicated below will be allowed on Fort Bend ISD Projects:*
Chlorinated-Polyethylene Roofing (07 53 13)
Chlorosulfonate-Polyethylene Roofing (07 53 16)
Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer Roofing (07 53 23)
Polyisobutylene Roofing (07 53 29)
Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (07 54 00)
Copolymer-Alloy Roofing (07 54 13)
Ethylene-Interpolymer Roofing (07 54 16)
Polyvinyl-Chloride Roofing (07 54 19)
Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing (07 54 23)
Nitrile-Butadiene-Polymer Roofing (07 54 26)
Protected Membrane Roofing (07 55 00)
Built-Up Bituminous Protected Membrane Roofing (07 55 51)
Modified Bituminous Protected Membrane Roofing (07 55 52)
Elastomeric Protected Membrane Roofing (07 55 53)
Thermoplastic Protected Membrane Roofing (07 55 54)
Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing (07 55 56)
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 07 50 00
Vegetated Protected Membrane Roofing (07 55 63)
Fluid-Applied Roofing (07 56 00)
Coated Foamed Roofing (Sprayed Polyurethane Foam) (07 57 00)
Roll Roofing (07 58 00)
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 07 60 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Flashing and Sheet Metal)
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL (07 60 00)
Sheet Metal Roofing (07 61 00)
Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing (07 64 13)
Refer to Division 07 Introduction for Design of roofs using Standing Seam Metal
Batten Seam Sheet Metal Roofing (07 64 16) – DO NOT USE
Flat Seam Sheet Metal Roofing (07 64 19) – DO NOT USE
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (07 62 00)
Provide Galvanized Sheet Metal, Stainless Steel not required
Consider Unfinished Galvanized at areas not exposed to view
Sheet Metal Roofing Specialties (07 63 00)
Sheet Metal Wall Cladding (07 64 00)
Standing Seam Sheet Metal Wall Cladding (07 64 13)
Batten Seam Sheet Metal Wall Flashing (07 64 16) – DO NOT USE
Flat Seam Sheet Metal Wall Cladding (07 64 19)
Flexible Flashing (07 65 00)
Laminated Sheet Flashing (07 65 13)
Modified Bituminous Sheet Flashing (07 65 16)
Plastic Sheet Flashing (07 65 19)
Rubber Sheet Flashing (07 65 23)
Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing (07 65 26)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 07 70 00
Division #07 – Thermal & Moisture Protection (Roof/Wall Specialties)
ROOF AND WALL SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES (07 70 00)
Roof Specialties (07 71 00)
Manufactured Copings (07 71 13)
Manufactured Counterflashing Systems (07 71 16)
Manufactured Gravel Stops and Fascias (07 71 19)
Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts (07 71 23)
Reglets (07 71 26)
Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints (07 71 29)
Low profile or raised type? Raised type is more reliable
Manufactured Scuppers (07 71 33)
Locate away from major building entries
Roof Accessories (07 72 00)
Manufactured Curbs (07 72 13)
Relief Vents (07 72 23)
Required at large spaces such as Gymnasiums (Refer to HVAC)
Ridge Vents (07 72 26)
May be required at Maintenance Buildings, if not air conditioned
Roof Hatches (07 72 33)
Provide minimum number, but locate so that access to ALL PORTIONS OF

ROOF are possible
Smoke Vents (07 72 36)
Ensure easily accessible from roof and from below, for maintenance, testing, and
reset
Roof Walk Boards (07 72 43)
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 07 70 00
Division #07 – Thermal & Moisture Protection (Roof/Wall Specialties)
Roof Walkways (Raised) (07 72 46)
Roof Pavers (Roof Ballast and Roof Decking) (07 76 00)
Wall Specialties (07 77 00)
Refer to Openings for information on Louvers and Vents
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 07 80 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Fire and Smoke Protection)
FIRE AND SMOKE PROTECTION (07 80 00)
Applied Fireproofing (07 81 00)
General:
Design facilities to avoid need for substantial fire-proofing. Consider fire walls.
Where fire-proofing is provided, no primer is required on steel
Cement Aggregate Fireproofing (07 81 13)
Cementitious Fireproofing (07 81 16)
Intumescent Fireproofing (07 81 23)
FBISD recognizes that architectural exposed steel is desired at times, however,

minimal use of this as primary means of fire protection is preferred
Magnesium Cement Fireproofing (07 81 26)
Mineral-Fiber Cementitious Fireproofing (07 81 29)
Mineral-Fiber Fireproofing (07 81 33)
Board Fireproofing (07 82 00)
Calcium-Silicate Board Fireproofing (07 82 13)
Slag-Fiber Board Fireproofing (07 82 16)
Firestopping (07 84 00)
Penetration Firestopping (07 84 13)
Joint Firestopping (07 84 43)
Building Perimeter Firestopping (07 84 53)
Smoke Seals (07 86 00)
Smoke Containment Barriers (07 87 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 07 90 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Joint Protection)
JOINT PROTECTION (07 90 00)
General:
Movement of dissimilar materials is expected and design of building to control movement

is also expected. Consider long term maintenance when selecting materials to fill
control and expansion joints.
5 year warranty, minimum, is expected on all joint protection
For exterior use, select materials appropriate for that application, including ones that are
resistant to pests (non-organic, non-cellulose)
Preformed Joint Seals (07 91 00)
Compression Seals (07 91 13)
Joint Gaskets (07 91 16)
Backer Rods (07 91 23)
Joint Fillers (07 91 26)
Joint Sealants (07 92 00)
Elastomeric Joint Sealants (07 92 13)
Rigid Joint Sealants (07 92 16)
Expansion Control (07 95 00)
Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies (07 95 13)
Minimize by considering layout during design
Avoid awkward alignments where specialty joints are required and multiple
covers are needed
Locate within wall chases when possible, only cross corridors, not aligned with
them
Not required in acoustic ceilings
All aluminum, design basis. No vinyl components.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 07 90 00
Division #07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Joint Protection)
Floor types shall be flat plate
Joint Slide Bearings (07 95 53) – AVOID USE
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 08 00 00
Division #08 – Openings (Introduction)
DIVISION 08 INTENT:
Contained within this section are FBISD preferred materials, vendors, and installation
instructions for Openings in New and Existing buildings. Details are provided to accompany
some materials, along with cut sheets of specific design basis that are not negotiable (no
exceptions allowed).
Separate sections have been prepared for all sub-categories of work within this division:

2) Doors and Frames (08 10 00)
3) Specialty Doors and Frames (08 30 00)
4) Entrances, Storefronts, and Curtain Walls (08 40 00)
5) Windows (08 50 00)
6) Roof Windows and Skylights (08 60 00)
7) Hardware (08 70 00)
8) Glazing (08 80 00)
9) Louvers and Vents (08 90 00)
10) FBISD Door and Hardware Specification Guidelines
Operation and Maintenance of Openings (08 01 00)
Refer to Flow Chart (Division 01) for Review of Hardware Submittals (include FBISD
Maintenance, Locksmith, Safe and Secure Schools, and Technology in submittal review
of all hardware, along with GC, applicable subcontractors, hardware specifier, and other
A/E representatives)
Common Work Results for Openings (08 05 00)
Refer to Sub-Divisions
Schedules for Openings (08 06 00)
Door Schedule within drawings should include space for:
Keying (left blank, to be added by FBISD during construction)
Hardware Set Number (added by A/E)
Proposed Owner Room Number (for fabrication of room signage)
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 08 00 00
Division #08 – Openings (Introduction)
Commissioning of Openings (08 08 00)
Commissioning of Openings and all associated Hardware is not required; HOWEVER, a

Punch List by Hardware Specifier IS REQUIRED. FBISD Locksmith and General
Contractor’s hardware installer must be present during punch list review. Punch list will
be attached to substantial completion form, same as other punch lists.
NOTE: Hardware installer must be certified by manufacturer for installation of that

product (no installation by general contractor laborer(s) is allowed without this
certification, regardless of experience)
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 08 10 00
Division #08 – Openings (Doors and Frames)
DOORS AND FRAMES (08 10 00)
Metal Doors and Frames (08 11 00)
General:
Provide plastic laminate doors at all interior locations except for hollow metal
(HM) doors (painted) at all mechanical rooms, interior and exterior
Provide sound seals at all interior mechanical rooms, Refer to 08 70 00
Touch up paint on all doors (including top and undercut) after fitting
In High Schools, at Black Box area, provide laminate on corridor-side door face
to match other doors. Install black plastic laminate on Black Box side (matte).
Provide larger doors at the following locations:
Interior Mechanical Rooms, provide (2) 4’-0” x 7’-0” doors with a 2’

removable transom panel
Exterior Mechanical Rooms, provide (2) 4’-0” x 7’-0” doors with a 2’

removable transom panel. Provide air-tight seals.
At commercial laundry in field house, and at band, orchestra and choir

(exterior and interior) rooms, provide 4’-0” x 7’-0”.
At A/V storage room off library and at chair storage off commons, provide
3’-6” x 7’-0”.
Behind stage and at drama access points, provide larger and wider doors.
Consult with Owner. At stairs, the door can be 3’-0”x7’-0”; at ramp, the
door should be a 4’-0”x7’-0”.
At band and orchestra, provide 4’-0” x 7’-0” doors to accommodate

movement of large pieces of equipment.
Coordinate location of door lites and view panels with Owner. Ensure
coordinated with hardware installation (allow adequate room for installation)
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames (08 11 13)
Refer to information above
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 08 10 00
Aluminum Doors and Frames (08 11 16)
Consider for use in lieu of steel in CMU walls where prolonged exposure to
weather during construction is likely. Confirm with FBISD Design and
Construction Project Manager
Stainless Steel Doors and Frames (08 11 19)
Natatorium use only, including all spaces serving this area (chemical storage,
general storage, mechanical, electrical)
Avoid use of the following:
• Bronze Doors and Frames (08 11 23)

• Metal Screen and Storm Doors and Frames (08 11 63)
• Metal Screen Doors and Frames (08 11 66)
• Metal Storm Doors and Frames (08 11 69)
• Sliding Metal Fire Doors (08 11 73) – DO NOT USE
• Sliding Metal Grilles (08 11 74)
Metal Frames (08 12 00)
General:
No knock down door frames in new construction, allowable in renovations only,

with approval of FBISD Design and Construction Project Manager
When installing new frames in existing walls, be sure to properly brace frame to
prevent movement
Refer to 08 71 00 for additional information, including Hardware requirements

and coordination
Hollow Metal Frames (08 12 13)
Hot Dip Galvanized at exterior. Provide full depth stop at center of frames to
receive removable mullions, so that top of mullion seats flush with frame
Aluminum Frames (08 12 16) – See Above
Stainless Steel Frames (08 12 19)
See above for information related to Natatoriums/Pools
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 08 10 00
Bronze Frames (08 12 23) – DO NOT USE
Metal Doors (08 13 00) – Included above
Wood Doors (08 14 00)
Carved Wood Doors (08 14 13) – NOT USED
Flush Wood Doors (08 14 16)
PLAM Clad Only, NO WOOD VENEER DOORS
Hardwood, Painted edges (NO PLAM). Hardwood Edges will allow for
adjustments without damage to laminate
No Attic Stock of Laminate required
Do not install doors and other finish materials until spaces are dried-in and
conditioned
Clad Wood Doors (Metal-Faced, PLAM-Faced, Molded-Hardwood-Faced) (08 14 23) –

SEE ABOVE
Prefinished Wood Doors (08 14 29) – NOT ALLOWED
Stile and Wood Rail Doors (08 14 33) – NOT USED
Wood Screen Doors (08 14 66) – NOT USED
Wood Storm Doors (08 14 69) – NOT USED
Sliding Wood Doors (08 14 73) – NOT USED
Bi-folding Wood Doors (08 14 76) – NOT USED
Plastic Doors (08 15 00) – DO NOT USE
Composite Doors (08 16 00) – NOT USED
Integrated Door Opening Assemblies (08 17 00) – DO NOT USE on Fort Bend ISD PROJECTS!
Accessories – Provide a peep site in exterior kitchen delivery doors.
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 08 30 00
Division #08 – Openings (Specialty Doors and Frames)
SPECIALTY DOORS AND FRAMES (08 30 00)
Access Doors and Panels (08 31 00)
Note that major equipment and valves SHOULD NOT be installed in areas where access
panel would have to be installed to maintain. If unavoidable, install access panels of
appropriate size and location, include on reflected ceiling plans
If coiling doors installed in bulkheads, provide access panel to motor, or size and
location appropriate to ENSURE maintenance and motor replacement access (including
access to reset/test)
Sliding Glass Doors (08 32 00)
Only use is display cabinets
Coiling Doors and Grilles (08 33 00)
General:
Interior coiling doors at kitchen, reception counter, weight rooms, corridors and
attendance office to be clear anodized aluminum solid slat type. Sargent lock,
electric operation
Interior lock-down gates to be clear anodized aluminum ladder type door for
security (view through gate). Sargent keyed switch, interlocked to fire alarm.
Gates should fail open. Electric operation. If electric gates are in egress
corridor, disable or remove throw bolts and cylinder locks
All exterior coiling doors to be electric operation if over 5’-0” in height or over 6’-
0” in width. All interior doors to be manually assisted operation unless of large
size as noted above. Discuss with Owner.
Special Function Doors (08 34 00)
General:
Sound Control Doors – Music areas if required. Coordinate with Owner.

Acoustic hollow metal type.
Folding Doors and Grilles (08 35 00)
General:
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 08 30 00
Division #08 – Openings (Specialty Doors and Frames)
See Division 10, Operable Partitions and Accordion folding partitions.
Panel Doors (08 36 00) – NOT USED
Traffic Doors (08 38 00) – NOT USED
Pressure Resistant Doors (08 39 00) – NOT USED
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 08 40 00
Division #08 – Openings (Entrances, Storefronts, and Curtain Walls)
ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS, AND CURTAIN WALLS (08 40 00)
Entrances and Storefronts (08 41 00)
General:
Steel stabilizer bar (painted to match aluminum) required in center astragal of

double aluminum storefront door systems to fortify lock area. Coordinate with
hardware specification.
No custom colors; clear and anodized frames preferred. Architect to check local
requirements and coordinate with Owner if AHJ requires (or suggests) non-
standard colors.
**Stiles to be wide enough to accommodate hardware; do not use narrow stile

profiles.**
Ensure thickness of door is sufficient to accept Sargent and Keso cylinders.
Important to coordinate all hardware with supplier and hardware specifier (i.e.
closer, electric transfers, control systems, lock etc.)
Provide Sargent cylinder dog-down on all panic hardware, including where

electric access is provided on the door. Confirm locations with FBISD Design
and Construction Department Project Manager
Refer to Specification Guideline for more information.
Provide full width stop at center of frames to receive removable mullions, so that
top of mullion seats flush with frame
Entrances (08 42 00) – SEE ABOVE
Storefronts (08 43 00) – SEE ABOVE
Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies (08 44 00)
It is recommended that Curtain Wall construction be avoided.
Designer to consider limits of traditional storefront while sizing exterior fenestration,

including requirement to limit all glazing sizes to less than 4’-0” X 8’-0” as noted
elsewhere in these standards.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 08 40 00
Division #08 – Openings (Entrances, Storefronts, and Curtain Walls)
Translucent Wall and Roof Assemblies (08 45 00)
General:
Clerestory only (no skylights)
Owner approval required due to concern for life expectancy and water tightness
If provided, Kal-wall or equal, unless otherwise approved by Owner
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 08 50 00
Division #08 – Openings (Windows)
WINDOWS (08 50 00)
General:
Inside mullions (those within the frame perimeter) are to be recessed from perimeter
frame to accommodate the installation of inside mounted blinds. Inset to be
approximately 1 ½” to accommodate blind.
Place glass stop to corridor side
Do not place windows down to slab level due to problems with water infiltration, including
at areas with large overhang where the windows are more protected
Typically use laminated glass (unless otherwise required by AHJ(Authorities Having

Jurisdiction)). Coordinate with Owner.
Use wired glass only where necessary by codes, etc.
Architect to detail sill flashing ensuring that watertight end dams are provided. End
dams should be welded or sealed with curtain wall sealant at vertical corner of end dam
joint
Indicate windows to receive mini-blinds in drawings (window elevations or FF&E plan

sheets), no general “catch-all” notes
Confirm with the Owner if the CBond or equal glass to window film product will be
required on glazing to enhance and increase the structural integrity of the glass unit.
Metal Windows (08 51 00) – SEE ABOVE
Wood Windows (08 52 00) – NOT USED
Plastic Windows (08 53 00) – NOT USED
Composite Windows (08 54 00) – NOT USED
Pressure-Resistant Windows (08 55 00) – NOT USED
Special Function Windows (08 56 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 08 60 00
Division #08 – Openings (Roof Windows and Skylights)
ROOF WINDOWS AND SKYLIGHTS (08 60 00)
General:
Deter or Prohibit Use, refer to below for additional information
Roof Windows (08 61 00) – DO NOT USE
Unit Skylights (08 62 00)
AVOID Domed, Pyramidal, Vaulted
Tubular Day-lighting Devices or Solar-Tubes are recommended for getting light to

interior spaces, without direct access to exterior. Refer to LEED sections for additional
information regarding available Credits and uses
Metal Framed Skylights (08 63 00) – DO NOT USE
Domed, Pyramidal, Vaulted, Ridge, Motorized
Plastic Framed Skylights (08 64 00) – DO NOT USE
Skylight Protection and Screens (provide at Tubular Devices) (08 67 00)
Provide wire guards on all devices
Consider bird protection
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 08 70 00
Division #08 – Openings (Hardware)
HARDWARE (08 70 00)
General (Keying):
Keying meeting will be conducted to coordinate keying with Design and Construction
Department and hardware supplier.
Sargent and Keso systems with a Great Grand Master system within the District are a
strictly enforced standard. Keso keys will be delivered to the FBISD Design and
Construction Department, not the contractor, due to security.
All MDF and IDF rooms to have a Keso (keyed on Technology master) and a DSX card
access system.
All chemical storage rooms at HS’s to have a Sargent cylinder (keyed on Science
master) and a DSX card access system.
Science prep rooms are to be key access from the classroom and the corridor. No key
is required for access back out of the prep room.
All exterior doors, main entrance vestibule doors, all Adminstration doors leading to
Reception and corridors, testing and record storage, and computer rooms will have DSX
card access systems.
Provide Combination Key Box at all schools (Near Main Entry to Facility, see below):
Locate at the main entry (near administration area), adjacent to the burglar alarm
key pad. Do not install it behind locked interior doors. It needs to be available
once you get into the front door and disarm the burglar alarm system.
The Contractor should be given the box for installation. The Contractor should
not close the box or remove the covering which prevents premature locking.
Once you lock the box, it cannot be re-opened without the correct combination.
The FBISD locksmith will program the box with the district security number and
place the interior master key(s) inside the box when he installs the Keso
cylinders in the building (at substantial completion). A key to the key cabinet
should also be placed inside the box. Knox key boxes are furnished by FBISD
Design and Construction Department, installed by Contractor. A flush mounted
Knox box is preferred by FBISD. Once installed, FBISD D&C Staff will not have
access to this key box
Page 1 of 4
FBISD 08 70 00
The purpose of this Knox key box is to have a building interior master available to
authorized District personnel in the event of an emergency.
Door Hardware (08 71 00)
General:
**Refer to FBISD Door and Hardware Specification Guideline for additional

information on all items within this Section**
- Hinges: No preference – Consider continuous hinges at high impact doors.

(no pivot closers) List 3 manufacturers.
- Push Plates & Pulls: McKinney (preferred), Rockwood & Tremco, Add Ives
- Closers: LCN, Norton & Sargeant, through sex bolts, stiffeners at frame
heads. Avoid drop plates by providing Wide style doors with mid-rail
- Floor Mounted Door Closers: DO NOT USE
- Thresholds: McKinney (preferred), Pemko, Rockwood, Ives, Ries. Cast
aluminum is preferred. Ensure there is a lip profile and they are sealed.
- Security Strikes at mechanical rooms and store rooms – not needed. Provide
mortise locks w/deadbolts. GC to maintain 1/8” tolerance in installation.
- Removable Mullions: Keyed and steel required. – Sargent and Von Duprin.
Provide modified stop at the head to ensure full seat!
- Coordinators – Avoid coordinators unless required by code and there are no
other alternatives.
- Automatic Doors: Do Not Use
- Sound Seals: McKinney (preferred), Pemko. Vinyl sound seal strip on all
sides - All Music areas and Auditorium. IT IS PREFERED FOR DESIGN
TEAM TO CONSIDER TWO SETS OF DOORS IN LIEU OF SOUND SEALS
TO ISOLATE SOUND AT AUDITORIUMS AND MUSIC AREAS.
- Automatic Door Bottoms – maintenance issue, avoid if possible. Pinch at
bottom of installation at aluminum doors to avoid “creep”.
- Locks & Latches:
o Mortise locksets and Access Control locksets: Sargent. Keep series
listing included.
o NO electric strikes except interior card reader applications only (mdf,
IDF, etc)
o Provide conduit (path) to 3 places at all EXTERIOR doors:
 Center Hinge
 Latch
Page 2 of 4
FBISD 08 70 00
 Head (6” from latch side if single, Mullion if double)

- Locksets and Cores: Sargent. NO EXCEPTIONS
- Panic Devices: Sargent and Von Duprin. Single use room exit device,
double with keyed removable mullion. Vertical Rod (internal or external) – Do
Not Use unless required by code. Add dead latch function.
- Kick Plates: McKinney, Rockwood, Tremco. Identify all locations where they
should be used (high traffic, high impact) 050 thickness, stainless steel. Size
to be specified - Band – 24”, Athletic Locker Rooms – 12”.
- Overhead Stops: Sargent & Brickson. Add concealed overhead stop at
exterior entrances.
- All exterior access control to fail secure. Access Control at Vestibules and
other interior spaces required for egress shall fail safe.
- Mag Hold-Opens: Avoid use
- Key Cabinet: 50% extra capacity for expansion NOT REQUIRED. FBISD
Design and Construction Department will set up key cabinet, GC to install all
the cores by certified installer.
- Keying: Hard copy bidding list to be delivered with permanent cores and
keys. 50 key blanks for elementary and 100 key blanks for MS and HS.
- Warranty: Refer to FBISD Door and Hardware Specification Guidelines
- Attic Stock: Confirm with FBISD Project Manager, include in Specifications
- Door bottom sweeps at exterior doors. McKinney, NGP and Pemko
- Put electrical key switches on the keyed system.
- Roof hatches and other HVAC items to be secured with keying system.
- All flush bolts shall be Manual, No Automatic
- Must be supplied by authorized factory reps. Must be installed by factory
authorized installer.
Access Control Hardware (08 74 00)
Verify Requirements:
- Card Key Access

- Keypad Access
ALL EXTERIOR DOORS WITH ELECTRIC ACCESS CONTROL (ANY VOLTAGE) TO

FAIL SECURE. Vestibule Doors at Main Entries Shall FAIL SAFE.
Refer to Division 28 for additional information concerning Access Control
Window Hardware (08 75 00) – Refer to Window Sub-Division
Page 3 of 4
FBISD 08 70 00
Special Function Hardware (08 78 00) – No Special Considerations
Hardware Accessories (08 79 00)
Refer to Division 13 for additional information on Knox Box, which is Owner

Provided and Contractor Installed.
Knox Boxes do not come with keys. The manufacturer keys the lock to the AHJ
key for the school’s location. Once the Knox Box is installed the campus
Administration assembles all required keys. They call the AHJ (City Fire Marshal
for appropriate location) stating keys are ready to be installed in the box. The Fire
Marshall or designee comes to the school gathers the keys and locks them into
the Knox Box. The box can only be opened with the Fire Marshal key.
Knox Box to include the following keys:
- Exterior Grand Master

- Interior Grand Master
- Mechanical Room Keys
- Interior and Exterior Gate Keys (if not Master)
Page 4 of 4
08 71 00
MASTER SPECIFICATION
GUIDE FOR NEW
CONSTRUCTION AND
RENOVATIONS
February 19, 2014
To Whom It May Concern,
Fort Bend Independent School District has chosen to standardize on certain

manufacturer’s products for finish hardware. The purpose of this standardization is to
reduce the cost to the district in maintaining parts and to reduce the labor associated with
repairs. The manufacturers have been chosen based on their performance and the
availability of parts locally. The following pages comprise the standards and
manufacturers decided upon by the school district for finish hardware. All specification
writers shall comply with the standards spelled out in the attached preamble when
establishing hardware sets for any new or renovation projects. All architects shall include
the attached preambles in their specification manuals for all new and renovation
construction projects.
Sincerely,
Fort Bend Independent School District
FINISH
HARDWARE
Fort Bend Independent School District – Master Specification Section 08710
Edition: December 10, 2013 DOOR HARDWARE
Master Specification for New Construction and Renovations
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 Ingersoll-Rand Security and Safety Consultants of Texas will develop the door hardware
specification (Section 8710). Contact David Carter at (832) 418-9557.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hardware for hollow steel and plastic laminate doors.
B. Thresholds.
C. Weather-stripping, seals and door gaskets.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors and Frames.
B. Section 08 14 00 –Wood Doors.
C. Section 08 33 00 – Coiling doors and Grilles.
D. Section 08 34 00 – Special Function Doors.
E. Section 08 40 00 – Entrances, Storefronts, and Curtain Walls.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act, Accessibility Guidelines.
B. ANSI A117.1 – Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by
Physically Handicapped People.
C. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows.
D. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute – Quality Standards.
E. NFPA 101 – Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
F. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
G. TAS – Texas Accessibility Standards.
H. UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-1
I. UL 305 – Panic Hardware
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
C. Submit manufacturer’s parts lists and templates.
D. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions

requiring special attention.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection
procedures related to preventative maintenance.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements:
1. ADA.
2. ANSI A117.1.
3. NFPA 101.
4. NFPA 80.
5. NFPA 252.
6. TAS.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Hardware Supplier Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with five years
documented experience.
B. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in

the work of this section.
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-2
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters’ Laboratories,
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to
match hardware schedule.
C. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 03 90.
B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of
internal reinforcement for door hardware.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for door closers.
1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of Section 01 70 00.
B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-3
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND MATERIALS

Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: submit products from acceptable sub list below for review with
equivalent features and function of scheduled products.
ITEM: MANUFACTURER: ACCEPTABLE SUB:

Hinges (IVE) Ives Hager, McKinney
Continuous Hinges (IVE) Ives Zero, Select
Pivots (IVE) Ives Rixson
Key System (SCH) Schlage No Substitution
Locks (SCH) Schlage No Substitution
Exit Devices (VON) Von Duprin No Substitution
Closers (LCN) LCN Sargent
Auto Flush Bolts (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco
Coordinators (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco
Silencers (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco
Push & Pull Plates (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco
Vandal Resistant Trim (IVE) Ives None
Kickplates (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco
Stops & Holders (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco
Overhead Stops (GLY) Glynn-Johnson Sargent, ABH
Thresholds (NGP) National Guard Reese, Zero
Seals & Bottoms (NGP) National Guard Reese, Zero
Key Cabinets (LUN) Lund TelKee
2.2 HINGING METHODS:
A. Note: drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees doors will actually swing to maximum
allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches in width
to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true 180-degree opening. Advise architect if 8-inch width
is insufficient.
B. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and concealed bearings. Hinge open widths
minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing.
1. Three hinges per leaf to 7 foot, 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in
height, or any fraction thereof.
2. Extra heavy weight hinges on doors over 3 feet, 5 inches in width.
3. Extra-heavy weight hinges on doors with panic hardware or fire exit devices.
4. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins.
5. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric conditions.
6. Provide shims and shimming instructions for proper door adjustment.
7. All hinges to be ball bearing type on high use or doors with closers. Plain Bearing hinges
are acceptable for any door that is not high traffic without a closer.
C. Continuous Hinges:
1. Pin and barrel stainless steel at all entry and high traffic doors.
2. Geared-type aluminum at all interior high traffic doors.
3. Heavy-duty, extra-bearing units for doors over 3 foot, 5 inches in width.
4. Heavy-duty, extra-bearing units for doors with panic hardware or fire exit devices.
5. Use wide-throw units where needed for maximum degree of swing, advise architect if
commonly available hinges are insufficient.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-4
2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS:
A. Extra Heavy Duty Mortise Locks and Latches: Schlage L9000 Series
1. Chassis: cold-rolled steel.

2. Latchbolts: 3/4 inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type.
3. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid extruded bar type levers
as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design unacceptable.
a. Spindles: security design independent breakaway. Breakage of outside lever

does not allow access to inside lever’s hubworks to gain wrongful entry.
4. Thumbturns: accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to operate.

5. Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw.
6. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid or Schlage AD400
Wireless lock where running wire is difficult.
7. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box construction, lips of
sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
8. Scheduled Lock Series and Design Schlage L9000 17 A. On interior doors with full light,
schedule 07 A handle to avoid interference with mini blinds. On renovations, match
existing lever style.
a. ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security.

b. ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL Listed.
9. Accepted substitutions: None. Substitution requests will not be accepted.
B. On renovations smaller than 20 doors, consult district lock shop.
2.4 KEYING REQUIREMENTS:
Key System: All cylinders will be keyed into the district’s Schlage Everest R key system. All cylinders are
to be small format interchangeable cores (SFIC). A preliminary key meeting will be held to establish
guidelines for the system and a secondary key meeting will be held to review the proposed key system.
All cores will be shipped directly to the district lock shop to be installed. A construction key system will be
in place during the construction period. Three control keys for the construction key system will be turned
over to the district for installation of the permanent cores.
2.5 EXIT DEVICES / PANIC HARDWARE
A. General features: Von Duprin 99 Series
1. Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles.

2. Push-through push-pad design. No exposed push-pad fasteners, no exposed cavities
when operated.
3. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions, no
extra parts required to effect change of function.
4. Releasable in normal operation with 15-lb. maximum operating force, and with 32 lb.
maximum pressure under 250-lb. load to the door.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-5
B. Specific features:
1. Supply rim devices with key removable mullion at all entrances. Surface vertical rods
less bottom rods may only be used on cross corridor doors being held open by magnetic
hold opens. Concealed vertical rod exit devices WILL NOT be accepted.
2. Non-Fire Rated Devices: cylinder dogging.
3. Lever Trim: Breakaway type, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min .130” thickness,
compression spring drive, match lockset lever design.
4. Exterior Trim: Stainless steel vandal resistant trim thru-bolted to device with plastisol
coated grip. Night latch function retracts latch with use of key.
5. Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”.
6. Delayed Egress Devices: Function achieved within single exit device component,
including latch, delayed locking device, request-to-exit switch, nuisance alarm, remote
alarm, key switch, indicator lamp, relay, internal horn, door position input, external inhibit
input plus fire alarm input. NFPA 101 “Special Locking Arrangement” compliant.
7. Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for electric latch retraction
devices, electrically controlled trim, power transfers, power supplies, monitoring switches
and controls. QEL type electric motor is preferred. Schlage AD400 trim is preferred on
retrofit.
8. Removable Mullions: Removable with single turn of building key. Securely reinstalled
without need for key. Furnish storage brackets for securely stowing the mullion away
from the door when removed.
9. Exit Device Series: Von Duprin 99 Series. Substitution requests will not be accepted.
2.6 CLOSERS
B. Surface Closers: LCN 4041/1461 or Sargent 281 Series.
1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with molded plastic cover and cast iron body.
2. Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and rooms.
3. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header,
door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
4. Opening pressure: Exterior doors 8.5 lb., interior doors 5 lb., labeled fire doors 15 lb.
5. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck
6. Parallel Rigid arms (PR) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
7. Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120 degrees F
to –30 degrees F, furnish data on request.
8. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
9. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV): unsafe, not permitted.
10. Accepted Substitutions: Substitution requests will not be accepted.
2.7 OTHER HARDWARE
A. Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design, “LBR” type where scheduled.
B. Surface Bolts: Shall be used at pairs of doors from non-fire rated Mechanical rooms for the
inactive leaf.
C. Overhead Stops: Stainless steel (100 series). Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end
caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.
D. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled.
Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-6
E. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.
1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type Ives WS402 with appropriate
fasteners. Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. ( Ives FS18S exterior and
FS436 Interior) If neither can be used, provide overhead type.
2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for furniture
locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note degree of opening in submittal.
F. Seals: Finished to match adjacent frame color. Resilient seal material: polypropylene, nylon
brush, or solid high-grade neoprene. UL label applied to seals on rated doors. Substitute
products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material’s thickness and durability.
Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
1. Solid neoprene: MIL Spec. R6855-CL III, Grade 40.

2. Non-corroding fasteners at in-swinging exterior doors.
3. Exterior pairs of mechanical room doors: Doors shall be equipped with appropriate seals,
astragal, threshold, drip cap and sweeps to prevent the intrusion of rain water. Provide
astragals at all interior pairs of doors to mechanical rooms.
4. Sound control openings: Use components tested as a system using nationally accepted
standards by independent laboratories. Ensure that the door leafs have the necessary
sealed-in-place STC ratings. Adhesive mounted components not acceptable. Fasten
applied seals over bead of sealant.
5. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C / UBC Standard 7-2 compliant. Coordinate with
selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements. Where
rigid housed resilient seals are scheduled in this section and the selected door
manufacturer only requires an adhesive-mounted resilient seal, furnish rigid housed seal
at minimum, or both the rigid housed seal plus the adhesive applied seal. Adhesive
applied seals alone are deemed insufficient for this project where rigid housed seals are
scheduled.
6. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Furnish
fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C / UBC
Standard 7-2. Where required, Intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and
door manufacture -- careful coordination required. Adhesive-applied Intumescent strips
are not acceptable, use concealed-in-door-edge type or kerfed-in-frame type.
7. All exposed exterior doors not under a cover are to have a rain drip to extend four inches
outside the width of the door.
G. Automatic door bottoms: low operating force units. Doors with automatic door bottoms plus head
and jamb seals cannot require more than two pounds operating force to open when closer is
disconnected.
H. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Substitute products: certify that the products equal or
exceed specified material’s thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
1. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene
sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture Protection". Non-
ferrous 1/4inch fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or
approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL).
2. Acoustic openings: Set units in full bed of Division-7-compliant butyl-rubber or
polyisobutylene sealant, leave no air space between threshold and substrate.
3. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for specified
fastening methods.
I. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned TORX drive at
high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and
wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-7
J. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Omit where
adhesive mounted seal occurs. Leave no unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes.
K. Wall- & Floor-mounted electromagnetic door holders: LCN's SEM series or approved equivalent.
Incorporate into U.L.-listed fire & life-safety system, doors release to allow closure and latching
when door's zone is in alarm state. Use minimum projection required to allow door to open as
widely as allowed by wall conditions and projection of door hardware.
2.8 FINISH:
A. Generally BHMA 626 Satin Chromium

1. Areas using BHMA 626 to have push-plates, pulls and protection plates of BHMA 630,
Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted.
B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
C. Aluminum items: match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions.
B. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the
manufacturer.
C. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Use templates and fasteners provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Use sex bolts to attach panic devices to wood doors and all closers.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation
has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as specified.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710-8
CATALOG
CUT SHEETS
HANGING
DEVICES
LOCKSETS
Small Format Interchangeable Core Mortise Cylinders
Cylinder Only Compr. Ring & Spring With Blocking Ring
Cylinders for Schlage L-Series Mortise Locks

Core Mechanism
Everest 29 Keyed Disposable Housing
Design Function Restricted Construction Construction Less Core
(GD Suffix) (HD Suffix) (BDC Suffix) (BD Suffix)
L583-255
L&N All Except Cam for All Functions
80-308 80-138 80-115 80-108
Escutcheons L9060 Outside Except L9060 Outside
(cylinders with
compression ring
and spring) L9060P Outside 80-304 80.134 80.134 80-104
Sectional Trim All* Except 80-301 80-131 80-131 80.101

(cylinder with L9060 Outside
compression ring, K510-680
spring and 1/4” 80-304 + 80-134 80-134 80-104 Cam for
blocking ring). L9060 Outside L9060 Outside
36-082-050 36-082-050 36-082-050 36-082-050
Notes 1. Available 605, 606, 612, 613, 619, 625, and 626 finish. Cores furnished 606 and 626 only.
2. All cylinders are 13/8˝ long.
Mortise Cylinders with Straight Cam for Exit Devices

Number Core Type
80-302 Everest 29 restricted core
80-110 Disposable constr. core
80-132 Keyed constr. core
K510-730
80-102 Housing less core Straight Cam,
Other Applications
Furnished with compression ring, spring and 1/4” blocking ring.
Notes 1. Available 605, 606, 612, 613, 629, 625, and 626 finish. Cores furnished 606 and 626 only.
2. All cylinders are 13/8˝ long.
20
Cams for Schlage Mortise Cylinders in Other Manufacturers’ Mortise Locks
Modular Cylinder Modular Cylinder Classic Everest 29 &
Interchangeable Core
Conventional Non-IC Primus Non-IC
Cyl. length Cyl. length 20-001 20-061, 20-771, 20-001
1 1/8”, 1 3/8”, 1 5/8” 1 1/4”, 1 1/2”, 1 3/4” 26-094, 80-102, 80-110, Everest 29 Conventional
80-132, 80-302 20-500 and 20-700
B520-730
B520-730 B520-731
B520-731
Primus
Corbin Russwin
Corbin DL4000
Russwin DL4000 Series
Series Corbin
CorbinRusswin
RusswinDL4000
DL4000 Series
Series
Corbin Russwin® ForFor housing
housing B520-730
sizes:
sizes: 1¹⁄₈,1¹⁄₈,
1³⁄₈,1³⁄₈, 1⁵⁄₈"
1⁵⁄₈" ForFor B520-731
housing
housing sizes:
sizes: 1¹⁄₄,
1¹⁄₄, 1¹⁄₂,
1¹⁄₂, 1³⁄₄"
1³⁄₄" B520-295 B520-254 B520-366
DL4000 Series (was XB11-426) (was XB11-656)
(Old Corbin 420 X X XX X
and Y Y YY Y
Russwin 1503)
Dim.
X = .155
Dim.
Dim. X=X .153
= .153 Dim.
Dim. X X= =.153
.153 Y = .775
Y=Y .761
= .761 Y Y= =.761
.761
B520-732
B520-732 B520-733
B520-733
Corbin Russwin® Corbin
Corbin
For housing
For
B520-732
Russwin
RusswinML2200
sizes:
housing
ML2200
1¹⁄₈,
sizes:
Series
1³⁄₈,
1¹⁄₈,
Series
1⁵⁄₈"
1³⁄₈, 1⁵⁄₈"
Corbin
For
B520-733
Russwin
Corbin Russwin
housing
For
ML2200
sizes:
housing
ML2200
1¹⁄₄,
sizes:
Series
1¹⁄₂,
1¹⁄₄,
Series
1³⁄₄"
1¹⁄₂, 1³⁄₄"
B520-233 B520-253 B520-309
ML2200 Series (was XB08-899) (was XB11-352) (was XB11-629)
(Old Corbin
7000-9000 and YY
XX
YY
XX
Y
X
Russwin 4000-5000)
All functions except
ML2255 and Dim.
ML2242 inside Dim.
Dim.X X= =.236
.236 Dim.
Dim.X X= =.236
.236 X = .232
(see straight cam) Y Y= =.731 Y = .729
B520-734 .731 B520-735 Y Y= =.731
.731
B520-734 B520-735
Corbin Russwin A65, Corbin Russwin A65,
Corbin Russwin A65, Corbin Russwin A65,
ML2200 master ring ML2200 master ring
Corbin Russwin A65 B520-734
ML2200 master ring
For housing sizes: 1¹⁄₈, 1³⁄₈, 1⁵⁄₈"
For housing sizes: 1¹⁄₈, 1³⁄₈, 1⁵⁄₈"
B520-735
ML2200 master ring
For housing sizes: 1¹⁄₄, 1¹⁄₂, 1³⁄₄"
For housing sizes: 1¹⁄₄, 1¹⁄₂, 1³⁄₄"
B520-223 B520-360 B520-367
ML2200 master ring (was XB03-142) (was XB11-817) (was XB11-887)
deadbolt functions X
X
X
X X
manufactured before Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
6/10/93 and
old Russwin cast iron
residential locks. Dim.
For all Best 40H Series Dim.
Dim.XX==.242
.242 Dim.
Dim.XX==.242
.242 X = .235
YY==.757 YY==.757 Y = .729
& 30H Deadbolt function B520-736
.757
B520-737
.757
B520-736 B520-737
YaleYale 2160,
2160, Arrow
Arrow 004,004, YaleYale 2160,
2160, Arrow
Arrow 004,004,
Yale® Sargent
Sargent B520-736
13-0660
13-0660
For housing sizes: 1¹⁄₈,1¹⁄₈,
For housing sizes: 1³⁄₈,1³⁄₈,
1⁵⁄₈"1⁵⁄₈"
B520-737
Sargent
Sargent 13-0660
13-0660
For housing sizes: 1¹⁄₄,1¹⁄₄,
For housing sizes: 1¹⁄₂,1¹⁄₂,
1³⁄₄"1³⁄₄"
B520-256 B520-296 B520-329
2160 (was XB11-430, (was XB11-461, (was XB11-631,
X X X X
replaces XB10-659) replaces XB11-484) replaces XB11-630)
Arrow ® Y Y Y Y
#004 X
Y
Sargent ®
13-0660
All functions Dim.
Dim. X =X.187
= .187 Dim.
Dim. X =X.187
= .187
except 16 inside Y =Y.727
= .727 Y =Y.727
= .727 Dim.
X = .186
and 50 outside Y = .718
SchlageL9060
L9060Outside
Outsideand
andOther
OtherStraight
StraightCam
CamApplications
Applications
Best Schlage
L583-476 L583-477 B502-191 K510-730 B502-948
30 L583-477
L583-477 L583-476
L583-476 Classic Conventional Everest 29 & Primus
Latch Function X
X X
XX XX Y Y Y
YY YY
Dim.XX==.35
Dim. .35 Dim.XX==.35
.35 Dim.
Dim. Dim.
Dim. X = .338
YY==.72
.72 YY==.72
.72 X = .338
X = .338 Y = .71
Y = .71 Y = .71
The following complete cylinders are available. Specify the desired cam from the correct column above:
Cylinder Mechanism Collar How to Order
Conventional cylinder compression ring and spring 20-001 x cam number
Primus XP cylinder compression ring and spring 20-700 x cam number
Primus XP UL437 Listed cylinder compression ring and spring 20-500 x cam number
Full size IC with conventional core compression ring, spring, 3/8” blocking ring 20-061 x cam number
Full size IC with Primus XP core compression ring, spring, 3/8” blocking ring 20-771 x cam number
Full size IC housing less core compression ring, spring, 3/8” blocking ring 26-094 x cam number
SFIC with Everest 29 core compression ring, spring, 1/4” blocking ring 80-302 x cam number
SFIC with keyed construction core compression ring, spring, 1/4” blocking ring 80-132 x cam number
SFIC with disposable construction core compression ring, spring, 1/4” blocking ring 80-110 x cam number
SFIC housing less core compression ring, spring, 1/4” blocking ring 80-102 x cam number
22
Other manufacturers’ registered trade names are for identification and reference only.
L SERIES
L9000-Series Cutaway View
Deeper cylinder retainer groove

in cylinder shell increases security
against wrenching and pullout. Stopworks operates
All cylinders backward compatible. by thumbturn.
High strength steel alloy

cylinder retainer
Armor front 6-Pin Everest Cylinder with

Brass, bronze or patented keys standard
stainless steel
Adjustable for door bevel
1” (25mm) throw Steel case and parts

deadbolt corrosion protected
Stainless steel
Captured cylinder
set screw for easier Trim applied by threaded bushing
cylinder mounting No exposed screws
Non-handed
auxiliary latch
Full 3/4” (19mm)

latchbolt
Standard
Heavy duty
anti-friction tongue
Standard
Fusible link built into lockcase
Standard Door Preparation
2-3/4"
1-1/4" 70 mm
32 mm
6-1/4 "
159 mm
3-7/8"
98 mm
8"
203 mm
1"
25 mm
4-1/2"
114 mm
2
PDF created by Specworks®
L SERIES
Specifications Certifications
Handing: ANSI:
L9000-Series lock bodies are field reversible without disassembly. L9000: ANSI A156.13 Series 1000,
L400-Series locks are non-handed. Grade 1 Operational and Security, UL Listed for 3-hour
fire door (except L9076 and L9077).
Door Thickness: With interchangeable core cylinders: Grade 2 Security.
1³⁄₄˝ (44mm) standard. 1³⁄8˝ (35mm) to 2¹⁄2˝(64mm) optional. With Concealed Shell Cylinder: A156.13 Grade 1 Operational
Over 2¹⁄2˝ (64mm) door ranges vary by function. N escutcheon and Security. ANSI/ASTM F476-76 Grade 40, UL Listed.
available for 1³⁄₄˝ (44mm) doors standard. 2˝ (51mm) to 2³⁄8˝ L400: ANSI A156.5 Grade 1
(60mm) optional. Specify door thickness if other than
1³⁄₄˝. California State Reference Code:
(Formerly Title 19, California State Fire Marshal Standard)
Backset:
2³⁄₄˝ (70mm) only. All levers with returns comply; levers return to within ½˝ of
door face.
Armored Front:
L9000-Series: 1¹⁄₄˝ x 8˝ x ⁷⁄₃₂˝ (32mm x 203mm x 6mm) UL / cUL:
standard. 1¹⁄₁₆˝ x 8˝ x ⁷⁄₃₂˝ (27mm x 203mm x 6mm) optional. All locks listed for A label single doors, 4´ x10´.
L400-Series: 1¹⁄₄˝ x 5 19/₃₂˝ (32mm x 142mm). Letter F and UL symbol on latch front indicate listing.
Electrified functions are UL19X Listed for single point locking
Case Size: applications.
L9000-Series: 4⁷⁄₁₆˝ x 6¹⁄₁₆˝ x 1˝ (113mm x 154mm x 25mm). UL437 Listed locking cylinder optional: specify Primus 20-500
L400-Series: 4⁷⁄₁₆˝ x 3⅝˝ x 1˝ (113mm x 92mm x 25mm). Series cylinder.
Spacing:
Knob or lever to cylinder, 3⁷⁄₈˝ (98mm); knob or lever to
thumbturn hub, 2¹¹⁄₁₆˝ (68mm).
Bolts:
1˝ (25mm) throw stainless steel deadbolt and ³⁄₄˝ (19mm) throw
stainless steel latch with anti-friction tongue
Exposed Trim:
Knobs: #41 and #42 heavy duty wrought brass, bronze or stainless
steel knobs match D-Series knobs.
Levers: Forged brass or bronze and cast stainless steel. Designs
available to match D-Series levers.
93 Lever Design: Extruded brass, bronze or stainless steel.
Mediterranean Designs: Forged brass lever and rose.
Escutcheons: L escutcheons are cold forged brass or bronze and
stainless steel. N escutcheons are heavy wrought reinforced brass,
bronze and stainless steel.
Trim Combinations: Available with knob both sides, lever both
sides, or knob x lever with rose or escutcheon both sides.
Strike:
L9000-Series: ANSI curved lip strike 1¼˝ x 4⅞˝ (32mm x
124mm) x 1³⁄₁₆˝ (30mm) lip to center with dust box standard.
L400-Series: 1⅛˝ x 3⅝˝ (29mm x 92mm) with dust box.
Cylinder & Keys:
6-pin Everest® C123 keyway cylinder with two patented keys
standard.
Keying Options:
Interchangeable core and Primus® high security cylinders.
Master keying, grand master keying and construction keying.
1
L SERIES
L-SERIES VANDLGARD WITH

™
Schlage L-Series keyed lever locks with Vandlgard provide vandal resistant technology. Designed
for maximum accessibility, security and durability, Vandlgard sets the standard for door
hardware in educational facilities and other applications subject to heavy traffic or abuse.
The unique features of Vandlgard prevent damage to internal lock components caused by
excessive force from persons kicking, hitting or standing on the lever to gain access. Vandlgard
functions maintain total key system and architectural design compatibility with Schlage’s
regular L-Series cylindrical locks.
Levers have virtually replaced knobs in the marketplace for handicap accessibility. The added
grip and leverage has created an increased opportunity for abuse or vandalism. This abuse Locked lever freely rotates
up and down while remaining
often renders locks inoperable. In some cases the security of the door is violated leaving computer securely locked. The Vandlgard
and laboratory equipment susceptible to theft. While this type of abuse is commonly associated function also increases resistance
to over-rotation of the lever.
with junior and senior high schools, it also occurs in universities, office buildings, commercial
buildings, and public buildings.
Benefits & Features

Superb warranty.
All Vandlgard functions have a 7-year warranty.
Reduce lever wobble and play.
Integrated spindle and spring cage greatly
reduces lever sag and wobble.
Resists vandalism.
Free-wheeling lever eliminates the ability
to stand or exert excessive force on the
end of the lever.
Ease of installation.
Installs in under 2 minutes.
L-Series Vandlgard levers comply with ADA requirements.
8
L SERIES
Functions • L
Functions
Features
Deadbolt
Stopworks functions
Auxiliary By turn piece
guarded latch
Latchbolt
With anti-friction
tongue
Product Identification Symbols
L 9 4 53 P Cylinder Solid spindle
Cylinder Suffix Outside knob or lever Two piece spindle

P = 6-Pin Full Face Mortise
Cylinder with Schlage Logo* Inside knob or lever Emergency turn piece
L = Less Full Face Cylinder
C = Concealed Mortise Cylinder
W = Less Concealed Cylinder Thumbturn DO NOT DISTURB Occupancy indicator
R = Full Size Interchangeable
Core with Schlage Logo Thumbturn Cylinder
J = Less Full Size
Interchangeable Core Coin turn
F = Full Size Interchangeable
Core Less Schlage Logo
T = Full Size Construction Core
BD = SFIC Less Core
BDC = Disposable SFIC
GD = Everest® Patented SFIC
HD = Construction SFIC
Function
0= No Deadbolt
1= Dummy Trim
4= With Deadbolt
- = Small Case Deadlock
0 = Dummy Trim without Lock Case
9= Functions with Lock Case
Lock Series
* To order less Schlage logo specify lock “with K510-612 faceplate”.
SFIC = Small Format (Best® Style) Interchangeable Core
9
EXIT
DEVICES
T
Auxiliary Hardware and General Information
REMOVABLE MULLIONS SIX STEEL MULLIONS

Door
Mullions provide single Electric and Monitor Strikes
door performance in Includes an electric cable
double door openings with for transferring power from
rim devices. Mullions are frame to strikes. The cable
Strike
easily removed by Mullion Device has five wires to a twist-
loosening bottom set Top Fitting
apart plug that is connected
screw and removing top Fitting
Cover Set Screw to a mating socket through
fitting cover. Hex Wrench
a hole in the top fitting.
(Furnished)
The top mullion fitting is 1/ 49
(6mm) For use with all Von Duprin
20 Flat Head
attached to the frame and Strike Machine Screws panic exit rim devices.
Furnished
is concealed by the fitting with 4754 — Prepared for two
Device
cover. Fittings shown 4263 monitor strikes.
for 4754, 4854
Mullions are shipped presized, with mounting screws and 4954 4854/9854 — Using one electric strike
and prepared for strikes. 3/ 89

(10mm)
16 Bolts
Strikes are not included except where indicated. Bottom Fitting
To order, specify: Anchors

Hex Wrench
(Furnished)
4854 — Prepared for one
1. Model number. 299 and one 6111 electric
2. Height of opening. strike. Indicate handing for
3. Finish. 9854/9954 Fitting
(used top and bottom)
electric strike.
4. Handing as required. 4854/9854 — Using one electric strike
6111
5. Center line deviation (refer to device template for 299 strike Electric
standard centerline). strike
6. Strikes, when required, should be ordered with RHR door shown active
device. LHR door shown inactive
Standard Doors
Stock Hollow Metal Applications 4954 — Prepared for two 264 or 299 strikes. For use
with all Von Duprin panic rim devices. Note: specify
Devices mounted to cover ANSI 161 cutouts are strike choice with device.
higher than the standard mullion strike location.
Consult the factory for special strike preparation or 9854 — Prepared for one 499-F and one 6111
order a blank mullion. electric strike. Indicate handing for electric strike UL
fire label mullion for 90 minute openings up to 88288
Blank Mullions (2438mm22438mm). This mullion is not easily
removed due to special fittings.
Furnished without strike preparation and without
fittings or stabilizers. Used to mount devices at a Fire Doors
strike height different from the standard mullion 9954 — UL fire label mullion for up to 3 hour openings
preparation. Note: 9954 blank mullion is furnished up to 88288 (2438mm22438mm) using Von Duprin
less UL label. fire exit rim devices. Must be used with two 268 (for
88-F) or two 499F (for 22-F, 98-F, 99-F) strikes. This
mullion is not easily removed due to special fittings.
1654 — Prepared for two 1606 strikes.
Sizes — 4754, 4854, 4954, 1654 — 7829 (2184mm),
8829 (2489mm), 10829 (3099mm). 9854/9954 — 7839
(2209mm), 88(2438mm), 10839 (3124mm) (no UL
label on 108 (3048mm).
Finishes
SP28 (sprayed aluminum), SP313 (sprayed dark
bronze) or sprayed black.
10
98/99™ Rim Exit Device
98 and 99 rim exit devices for all types of single and double doors with mullion, UL listed for Panic Exit
Hardware. Devices are ANSI A156.3 – 2001 Grade 1. The 98 device has a smooth mechanism case and the
99 device has a grooved case. The rim device is non-handed except when the following device options are
used: SD (Special Dogging), -2 (Double Cylinder) or SS (Signal Switch). See Opposite page for available
299 Strike outside trim and device functions. Covers stock hollow metal doors with 86 or 161 cutouts on single doors
(may cover cutouts on pairs – consult template).
The 98/99 devices are available in the following finishes: US3, US4, US10, US26, US26D, US28, 313AN,
315AN and US32D for the 98 device only. See page 52 for component finishes and the inside cover for
finish chips.
Specifications
Device Functions Device ships EO/DT/NL. Field selectable. For TP,K,or L remove NL
drive screw from device
Device Lengths 3’ 2’4" to 3’ (711mm to 914 mm) Door Size
4’ 2’10" to 4’ (864 mm to 1219 mm) Door Size
Strikes 299 – Dull Black
Optional Strikes – see page 39
Dogging Feature Hex key dogging standard
Dogging Options CD Cylinder Dogging see page 48
SD Special Center Case Dogging see page 48
LD Less Dogging see page 48
Electric Options LX Latchbolt Monitor Switch see page 42
RX Pushpad Monitor Switch see page 42
RX2 Double Pushpad Monitor Switch see page 42
E Electric Locking & Unlocking see page 44
EL Electric Latch Retraction see page 43
SS Signal Switch see page 43
CX Chexit Delayed Exit see page 45
ALK Alarm Exit Kit see page 42
Miscellaneous Options PN Pneumatic Latch Retraction see page 48
-2 Double Cylinder see page 48
GBK Glass Bead Kit see page 49
Fasteners & Includes 1 ³₄" (19mm) – 2 ¹₄" (57mm) Wood & Metal Doors
Sex Bolts (SNB) Optional SNB available for device, see next page for quantities
Latch Bolt Deadlocking, ³₄" (19mm) throw
Device Centerline from 39 ¹³₁₆" (1011 mm)
Finished Floor 39 ¹¹₁₆" (1008 mm) with Mullion
Center Case Dimensions 8" x 2 ³₄" x 2 ³₈" (203mm x 70mm x 60mm)
Mechanism Case Dimensions 2 ¹₄" x 2 ¹₄" (57mm x 57mm)
Projection Pushbar Neutral – 3 ¹³₁₆" (97 mm)
Pushbar Depressed – 3 ¹₁₆" (78 mm)
See page 53 for How to Order specification
4 © 2004 Ingersoll-Rand. May be copied for use with specification submittal.

XP98/99™ Rim Exit Device
Introduction
Balancing security and safety has always been a challenge with any panic exit device design. With the new
XP98/99 Rim exit device, Von Duprin has engineered a device that reaches a new standard for security while
enhancing the safety performance features. The new patented center case design takes the proven reliability
of the 98/99 series and adds a new latch bolt concept that delivers the industry’s highest lever of latching
security.
Additionally, upgrading for current 98/99 owners will be made easy and affordable. The new device will match
the existing 98/99 device footprint, eliminating costly door prep changes. A new retrofit kit will allow
conversion of existing 99 devices into the new XP99 function, making higher security an affordable function.
For over 100 years Von Duprin has set the standard for innovation and quality in the world of exit devices.
The XP98/99 Rim device is another page in this long honored story of excellence.
XP99 Series features grooved mechanism case.
XP98 Series features smooth mechanism case.
Von Duprin push pad exit devices are available in two external surface styles, designated XP98 Series and XP99 Series.
The two styles are mechanically and dimensionally identical and provide a wide selection of appearance options.
Latch Bolt
New latchbolt design provides the industry’s most secure device.
Retro-fit kits available for 98/99 device conversions.
The Quiet One®

A fluid dampener decelerates the pushpad on its return stroke and eliminates most noise associated with exit device
operations. Furnished on all XP98/99™ series exit devices.

XP98/99™ Rim Exit Device
XP98 and XP99 rim exit devices for all types of single and double doors with mullion, UL listed for accident
hazard installations. Covers stock hollow metal doors with 86 or 161 cutouts.
XP98-F and XP99-F fire exit rim devices for all types of 4´ x 10´ (1219mm x 2438mm) single doors or
8´ x 10´ (2438mm x 2438mm) double doors with 9954 mullion, UL listed A, B, C, D, or E fire labeled
installations.
909 Strike
Specifications
Device Functions Device ships EO/DT/NL. Field selectable. For TP,K,or L remove NL
drive screw from device
Device Lengths 3´ 2´4˝ to 3´ (711mm to 914 mm) Door Size
4´ 2´10˝ to 4´ (864 mm to 1219 mm) Door Size
954 Strike Strikes 909 – Panic and Fire Single Door
With 9854/9954 954 — Mullion Fire
Mullion Dogging Feature Hex key dogging standard
Dogging Options CD Cylinder Dogging
SD Special Center Case Dogging
LD Less Dogging
Electric Options RX Pushpad Monitor Switch*
(Consult factory) RX2 Double Pushpad Monitor Switch*
E Electric Locking & Unlocking
ALK Alarm Exit Kit*
Miscellaneous Options -2 Double Cylinder*
GBK Glass Bead Kit
Fasteners & Includes 1 ³₄˝ (19mm) – 2 ¹₄˝ (57mm) Wood & Metal Doors
Sex Bolts (SNB) Optional SNB available for device, see next page for quantities
Latch Bolt Deadlocking, ³₄˝ (19mm) throw
Device Centerline from 39 ¹³₁₆˝ (1011 mm)
Finished Floor 39 ¹¹₁₆˝ (1008 mm) with Mullion
Center Case Dimensions 8˝ x 2 ³₄˝ x 2 ³₈˝ (203mm x 70mm x 60mm)
Mechanism Case Dimensions 2 ¹₄˝ x 2 ¹₄˝ (57mm x 57mm)
Projection Pushbar Neutral – 3 ¹³₁₆˝ (97 mm)
Pushbar Depressed – 3 ¹₁₆˝ (78 mm)
See full-line product catalog for “How to Order” specification.
* Available Q3, 2006
© 2005 Ingersoll Rand. May be copied for use with specification submittal.
98/99™ Rim Exit Device Standard Trim
Exit only Dummy Trim Night Latch Night Latch
Pull when Dogged Key Retracts Latchbolt Key Retracts Latchbolt
Optional Pull Required
Product Description 98EO 98DT 98NL 98NL-OP

99EO 99DT 99NL 99NL-OP
110NL-MD
Trim Description –– 990DT 990NL-R/V
110NL-WD
3" x 14³₁₆" x ³₃₂" 3" x 14³₁₆" x ³₃₂"
Escutcheon Plate Size –– ––
(76x360x2mm) (76x360x2mm)
Pull Center to Center –– 5¹₂" (140mm) 5¹₂" (140mm) ––
Projection –– 2" (51mm) 2" (51mm) ––
ANSI Function 01 02 03 03
Cylinder Type –– –– Rim Rim
Optional Trim x990EO x991K-DT x991K-NL

(See pages 32 – 34) x992EO x992L-DT x992L-NL
x994EO x994L-DT x994L-NL
x996EO x996L-DT x996L-NL
x696DT x696NL
x697DT x697NL
Optional #425 Sex Bolt 6 2 2 6
Quantity for Device
Lever Lever – Night Latch Lever – Blank Escutcheon Lever Dummy Trim
Key Locks & Unlocks Key Retracts Latchbolt Always operable Pull when Dogged
(No Cylinder)
Product Description 98L 98L-NL 98L-BE 98L-DT

99L 99L-NL 99L-BE 99L-DT
Trim Description 996L-R/V 996L-NL-R/V 996L-BE-R/V 996L-DT-R/V
2³₄" x 10³₄" x ²⁷₃₂" 2³₄" x 10³₄" x ²⁷₃₂" 2³₄" x 10³₄" x ²⁷₃₂" 2³₄" x 10³₄" x ²⁷₃₂"
Escutcheon Plate Size
(70x273x21mm) (70x273x21mm) (70x273x21mm) (70x273x21mm)
Pull Center to Center –– –– –– ––
Projection 2⁷₈" (73mm) 2⁷₈" (73mm) 2⁷₈" (73mm) 2⁷₈" (73mm)
ANSI Function 08 09 –– 02
Cylinder Type Rim Rim –– ––
Optional Trim x992L x992L-NL x992L-BE x992L-DT

(See pages 32 – 34) x994L x994L-NL x994L-BE x994L-DT
Optional #425 Sex Bolt

2 2 2 2
Quantity for Device
5
For optional trims and functions see pages 32-34
98/99™ Options
Pneumatic Controlled Exit Devices–PN Less Dogging – LD

Less Dogging is available in all 98/99™ Panic Exit devices to remove the
dogging option.
To Order, Specify:
• Use prefix LD, example LD99L
The PN feature provides remote latch bolt retraction in hazardous areas
where electrically operated devices would not be permitted. The
Special Center Case Dogging – SD
pneumatic solenoid will retract the latch bolt for momentary or
prolonged periods. PN exit devices are particularly suited for use with
automatic door operators. The PN feature is available on both Panic and
Fire Exit Hardware devices.
The PN feature includes a special actuating linkage that gives building Special cylinder dogging in the center case is available for Chexit, EL, ALK
owners the option of mechanically or pneumatically dogging the exit panic devices to allow for mechanical push/pull operation. With this option,
the latchbolt is held retracted and pushbar is still operable. Specify
device. If manual hex-key dogging is required, specify HD-PN (Dogging
handing –– RHR or LHR.
the device, whether mechanically or pneumatically, makes the device
function as a push/pull unit and reduces the wear on its moving parts.) SD requires 1 ¹₄" (32mm) mortise cylinder with a straight cam. (Schlage
If cylinder dogging is required, the standard cylinder dogging is not cam reference B502-191.)
available, but special center case dogging is available, specify SD-PN. Note: Available on Rim and Vertical Rod Panic Exit Devices only.
SD-PN is not available on the 9875 or 9975 devices.
To Order, Specify:
When activated pneumatically, the latch bolt(s) of the exit device retract
in ¹₂ to 1 ¹₂ seconds. This pneumatic operation uses air pressure • Use prefix SD, example SD99L
ranging from 50 to 100 pounds per square inch.
Cylinder Dogging — CD
This product will function only when it is part of a pneumatic system Cylinder dogging is available on all 98/99™ Panic Exit
(air compressor, air lines, pneumatic system, etc.). Contact LCN for devices to replace the standard hex key dogging. Unit
requires a standard 1¹₄" (32mm) mortise cylinder
correct control boxes
with a straight cam (Schlage Cam B502-191
reference).
To Order, Specify: To Order, Specify:
• Standard –– Use prefix PN, example PN99NL
• Use prefix, CD, example CD99L
• Hex Key Dogging –– Use prefix HD-PN, example HD-PN99NL
• Special Center Case Dogging –– Use prefix SD-PN, Cylinder Dogging Kit — CDK
example SD-PN99NL For field conversion, a cylinder dogging conversion kit is available.
Cannot be added to fire exit hardware.
Double Cylinder – 2 Order: 33A/99CDK or 35A/98CDK, specify finish.
Hex Key Dogging Kit — HDK

For field conversion, a hex key dogging conversion kit is available.
Cannot be added to fire exit hardware.
Order: 33A/99HDK or 35A/98HDK, specify finish.
Double cylinder features an inside key cylinder which locks or unlocks

the outside trim and an outside key cylinder which retracts the latch bolt
Braille, Embossed and Knurled Touchpads
only(Night Latch Function) . Available on rim or mortise lock device.
Rim requires two rim type cylinders. Mortise device requires 1 rim
cylinder and 1 mortise cylinder wit a straight cam. (Schlage cam
reference B502-191.)
Braille touchpad is embossed with the message “CAUTION
Available functions are thumbpiece, knob or lever. STAIRWELL” in braille and raised letters provides assistance to person
with impaired vision. Letters are ¹₂" (13mm) high and braille is #2,
To Order, Specify: raised height is ³₃₂" (2mm). Other messages are available on special
order, limited to 20 characters per line.
1. Suffix-2 with device/trim number, example 99TP-2.
Embossed touchpad is embossed with the word “PUSH”
2. Handing required, LHR or RHR. Knurled touchpad is to provide warning to person with impaired vision.
48 © 2004 Ingersoll-Rand. May be copied for use with specification submittal.

98/99™ Additional Information
Nomenclature – How To Order

EL 99 27 -L -16 -F LBR 3’ US3 RHR
SD –– Special Dogging - Panic Only
CD — Cylinder Dogging - Panic Only
CX –– Chexit
E –– Electric Locking (Rim or Mortise)
EL — Electric Latch Retraction
LX — Latch Bolt Monitoring
PL — Pullman Latch
PN –– Pneumatic Latch Retraction
RX — Request to Exit
RX2 –– Double Request to Exit
SS –– Signal Switch
98 — Series 98-smooth
99 — Series 99-grooved
None — Rim Device

27 — Surface Mounted Vertical Rod Device
47 — Concealed Vertical Rod Device
47WDC –– Concealed Vertical Rod Wood Door Device
48 — Concealed Vertical Rod Device
57 –– Three Point Latch Device
75 –– Mortise Lock Device
DT — Dummy Trim
EO — Exit Only
K –– Knob (Classroom)
K-BE –– Knob-Blank Escutcheoon
K-DT –– Knob-Dummy Trim
K-NL –– Rigid Knob - NightLatch (Key retracts Latchbolt)
L — Lever (Classroom)
L-BE –– Lever-Blank Escutcheon
L-DT –– Lever-Dummy Trim
L-NL –– Rigid Lever - Night Latch (Key retracts Latchbolt)
NL –– Night Latch (Key retracts Latchbolt)
NL-OP — Night Latch Cylinder Assembly –– Optional Pull
TL — Turn Lever
TL-BE –– Turn Lever-Blank Escutcheon
TP –– Thumbpiece
TP-BE –– Thumbpiece-Blank Escutcheon
XX –– Lever Style 06 standard

optional –– 01, 02, 03, 05, 07, 12, 16, 17, 18
F — Fire Exit Device
LBR — Less Bottom Rod

2 –– Double Cylinder (Rim & Mortise Only)
ALK –– Standard Alarm Kit
ALK-EI –– External Inhibit Alarm Kit
ALK-AR1 –– Auto-Reset 1¹₂ minute Alarm Kit
ALK-AR3 –– Auto-Reset 3 minute Alarm kit
ALK-AR6 –– Auto-Reset 6 minute Alarm Kit
3’ –– 3’ Device (2’ 4” –– 3’ Door Size)

4’ –– 4’ Device (2’ 10” –– 4’ Door Size)
US3, US4, US10, US26, US26D, 313AN, 315AN

US32D – 98 ONLY
– HR –– Handing – RHR or LHR
53
Data sheet - QEL
Quiet Electric Latch Retraction - QEL
About the product System Components / Compatible Products

The QEL option provides electronic control of an exit QEL is an option for 98/99 series (including XP),
device and is ideally suited for environments where limited 94/95 Series and 33A/35A Series devices.
operational noise is desired. The QEL option allows for the The PS 900 Series with the 900-2RS option card is the
electronic unlatching of exit devices for continuous push-pull minimum option card requirement. Other option cards
operation and/or access control and can be activated through are available for various functions.
a building automation system, access control system or by a
control system operator.
QEL Electrical Load
The device always provides mechanical egress but can also
be tied to an access system to unlatch when a credential is Voltage 24 VDC
presented or may be held unlatched (dogged) for extended Current 1.4 A Inrush (0.5 sec.)
periods to provide free entry. If manual dogging is also 0.14 A Holding
required, special center case dogging is available for 98/99 rim 2.0 A Calibrate (3 sec. one time)
and vertical systems, specify SD-QEL.
QEL devices are also useful with automatic door operators,
and may be applied to fire-rated applications when under the QEL Run Lengths
control of an automatic fire alarm system. Distance (one-way) Wire Gauge
200’ 18 AWG
Features and Benefits
• Quiet operation both mechanically and electrically 320’ 16 AWG
• On-board installation and troubleshooting diagnostics 500’ 14 AWG

built into device 800’ 12 AWG
• Automatic calibration – automatically adjusts
latch throw and pull The QEL option does not include the power transfer from door
• Pushbar is pulled in electronically for quiter operation to frame, the power supply, or the control operator. Refer to
when dogged Von Duprin catalog for information on EPT-2/10 power transfer
• Vandal resistant – detects and responds to vandals and the 900 Series power supplies.
Specifications Compliance To order, specify:

• Devices are BHMA Certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 (2001) • Standard –– Use prefix QEL, example QEL99L.
Grade 1 for Exit Devices • Special Center Case Dogging –– Use prefix SD-QEL,
• Devices are UL and cUL Listed as “Panic Hardware” example SD-QEL99L.
(UL 305) and as “Fire Exit Hardware” (UL 10C)
• The QEL Conversion Kit is UL Classified under
“Accessories for Single-Point Locks and Latches
and Fire Exit Hardware” (UL 10C)
©2012 Ingersoll Rand 106586 07/12

DOOR
CLOSERS
new 4040 #2.qxd 3/30/07 2:03 PM Page 1
LCN 4040 SERIES

New 4040XP
FEATURES
The new 4040XP is LCN’s most durable heavy duty
w
Ne 0XP
closer designed for the most demanding, high use
4 and abuse applications.
40
44% increased bearing load capacity
Strongest pinion ever- at 3/4” journal diameter
Widest bearing ever- at 5/8”
Stronger pinion teeth
New V-shield™ seal with 20% longer life
XP = eXtra Protection in real world applications
CLOSER MOUNTS
*HINGE (PULL) SIDE The 4041 is LCN’s most flexible
TOP JAMB (PUSH SIDE) heavy duty closer designed for
PARALLEL ARM (PUSH SIDE)
institutional and other rugged
high traffic applications.
Ten Million Cycles
Cast Iron
Forged Steel Arm
*HINGE (pull) side mount shown
Double Heat Treated Steel
Pinion
NEW 4041XP closer shipped with EDA arm, standard plastic All Weather Fluid
cover, and self reaming and tapping screws. See 4040 Series Non-Handed
pages 44 -46 for options.
LCN® Fast™ Power Adjust
Standard 4041 closer shipped with regular arm, standard plastic
cover, and self reaming and tapping screws. See 4040 Series Fast & Accurate Installation
pages 44-46 for options. UL & ULC Listed
Non-sized cylinder is adjustable for interior doors to 5’0” and exterior Tested and certified under ANSI
doors to 4’0”.
Closer mounts hinge side, top jamb, and parallel arm w/PA Shoe on Standard A156.4, grade one
either right or left swinging doors.
Closers to meet ADA requirements. See 4040 Series page 47.
Standard or optional custom powder coat finish.
Optional plated finish on cover, arm, and fasteners.
Optional SRI primer for installations in corrosive conditions.
Optional designer series metal cover
UL and ULC listed for self-closing doors without hold-open.
MOUNTING FINISH COVER CYLINDER **ARM FUNCTION
ST LEL SH)
)
AL
HO RD LE)
LE
PA MB LL)
ON
SH
NG
E
FA M
ET
DA UB
Y
ED AT
JA (PU
U
SID
TI
ED
IT
HE K
AR
US SH
(P
CU
M
LD (SI
AN (DO
AC
O
N
N
IL
ND
D
L)
CE
PL ER C
B
LI
SC HCU
CU DA
ER
SH
FU OPE
IB
TO PUL
ZE
TO AM
ST AR
C
HA
E
SS
GN
YE
H/
TI
SI
BL
AL
L
E(
-
L
**
/
J
RA
AS
SH
N-
N-
OP
CE
GU
LA
AT
W
A/
SI
NG
SI
ET
P
B
P
NO
NO
PO
PL
AC
DE
ED
AV
RE
DE
M
HI
120° 120° 180° 110° 110°
Available Closer available with less than 5.0 lbs. opening force on 36" door.
Not available **Maximum opening/hold-open point with standard template.
*** Advanced Variable Backcheck
LCN CLOSERS PHONE 800-526-2400
121 W. RAILROAD AVE. FAX 800-248-1460
39 P.O. BOX 100

PRINCETON, IL, USA 61356-0100
www.lcn.ingersollrand.com
3/07

new 4040 #2.qxd 3/30/07 2:03 PM Page 4
MOUNTING DETAILS LCN 4040 SERIES

MOUNTING
Optional mounting requires PA SHOE,
4040-62PA for REGULAR or HOLD-
OPEN arms. Add prefix "P" to closer
description (eg. P4041). P4041 closer
includes 4040-201 FIFTH HOLE
SPACER to support PA SHOE.
MAXIMUM OPENING
180° opening/hold-open points with
all except CUSH arms.
110° opening/hold-open with CUSH

arms.
Optional, Non-handed
Designer Series
Metal Cover
4040 REGULAR or HOLD-OPEN MOUNT

Butt Hinges should not exceed 5” (127 mm) in width.
Auxiliary Stop is recommended at hold-open point, where the door cannot
swing 180°, or where CUSH-N-STOP arm is not used.
Clearance for 4040-62PA shoe is 4” (102 mm) from door face.
EDA shoe projects 5 1/2” (140 mm) from door face.
CUSH shoe projects 6” (152 mm) from door face.
Options Top Rail less than 5 3/8” (137 mm) measured from the stop requires PLATE,
Delayed action cylinder. 4040-18PA. Plate requires 2” (51 mm) minimum from the stop. With Designer
Hold-open, EDA, HEDA,
Series metal cover, use PLATE, 4040-18PADS1
CUSH, HCUSH, SPRING
Head Frame flush or rabetted requires PA SHOE ADAPTER, 4040-418.
CUSH, or SPRING HCUSH arm.
Metal or lead lined cover. Stop Width minimum 1” (25 mm). CUSH arm requires
Designer Series metal cover. minimum 1 1/2” (38 mm).
Special Templates Blade Stop clearance requires 1/2" (13mm) BLADE STOP SPACER, 4040-61.
Customized installation templates Delayed Action Add suffix “DEL” to selected cylinder (eg. P4041 DEL).
or products may be available to Delays time adjustable up to approximately 1 minute.
solve unusual applications. Contact
LCN for assistance.
LCN CLOSERS PHONE 800-526-2400

121 W. RAILROAD AVE. FAX 800-248-1460
42 P.O. BOX 100

www.lcn.ingersollrand.com
3/07

LCN 1460 SERIES
NEW R ®
FEATURES
The 1460 SUPER STOCK is a fully
E
COV N! universal double lever arm, slim
O
OPTI line closer designed for use on
narrow head frames and top rails.
A wide choice of options,
mounting accessories and ease
of installation offer maximum
versatility.
UL and ULC listed for self-closing

Fast accurate installation
doors without hold-open. Tested and
New Stick-on template
1-6 sizing certified under ANSI Standard
Optional designer series metal cover A156.4, grade one.
Standard 1460 series closer shipped with regular arm (non-hold-open),

a slim line non-metallic cover, and self reaming and tapping screws. See
Page 1460-6 for options.
Non-sized (1-6) cylinder is adjustable for interior doors to 5’0” and
exterior doors to 4’0”.
Closer mounts hinge side, top jamb, and parallel arm on either right or
left swinging doors.
Closers to meet ADA requirements. See page 1460-8.
Standard or custom powder coat finish.
Optional plated finish on cover, arm and fasteners.
SRI primer for installations in corrosive conditions.
!
W
NE
MOUNTING FINISH COVER CYLINDER ARM FUNCTION*

AL
GN LLIC
CE
M
ET
TY
ED AT
N
D
NG OP
SH
AV LINK
AR
IO
M
A Y
AN
N- DE
LA ILI
SH TY
AT CO
NT Y
N
E
T
A
CE D
T
CU
T
PA MB
M ANT
TO SID
ER
FU OPE
EX DU
DE SIB
SP N-S
EL
NO AN
CU DU
DE ET
AC IZE
AV AC
EN
HO AR
R
E
LL
DE
M
JA
BL
H
Y
S
L
E
R
-
RA
N-
N-
GU
LD
NG
TR
W
AR
SI
RI
SI
B
AI
P
NO
NO
PO
HE
RE
PL
HI
180° 180° 180° 180° 110° 100° 100° 10yr NR
Available Closer available with less than 5.0 lbs. opening force on 36" door.
Not available * Maximum opening/hold-open point with standard template. Hinge side mount.
NR = No periodic maintenance required.
LCN DIVISION PHONE 815-875-3311

P.O. BOX 100 FAX 815-879-1497
9
121 W. RAILROAD AVE.
4/00
1460-1
MOUNTING DETAILS LCN 1460 SERIES
MOUNTING
Optional mounting requires PA SHOE,
1460-62PA for REGULAR or HOLD-
OPEN arms. Add prefix "P" to closer
description (e.g. P1460.) P1460 closer
includes 1460-201 FIFTH HOLE
SPACER to support PA SHOE.
MAXIMUM OPENING
Regular or hold-open arm can be
templated for 180°.
A = 1 1/8” (29 mm)
B = 6 1/2” (165 mm)
Hold-open points up to maximum

opening with hold-open arm.
1460 - 18PA
1460 REGULAR or HOLD-OPEN MOUNT

Butt Hinges should not exceed 5” (127 mm) in width.
Auxiliary Stop is recommended at hold-open point, where a door
®
cannot swing 180°, or where CUSH-N-STOP arm is not used.
Options Clearance for 1460-62PA shoe is 4” (102 mm) from door face.
Delay action cylinder.
Top Rail less than 4 1/4” (108 mm) measured from the stop requires
Hold-open, EDA, H-EDA, PLATE, 1460-18PA.
CUSH, or H-CUSH arm, Fusible With full cover, use PLATE, 1460-18PAFC.
link arm, Spring-Cush, HS-Cush. Plate requires 1 3/4” (44 mm) minimum.
Full cover. Head Frame flush or single rabetted requires PA SHOE ADAPTER,
EC cover. 1460-418.
Designer series metal cover.
Stop Width minimum 1” (25 mm).
Metal cover.
Blade Stop clearance, requires 1/2” (13 mm) BLADE STOP SPACER,
Special Templates 1460-61.
Customized installation templates
or products may be available to Auxiliary Shoe, 1460-62A allows installation of regular arm with Glynn-
solve unusual applications. Johnson overhead holder/stop. Special templating required.
Contact LCN for assistance. Delay Action Add suffix “DA” to selected cylinder (eg. P1460 DA).
Delays closing from maximum opening to approximately 75°.
Delay time adjustable up to 1 minute.
LCN DIVISION PHONE 815-875-3311

P.O. BOX 100 FAX 815-879-1497
1460-4
121 W. RAILROAD AVE.
PRINCETON, IL USA 61356-0100
4/00
12
281 Series Powerglide®
Cast Iron Door Closer
Copyright © SARGENT Manufacturing Company 2005-2007, 2009-2014, All rights reserved.

Reproduction in whole or in part without the express written permission of Sargent Manufacturing Company is prohibited.
General Information
All Weather Fluid Closer Spring Adjustment (not shown)

All 281 Series closers are equipped with fluid
Door Closer Cycle • Effects the entire cycle of the door
that allows the units to operate effectively in closer movement
extreme temperatures without readjustment. • Used to size closer for application
requirements
• Determines the amount of force with which the
Finishes door closes and the amount of force required to
open the door
Powder coated and plated finishes are
• Adjustable to compensate for door size and
available. See How to Order page 16.
draft conditions
Backcheck Valve
Opening
ANSI/BHMA Specifications • At approximately 70° of the open cycle, the
Cycle backcheck valve begins to slow the door’s
• The 281 Series door closers are certified to motion
the ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 requirements • Prevents the door from slamming into
• Complies with UL-10C and UBC 7-2C (1997) the door’s stop
Positive Pressure Fire Test • Valve is used to control the intensity of the
backcheck
• Note: A Positive stop is required, Backcheck
cannot be used as a stop
Delayed Action Valve (Optional)

• Holds the door in the open position
momentarily
• 20 second minimum hold open delay
• The feature is available for all applications
and arms
• Beneficial for ADA applications and
when moving carts or objects thru door
opening
Closing Speed Valve
90119:L 02/03/14 Copyright © 2005-2007, 2009-2014, Sargent Manufacturing Company, an ASSA ABLOY Group company. All rights reserved.
• Controls how fast the door closes to
approximately 8" from the closed position
Latching Speed Valve

• Controls the speed of the door during the
final 8" of door swing
• The force the door closes with is controlled
by the closer spring
• Note: This adjustment is critical for
door latching
How to Select the Proper Closer
Things to Consider 4. Degree of Opening ANSI Standards
Proper arm and position on the door is
1. Size and Weight of Door ARM TYPE ARM TYPE
most important to permit the door to open
The 281 Door Closer is non-sized so that O CO2011 PF9 CO2101
far enough to allow adequate traffic flow.
closing force can be adjusted in the field
to accommodate various door sizes and P9 CO2021 P10 CO2021
5. Function
weights. Closers are available with hold-open, H CO2051 PS/CPS CO2021
positive stop or fusible link hold-open arms. PH9 CO2061 CPSH/PSH CO2061
2. Interior Application
The standard application is the most F CO2091
6. Special Condition
efficient in terms of power and control. Consult factory when special hinges, All are certified ANSI types including options
overhead holders or other specialized PT4 A, B, D, E, F, G, H
3. Exterior Application
hardware is used.
The top jamb, corner bracket or parallel
arm application should be used. Exterior
doors require greater closing forces
because of draft conditions. Always place
the closers out of the weather.
1-800-727-5477 • www.sargentlock.com
1
Parallel Arm Applications
281-P9 Regular Parallel Arm Application

P9 ARM SHOWN
1" MIN
(25mm)
P9 Parallel Arm
6-3/8"
(162mm)
4-3/8"
(111mm)
2-3/16"
(56mm)
11-13/16"
Parallel Arm Application - The 281 closer is mounted on the push side of (300mm)
the door. As the door opens, the closer swings with the door and gives full
headroom in the door opening. Other advantages are that the closer arm 1/4” - 3-1/8"
does not project into the room, the frame can be quite narrow and the door (6mm - 79mm)
can be swung open much further than in Top Jamb Applications. However,
the closing force is not as great.
281-P9 Parallel Application

• 4-3/8" minimum door top rail with a minimum of 6-7/8" unobstructed door top rail
281-P10 Parallel Application

90119:L 02/03/14 Copyright © 2005-2007, 2009-2014, Sargent Manufacturing Company, an ASSA ABLOY Group company. All rights reserved.
• 5" minimum door top rail with a minimum of 6-3/4" unobstructed door top rail
• 3" minimum soffit, when less than 3" use a 125V bracket
Note: Base on the application & arm; verify door & frame requirements using the appropriate template
Heavy Duty Parallel Arms For use in high traffic and abusive environments
• Forged steel arm and cast iron foot bracket for strength and durability Non hold-open arms
• Oiled bronze bearings for superior wear resistance • Two mounting positions for 120° and 180°
• 2 piece rigid arms for ease of installation maximum door openings
• Friction and positive hold open arms available Stop & Stop/Hold Open Arms
• Use friction hold open arms for doors subject to moderate hold open use • 6 mounting positions allow stop from 85°–
• Dead stop and compression stop arms available 110° with PS, PSH, CPS & CPSK arms
• Security non-hold open arms available
Regular Duty Parallel Arms

• For use in moderate duty institutional applications Standard Mounting Position
• Double jointed arm provides flexibility in the vertical mounting position of closer • 120° Maximum door opening
• Flush frame arms available for use with Auxiliary Holders & Stops • Holding range of friction and fusible hold
• Flush frame, friction hold open arms available open arms: 75° - 110°
• Friction and fusible link hold open arms available Alternate Mounting Position
• Use friction hold open arms for doors subject to moderate hold open use
• Maximum door opening: 180°
• Use offset bracket arms with auxiliary holders and stops
• Holding range of friction and fusible hold
open arms: 85° - 170°
8 1-800-727-5477 • www.sargentlock.com
MISC.
HARDWARE
90 Series Surface Overhead Door Holders/Stops
Materials and Finishes:
In 300 series Stainless Steel, Brass and Steel substrates, these
models are available in the largest selection of finishes in the
industry. Stainless Steel models offer the highest resistance to
corrosion. Available in the following finishes:
Finish Description
US3 Polished Brass
US4 Satin Brass
US10 Satin Bronze
US10B Oil Rubbed Bronze
90 Series Heavy-Duty US32 Polished Stainless Steel
US32D Satin Stainless Steel
Glynn-Johnson 90 series holders and stops are the most rugged SP4 Powder Coat Brass
models available for heavy-duty applications. The channel is SP10 Powder Coat Bronze
surface-mounted to the door, most often with sex bolts, and the SP28 Powder Coat Aluminum
jamb bracket is surface mounted to the jamb, requiring minimal SP313 Powder Coat Dark Bronze
door and frame preparation. SPBLK Powder Coat Black
652 Chrome-like Coating
These versatile units can be used in conjunction with most
surface-applied door closers. The provided templates allow
for variable mounting positions, ranging from 85º to 110º
Hold-Open/Stop angle. These templates are designed for Models
installation in almost all types of doors, including doors Glynn-Johnson 90 series door holders and stops provide
with conventional butt-type hinges or specialty hinges. long-lasting protection for doors, frames and hardware. All
Four Models: models incorporate a heavy-duty channel/slide-arm design
• 90H Series Hold-Open Model and offset jamb bracket. This unique design allows for simple
• 90S Series Stop-Only Model field modification of functions, should user requirements change.
• 90F Series Friction Hold-Open Model
• 90SE Series Special Stop-Only Model
90H Series Hold-Open
(Suffix H) Hold-Open models provide a convenient method
Five Sizes: of holding the door open at a predetermined position for short
• Simple or long periods of time, permitting an unobstructed traffic flow
• Standardized through the opening. The Hold-Open function can easily be
• Each model is available in five sizes turned on or off by simply rotating the serrated knob on the
Three Options: bottom of the channel. This knob engages the Hold-Open
• J—Angle Jamb Bracket mechanism, allowing the door to be held open at a predetermined
• SHIM—Blade Stop Shim Kits position ranging from 85º to 110º. When the knob is flipped over,
• SOC—Pin-in-Socket Security Screw Package it acts as a stop and shock absorber.
Unmatched Convenience: The tension on the Hold-Open mechanism can be adjusted

• Non-Handed using a phillips screwdriver to offset air currents or other exterior
• Improved Compatibility with Door Closers conditions. The Hold-Open tension adjustment is located on the
• Single-Acting Doors top of the slider in the channel.
• Interior/Exterior Applications
• Durable 90S Series Stop-Only
• Easy to Install (Suffix S) When the Hold-Open function is not a requirement,
• Improved Corrosion Resistance Stop-Only models provide a reliable method of door control.
• Function Conversion Kits Available Stop-Only models provide the same shock-absorbing capability
as Hold-Open models. The Stop-Only model may be used on
fire doors.
90F Series Friction Hold-Open

(Suffix F) Friction Hold-Open models are ideal for patient room
doors, wardrobe and closet doors or similar applications where
multiple Hold-Open positions are desired. The friction tension can
be adjusted through the top of the channel using an allen wrench.
The friction tension adjustment is located on the top of the slider in
the channel.
14
90SE Series Special Stop-Only Environmental Considerations:
(Suffix SE) When Stop-Only models are used in conjunction Environmental factors should always be considered when
with single-point, Hold-Only electronic door closers, the specifying overhead holders and stops. Doors that are positioned
Stop-Only function may be ordered without the shock-absorbing on a building’s exterior or subject to corrosive conditions should
mechanism. Used as an auxiliary stop, these models prolong be equipped with a holder constructed primarily of stainless steel
the life of the closer. The stop location is adjusted using an allen or brass materials. For interior applications, steel is acceptable,
wrench on the stop block located in the channel. though brass substrates generally provide a more attractive
architectural-grade finish.
Note: Caution should be taken when using this option in other applications, as
the elimination of the shock-absorbing spring can put added stress on the door Function Conversion Kits
and frame. • FK90H—Converts a 90F or a 90S unit into a 90H unit.
To order specify FK90H.
• FK90F—Converts a 90H or a 90S unit into a 90F unit.
Application Information To order specify FK90F.
• FK90SE—Converts a 90H, 90F or a 90S unit into a 90SE unit. To
UL Classification order specify FK90SE–Finish.
The 90 series Stop-Only models are classified by Underwriters • No kit is needed to convert a 90H or 90F unit into a 90S unit.
Laboratories (UL) as Miscellaneous Fire Door Accessories. This
classification applies to use on either Hollow Metal Fire Doors or
Wood Fire Doors. These units may be used on doors of any rating. Options
As a reminder, the Miscellaneous Fire Door Accessories (GVUX)
Suffix J (Angle Jamb Bracket):
section is defined by UL as: “Miscellaneous fire door accessories
An angle jamb bracket is available for converting standard models
are intended in the individual Listings. The accessories have been
to hinge-side or flush transom mounting. The angle jamb bracket
investigated to determine that when installed in accordance with
affixes to the standard jamb bracket. If ordered with the unit add
the manufacturer’s instructions, the accessories do not adversely
suffix J. If needed separately order 90J by finish needed.
affect the fire rating of the fire door and/or fire door frames.”
Suffix SOC (Pin-in-Socket Security Screws):
Dead-Stop Templating:
A screw package with pin-in-socket screws for mounting the door
Dead-stop templating is recommended for applications where a
bracket and the jamb bracket is provided instead of the standard
wall or similar obstruction is placed at an opening angle of 110º
screw package.
or less (i.e., doors that open back-to-back). Dead-stop templating
can be applied to Hold-Open, Stop-Only and Friction models. Suffix SHIM (Blade Stop Shims):
The Dead-Stop position is the point at which the shock-absorbing Shim kits are available in 3 sizes
spring is fully compressed. Therefore, when Dead-Stop Templating 90 SHIM1 is a 1/4" Shim Kit
is used, the initial degree of opening will be 5º to 7º less than the 90 SHIM2 is a 1/2" Shim Kit
Dead-Stop opening. 90 SHIM3 is a 3/4" Shim Kit
Example: If the holder is templated to a 100º Dead Stop, the door will hold If ordered with overhead, add suffix SHIM (1, 2 or 3). If needed
open at an angle between 93º and 95º but no further than 100º separately order 90 SHIM (1, 2 or 3)–Finish.
Note: Do not use dead-stop templating on the 90SE Series since there is no
shock-absorbing spring.
15
100 Series Concealed Overhead Door Holders/Stops
Materials and Finishes:
In Heavy Gauge Brass or 300 Series Stainless Steel, these models
offer the broadest range of finishes in the industry, complementing
any design and offering the highest resistance to corrosion.
Available in the following finishes:
Finishes Description
US3 Polished Brass
US4 Satin Brass
US10 Satin Bronze
US10B Oil Rubbed Bronze
US32 Polished Stainless Steel
US32D Satin Stainless Steel
SP4 Powder Coat Brass
100 Series Heavy-Duty SP10 Powder Coat Bronze
Glynn-Johnson offers a complete line of overhead door holders and SP28 Powder Coat Aluminum
stops, accommodating virtually all openings with solutions for even SP313 Powder Coat Dark Bronze
the most complex door control problems. These concealed holders SPBLK Powder Coat Black
and stops provide the most attractive and reliable heavy-duty door
control available.
Glynn-Johnson 100 series holders and stops provide the most reli- Models
able and versatile concealed overhead door control. They are These models provide a wide range of optional features, and are
designed for installation on virtually all types of doors mounted on ideal for use on entrance and vestibule doors, large doors, doors
conventional type butt hinges, pivots, continuous hinges, swing opened frequently, or doors subject to abuse. These models are also
clear hinges and numerous other specialty hinges. When used in furnished with an offset-style jamb bracket.
conjunction with many surface-applied door closers, 100 series
holders and stops provide the most effective control for entrance Designed for heavy-duty applications, 100 series models will
doors and vestibule doors of all types, as well as heavy or often provide long-lasting protection to doors, frames, hinges, related
used interior doors. Templates provided allow for variable mounting hardware and surrounding walls or obstructions.
positions, ranging from 85° - 110° of opening.
100H Series Hold-Open
Five Models: (Suffix H) The Hold-Open function should be used where it
• 100H Series Hold-Open Model is desired to hold a door open at a predetermined position for
• 100HP Series Internal Hold-Open Model short or long periods of time, permitting an unobstructed
• 100F Series Friction Hold-Open Model traffic flow through the opening.
• 100S Series Stop-Only Model
• 100SE Series Special Stop-Only Model These models are both selective and adjustable, featuring the
most reliable Hold-Open mechanism available. They feature
Six Sizes: a control knob which protrudes from the face of the door and
• Each model comes in six sizes. turns the Hold-Open function on or off. Set in the inactive
• Simple position, the unit acts as a stop and shock absorber. The tension
• Standardized on the Hold-Open mechanism can be adjusted using an allen
Three Options: wrench to offset air currents or other exterior conditions. The
• ADJ—Adjustable Jamb Bracket Hold-Open tension adjustment is located in the bottom of the
• CJ—Jamb Bracket for use with LCN5030 Closer track in the top of the door.
• SOC—Pin-in-Socket Security Screw Package
100HP Series Internal Hold-Open
Unmatched Convenience: These models provide a Hold-Open unit with the Hold-Open
• Non-handed mechanism built into the channel, thus reducing the door prep.
• Improved Compatibility with Door Closers The 100HP have a preset Hold-Open force that is not adjustable.
• Single/Double-Acting Doors The Hold-Open feature is not selectable in these units, so the doors
• Interior/Exterior Applications are always held open.
• Reduced Door Prep
• Durable
• Improved Corrosion Resistance
• Function Conversion Kits are Available.
18
100F Series Friction Hold-Open Dead Stop Templating:
(Suffix F) Friction Hold-Open models provide an alternative If a wall or similar obstruction is in place at 110° or less opening
holding method, ideal for heavy patient room doors, closet angle (i.e. doors that open back-to-back), Dead Stop Templating
doors or similar applications where multiple Hold-Open should be used. This includes all Hold-Open, Friction and
positions are desired. The friction tension is adjusted using Stop-Only models, except when the “SE” Option is used. The
an allen wrench and an open end wrench. The friction tension Dead Stop position is reached when the shock-absorbing spring
adjustment is located on the top of the slider in the channel. is fully compressed, the initial degree of opening will be 5° to 7°
less than the Dead Stop opening.
100S Series Stop-Only
Example: If the holder is templated to 100° Dead Stop, the door will hold open
(Suffix S) When the Hold-Open function is not required, the somewhere between 93° and 95°, but no further than 100°.
Stop-Only function provides the same effective door control
minus the Hold-Open feature. The Stop-Only model may be Note: Do not use dead-stop templating on the 100SE Series since there is no
used on fire doors. shock-absorbing spring.
100SE Series Special Stop-Only

Environmental Considerations:
(Suffix SE) When Stop-Only models are used in conjunction with Environmental factors should always be considered when
single point Hold-Open electronic door closers, they may be ordered specifying overhead holders and stops. Doors that are positioned
without the shock-absorbing mechanism. Used as an auxiliary stop on a building’s exterior or subject to corrosive conditions should
with these closers, they will prolong the life of the closer. The stop be equipped with a holder constructed primarily of stainless steel
location is adjusted using an allen wrench on the stop block located or brass materials. For interior applications, steel is acceptable,
in the channel. though brass substrates generally provide a more attractive
Note: Caution should be used when using this option in other applications, architectural-grade finish.
as the elimination of the shock-absorbing spring can put added stress on door
Function Conversion Kits
and frame if used improperly.
• FK100F—Converts a 100H or 100S unit into a 100F unit.
To order specify FK100F.
Application Information • FK100H—Converts a 100F or 100S unit into a 100H unit.
To order specify FK100H.
UL Classification • No kit is needed to convert a 100H or 100F unit
The 100 series Stop-Only models are classified by Underwriters into a 100S unit.
Laboratories (UL) as Miscellaneous Fire Door Accessories. This
classification applies to use on either Hollow Metal Fire Doors or
Wood Fire Doors. Where Wood Door manufacturer’s listing allows Options
for the cutout required for installation, concealed overhead stops
Suffix ADJ (Adjustable Jamb Bracket):
may be used on those wood fire doors. These units may be used on
An additional option on the 100 series is the adjustable jamb bracket,
doors of any rating. As a reminder, the Miscellaneous Fire Door
which allows the degree of Hold-Open or Stop angle to be adjusted
Accessories (GVUX) section is defined by UL as: “Miscellaneous
after installation. Suffix “ADJ” is available in all functions, but only
fire door accessories are intended in the individual Listings. The in sizes 3, 4, 5 & 6. ADJ jamb bracket requires additional frame prep.
accessories have been investigated to determine that when installed The ADJ option cannot be added to an existing unit, it must be
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, the accessories factory ordered.
do not adversely affect the fire rating of the fire door and/or fire
door frames.” Suffix CJ (Closer Jamb Bracket):
Provides a special jamb bracket needed for 100 series units used with
LCN5030 closers. These special jamb brackets are handed, so handing
will need to be specified when ordering the “CJ” option, CJLH for
a left hand door and CJRH for a right hand door. The CJ option
cannot be added to an existing unit, it must be factory ordered.
Suffix SOC (Pin-in-Socket Security Screw Package):
A screw package with pin-in-socket screws for mounting the jamb
bracket to the frame is provided instead of the standard screw package.
19
Manual Flush Bolts - Metal Doors
FB458, FB458N and FB0458N
Series for Metal Doors
• When the active door is opened, the lever can be moved to the ‘up’ • Brass Finishes: B3, B4, B5, B10, B10B, B14, B15, B15A, B26, B26D.
position, retracting the bolt and allowing the inactive leaf to be • Bolt tip is 1/2" diameter.
opened. When the inactive leaf is closed, the lever can be moved to • Bolts have 3/4" throw with a bolt backset of 3/4".
the ‘down’ position, projecting the bolt into the strike and securely
locking the inactive leaf. • Standard Rod Length is 12", which is measured from the center
of the flush bolt body to the bolt tip.
• Simplified installation in metal frames. Round bolt head requires
only a punched hole. Use of strike optional. Special design of guide • Meets ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L04251.
and flat sided bolt tip to prevent bolt rotation. • Optional Dust Proof Strikes— prevents dirt build-up assuring full
• FB458 UL Listed for Fire Doors. engagement of bottom bolt.
• FB458N and FB0458N not UL Listed for Fire Doors. • Optional Rod Lengths available for FB458: 6", 9", 18" and 24".
• FB0458N features 1/4" radius corners on body. • Optional Rod Lengths available for FB458N and FB0458N: 6", 9", 18",
24", 30", 36" and 48".
• Non-handed.
FB458 FB458N FB0458N

Top or Bottom Bolt Top or Bottom Bolt Top or Bottom Bolt
• UL Listed 3 hours on
8'0" x 10'0" Opening
Dimensions:
Body Size: 1" Wide x 6-3/4" Long x 1-1/8" Deep
Guide Size: 1" Wide x 2" Long x 5/64" Thick
Strike Size: 15/16" Wide x 2-1/4" Long x 5/64" Thick
A8
Architectural Door Trim
8200 Series Push Plates and

8300 Series Pull Plates
• Made from the finest architectural aluminum, brass,
and stainless steel.
• For Push Plate sizes other than listed, contact our Customer
Service Department or your local sales representative.
• All aluminum, brass, and stainless steel Push Plates meet
ANSI A156.6 requirements for .050" thickness.
• Each Push Plate is packaged individually wrapped with Push and Pull Plates Cut for Cylinder or Thumbturns
mounting screws.
• All plates may be ordered with cutout for cylinder or thumbturn.
• For special mounting methods other than standard, Standard cutouts are positioned 2" from top of plate and
see pages C11 - C13. centered on plates up to 4" wide or 2" from edge on plates
over 4" wide. Specify hand of door when ordering cutout for
plates wider than 4". On pull plates, if the pulls center-to-center
dimension interferes with the cutout for the cylinder or
thumbturn, please provide drawing of cutout location when
ordering.
• Standard size for cylinder cutouts is 1-1/4" diameter and for
thumbturn cutout is 3/8" diameter.
• When ordering, add suffix CFC for cut for cylinder, and CFT
for cut for thumbturn to product number.
How to Order
8 ___ - ____ -____ - ____ - ____
Model:
200 Push Plate,
300 Pull Plate, less pull
Hole Spacing: (for Pull Plate only)

5 for 5-1/4"
6 for 6"
8 for 8"
0 for 10"
Finishes:
US3, US4, US5, US10, US10B, US15, US15A,
US26, US26D, US28, US32, US32D
Size:
3 x 12, 3-1/2 x 15, 4 x 16, 6 x 16, 8 x 16
8200 Push Plate
8300 Pull Plate (less pull) Special Options: (specify handing for plates over 4" wide)
CFC Cylinder cutout
Available Sizes CTC Thumbturn cutout
3" x 12"
3.5" x 15"
4" x 16"
6" x 16"
8" x 16"
C8
Architectural Door Trim
Series 8400 Door Protection Plates
.050" Thickness
Features:
• Door Protection Plates are fabricated from the finest architectural
aluminum, brass, and stainless steel, or 1/8" thick clear acrylic
plastic or black or brown high impact polyethylene. • Use No. 8401 Kickplate Gasket Tape as a buffer between brass
• All aluminum, brass, bronze and stainless steel Door Protection kickplates and metal doors to help prevent tarnishing which may
Plates meet ANSI A156.6 requirements for .050" thickness. result from electrolytic oxidation. One package provides enough
• Optional Beveling—For beveling of top and two sides of plates double-sided adhesive-backed foam tape for the perimeter of an
suffix with B3E, and for beveling of four sides suffix with B4E. 8" x 34" plate.
Plastic plates are beveled on all four sides as standard. • Finishes:
• Each plate is packaged carefully wrapped in strong kraft paper with Brass: B3, B4, B5, B10, B10B (for heights over 24", check with
#6 x 5/8" oval head, undercut sheet metal screws plated to match, customer serivce)
for easy installation on hollow metal, laminate, or wood doors. All Stainless Steel: S32D, S32
plates are packaged in heavy duty corrugated cardboard; larger Aluminum: PA28
plates are enclosed in a wooden frame. Plastic: BLK, BRN, CLR
Mop Plates Kick Plates Stretcher Plates Armor Plates

• Protect the bottom of the • Protect the bottom of the • Protect doors at specific • Protect lower half of doors
pull side of door subject push side of doors subject areas where consistent from abuse by hard carts,
to cleaning and mopping to scuffing from foot traffic. contact is made by trucks and rough usage.
procedures. • Recommended for all stretchers, service carts • Usually applied to push side
• Size Ranges: doors subject to normal or other equipment. of single doors and both
4" to 6" high, 22" to 48" wide use (especially doors using • Usually applied to push sides of double acting doors.
a closer). side of doors. • Size Ranges:
• Size Ranges: • Specify “B4E” Option for 26" to 48" high, 22" to
8" to 24" high, 22" to 48" wide beveled edges. 48" wide
• Size Ranges:
6" to 8" high, 22" to 48" wide
How to Order 8400 ____ - _____ x _____ - _____

Finish
Height:
4" up to 48" in 1/2" increments
(For brass kick plates over 24", check with customer service.)
Width:
22" up to 48" in 1/2" increments
Options: (Only for metal plates)
B3E for Bevel Top and 2 Edges
B4E for Bevel 4 Edges
CS for Counter Sink Holes
ES for Extra row of Screws
C14
Floor Door Stop & Automatic Holder
FS40
FS41
FS42
FS43
Features:
• Automatic door holders ideal for heavy-traffic situations that require a simple,
fool-proof, Hold-Open device.
• Forged from brass.
• Unit is activated automatically when door is opened. A firm pull on door releases
the mechanism.
• Strikes accommodate different door to floor clearances.
• Model numbers are determined by strike/door-to-floor clearances.
• Holder position on door is adjustable.
• Universal screw pack allows for installation in all types of door construction.
• Meets ANSI/BHMA 156.16, L11301.
• Finishes: US3, US4, US10, US10B, US26, US26D.
Product No. Door to Floor Clearance Holder Dimensions

FS40 1/2" or less 3" Wide x 3-11/16" High
FS41 9/16" to 1-1/16" 3" Wide x 3-11/16" High
FS42 1-1/8" to 1-9/16" 3" Wide x 3-11/16" High
FS43 1-5/8" to 2-1/16" 3" Wide x 3-11/16" High
FS40
Optional Strike Details
FS41 FS42
FS43
D9
National Guard Products, Inc. Toll Free Phone 1-800-647-7874
PROTECTION, INSIDE OUT Toll Free Fax 1-800-255-7874
• mill finish aluminum

Saddle Thresholds
10C All thresholds this page. • DKB - aluminum dark bronze

finish
NON-SLIP SURFACE
408 .10 lbs./ft.
1/8" All drawings are actual size All thresholds are available with a
Typical Wall .050 except as noted. slip resistant, non-skid surface for
1 3/8" better traction.
Specify SIA finish.
410 .40 lbs./ft
410DKB .40 lbs./ft.
1/4"
Drilling and notching details
should be included with order.
Typical Wall .125
2 1/2"
411 .50 lbs./ft #10 x -1-1/2” FH zinc plated

411DKB .50 lbs./ft. wood screws are included on mill
1/4"
Typical Wall .125 finish thresholds. Chemically
treated stainless steel screws are
3"
provided to match DKB finish.
413 .58 lbs./ft.
413DKB .58 lbs./ft.
1/4"
1/2” added to thresholds under 61”
Typical Wall .125 1” added to thresholds over 61”
4"
513 .74 lbs./ft.

513DKB .74 lbs./ft.
1/4"
Typical Wall .125
5"
613 .88 lbs./ft.

613DKB .88 lbs./ft.
1/4"
Typical Wall .125
6"
713 1.01 lbs./ft

713DKB 1.01 lbs./ft.
1/4"
Typical Wall .125
7"
813 1.20 lbs./ft

1/4"
Typical Wall .125

8"
913 1.41 lbs./ft

1/4"
Typical Wall .125

9"
1013 1.63 lbs./ft

1013DKB 1.63 lbs./ft.
1/4"
Typical Wall .125

10"
12
E-mail: ngpinfo@ngpinc.com
PDF created by Specworks® www.ngpinc.com
Saddle Thresholds
All thresholds this page. 10C
1/2"
412 .625 lbs./ft.
412DKB .625 lbs./ft. Typical Wall .125
Thresholds are aluminum mill
4" finish
DKB indicates aluminum with
dark bronze finish.
1/2"
419 .72 lbs./ft.
Typical Wall .250
419DKB .72 lbs./ft.
3"
All drawings are actual size
except as noted.
1/2"
424 .72 lbs./ft.
424DKB .72 lbs./ft. Typical Wall .125
4"
1/2"
425 1.00 lbs./ft.
Typical Wall .162
5"
1/2"
426 1.35 lbs./ft. Typical Wall .175
6"
1/2"
Typical Wall .188
427 1.58 lbs./ft.
7"
1/2"
8472 1.78 lbs./ft.
8472DKB 1.78 lbs./ft. Typical Wall .250
7"
5/8"
524 .72 lbs./ft. Typical Wall .188

524DKB .72 lbs./ft.
4"
5/8"
525 .93 lbs./ft. Typical Wall .188

525DKB .93 lbs./ft.
5"
14
Self Adhesive Seals

Self Adhesive Seals
HEAD & HEAD &

LATCH SIDE
LATCH SIDE
JAMB DOOR
1/4" JAMB DOOR 1/4" Silicone
Silicone (optional astragal
5/1
application)
6"
1/2" 3/8" JAMB DOOR
JAMB DOOR 1/2"

5050B Brown 2525B Brown HINGE SIDE
5050C Charcoal HINGE SIDE 2525C Charcoal

5050W White 2525W White 5060B Brown
5050T Tan 2525T Tan 5060CL Clear
5050CL Clear
10C S 10C S 10C S
*Edge Sealing System on 20 min Available in 17’, 20’, 21’, 25’ and 300’ rolls.
ESS
* rated wood doors up to 4’0 x 8’0 sin-
gle, 8’0 x 8’0 std. pair with 9800 or Available in 7’, 8’, 9’,
9500 at meeting edge. 17’, and 21’ rolls
Available in 17’, 20’, 21’, 25’ and 300’ rolls.
Neoprene Gasketing
width thickness
11/32"
7/16" 361 18’, 21’, 50’ rolls 3/8” x 3/16”
362 18’, 50’ rolls 1/2” x 1/4”
7/16" 7/16" 363 18’, 50’ rolls 3/8” x 1/8”
LATCH SIDE HINGE SIDE

7/16"
5020B Brown Kerf Application
5020C Charcoal 5021B Brown DOOR DOOR
5020W White 5021C Charcoal

5021W White
10C S
Available in 36”, 48”, 84”, 96” and 108” lengths.
“FATT”
Fast Attach Two-Way Tape

Fast attach two way tape provides an easy and effective alter-
native to gasketing installation. A 1/2” wide 2-way tape is
applied to the metal housing insuring a quick and easy instal-
lation. Then for security, 3 tek-type self drilling screws are
used to further secure each piece of material to the frame
stop. A no problem installation with no holes to drill.
To order add suffix “FATT” to product number. See price list

for products available with this feature.
FATT IS NOT CLASSIFIED FOR USE ON FIRE DOORS.
50
Automatic Door Bottoms - Surface
Use with a threshold for maximum sealing capability. Nylon brush recommended for carpet
applications where no threshold is provided.
19/32"
neoprene
(1, 3, 4) neoprene 43/64" neoprene 19/32"
220NA (1, 4) (1, 3, 4)
220NB 222NA 310NA
220NDKB 222NB 310NB
222NDKB 310NDKB
silicone
2 3/32"
silicone
2 1/4"
silicone (1, 3, 4)
(1, 4)
(1, 3, 4)
222SA 310SA
220SA 310SB
220SB 222SB 310SDKB
220SDKB 222SDKB
2 1/8"
nylon brush nylon brush
nylon brush
(4) (3, 4)
(3, 4)
220WHA 222WHA 310WHA
220WHB 222WHB 310WHB
220WHDKB 222WHDKB 310WHDKB
1" 1"
Max. Max. 3/4"
Drop Drop Max.
Drop
Drop Bar with All products

10C
Slimline Nylon Brush -
Use suffix “WH”
this page:
Endurance Tested
7/16" OK for use on
to 5 Million Cycles ‘S’ labeled doors
15/16" 15/16"
9/16"
15/16"
1 3/8"
.097 Wall
2 5/16"
2 5/16"
2 5/16"
Max Drop 1/2"
silicone (5)
780SA
780SDKB
7/8" e
vinyl (5) Max. nylon brush 7/8"
780VA Drop Max. Drop
780VDKB
HEAVY DUTY HEAVY DUTY HEAVY DUTY
Will work half mortised neoprene neoprene
on swing or sliding (1, 2, 5) (2, 5) (5)
doors! Available in 12” 420NA 520NA 680A
to 96” lengths 420NB 520NB 680B
420NDKB 520NDKB 680DKB
1. Available with lead insert for radiation shield on special order.
2. For half mortise applications specify HM item number prior to finish (ie: 420NHMDKB).
3. Door Bottom is handed. Right hand supplied as standard unless specified. Field reversible.
4. End caps available - please specify
5. End Caps furnished standard.
Always specify the exact net length of your Automatic Door bottom, whenever possible. Automatic Door Bottoms 32” and larger may be
cut up to 4” in the field, 24” to 32” may be cut 2”, under 24” should not be cut in the field. Minimum length 12”.
62
Specialty Astragals, Drip Strips, Overhead Door Bottom Seal
black rubber covered

fabric astragal
Drip Strips
14RA
14RB
1 1/2"
14RDKB
1 3/4"
Available for 2 1/4”

112N
door- specify 17
112N DkB 17DKB
5/8"
eoprene
3/4"
1 1/2"
Max.
1 1/2"
16A
16B
23/32" 16DKB
2 1/2"
1 3/16"
neoprene 1/4"
Overhead
112N
112NDKB
Door Bottom
5/32" Seal
81369N 1 1/8"
Security Astragal 81369NDKB
96" MAXIMUM HEIGHT

2 3/4"
detail 1/2 size
Spring loaded protection for pairs of outswinging

145PA neoprene
145PB doors up to 96” in height. Pile insert for weather 1/8"
145PDKB protection, sturdy aluminum for pry bar protection.
#8 x 1 1/4" Stainless Steel Screw
Glass Door Astragal Seals

Our glass door seal consists of translucent PVC channel and nylon brush for an attractive solution to a difficult problem.
15/16" 15/16" 15/16"

1/2"
5/8"
1/2"
5/8"
nylon brush nylon brush

A651 6"
A650 5/8" 7/16" 7/16" 5/8" 7/1
Order as set to receive two pieces Maximum length120”

66
vinyl is gray. Exceptions: neoprene, polyurethane are black

Sweeps
*vinyl is black, ** vinyl is brown silicone is gray

#6 x 3/4” stainless steel
sheet metal screws furnished.
1 1/4"
7/8"
7/8"
7/8"
7/8"
vinyl
vinyl
vinyl
vinyl
7/8"
1"
neoprene
96V
1/2"
97V 98V 100V
3/4"
96VA 97VA 98VA 100VA
1"
96VB 97VB 98VB 100VB 199NA
96VDKB 97VDKB* 98VDKB 100VDKB** 199NB
199NDKB
1 1/4"
7/8"
1 1/16"
7/8"
1 1/4"
vinyl neoprene
polyurethane
3/4"
vinyl
7/8"
1"
102VA
3/4"
198UA 198NA polyurethane

102VB 198UB 198NB
3/8"
102VDKB* 1025VA 198UDKB 198NDKB 200UA
1025VB 200UB
1025VDKB* 200UDKB
3/8"
All products 10C

1 1/16"
1 1/4"
this page:
OK for use on
1"
‘S’ label doors.
neoprene neoprene
1/2"
neoprene
3/8"
200NA neoprene 3/8"

201NA 200NB
5/8"
202NA
201NB 200NDKB 202NB
201NDKB 202NDKB
silicone
200SA
1"
200SB
200SDKB
7/8"
1 1/16"
neoprene
1 1/2"
neoprene
black 197NA 203NA

197NB 203NB
15/16"
rubber
1 5/8"
197NDKB 203NDKB
2"
covered
fabric
1"
vinyl
neoprene 5/16" 101VA

1/2"
101VB
2014A 117N 23/32" 101VDKB
2014B 117NDKB
2014DKB
70
Toll Free Phone 1-800-647-7874
National Guard Products, Inc.
PROTECTION, INSIDE OUT
Toll Free Fax 1-800-255-7874
Astragal/Meeting Stile Gasketing

Surface Mounted Astragal Sets
#6 x 3/4” Stainless Steel Sheet Metal Screws furnished.
Fire-rated Astragal Seals cannot replace any astragal required on the door to maintain its fire label. The gap at the latch between
fire labeled doors must not exceed 1/8”.
5/8" 3/8"
7/8" 1"
vinyl epdm
epdm
97V 115NA
97VA 115NB
97VB 115NDKB
97VDKB*
10C S
Order as set to receive two pieces
Order as set to receive two pieces
1 1/16" 5/16" Spring loaded
7/8" 3/8"
9/16"
epdm
125NA 140PA pile

125NB 140PB
125NDKB 140PDKB
10C S Order as set to receive two pieces
Order as set to receive two pieces * *up to 3 hrs. metal doors, 20 mins. wood doors
5/16"
7/8" 11/16"
7/8"
7/16"
1/4"
max
neoprene .625" neoprene 1/4"
neoprene silicone
12135NA
137NA Order as set to receive 137SA
137NB 137SB Maximum length 96”
two pieces
137NDKB 137SDKB
10C S 10C S
7/8" 1/2" 3/4" 1/2"
nylon +
nylon brush
nylon
nylon+
brush
600
600A Order as set to receive two pieces B606A Order as set to receive two pieces
600B B606B 10C
10C
600DKB B606DKB
5/8" 7/16" neoprene
123NA 121A
.062"
nylon
nylon+
brush
3/4" 11/16"
A605A Order as set to receive two pieces
123NA x 121A
A605B 10C Maximum length 96”
A605DKB
E-mail: ngpinfo@ngpinc.com A - clear

B - gold
EPDM, pile, silicone, vinyl are gray
exception: * vinyl is black
72
www.ngpinc.com DKB - dark bronze
neoprene, brush are black
FBISD 08 80 00
Division #08 – Openings (Glazing)
GLAZING (08 80 00)
General:
Type generally a tinted bronze double-pane for exterior applications. Glass should be
recommended based on performance. As glazing progresses, color selections my
change as performance changes.
Glass Glazing (Decorative) (08 81 00) – NOT USED
Mirrors (Glazing) (08 83 00)
Information on Unit Mirrors for use in Toilet Rooms included with Toilet Accessories
Dance room mirrors. Mirrors should cover one wall, mounted 4” off the floor. Mirror
sections to be mounted vertically, 4 feet in width by 7 feet in height, coordinate with
ballet bar installation so that joints align with mounts
Plastic Glazing (Decorative) (08 84 00)
Avoid use
Glazing Accessories (08 85 00)
Glazing Surface Films (08 87 00)
- Solar Control Films

o Only for use on renovated facilities provided that building model shows
significant affect to energy costs
- Safety and Security Films
o Only for use on renovated facilities where required for theft/vandal deterrant
and/or windborne debris (during storm).
o Confirm with the Owner if the CBond or equal glass to window film product
will be required on glazing to enhance and increase the structural integrity of
the glass unit.
- Decorative Films – NOT USED
Special Function Glazing (08 88 00)
Use of all below should be avoided. If need arises, present need to FBISD for approval
prior to incorporating into documents. Include alternatives to use along with intended
use:
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 08 80 00
Division #08 – Openings (Glazing)
- Fire Resistant Glazing

- Hurricane-Resistant Glazing
- Transparent Mirrored Glazing
- Pressure-Resistant Glazing
- Security Glazing
- Ballistics-Resistant Glazing
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 08 90 00
Division #08 – Openings (Louvers and Vents)
LOUVERS AND VENTS (08 90 00)
Louvers (08 91 00)
General:
Provide fully welded plenum boxes for all wall louvers, positive slope to exterior,
refer to detail below for additional information
Do not provide sealant at base of louver, ensure drainage
Provide bird screens and rain protection/drip
Design Basis shall be Ruskin, 6” deep
Motorized Wall Louvers (08 91 13) – NOT USED
Operable Wall Louvers (08 91 16) – NOT USED
Fixed Louvers (08 91 19) – SEE ABOVE
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 08 90 00
Division #08 – Openings (Louvers and Vents)
Door Louvers (08 91 26)
Install in galvanized steel doors leading into unconditioned spaces, such as

outdoor equipment storage, fire rise rooms, grounds and maintenance
spaces/buildings
Louvered Equipment Enclosures (08 92 00)
Consider at areas where low cost concealing of equipment needed (due to requirements
of Authority having Jurisdiction)
Vents (08 95 00)
Soffit Vents (08 95 13)
Refer to Plaster Section in Division 09 for additional information on installation of

vents in that material
Refer to Metal Panel Section in Division 07 for additional information on

installation of vents in that material
Wall Vents (08 95 16) – NOT USED
Explosion Vents (08 95 33) – NOT USED
Flood Vents (08 95 43) – NOT USED
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 09 00 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Introduction)
Division 09 (Finishes) Intent:
Information contained within this section relates to interior finish materials of all types. Due to
high abuse in a K-12 setting, finish requirements within this section generally include material
selections and details of a high-impact, low maintenance nature. The introduction of materials
not included within section by A/E is allowed, but durability requirements must be proven prior to
incorporation into design documents.
Table of Contents for Division 09:
1) General Requirements for All Finishes (This Section)

2) Plaster and Gypsum Board (09 20 00)
3) Tiling (09 30 00)
4) Ceilings (09 50 00)
5) Flooring (09 60 00)
6) Wall Finishes 09 70 00)
7) Acoustic Treatment (09 80 00)
8) Painting and Coating (09 90 00)
Finishes (09 00 00)
General:
Provide durable finishes appropriate for K-12 use. Any material that significantly
increases maintenance cost and labor will likely NOT be allowed.
Use of materials containing high recycled content is not required to achieve

minimum LEED Certification on Fort Bend ISD Projects, although consideration will be
given to these materials. A/E to provide information, including cost vs. standard
material, for Fort Bend ISD review PRIOR to including in any deliverable.
Consideration should be given to materials/manufacturers within 500 miles of project

site. Avoid non-domestically manufactured materials and those with initial
manufacturing (thus replacement) time frames of more than 10 weeks.
LOCATIONS where types of materials intended for use are indicated in Educational
Specifications (Ed Specs) and Design Guidelines (Master Program). EXAMPLE: “Wood
Flooring” is indicated in Ed Specs for High School Gymnasium; however, details,
approved manufacturers, warranty, and other installation information is provided within
Division 09 Design and Construction Standards (09 60 00).
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 09 00 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Introduction)
Maintenance of Finishes (09 01 00) – See above
Common Work Results for Finishes (09 05 00)
FBISD prefers to minimize use of flammable interior finishes, including those with higher
flame spread characteristics, even if allowed by code.
Transitions in wall finishes to occur at inside corners as much as possible
Consider the following average life spans when selecting interior finish materials:
Sheetrock (Unstippled) Wall 300 years

Plaster Wall Finish 300 years
Concrete Block (Painted) Wall 500 years
Fabric, Wallpaper, Vinyl Interior Wall Finish 10 years
Ceramic Tile Wall Finish 100 years
Steel (Painted) Interior Wall Finish 200 years
Acoustical Interior Wall Tile 90 years
Concrete Finished Flooring 75 years
Ceramic & Quarry Tile Flooring 50 years
Terrazzo Flooring 75 years
Wood Parquetry & Maple Sports Floor 40 years
Vinyl Tile/sheet, Rubber Tile, Linoleum Flooring 18 years
Nylon Carpet-Low Traffic 15 years
Wool Carpet, Premium 25 years
Nylon Carpet-High Traffic 8 years
Wood Finished Ceiling 80 years
Plaster/Sheetrock Ceiling 300 years
Acoustical Tile Ceiling 70 years
Schedules for Finishes (09 06 00)
A/E to meet with FBISD Project Manager to review all Room Finish Schedules and
confirm prior to incorporation into design documents, prior to Design Development
Within Room Finish Schedule, include remarks, or references to details provided

elsewhere, for surfaces (wall or floor) having multiple finishes
Include accent wall selections within Finish Schedule
Commissioning of Finishes (09 08 00) – NOT USED
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 09 20 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Plaster and Gypsum Board)
Plaster and Gypsum Board (09 20 00)
Plaster and Gypsum Board Assemblies (09 21 00)
Provide control joints at all openings (doors, windows, cased) in drywall partitions to
allow for differential movement without significant damage to finishes. Ensure fire rating
is maintained behind control joints in fire rated partitions (Refer to UL for options)
Provide 4” offset between drywall ceilings/bulkheads and lay-in ceiling (DO NOT ALIGN)
Coordinate with Electrical – Provide two 4” conduit within drywall furring or above ceiling
at high volume corridors or other areas where access is limited (for future technology,
security F/A, other electrical, etc.)
Wall to Deck Requirements:
Provide wall to deck plan separate from code review plan. Use of only General
Notes in design documents that indicate which walls are to extend to deck is
NOT ACCEPTABLE
Specific locations where walls are to extend to deck and other spaces where
special acoustic or security requirements exist are indicated, per space, in
Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines. Information below is general
for all types of spaces. A/E to verify with Ed Specs.
Classrooms – Extend walls to deck. Minimize sound transmission

from corridors and from adjacent spaces. Note that sound control at
teaching spaces is a minimum requirement (Pre-Requisite) of LEED
(Refer to that Section for Additional Information).
Offices – All offices shall extend to deck, with sound attenuation blanket,
for security and privacy
Conference Rooms – All shall extend to deck, with sound attenuation

blankets, for security and privacy
Corridors – Need not extend to deck, except as required elsewhere for

sound control or security
Electrical and Mechanical Rooms – All walls shall extend to deck, as

these spaces typically have no ceilings.
Storage Rooms – All walls shall extend to deck for security
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 09 20 00
Toilet Rooms – All walls shall extend to deck, with sound attenuation
blankets installed, for privacy
Consider topping out CMU walls to deck (8” to 12” above ceiling) with drywall,
conserve cost and allow for less intrusive installation for MEP
Extend partitions 2” minimum beyond fixed millwork (DO NOT ALIGN)
Provide minimum Level 4 finish on all painted drywall partitions, Level 5 on all
partitions in well lit, high volume, or curved applications
Do not use gypsum board in exterior situations where it will be exposed to the
weather, such as soffits.
Do not use ½” gypsum board in new construction
Gypsum board should not extend to floor. Board to sit ½” to 5/8” off of finish floor
material (not slab elevation)
Studs to be mechanically fastened top and bottom, both sides. (If using
deflection track, do not attach at top.)
If gypsum board partitions are utilized in public or high traffic areas of secondary
schools, consult with Owner about providing a more durable wainscot material
(PLAM panels, tile)
Provide access panels under all mechanical equipment in suspended gypsum

board ceilings, HOWEVER, it is preferred that all equipment, including valves or
other items requiring maintenance access, be relocated from gypsum board
ceiling areas to adjacent lay-in ceiling areas.
Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board (09 22 00)
ZINC-COATED for exterior suspended plaster
Gypsum Plastering (Acoustical, Fireproof) (09 23 00) – NOT USED
Cement Plastering (Adobe, Cement Stucco, Cement Parging) (09 24 00)
Accessories: Provide vented perimeter at all exterior plaster, ensure walls to deck
around ALL exterior plaster areas with thermal and moisture envelopes complete on all
sides (Refer to Division 07 for additional information)
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 09 20 00
Vents at exterior plaster bulkheads to be set back 4” to 6” from edge to allow for
installation of framing
Venting requirement for plaster is that ALL horizontal surfaces must have at least one
opening for ventilation
Utilize traditional lathe and Portland cement plaster system with acrylic based top coat
so that system is integrally colored and more weather-resistant than traditional plaster
topcoat. Application(s) as recommended by manufacturer.
Refer to Division 07 for Exterior Insulation Finish Systems (EIFS), generally NOT USED
Plaster control joints should be spaced approximately every 15’ to minimize cracking (or
closer if recommended by the installer or industry standard practice or manufacturer,
etc.). A/E to indicate recommended control joint layout on Reflected Ceiling Plans
The bottom plaster casing bead/plaster stop should be notched to the same profile as
the control joint to allow for deflection of the control joint on the horizontal casing
bead/plaster stop and to allow water to shed onto the flashing assembly.
Plaster wall assembly should be detailed so that some movement of the different
materials is allowed without major cracking. The glass-matt sheathing substrate should
be installed with 1/8” gaps to allow for expansion and there should be some type of
separation/slip sheet assembly between the plaster and the substrate to facilitate
movement.
Other Plastering (Acrylic, Lime-Based, Natural Clay) (09 25 00) – NOT USED
Veneer Plastering (09 26 00) – NOT USED
Plaster Fabrications (09 27 00) – NOT USED
Backing Boards and Underlayments (09 28 00)
Refer to other sub-divisions for information on glass-matt sheathing (used
Gypsum Board (09 29 00)
Refer to 09 21 00 for additional information
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 09 30 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Tiling)
Tiling (09 30 00)
General Requirements:
Provide sealant joint at all inside corners on wall tile, NO EXCEPTIONS, regardless of
substrate (masonry or drywall)
Provide sealant between wall/floor tile and door frames, do not install grout in these
locations, allow for movement of dissimilar materials
Generally, ONE field color with ONE accent color and MINIMAL pattern is acceptable.
Verify proposed patterns with FBISD Project Manager
Restrooms:
Wall tile for student restrooms: Provide tile on water closet (wet) walls only.
Wrap the wall tile at the end stalls so that it extends 4” minimum beyond the front
edge of the toilet partition.
Wall tile at Special Education: Provide full ceramic tile on all walls.
Column wraps. If columns are wrapped with ceramic tile, do not extend tile to the
floor. Detail a minimum 4” tall stainless steel base for durability.
Drinking fountains:
Provide ceramic floor tile under all drinking fountain areas, wall tile behind
and to each side (regardless of floor or wall material)
Miscellaneous:
Wall tile: Approximately 4” x 4” tile preferred
Floor tile: 1” x 1” or 2” x 2” tile
Per health department requirements, all ceramic tile grout to be sealed in

restrooms and kitchen areas. Verify with AHJ (Authorities Having
Jurisdiction).
Slope all floors to drains, not just slope 36” from drains. Ensure that no
slope exceeds allowable per ADA/TAS requirements
At all ceramic or quarry floor tile, provide a marble threshold to transition

to alternate flooring material.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 09 30 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Tiling)
Ceramic Tiling (09 30 13)
Provide aluminum trim at all outside corners in lieu of bullnose
Design basis: Schluter Systems, http://www.schluter.com/products.aspx
Random tile patterns are acceptable for use, however A/E must provide sample
pattern within design documents for contractor use while bidding, and installing
** A/E to include grout selections in design documents (wall and floor, all types)
Quarry Tiling (09 30 16)
Provide American Olean Quarry or equal tile, unglazed, Sure-step II OQ30 in

Red Tread color. Mudset (thickset, allow for depression in slab, including
installation of membrane). Grout to be a dark colored epoxy type, indicated in
Finish Schedule
Paver Tiling (09 30 19) – NOT USED
Glass Mosaic Tiling (09 30 23) – NOT USED
Plastic Tiling (09 30 26) – NOT USED
Metal Tiling (09 30 29) – NOT USED
Stone Tiling (09 30 33) – NOT USED
Concrete Tiling (09 30 36) – NOT USED
Brick Tiling (09 30 39) – NOT USED
Thin-Set Tiling (09 31 00) – See above
Mortar–Bed Tiling (09 32 00) – NOT USED
Conductive Tiling (09 33 00) – NOT USED
Waterproofing-Membrane Tiling (09 34 00) – NOT USED
Chemical-Resistant Tiling (09 35 00) – NOT USED
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 09 50 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Ceilings)
Ceilings (09 50 00)
Acoustic Ceilings (09 51 00)
2X2 only, FBISD standard (no substitutions)
15/16” exposed T, no concealed spline, always white except for at HS Black Box (black).
No special colors or finishes allowed
Fine-Fissured Humiguard with BioBlock tile with the Prelude grid system by
Armstrong or equal with a warranty of 15 years against sag and warpage and the
occurrence of 50% red rust on grid.
Radar ClimaPlus tile with the USG Donn grid system with a warranty of 30 years
to be free from manufacturing defects and the occurrence of 50% red rust on
grid.
Provide vinyl faced drywall tiles at kitchen and bathrooms (where tile scheduled)
Acoustic Ceiling Suspension Assemblies (09 53 00) – See Above
Specialty Ceilings (09 54 00)
Consult with Acoustic Engineer for requirements at Music and other Performance
Spaces. Provide absorbent and/or reflective tiles as recommended.
Textured Ceilings (09 56 00) – NOT USED
Special Function Ceilings (09 57 00) – NOT USED
Integrated Ceiling Assemblies (09 58 00)
NO NEW, ONLY in renovations where ALREADY INSTALLED and must be maintained

with MINOR renovations
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 09 60 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Flooring)
Flooring (09 60 00)
IMPORTANT: Floor finishes to be utilized per space, new and existing facilities, are
indicated in Educational Specifications (Master Program) and NOT within this section
This Section contains information regarding details, manufacturers, warranty,

maintenance, and other installation instructions for flooring
For transitions from one flooring material to another, use of rubber is acceptable,
however, consider more durable transitions where more durable floor finishes uses, such
as metal transitions or thresholds at tile and terrazzo flooring. Essentially, consider
equipment used for cleaning, providing more durable transitions where heavier
equipment required to maintain adjacent flooring
Flooring Treatment (09 61 00)
Specialty Flooring (09 62 00)
Weight Room
Middle schools: Mats are bought as part of FFE for under equipment
High schools: Sport Impact flooring “Ramflex” by Mondo or equal. Minimum 3/8”
thickness, smooth texture, manufacturer’s standard color range, roll goods.
Masonry Flooring (09 63 00) – NO USED
Wood Flooring (09 64 00)
Maple Wood Floors at Gymnasiums:
Provide same grade of wood, inside and outside of main basketball courts, all
grade levels (middle school and high school)
Provide 2” gap (one board width) between colors on all gym striping to allow for
separation of colors AND to assist with re-painting when floors periodically re-
finished by FBISD Maintenance staff
Striping paint shall be compatible with floor finish, including acceptability for use
on wood substrate. Provide information on compatibility within submittal.
Page 1 of 8
FBISD 09 60 00
Refer to Middle School & High School Gym Striping Layout drawing within this
Section for striping layout
Colors of striping are to match following, so that district personnel can match
when floors are periodically stripped and painted:
Black = ICI 1673 Dark Secret
White = ICI 1016 White on White
Grey = ICI 240 Silver Shores
Crème = ICI 564 Bavarian Crème
The ‘school color(s)’ are to be matched as closely as possible and will be

reviewed by FBISD Project Manager and FBISD Athletics.
School Logos will be permitted at center court on H.S.and M.S. competition gym
floors only.
Refer to Division 10, Signage and Graphics, for more information on gymnasium
logos and graphics
Middle Schools:
Provide cushioned sleeper floor system, Northern Hard Maple Strip

Flooring, third grade and better, tongue and groove and end matched,
23/32” x 1 ½” on fir or pine sleepers and cushion pads, Bio-Cushion
Classic as manufactured by Robbins, Action Floor Systems LLC “Action
Concorde”, or Owner-Approved equal
High Schools:
Provide cushioned sleeper floor system, Northern Hard Maple Strip

Flooring, first grade and better (in court area) and third grade or better
(perimeter area), tongue and groove and end matched, 23/32” x 1 ½” on
fir or pine sleepers and cushion pads, Bio-Cushion Classic with ¾” black
pad as manufactured by Robbins, Red Neo-Shok as manufactured by
Connor or Owner-Approved equal.
District Athletic Facilities:
Consider Bio-Star (formerly Bio-Cushion 2) by Robbins or Rezill-Flex by

Connor or Owner-approved equal.
Page 2 of 8
FBISD 09 60 00
Wood Floor at Stages (All Grade Levels)
Stage flooring (oak, pine, and masonite). Consider the following:
- Drama Department likes to apply tape and nail things to the floor
- Drama Department likes black everywhere, and will cover oak in front
of curtain for some presentations
Stage Flooring – provide high quality finish (stained oak) from front to main
curtain, lower quality behind (pine or masonite). Provide mat to cover high
quality finish for special performances where thrust (or full) stage required.
Page 3 of 8
FBISD 09 60 00
Provide raised safety edge at front of stage, with photo-illuminescent strip or

lighting. It is important to note that this should not be used in any facility where
pit filler utilized at Orchestra area. To utilize “thrust stage” created by infill of
Orchestra Pit, floor must be level from back of stage to audience side edge
Elementary schools:
For steps and for stage area to centerline of stage curtain, provide 1 x 4,
tongue and groove, center matched, southern pine No. 1 select grade
wood flooring on wood nailers and ¾” plywood subfloor system.
Remainder of stage, behind curtain, to be VCT
Middle schools:
Stage flooring to be masonite on a bonded plywood subfloor system. At

front of stage, provide Oak, tongue and groove end matched select grade
red oak milled and graded, ¾” x 2 ¼”. From centerline of front curtain to
back of stage, provide masonite floor assembly. Stain black. Provide any
transitions required at doors to comply with ADA, etc.
High schools:
Stage flooring to be a bonded ¾” plywood subfloor system. At front of

stage, provide Oak, plain sawn No. 1 common 25/32” x 2 ¼” x random
lengths, tongue and groove, end-matched. From centerline of curtain to
back of stage, provide Pine, D-grade and better, nominal 1 x 3, tongue
and groove, southern yellow pine flooring. Stain black.
Black Box at High schools:
Bonded plywood subfloor system, Pine flooring as described above for

high school stage. Stain black.
Dance room at High schools:
Fully-floating triple sandwich floor system, Harlequin Activity Sprung Floor

with Cascade vinyl mat surface as manufactured by American Harlequin
Corporation, http://www.harlequinfloors.com/us/en/index.php
800.642.6440
Approved Equal: O’Mara Sprung Floors, http://www.sprungfloors.com/

with “Marley” Type vinyl mat manufactured by Alvas or Rosco
Page 4 of 8
FBISD 09 60 00
Gymnasium, Elementary schools.
Provide Sport Court flooring. Provide in pattern indicated below to mimic

floor striping layout (ONLY Gray)
Resilient Flooring (09 65 00)
Luxury Vinyl Tile:
Public Corridor Floor Finish. Luxury Vinly tile is preferred. Please consult FBISD during
design phase for final determination.
Vinyl composition tile:
Size: 12” x 12” x 1/8” thick
Page 5 of 8
FBISD 09 60 00
Allow two colors to provide a border at the following rooms: Science, Art, ES
Commons, Band, Choir, Orchestra, CATE Graphics lab. Standard colors.
Provide VCT floor in MS weight room except under ice machine (provide finish
similar to a locker room or auditorium floor finish.)
Provide solid black color VCT at black box area
Provide contrasting color at emergency shower in science labs. Provide a 3 tile x

3 tile square of this color approximately under the emergency shower (fit into
room tile layout with minimal cutting of tiles).
Acceptable manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, Azrock Floor Products,

Tarkett Corp., Mannington Commercial and other Owner-approved equals.
Tile to have through color
Subcontractor to use matching color caulk to caulk VCT to all door and window
unit frames and other metal pieces.
Base:
Type I rubber base with matching end stops and molded corner units. Height 4”,
minimum 72” lengths. Standard color. Miter all inside and outside corners if not
using molded corner units.
Acceptable manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, Roppe, Burke, R.C.

Musson or Owner-approved equal.
At all wood floors, provide 3” x 4” ventilating resilient cove base. Miter all inside
and outside corners
Trim strips, Transition strips:
Resilient Reducer Type, 1” wide x 1/8” thick, vinyl or rubber, tapered or bullnose
edge. Standard color.
Stair covering:
Molded synthetic rubber treads, landings, and risers as manufactured by Roppe

or equivalent, nominal 1/8” thick. Treads to be “Vantage” low profile raised disc
pattern and of one-piece construction with molded round or square nose.
Landings to be standard profile raised circular disc pattern on 19-11/16” square
tiles.
Page 6 of 8
FBISD 09 60 00
Terrazzo Flooring (09 66 00)
Always use sand bed on ground floor
Polyacrolyte recommended for second floor applications with expansion joints and
control joints coordinated with inside and outside corners, structural corners, and heavy
use live load areas (stairways)
On first floor applications, use sand-bed cementitious terrazzo. No epoxy terrazzo is

allowed on first floor due to moisture problems. In some instances, the logo is allowed to
be in epoxy terrazzo. Polyacrylate terrazzo may be considered in a renovation; consult
with Owner.
On second floor applications, thin-set polyacrylate terrazzo or epoxy terrazzo is

allowable. Coordinate with FBISD to make an appropriate decision, as cost and
potential for structural movement is a deciding factor.
At middle and high schools, accommodations for a logo of approximately four feet in
diameter (or 4 feet x 4 feet square) and of moderate complexity (amount of detail in
design of logo and number of colors used), should be included in the bid documents.
Metal divider strips to be spaced at 4 - 5 foot both directions, maximum, to help minimize
cracking.
Fluid-Applied Flooring (09 67 00)
Includes troweled on epoxy quartz, typically used in locker rooms (Refer to Educational
Specifications (Master Program) for locations, turn this material up on wall as base
Provide bond break at control joints in concrete flooring where this material scheduled
for installation. Movement in control joints will communicate through where not treated
correctly prior to installation.
In facilities where movement anticipated, provide control joints in epoxy quartz flooring
aligned with concrete control joints (coordinate with Geotechnical Survey and Structural
Engineer)
Carpeting (09 68 00)
Carpet represents a significant portion of all spaces within any new and renovated
facility where classrooms are present. It is therefore is a significant investment for Fort
Bend ISD and no exceptions will be considered to requirements below
Page 7 of 8
FBISD 09 60 00
Warranty of 20 years is required and must be provided within submittal information as

well as within closeout documents
Carpet tile is acceptable
Elementary and Middle Schools:
“Sentinel” or “Crayon” as manufactured by Collins & Aikman, Tandus Corporation

or equal.
High schools:
“Infinity” as manufactured by Collins & Aikman, Tandus Corporation or equal.
All carpet to be Powerbond Vinyl Cushion back, “peel and stick” RS pre-applied micro-
encapsulated adhesive back.
Access Flooring (09 69 00) – NOT USED
Page 8 of 8
FBISD 09 70 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Wall Finishes)
Wall Finishes (09 70 00)
Wall Coverings (09 72 00)
For use in Admin areas, spaces indicated in Educational Specifications (Master

Program)
NEVER use on exterior walls
Vinyl wall covering: Provide only micro vented, self-healing vinyl.
Tackable vinyl wall surfaces in classroom is permitted. Please confirm use with FBISD
during the design phase.
Wall Carpeting (09 73 00) – DO NOT USE
Flexible Wood Sheets (09 74 00) – NOT USED
Stone Facing (09 75 00) – NOT USED
Plastic Blocks (09 76 00) – NOT USED
Special Wall Surfacing (09 77 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 09 80 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Acoustic Treatment)
Acoustic Treatment (09 80 00)
Acoustic Insulation (09 81 00)
Provide at all conference rooms and offices. Refer to Section 09 20 00 and Educational
Specifications for Additional Information on sound control requirements at other areas
Use of standard insulation in lieu of acoustic will not be acceptable. A/E to include
verification as part of Wall Cover Up Observation
Acoustic Finishes (09 83 00)
Provide recommendations from Acoustic Consultant in the following spaces, for review
with FBISD prior to incorporation with design and construction documents:
Auditorium and all Auxiliary Support Spaces
Band, Choir, and Orchestra Halls
Band Practice and Ensemble Areas
Gymnasiums and Indoor Play Areas
Cafeteria/Commons (including Cafetoriums)
Acoustical recommendations by A/E alone are NOT ALLOWED unless qualified to

provide such recommendations
Generally, provide 1” on drywall, 2” on CMU, to be verified by Acoustic Engineer
Provide air space behind wall panels, see detail below
Tectum NOT ALLOWED
Provide allowance for testing of space after installation and prior to substantial
completion; relocate/add panels prior to occupancy
At areas subject to impact, provide impact resistant panels
At practice rooms in fine arts areas, install acoustical wall panels on two adjacent walls
with a chair rail at the bottom of the panel to prevent damage to panel.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 09 80 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Acoustic Treatment)
Acoustic Room Components (09 84 00)
RESERVE
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 09 90 00
Division #09 – Finishes (Painting and Coating)
Painting and Coating (09 90 00)
Use materials with lower VOC durable, complying with Health Code
Refer to LEED Section for additional information concerning utilizing lower VOC
coatings and systems within new buildings
Painting (09 91 00)
Include Schedule for all applications in Project Manual
Finishes shall be eggshell on Drywall, semi-gloss on CMU
Matte, flat, gloss finishes NOT ALLOWED
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces,

operating parts, and labels.
Provide mock-up for all wall paints on scheduled surface, in scheduled space, for
A/E and FBISD Project Manager review and approval at Painting Pre-Install
Meeting
Piping in all exposed areas shall be painted. Provide band (tape/sticker) in public
and concealed areas (above ceiling and in walls). Refer to MEP Sections for
additional information, including colors for ALL PIPING to be COMPLETELY
painted in Mechanical, Electrical, and other Support Areas without ceilings
Attic stock: None
Alkyd paints have higher durability, but higher VOC, are also more work to re-
paint. Some K-12 have excluded use, others retain requirement to use on all trim
and in high traffic areas. There are hybrid, durable water based acrylics on the
market now that should be considered
General Paint Schedule:
Corridors: Semi-gloss
All CMU: Semi-gloss
Page 1 of 4
FBISD 09 90 00
Wet areas (including toilet rooms, showers, and kitchen: Epoxy (See
Below)
Gypsum board: Acrylic latex, eggshell, except as noted above
Traffic Line Marking Paint – Refer to Division 32
Floor under ice machines: Provide same as a locker room floor
Exterior Painting (09 91 13)
Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated low-sheen (eggshell)

acrylic-latex paint for exterior application.
Exterior Full-Gloss Urethane Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd

enamel for exterior application.
Interior Painting (09 91 23)
Sherwin-Williams (Basis of design)
Interior Low-VOC Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex

interior enamel.
Sherwin-Williams; Pro Green 200 Low VOC Interior Latex Enamel

B20W600 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils
Interior Semi gloss Zero VOC Enamel: Factory-formulated semi-gloss enamel for
interior application.
Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic Semi gloss, B66W650:

Applied at a dry film thickness of 2.5 – 4.0 mils
Interior Dryfall Finish Coat: Factory-formulated acrylic finish coat for exposed roof
structure, roof deck, and cementitious wood fiber planks.
Sherwin-Williams: Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42 Series

Interior Semigloss Epoxy: Factory-formulated, two-component, waterbased,
catalyzed epoxy resin for high performance applications.
Sherwin-Williams: Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy B70-200 Series:

Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils
Staining and Transparent Finishing (09 93 00)
Page 2 of 4
FBISD 09 90 00
Refer to Division 06 for additional information on where to apply these finishes
HS Auditorium floor coating on concrete under seating: Euclid Super Floor Coat,
colored or Owner-approved equal.
Decorative Finishing (Textured, Faux, Multi-Color) (09 94 00) – NOT USED
High Performance Coatings (09 96 00)
Abrasion-Resistant Coatings (09 96 12) – DO NOT USE
Graffiti-Resistant Coatings (09 96 23) – DO NOT USE
Marine Coatings (09 96 26)
Not needed if Epoxy used (Training Rooms and Walk-In Coolers)
High-Temperature-Resistant Coatings (09 96 33) – NOT USED
Chemical-Resistant Coatings (09 96 35) – NOT USED
Fire-Retardant Coatings (09 96 43) – NOT USED
Intumescent Painting (09 96 46)
Refer to Division 07 (Fire Protective Coatings)
Elastomeric Coatings (09 96 53)
Provide on inside face of Service Area screen walls and Dumpster Enclosures IN
LIEU of Standard Exterior Paints
Epoxy Coatings (09 96 56)
Provide in all wet areas, including shower rooms, toilet rooms, and kitchen walls
High-Build Glazed Coatings (09 96 59) – DO NOT USE
Textures Plastic Coatings (09 96 63) – DO NOT USE
Aggregate Wall Coatings (09 96 66) – DO NOT USE
Special Coatings (09 97 00)
Page 3 of 4
FBISD 09 90 00
Marker wall paint (Wall Talker) – Suggested use of this alternate material will be
considered by Fort Bend ISD, verify locations and intent with FBISD Project Manager prior to including
within design documents.
Page 4 of 4
FBISD 10 00 00
Division #10 – Specialties (Introduction)
Division 10 (Specialties) Intent:
Information provided within this section relates to specialty equipment and furnishings, including
specific preferences of Fort Bend ISD with regards to these specialty products. Model numbers,
manufacturers, and installation methods are listed, where appropriate, with details, photos and
cut sheets (where available)
Table of Contents for Package 10:
1) General Requirements for Specialties (This Section)

2) Information Specialties (10 10 00)
3) Interior Specialties (10 20 00)
4) Fireplaces and Stoves – NOT USED
5) Safety Specialties (10 40 00)
6) Storage Specialties (10 50 00)
7) Exterior Specialties (10 70 00)
8) Other Specialties (10 80 00)
General Requirements for Specialties (10 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of Specialties (10 01 00)
No special considerations. Refer to individual sub-divisions for information
Common Work Results for Specialties (10 05 00)
Consider durable items with long-term (low) maintenance in mind
Schedules for Specialties (10 06 00)
Signage Schedule should be provided (along with Door Schedule), INCLUDE in design
documents. Allowance will NOT be permitted for building signage (interior or exterior)
No schedule needed for toilet and bath accessories, clearly indicate on enlarged toilet
plans. DO NOT rely on general notes
Commissioning of Specialties (10 08 00) – NONE
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 10 10 00
Division #10 – Specialties (Information Specialties)
Information Specialties (10 10 00)
Visual Display Units (10 11 00)
Chalkboards (10 11 13) – NOT USED
Markerboards (10 11 16)
This section includes rolled-good marker wall-covering, not currently used on

Fort Bend ISD projects. Marker wall paint included in Division 09. Suggested
uses of these alternate materials will be considered by Fort Bend ISD, verify
locations and intent with FBISD Project Manager prior to including within design
documents.
Boards must be magnetic; low gloss, white. No Grey Allowed
Refer to Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines for information on

location and quantity per space (linear foot of marker board per room)
Boards shall be 5’ in height at projection screen locations. At all other locations

boards shall be 4’ in height (all lengths to be shown on design documents in
increments of four (4): i.e., 4’, 8’, 12’, 16’).
Allow for 2’ between edge of marker board and entry door frame (for switch, etc.,
installation)
Provide two flag holders per room (not per board)
Provide blocking in wall for map rail/tack strip to accommodate weight of maps,
especially in social studies rooms. Ensure marker board is secured into each
stud behind map rail/tack strip.
Provide continuous box-type aluminum chalk tray with slanted front and cast
aluminum end closures at each board
Do not provide chalk tray at Gymnasiums, if marker board provided
Tackboards (10 11 23)
Tack boards to be ¼” cork laminated to ¼” hardboard in an extruded aluminum

frame with a vinyl fabric finish.
All boards shall be 4’ in height (all lengths to be shown on design documents in

increments of four (4): i.e., 4’, 8’, 12’, 16’)
Page 1 of 5
FBISD 10 10 00
Sliding Visual Display Units (10 11 33) – NOT USED
Visual Display Conference Units (10 11 36) – NOT USED
Visual Display Rails (10 11 39)
Tack strip: Provide No. 74 Deluxe Display Rail as manufactured by Claridge.

Strip to be 2” overall width with flat end stops at all exposed ends. Provide in
Corridors as indicated within Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines.
Visual Display Wall Panels (10 11 43) – NOT USED
Visual Display Fabrics (10 11 46)
For back of display cases and tack walls (see below for additional information on
display cases)
Display Cases (10 12 00)
Provide as indicated in Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines as follows:
Not Pre-manufactured units
Sliding glass front, frameless, with lock
Provide lighting switched separately, on same circuit as corridor (to allow for
control by building automation system)
Provide glass adjustable shelves and brackets with tackboard back (not sides)
Directories (10 13 00) – NOT USED
Signage (10 14 00)
NO ALLOWANCES. Always include signage, only names and numbers MAY need to be
verified. Include directional signage in design and construction documents.
Room Signs and Directional Signs
Use FBISD standard color, design and verbiage (see below), for ease of
replacement and repair by District maintenance staff.
Laminate for room signage shall be Wilsonart “Caldera Grey” laminate. If not
available, Wilsonart “Silicon EV” 4811-60 can be used in its place.
Page 2 of 5
FBISD 10 10 00
Approved Signage Vendors
AGP (Architectural Graphic Products)
South Texas Graphics
Others can be considered, if they can conform to FBISD Standards. Verify with
FBISD Project Manager.
Policy and Procedure
Design and Construction Department recommends and reviews room numbering

system with Principal and Director of Safe and Secure Schools.
Graphic (signage) schedule to be prepared by Architect, included within Design

and Construction documents
Renovation work – Provide new signs but use existing numbering system
Use a triple digit numbering system with no alpha letters for compatibility with
EMS, Fire Alarm and Security Systems.
Contractor to label EMS, Fire Alarm and Security System to actual room number
and not plan numbers. In a renovation, include in specifications to have all room
numbers impacted by room numbering change to be reprogrammed regardless if
any renovation was done within those rooms.
Architect to provide District a reproducible floor plan with room numbers on 8 ½”

x 11” or 8 ½” x 14” size paper. Room numbers must be legible at this size. If this
is a renovation or addition, provide file to Owner to be coordinated by Owner into
one new overall plan. These files will be utilized for Fire Exit plans, and other
District uses.
Back plate required at glass installations
Provide “Maximum Occupancy” signage at all Public/Common/Meeting areas

with appropriate capacity indicated (verify with Authority Having Jurisdiction and
FBISD Project Manager), match size and color of other building signage, with
large readily visible text
Avoid mounting on split face masonry
Room signs MUST BE installed prior to substantial completion for punch list
coordination and furniture delivery, NO EXCEPTIONS
Page 3 of 5
FBISD 10 10 00
Exterior School Letters
Building name and address number to be sized for viewing from street and front
parking lot. Name to be written in all capital letters.
Font is to be easily readable. Several easy to read fonts are: Helvetica, Friz
Quadrata and Optima. Avoid Times, Roman and others with serifs.
Finish to have good contrast with building surface for easy visibility. Provide
matte or flat finish only, no semi-gloss or gloss, to reduce glare.
Mounting on pilasters, split face and other projections to be avoided.
Mounting over building control or expansion joints to be avoided to allow for ease
of future maintenance of joint.
The name of the school is established in late spring by the principal and a
committee. Verify name with FBISD Project Manager.
Exterior signage
Show all site signage on the site plan. Coordinate internal traffic signage with
FBISD Project Manager, Transportation Department, Safe and Secure Schools
Department, and FBISD Police.
Directional signage (Staff Parking, Student Drop-Off, etc.), accessible parking

signage, and traffic signage (One-Way, Stop, etc.) to be traffic quality, made of
aluminum and mounted on minimum 2” schedule 40 galvanized pipe or square
equivalent. Provide bond breaker between dissimilar metals. Pole is to be a
minimum of 36” into sub-grade and set in concrete for stability.
NOTE: Signage located within an ADA accessible path that is 24” wide or less is
considered a “free-standing object mounted on a post or pylon” and is allowable
under the guidelines noted for such in “Protruding Objects”. If a sign is wider
than 24”, it will be treated as a protruding object and should either be mounted on
a 2 x 12 post (approx.) so that the edges of the sign are not an obstruction
(projecting more than 4”) OR it is preferred, if possible, to locate the signage out
of the ADA accessible path instead.
Drama Marquee (interior, high school)
Provided by South Texas Graphics, Bob Woods – 10216 Georgibelle, #800,

Houston, 77043, 713-467-4499
Page 4 of 5
FBISD 10 10 00
Approximate 7’-0” wide x 2’-8” tall x 9” deep recess-mounted painted sheet metal
cabinet with steel angle support frame and 3/16” thick translucent plastic face
ribbed for placement of individual copy letters.
Provide recessed porcelain sockets and incandescent 11 watt bulbs spaced on

approximate 4” centers around perimeter of sign face. Lights controlled by 3-
circuit solid state “chaser” unit.
Food Court Signage (located over each serving line opening in cafeteria)
Signs finish dimensions are approximately 2’ high by 10’ in length. Camera-

ready art work should be provided as 2’-4” x 10’-4” so design ‘wraps’ edges.
Coordinate each design with school principal and with Director of Child Nutrition
High School has five lines, two of which are customized with the school’s logo.
Middle School has three food signs, all standard design. May have school’s
logo; verify with Owner
Menu system details and colors to be coordinated with Director of Child Nutrition
at the time the shop drawings are submitted.
Elementary has no food signs or menu system
Supplied by AGP signs
Dedication Plaque – Furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor.
Information Kiosks (10 18 00) – NOT USED
Page 5 of 5
FBISD 10 20 00
Division #10 – Specialties (Interior Specialties)
Interior Specialties (10 20 00)
Compartments and Cubicles (10 21 00)
Toilet Compartments (10 21 13)
Provide only solid phenolic partitions.
Acceptable manufacturers are Capitol, Columbia and Bobrick
Floor mounted, continuously overhead braced system. Brace back to rear or

side walls. Provide continuous metal brackets and angles for support of all
panels – IMPORTANT
Provide all stainless steel hardware and fasteners, including shoes (no chrome or
brass); no plastic hardware allowed
At secondary schools, provide continuous hinges
All fasteners to be vandal-resistant including the wall attachment
Provide coat hook on inside of all stall doors
Provide astragal on the door edge at ES and MS to provide closure at open joints
for the purpose of additional privacy by the user.
Shower and Dressing Compartments (10 21 16)
Provide at Middle School Girl’s Shower Rooms (vinyl, anti-microbial, with

stainless tracks). Boy’s shower compartments shall be CMU at this grade level.
Cubicle Curtains and Tracks (10 21 23)
Curtain to be 100% Trivera polyester inherently flame resistant fabric with flame
retardant 100% nylon ½” mesh drop as manufactured by General Cubicle Co. or
approved equivalent.
Extend curtain to within 12” of finish floor
Track to be extruded aluminum continuous track, IFC-100 roller carrier, satin

anodized finish, surface mount
Mounting of track to be coordinated with reflected ceiling plan to avoid conflict

with lights, louvers and other ceiling mounted devices.
Page 1 of 6
FBISD 10 20 00
Partitions (10 22 00)
Wire Mesh Partitions (10 22 13)
Mesh to be ¾” diamond pattern wire of not less than 10 gauge extending from
floor to ceiling. Wire mesh doors to be swing type and shall be constructed to
prevent the lock release to be tripped by something being stuck through the wire
mesh.
Finish to be pre-finished galvanized, verify color with FBISD Project Manager
Expanded Metal Partitions (10 22 14) – DO NOT USE
Demountable Partitions (10 22 19)
Ultrawall or equal, no substitutions
Accordion Folding Partitions (10 22 33)
Modernfold and Panelfold are the only acceptable manufacturers unless

otherwise approved in writing by the Owner, prior to being put in the
specifications.
STC 35 minimum
Manually operated pantograph action accordion type, top supported without floor
guides
Tedlar clad heavy duty vinyl with woven fiber backing outer covering
Coiling Partition (10 22 36) – DO NOT USE
Folding Panel Partition (10 22 39)
Modernfold “Acousti-Seal” Model 933 or Owner-approved equal
STC 49 minimum
Top supported, continuously hinged paired panels, 3” thick steel construction

panels with sound seals all around
Page 2 of 6
FBISD 10 20 00
Floor seals shall be of the automatic operating bottom seal type and shall
automatically drop into place as each panel is positioned
Sliding Partitions (10 22 43) – NOT USED
Wall and Door Protection (10 26 00)
Corner Guards (10 26 13)
Locate at all outside corners (non-CMU walls) in high-traffic areas. Especially

important to use a corner guard on partitions with VWC. Type of corner guard to
be used in each situation to be determined in conjunction with Owner.
Options:
Snap-on PVC by Korogard or equal
Clear polycarbonate, 2 ½”, verify height with Owner, screw installation.

Commercial Grade
Stainless steel, 4” at kitchen and at areas subject to very high traffic or

areas subject to damage by movable equipment
Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories (10 28 00)
Refer to Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines for locations, below

for quantities and installation.
Toilet Tissue Dispensers: Owner Provided, Contractor Installed
Paper Towel Dispenser: Owner Provided, Contractor Installed.
Assume unit is 12” X 12” when laying out toilet rooms
PROVIDE 8” MINIMUM RECESS IN WALL TO ENSURE NOT PROTRUDING

OBJECT WHEN INSTALLED
Soap Dispenser: Owner Provided, Contractor Installed
No Feminine Product Dispensers are provided
Feminine Napkin Disposals: Owner Provided, Contractor Installed
Page 3 of 6
FBISD 10 20 00
Electric Hand Dryer:
Fix nozzle in downward position in student restrooms in secondary schools
PROVIDE RECESS IN WALL, IF SEMI-RECESSED UNITS NOT PROVIDED,

TO ENSURE NOT PROTRUDING OBJECT
The following are the guidelines for determining number of toilet accessories:
Elementary
Boys and Girls restrooms
1 paper towel dispenser for 1-2 sinks

2 paper towel dispensers for 3-5 sinks
3 paper towel dispensers for 6 or more sinks
1 soap dispenser at every sink (if sinks are closely spaced, can locate 1
dispenser for use by a sink on either side; always locate soap dispenser at
ADA sink)
1 toilet tissue dispenser at every toilet
Adult restrooms
1 paper towel dispenser (as noted above)

1 soap dispenser at every sink
1 sanitary disposal to be shared between 2 toilets (women’s restroom and unisex
restrooms)
Art rooms, Science rooms, Workrooms, Lounge, etc.
1 paper towel dispenser per sink (if sinks are nearby each other, a dispenser can
be shared)
ADA sink)
Kitchen
Per health department guidelines but generally:

1 paper towel dispenser at every sink
Middle School
Page 4 of 6
FBISD 10 20 00
Boys and Girls restrooms
1 electric hand dryer (semi-recessed preferred) for 1-2 sinks

2 electric hand dryer (semi-recessed preferred) for 3-5 sinks
3 electric hand dryer (semi-recessed preferred) for 6 or more sinks
ADA sink)
1 sanitary disposal to be shared between 2 toilets
Adult restrooms
1 paper towel dispenser (as noted above)

1 sanitary disposal to be shared between 2 toilets (women’s restroom and unisex
restrooms)
Art rooms, Science rooms, Life Management
be shared) – Note that if there are upper cabinets, use the ‘under-counter’
version dispensers so that there are no clearance problems between the
millwork. However, if a dispenser can be located near the sink where there is
no upper cabinet, then provide one at that location.
Workrooms, Lounge, Special Education, etc.
be shared) – Note that if there are upper cabinets, use the ‘under-counter’
version dispensers so that there are no clearance problems between the
millwork. However, if a dispenser can be located near the sink where there is
no upper cabinet, then provide one at that location.
ADA sink)
Showers
Page 5 of 6
FBISD 10 20 00
Boys: 1 soap dispenser between each two gang shower devices. Locate on
perimeter walls and mechanically fasten to wall.
Girls: 1 soap dispenser at each shower
Kitchen
Per health department guidelines but generally:

1 paper towel dispenser at every sink – Note that if there are upper cabinets, use
the ‘under-counter’ version dispensers so that there are no clearance
problems between the millwork. However, if a dispenser can be located near
the sink where there is no upper cabinet, then provide one at that location.
High School
Same as middle school, but don’t forget the restrooms and showers in the Field
House. Also look for sinks in other areas not provided in a middle school such as
Ag, Marine Science, Photo Lab, etc.
Page 6 of 6
FBISD 10 40 00
Division #10 – Specialties (Safety Specialties)
Safety Specialties (10 40 00)
Emergency Access and Information Cabinets (10 41 00)
Fire Department Plan Cabinets (10 41 13) – NOT NEEDED
Emergency Key Cabinets (10 41 16)
Indicate location for KNOX BOX at main entry, visible from nearest fire lane. In
accordance with Hardware 08 70 00 the knox box is purchased by FBISD Design
& Construction Department and installed by the Contractor.
Emergency Aid Specialties (10 43 00)
Defibrillator Cabinets (AED) (10 43 13)
No cabinet provided in contract, but A/E to locate (niche) on plans in public

accessible location, near front entry (ensure not protruding object per TAS,
hence reason for niche)
Coordinate additional locations with FBISD, as units may be purchased and

installed in other locations (adjacent to gymnasiums, for example)
First Aid Cabinets (10 43 16) – By FBISD, however, in Science Labs A/E to indicate
location on FF&E plans, near eye wash and other safety equipment
Fire Protection Specialties (10 44 00)
Provide Cabinets AND Extinguishers. Coordinate with FBISD for purchase of

extinguishers through current district vendor
Provide for wall-hung extinguishers in all mechanical rooms
At all non-supervised areas (for example, corridors, commons, etc.): Provide fully
recessed fire extinguisher cabinets. Provide stainless steel non-locking door, magnetic
catch, pull handles and solid front panel
Provide fire extinguisher for each science lab
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 10 50 00
Division #10 – Specialties (Storage Specialties)
Storage Specialties (10 50 00)
Lockers (10 51 00)
Metal Lockers (10 51 13)
Minimum gauges are as follows:
Non-athletic lockers – 16 ga. Door with 20 ga. Body
Athletic lockers – 14 ga. Door, 16 ga. Upright and 18 ga. Back.
Provide piano (continuous) hinges ONLY
All lockers to be quiet operation with a recessed handle. Handles to be

stationary type with combination lock and padlock hole. Combination locks are
not required on PE athletic and team lockers.
All lockers to have all welded frame construction, no knock-down type
All lockers to have a sloped top, including athletic lockers
Provide double contact point latches on double tier lockers and three contact
point latches on single tier lockers
Coordinate numbering system with Owner. Subcontractor to submit locker

numbering system for Owner review based on these criteria:
• First floor begins with 1001 and continues around the building
• Locker 1001 is in the same general area as the lowest classroom
number or area and follows the building number sequencing
• Second floor lockers begin with 2001 and continue sequentially similar
to the first floor
• PE lockers begin with 3001 and continue sequentially
• HS Field House locker numbers begin with 4001 (freshman lockers)
and continue through upper classmen, in order
In a renovation, specify for all lockers to match the existing school master key.
In new construction, specify all lockers to have a school master key.
All lockers are to have built-in combination locks with five set ups
Page 1 of 4
FBISD 10 50 00
Specify that control chart should be issued to District in both hard copy and
electronic format.
Key athletic lockers under the same key number as PE lockers
Provide ADA/TAS lockers as required. (Consult codes but generally this means
an ADA/TAS acceptable opening mechanism within acceptable reach and a shelf
within acceptable reach.)
Lockers to be set on 4” concrete base, no CMU or wood
Sizes of lockers are indicated in Educational Specifications and Design

Guidelines along with Quantities. Special characteristics of lockers, other than
what has been noted above, are as follows:
Corridor Lockers. Shop-applied baked enamel finish from standard color

line (NO CUSTOM COLORS). Standard louvered door with solid back,
divider and end panels and side closure panel.
Food Service Lockers. Same type as Corridor Lockers.
Athletic Lockers. Shop-applied baked epoxy enamel finish from standard

color line (NO CUSTOM COLORS). PE lockers shall have ventilated
louver solid front faced doors with solid back, divider and end panels and
side cloure panels. Team lockers shall have wire mesh fronts.
For ALL LOCKERS, provide alternate (second-choice) color selection from a

second manufacturer, indicate in Finish Schedule
Wood Lockers (10 51 16) – DO NOT USE
PLAM Lockers (10 51 23) – DO NOT USE
Plastic Lockers (10 51 26) – NOT USED
Phenolic Lockers (10 51 29) – NOT USED
Wire Mesh Storage Lockers (10 51 43) – NOT USD
Locker Room Benches (10 51 53)
Accessible benches in locker rooms MUST BE provided. Provide in EVERY

dressing area, including within wire mesh partition athletic areas at high schools
Page 2 of 4
FBISD 10 50 00
Provide with solid phenolic resin tops, galvanized steel legs
Postal Specialties (10 55 00)
Pre-manufactured steel mailboxes may be used at Administration Mail Rooms in lieu of

PLAM, verify with FBISD Project Manager
Storage Assemblies (10 56 00)
Metal Storage Shelving (10 56 13)
Coordinate location and height with Owner, refer to Educational Specifications for
Sizes and Quantities
All shelving to be properly braced and/or attached to wall
Each shelf to be able to carry a uniform load of 750 pounds
Each shelving unit should have a shelf as close to the floor as possible for
stability purposes.
Color from standard line, NO CUSTOM COLORS
Do not use metal shelving in science labs or prep rooms
Fabricated Wood Storage Shelving (10 56 16)
For use only in Chemical Storage
Provide drip lip at front and back to control spills and prevent accidental fall of
chemicals from shelving units
Wall Mounted Standards and Shelving (10 56 17)
No special considerations, for use only in closets and display cases
Wire Storage Shelving (10 56 23) – NOT USED
Mobile Storage Shelving (10 56 26) – NOT USED
Storage Racks (10 56 29) – NOT USED
Page 3 of 4
FBISD 10 50 00
Page 4 of 4
FBISD 10 70 00
Division #10 – Specialties (Exterior Specialties)
Exterior Specialties (10 70 00)
Exterior Protection (10 71 00)
Exterior Sun Control Devices (10 71 13)
Consider for use on south side of building, coordinate with LEED

Requirements; however, utilize ONLY passive systems, to be approved by
FBISD Project Manager prior to incorporating with design documents
Protective Covers (10 73 00)
Awnings (10 73 13) – NOT USED
Canopies (10 73 16)
Front entry and bus loading areas: Internal drainage system, tied to underground
drainage system.
Rear areas: Internal drainage of canopy; downspouts can discharge onto areas
adjacent to paving, however, it is preferred that they are tied in to the
underground drainage system. Discuss with Owner.
Finish is to be Kynar or anodized aluminum (not standard baked polyester)
Acceptable manufacturer: Avadek or equal
Walkway Coverings (refer to Canopies) (10 73 26)
Marquees (10 73 33)
Exterior School Marquee
Republic of Texas Signage, Inc. or equal
Provide concrete pad for sign (EXTEND 4” BEYOND EDGE, FOR

MAINTENANCE). Pad to drain to adjacent ground.
Masonry to match building; coordinate with Owner. Provide galvanized steel

lintel, water-resistant cap (slope to drain) and weep hole construction.
Marquee is two-sided, internally lit. Elevation of front and back are identical.
Marquee to be located on site so that message portion is nearest to the street.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 10 70 00
Division #10 – Specialties (Exterior Specialties)
Marquee sign to have 1/8” clear Plexiglas cover with a continuous hinge and lock
Provide aluminum poles to hold marquee door open while changing out letters
Power is to be 20 amps, 277 lighting, verify. Provide 2 spare 2” PVC conduits

from MDF room in building and stubbed up in marquee for future use.
Marquee illumination to be tied into perimeter site lighting circuit and controlled
by Energy Management System (EMS).
Marquee sign frame color to be duronodic bronze aluminum, factory coated.
Provide one set of letters and numbers kit (standard font letters).
Follow all architectural signage regulations of Local AHJ and obtain all permits
prior to construction.
FBISD to provide camera-ready logo graphics
Manufactured Exterior Specialties (10 74 00)
Exterior Clocks (10 74 13) – DO NOT USE
Flagpoles (10 75 00)
One piece construction, 35’ tapered aluminum, internal halyard with internal winch
Finish to be 80 grit clear anodized satin, unless otherwise required by the HOA or other
governing entity.
Provide 2 aluminum swivel snaps per flag. Coordinate with size of flags. Consult Owner
for size of flag, typically 4’ x 6’. Typically 2 flags per one flagpole.
Standard is to locate flagpoles so that flags are no closer than 2’ from each other when
fully out-stretched horizontally
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 10 80 00
Division #10 – Specialties (Other Specialties)
Other Specialties (10 80 00)
Pest Control Devices (10 81 00)
Bird Control Devices (10 81 13)
No special considerations at this time
Insect Control Devices (10 81 16) – NOT USED
Rodent Control Devices (10 81 19) – NOT USED
Bat Control Devices
Verify need with FBISD Project Manager
Consider possible nuisance of all pests above when designing facilities for FBISD
Grilles and Screens (10 82 00) – NOT USED
Flags and Banners (10 83 00)
Purchased by FF&E
Security Mirrors and Domes (10 86 00)
Consider at Clinic to ensure no blind spots
Goal of A/E should be to design spaces so that these devices not needed
Verify other possible needs with FBISD Project Manager
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 11 00 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Introduction)
Division 11 (Equipment) Intent:
This section contains information regarding size, type, and installation of all non-MEP
equipment within new and renovated facilities. Locations where equipment is required should
be found in Educational Specifications, but may be referenced in this document for clarity.
Equipment selected is typical for K-12 projects within Fort Bend ISD, but also includes
information on equipment within specialty (auxiliary) projects, such as transportation centers, Ag
facilities, etc.
Some sections are reserved for future equipment needs, not yet determined. Some types of
equipment are prohibited for use within Fort Bend ISD and are noted as such.
1) General Requirements for Equipment (This Section)

2) Vehicle and Pedestrian Equipment (11 10 00)
3) Security, Detention, and Banking Equipment (11 15 00)
4) Commercial Equipment (11 20 00)
5) Residential Equipment (11 30 0)
6) Food Service Equipment (11 40 00)
7) Educational and Scientific Equipment (11 50 00)
8) Entertainment Equipment (11 60 00)
9) Athletic and Recreational Equipment (11 65 00)
10) Healthcare Equipment (11 70 00)
11) Collection and Disposal Equipment – NOT USED
12) Other Equipment (11 90 00)
General Requirements for Equipment:
Select equipment with long life, high durability, and low maintenance while ensuring lowest
possible up-front costs
Operation and Maintenance of Equipment (11 01 00)
List Special Maintenance Agreements for FBISD in specifications, including

providing sample agreement forms and durations
Operation and Maintenance of Commercial Equipment (11 01 20)
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 11 00 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Introduction)
Operation and Maintenance of Residential Equipment (11 01 30)
Operation and Maintenance of Food Service Equipment (11 01 40)
Operation and Maintenance of Educational and Scientific Equipment (11 01 50)
Operation and Maintenance of Entertainment Equipment (11 01 60)
Operation and Maintenance of Healthcare Equipment (11 01 70)
Operation and Maintenance of Other Equipment (11 01 90)
Common Work Results for Equipment (11 05 00)
Schedules for Equipment (11 06 00)
RESERVE
Commissioning of Equipment (11 08 00)
RESERVE
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 11 10 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Vehicle and Pedestrian Equipment)
Vehicle and Pedestrian Equipment (11 10 00)
Vehicle Service Equipment (11 11 00)
General:
Transportation Centers and CTE Shops only. Most sections reserved so that
information can be added when that type of auxiliary building is needed.
Compressed-Air Vehicle Service Equipment (11 11 13) – RESERVE
Vehicle Lubrication Equipment (11 11 19) – RESERVE
Tire-Changing Equipment (11 11 23) – RESERVE
Vehicle-Washing Equipment (11 11 26)
Bus Wash, verify performance or other preferences
Parking Control Equipment (11 12 00)
Includes Key and Card Access Units, Ticket Dispensers, Meters, Gates and Fee
Collection Equipment – NOT USED
Loading Dock Equipment (11 13 00)
Loading Dock Bumpers (11 13 13)
Provide laminated/stacked recycled tire tread type with galvanized steel angle
anchor plates. ALWAYS anchor to concrete foundation, NEVER building
structure
Pedestrian Control Equipment (11 14 00)
Verify need for metal detectors with FBISD Project Manager. These come with specific
power requirements
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 11 15 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Security, Detention, and Banking Equipment)
Security, Detention, and Banking Equipment (11 15 00)
Vault Equipment (11 16 00)
Safe to be Owner Provided, Owner Installed. Refer to Ed Specs for location, but provide
in location where NOT visible from entry door (provide partition wall to conceal from
view)
All safes are delivered as right-hand reverse. Therefore, placement in the room is of
utmost importance. Ensure that there is ample space for the opening of the door.
Elementary schools – Dimensions are 18” w x 16” d x 25” h (inside dimensions), 25” w x
28” d x 32” h (exterior dim’s). Allow minimum 4” clearance around safe for move-in.
Due to weight of safe (1400 pounds approx.), accommodations to slab must be made.
Verify exact size and weight of safe with FBISD Purchasing
Middle schools – Dimensions are 21” w x 20” d x 45” h (inside dim’s), 28” w x 32” d x 52”
h (exterior dim.’s). Allow minimum 4” clearance around safe for move-in. Due to weight
of safe (2800 pounds approx.), accommodations to slab must be made. Verify exact
size and weight of safe with FBISD Purchasing
High schools – Dimensions are 28” w x 18” d x 65” h (inside dim.’s), 35” w x 30” d x 72”
h (exterior dim.’s). Due to weight of safe (3600 pounds approx.), accommodations to
slab must be made. Verify exact size and weight of safe with FBISD Purchasing
All school kitchens – Dimensions are 14” w x 12” d x 18” h (inside dim.’s), 21” w x 24” d x
25” h (exterior dim.’s). Due to the weight of the safe (950 pounds approx.),
accommodations to slab must be made. Verify exact size and weight of safe with FBISD
Purchasing
Detention Equipment (Pass-Thru Doors and Gun Lockers) (11 19 00)
RESERVE – Required at FBISD Police facilities only
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 11 20 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Commercial Equipment)
Commercial Equipment (11 20 00)
Mercantile and Service Equipment (11 21 00)
Vending Equipment (11 21 23)
Information on where to provide Owner-Furnished Vending Equipment is

included within Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines
Commercial Laundry and Dry Cleaning Equipment (11 23 00)
HS Field House Laundry:
Commercial Washer and Dryer - Contractor Provided, Contractor Installed
Laundry Carts - Contractor Provided, Contractor Installed.
MS Locker Room/PE Laundry:
Commercial Washer and Dryer - Contractor Provided, Contractor Installed
Laundry Carts - Contractor Provided, Contractor Installed.
Commercial Washer and Dryer:
Washer-Extractor:
Electric, 208 volt, 208/240 3 -phase, microprocessor control, 40 lb.

capacity, minimum extractor force 140 g-factor.
Speed Queen, Huebsch or Owner-approved equal.
Dryer:
Natural gas, 208/240 3 -phase, 55 lb. capacity. Dual, manual timer.
Speed Queen, Huebsch or Owner-approved equal.
Laundry carts
Dandux Vinyl-coated (Gloss-tex), 10 bushel, extra duty steel truck with casters
and basket or Owner-approved equal
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 11 20 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Commercial Equipment)
Maintenance Equipment (11 24 00)
Façade Access Equipment (11 24 23)
Window washing anchors and systems (district athletic facility press box)
Facility Fall Protection (11 24 28)
See Above
Photographic Processing Equipment (11 27 00)
Now all digital equipment. Verify Equipment with CTE, provide adequate power
Office Equipment (Computers, Printers, Copiers, Fax Machines) (11 28 00)
By FBISD Purchasing. Refer to Educational Specifications for locations, to coordinate

data and power requirements.
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 11 30 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Residential Equipment)
Residential Equipment (11 30 00)
General:
Locations where equipment is to be provided is included within Educational

Specifications and Design Guidelines
Very important, verify Owner Furnished vs. Contractor Furnished CLEARLY in Design
and Construction documents
Architect to ensure that all appliances are ADA/TAS compliant. Verify current Model
numbers (if noted); these are provided as reference.
Residential Appliances (11 31 00)
Residential Kitchen Appliances (11 31 13)
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. General Electric, www.ge.com

2. Kenmore, www.kenmore.com
3. Maytag Co., www.maytag.com
4. Raytheon Co., www.raytheon.com
5. Whirlpool Home Appliances., www.whirlpool.com
Refrigerator/Freezer. Contractor to adjust door swing when required. ALWAYS

provide full size refrigerator in Clinic.
Design Basis: Kenmore No. 7991(ENERGY STAR)
Size: 65"H x 31-3/4"D x 29-7/8" W
Top Freezer Type: Freestanding, two-door unit; both compartments

frostless, with separate temperature controls; switch for condensation
control heating element at freezer opening; storage features including
adjustable shelves, meat compartment, vegetable crisper(s), butter
conditioning compartment, removable egg trays or bins, door shelves and
not less than 2 ice cube trays; reversible doors; adjustable rollers.
Capacity:
Total volume: 19 cubic feet

Refrigerator volume: 13.7 cubic feet
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 11 30 00
Freezer. 25 cu. ft. capacity
Under counter Refrigerator. Contractor Provided and Installed.
Wall Oven – Electric. GE or Owner-approved equal.
Wall Convection Oven – GE or Owner-approved equal.
Cooktop – Electric. Standard exposed element burner type. GE or Owner-

approved equal.
Exhaust Hood – Provide at ALL cooktops/range. Vent to outside. Provide

separate switch. Coordinate fire protection with AHJ. GE or Owner-approved
equal. DO NOT USE combination hood/microwave unit
Oven/Range Combination – Electric, unless otherwise noted. GE or Owner-

approved equal. Natural gas. GE or Owner-approved equal.
Microwave – If countertop, Contractor to coordinate location with electrical. If

microwave is mounted within casework, Contractor to coordinate electrical.
Provide adequate clearances. Do not combine with exhaust hood.
BEST TO PROVIDE IN UPPER CABINET (SHELF) EXCEPT FOR AT

ACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS (USE COUNTERTOP MODEL)
Design Basis: GE #JEB1860DMWW Microwave oven
Size: 13-1/2”H x 18-13/16” D x 23 7/8”W
1.8 cu. ft. capacity; 1100 watts; Electronic touch controls; Electronic clock/
timer; 10 power levels; Revolving turntable; Child lockout; 120v, 15a.
Under-counter Dishwasher (high temp.) – ASKO D3112W (white door color) or

ASKO D3112SS (stainless steel door color). Controls to be mounted on the face
of the door (not the top edge). Contractor provided and installed.
STAINLESS AT CHEMICAL STORAGE

WHITE AT LIFE SKILLS
INCLUDE POWER AND CONNECTIONS FOR FUTURE DW AT ALL

SCIENCE AREAS
Provide air gap/vent, connect to dishwasher drain line. Ensure located

adjacent to sink so that water drains into sink in the event of clog.
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 11 30 00
Disposal – Locate at life management/life skills lab only. Do not provide at any
ADA/TAS sink due to clearance problems. ¾ horsepower. In-sinkerator, GE or
other Owner-approved equal. Contractor provided and installed.
Residential Laundry Appliances (11 31 23)
Residential Washer and Dryer – Owner Provided; Contractor Installed. MS

Kitchen, Severe Profound classroom. HS Kitchen, Severe Profound, Home Ec.
Residential electric (washer 110, dryer 208/240 single phase), Heavy-Duty
models, roughly 17 cu.ft. capacity or super-capacity. Acceptable manufacturers
Kenmore, GE, Whirlpool, or other Owner-approved equal.
Residential Ceiling Fans (11 34 00)
Exterior, at Day Care areas
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 11 40 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Food Service Equipment)
Food Service Equipment (11 40 00)
General:
Receiving:
No can wash. In lieu of can wash, install hot and cold water mixing faucet with
hose connections within a 3’ x 3’ area that is depressed 1 ½” with all sides sloped
to drain. At perimeter of depressed area, ramp up paving so that an extra 1 ½”
height is added. Connect the drain to the grease trap.
PROVIDE COVER over Can Wash
The drain in the service yard should be located near the kitchen wash-down
area.
The receiving door to be a minimum of 48" wide. No visible outside light can be
seen from the inside when the door is shut.
If receiving door has direct access to outdoors, an air screen to be incorporated

above the door. Preferably on the outside of the building.
A canopy is required above the receiving door. Canopy to be large enough to

protect the delivery person and the product from rain, etc.. Bollards to be
provided to prevent damage from delivery trucks.
Delivery trucks must have a viable delivery zone. Must have proper clearance
for maneuvering around and be able to get within 15' maximum from the
receiving door.
The receiving door to be provided with a peep hole so the employees can see
who is trying to gain access to the facility.
The receiving area to be provided with an audible alarm that can be heard in the
manager's office as well as throughout the kitchen area. The push button switch
to be located on the exterior of the building next to the receiving door.
Proper lighting is required at the receiving area for employee safety.
The manager's office to be located near the receiving door. Office to have
windows to oversee the receiving door as well as the kitchen. The office to be
sized to accommodate the number of employees that will be using it. The
minimum office size is 75 square feet.
Page 1 of 10
FBISD 11 40 00
Restroom and locker area is required. It is preferred that the kitchen staff has a
dedicated restroom / locker area for the kitchen only. The locker room is for
storing personal items only, no changing. A unisex restroom is acceptable. Size
of rooms driven by ADA requirements. Number of lockers depends on size of
staff. Style of lockers to be determined by Owner.
A laundry / mop room is required. Size to accommodate full size clothes washer
and dryer, mop sink, chemical shelving and mop buckets. Broom and mop
hangers for a minimum of Twelve (12) hangers to be provided in the contract.
Storage:
Cold storage assembly to be floorless assemblies whenever possible with tiled

flooring to match the kitchen floor. The size of the units depends on population.
Due to new breakfast requirements, cooler section to be oversized to
accommodate additional load requirements. Layout to maximize shelving
capacity. Shelving to be Four (4) tier high with 74" high posts. Dunnage racks
required, quantity is project dependent.
Dry storage to be tiled to match kitchen floor. Shelving layout to be designed for
maximum capacity. Provide space for safe (provided in contract) and small desk
for counting the money. Shelving to Five (5) tier high with 86" high posts.
Dunnage racks required, quantity is project dependent.
Non-food storeroom may be required to store breakfast carts. Depending on

how the school operates their breakfast program, additional storage may be
required for rack storage.
Preparation / Production:
Specify the following grades of stainless steel:
Working areas: 304 14 gage

Hoods: 304 18 gage
Under and over shelves: 304 16 gage
Legs are also to be stainless steel
No Salvajor kitchen disposals. Only BusBoy is acceptable. 2hp or 3hp 208 volt
three phase.
Stainless steel bakers tables with Three (3) drawer closed base section with
remainder being open for ingredient bins. Minimum of Four (4) ingredient bins.
Page 2 of 10
FBISD 11 40 00
One (1) 60 qt. floor mixer (All Schools) and One (1) 20 qt. mixer with stand (M.S.
and H.S.).
Proofer/Heated Cabinet on middle schools and high schools, not required on

elementary schools.
Food processors required on middle schools and high schools, not required on
elementary schools.
Two compartment sink with disposer and utensil rack. Sink compartments to be
minimum of 24" x 26" x 15" deep with "Richlite" sink covers. Provide One (1)
hose bib assembly and undershelf.
Worktables to have drawer assemblies with locking hasps, undershelves and

overshelves (where applicable). Tables with built-in utilities to bolted to floor.
Quantity and sizes dependent on room layout.
Exhaust hoods are preferred to be waterwash hoods with waterwash control

panels.
District prefers Blodgett convection ovens. Typically Two (2) units in the
elementary schools, Six (6) units in both the middle schools and high schools.
All units to be double stacked. This quantity is subject to population.
Convection steamers: Typically One (1) unit in the elementary schools, Two (2)
units in the middle schools and Three (3) units in the high schools. The
elementary steamers have typically been steam generators too, providing steam
for the adjacent steam kettle. This quantity is subject to population.
The elementary schools require One (1) six burner range and the middle schools
and high schools require One (1) two burner range. All ranges to be provided
with electronic ignition and flame failure.
All the schools to be provided with a steam kettles. The steam kettle at the
elementary are typically interconnected to the convection steamers. The kettles
at the middle schools and high schools are typically self contained and tilting.
The middle schools typically get One (1) tilt braising pan. The high schools
typically get One (1) trunnion kettle.
Trench liners are preferred at steamers, kettles and tilt braising pans.
Page 3 of 10
FBISD 11 40 00
Warewash:
A three compartment sink is required. The sink should include a disposer with
pre-rinse, Two (2) 24" x 26" x 15" Deep sinks and One (1) 30" x 26" x 15" Deep
sink (If space allows, all Three (3) sinks to be 30" x 26" x 15" deep).
The clean and soiled dishtables to be integrally connected with a rack return
track that extends behind the conveyor style dishmachine. Rack return to be
designed per FBISD's standard requirements. Tray drop to be ADA compliant
with stainless steel roll down door. Dishtables to turn down into the dishmachine
and to be sloped to dishmachine to eliminate standing water on drainboards.
Elementary schools to have a pass-thru window with a trash receptacle. The

window to be located next to the tray drop window and is to be trimmed out like
the tray drop window.
High schools are incorporating a pulper system. Somat is the preferred

manufacturer.
Warewash rooms to have a wall mounted reel hose bib for washdown.
Coordinate the heights of the roll-down door opening at the tray wash area,
the tray chute and the wash tray and tray bin. See “Kitchen Tray Chute”
drawing as an example.
Serving:
Prefer combination Servo-Lift mobile tray stacking space, round cutlery bins
and napkin dispenser station inserts, Model A2TCA-SN-B. Trays are 10” x 14”
and napkins are 4 ¼” x 7 ½”.
Menu board system:

Mainstreet (manufacturer)
Illuminated Series model
MS: Four D size modules per unit; HS: Six D size modules per
unit not required at elementary schools
Coordinate mounting kits required (Ceiling vs. Wall)
Coordinate location behind serving counters
Power required in ceiling, switched on a nearby wall
At high schools, provide breakfast menu boards on stands as
required by FBISD
Coordinate with FBISD Director of Child Nutrition.
Page 4 of 10
FBISD 11 40 00
Serving counters:
Elementary Schools: Typically double serving counter with Two (2) Five
(5) hot food wells, Two (2) flat area to pass trays, Two (2) heated plate
shelf, Two (2) frost top, flat counter, beverage counter and Two (2)
cashier counters.
Middle Schools: Typically Two (2) Double counters made up of Two (2)
Five (5) hot food wells, Two (2) Four (4) pan refrigerated cold pans, One
(1) beverage/ice cream dispenser and One (1) double cashier unite. The
M.S. also have One (1) snack bar counter that is separate from the
traditional counters.
High Schools: Typically Three (3) double serving counters. Counters to

be a mix of hot food wells, heated plate shelves, heated merchandisers,
refrigerated cold pans, flat top counters, ice cream dispensers, beverage
dispensers and double cashier units. Counters will be menu driven.
Middle schools and high schools require stainless steel guide rails to
contain and direct student flow throughout the serving area.
Elementary and middle schools typically have pass-thru holding cabinets

with universal angle iron slides on 3" centers. Stainless steel exterior with
aluminum interiors. Dutch doors with locks on each door. Electrical and
thermostats to be located on kitchen side of unit.
High schools typically have roll through hold cabinets with dutch doors on
the serving side. Stainless steel exterior with aluminum interiors. Ramp,
electrical and thermostat all on kitchen side.
A large ice cream dispensing cabinet to be provided behind the

elementary counters.
Middle schools and high schools are provided with stainless steel back
counters. Coordinate open / closed base construction with individual
project needs/design.
High school to be designed with display cooking in mind. Provide One (1)
double stacked conveyor oven within visual range of students. A double
stacked conveyor oven is required at the middle schools to, but can be
located within the production area.
Page 5 of 10
FBISD 11 40 00
Foodservice Storage Equipment (11 41 00)
Refrigerated Food Storage Cases (11 41 13)
Cabinets to have stainless steel exteriors and aluminum interiors. Dutch doors
with locks and field reversible hinges. Stainless steel adjustable feet. Two (2)
years parts and labor warranty and Five (5) year compressor warranty. Pass-
thru units: controls and electrical connections to be located on kitchen side not
facing the students.
Walk-In Coolers (11 41 23)
Units to be sized per population. Exposed exterior to be stainless steel with 3'-0"
high diamond tread plate. Interior walls to be embossed aluminum. Walls to be
white embossed smooth ceiling panels. Inside clearance to be 8'-6" from
finished floor. Walk-in to be located within a recess pit with the flooring to match
kitchen floor material. Provide a minimum air gap of 2" between walk-in panels
and building walls. Provide 50' candle lighting. All panels must meet local and
federal codes.
FBISD Preferred Manufacturer: RPT
Walk-In Freezers (11 41 26)
Units to be sized per population. Exposed exterior to be stainless steel with 3'-0"
high diamond tread plate. Interior walls to be embossed aluminum. Walls to be
white embossed smooth ceiling panels. Inside clearance to be 8'-6" from
finished floor. Walk-in to be located within a recess pit with the flooring to match
kitchen floor material. Provide a minimum air gap of 2" between walk-in panels
and building walls. Provide 50' candle lighting. All panels must meet local and
federal codes.
Foodservice Shelving (11 41 33)
Cold storage shelving to be Four (4) tier high open grid shelving with 74" high
posts. Shelving to be high dense polymer with steel re-enforced framing.
Shelving overlays to be dishwasher safe.
Dry storage shelving to be Five (5) tier high open grid shelving with 86" high
posts. Shelving to be high dense polymer with steel re-enforced framing.
Shelving overlays to be dishwasher safe.
Page 6 of 10
FBISD 11 40 00
Pot & pan shelving to be Four (4) tier high open grid shelving with 62" high posts.
Four (4) N.S.F. approved non-marking swivel locking casters. Security screen
with locking doors around entire shelving unit. Shelving to be high dense
polymer with steel re-enforced framing. Shelving overlays to be dishwasher safe.
Food Preparation Equipment (11 42 00)
Food Preparation Appliances (11 42 13)
All schools require a 60 qt. floor mixer, Slicer w/ stand, mobile ingredient bins,
worktables, can opener, prep sinks and at least One (1) disposer. Refer to
above for further information.
Food Preparation Surfaces (11 42 16)
All working surfaces to be 14 gauge 304 stainless steel. Overshelves and

undershelves to be 16 gauge 304 stainless steel. All legs to be stainless steel
and adjustable. Flanged feet to be stainless steel with rust-resistant molly bolts
securing them to the floor. Counter corners to be radius, no square outside
corners. Prep counters with sinks to be marine edge, baker's tables to be
equipment with stainless steel flour troughs along the entire front and standard
worktables to have 2" square turndowns. Worktables adjacent to walls to have
backsplashes secured to adjacent wall and sealed.
Food Delivery Carts (11 43 00)
Food Delivery Carts (11 43 13)
Heavy duty 18 gauge stainless steel utility carts with Two (2) swivel casters and
Two (2) fixed. Three (3) shelves, 700 lb capacity with extended perimeter
bumpers. Four (4) at the elementary schools, Eight (8) at the middle schools and
high schools. Confirm final count with owner for each project.
Universal angle pan racks, fully welded aluminum framing with Four (4) N.S.F.
approved non-marking casters (Two (2) with brakes). Adjustable angle iron
slides. Perimeter bumpers and enclosed base. (Omit bumpers and provide heat
resistant casters on roll-in racks)
Food Cooking Equipment (11 44 00)
All gas equipment to be provided with 4'-0" long dual swivel gas quick disconnect
hoses with 3'-0" long wall restraint cables.
Page 7 of 10
FBISD 11 40 00
Commercial Ranges (11 44 13)
On Six (6) burner ranges, provide convection oven base with stainless steel front
and sides. Provide 5" high flue at rear.
All ranges to be equipment with electronic ignition with flame failure kits.
Stainless steel modular bases on ranges too small for oven bases. Stainless
steel adjustable legs. Rear gas connection, cap and cover front manifolds.
Commercial Ovens (11 44 16)
FBISD prefers Blodgett model number DFG-100 Double convection ovens with
glass doors, stainless steel front and sides. Five (5) oven racks per oven.
Stainless steel adjustable legs.
Food Dispensing Equipment (11 46 00)
Serving counter configuration may change due to building constraints, but the
standard components described prior must be incorporated into each design.
Service Line Equipment (11 46 16)
FBISD prefers Mod-U-Serve MCT series counters. Stainless steel fold down tray
slides and plastic laminate removable front panels. N.S.F. non-marking
adjustable swivel casters with brakes. stainless steel finished end panels.
Individual electrical connects, no daisy chains. Breath protectors to meet new
code requirements. Single tier with heat lamps and display lights at hot food
counters and two tiers with display lights at cold food.
Ice Machines (11 47 00)
Locate a drain under ice machine. Power, drain and water supply must be within 10’ of
ice machine. Machine must work with all industry standard dispensers and bins; ensure
machine and bin provided work together. Provide flake or cube as designated.
Cube:
Ice-O-Matic 800# Cube Machine: Model ICE0806*A or current model equivalent.

Ice-makers are air-cooled, corrosion-proof, 304 stainless steel inside and out,
electro-mechanical controls, R-404A non ozone-depleting refrigerant, classic
cube shape.
Page 8 of 10
FBISD 11 40 00
Bin:
Ice-O-Matic 600# Bin: Model B-55PS or current model equivalent. Bin is low-
profile, insulated, with polyethylene bin liner, and has adjustable legs for leveling.
Kitchen:
Elementary and middle schools get One (1) Manitowoc model IY-0454A ice
maker on model number B-570 ice bin. Ice-makers are air-cooled,
corrosion-proof, 304 stainless steel inside and out, electro-mechanical
controls, R-404A non ozone-depleting refrigerant, half dice cube. Stainless
steel adjustable legs. Cord and plug assembly.
High schools get One (1) Manitowoc model IY-1404A ice maker on model
number B-970 ice bin. Ice-makers are air-cooled, corrosion-proof, 304
stainless steel inside and out, electro-mechanical controls, R-404A non
ozone-depleting refrigerant, half dice cube. Stainless steel adjustable legs.
Unit to be hard wired with an adjacent electrical disconnect switch. Provide
One (1) stainless steel trench liner in front of unit. Provide One (1) Follet
Smart Cart 75 ice caddy with Six (6) totes.
All ice makers to come with an Everpure pre-filter and water filter system
sized for the associated ice maker. The water supply to filter to be hard
copper plumbed. Provide a 60" long stainless steel beaded flex hose from
water filter to ice maker. Water filter to be located in an easily accessible
located so that a typical kitchen worker will be able to change the filters.
Cleaning and Disposal Equipment (11 48 00)
Prep area should have at least One (1) 3hp/208 volt/Three phase disposer
(Salvajor #300-CA-18-ARSS-LD). Warewash area should have at least One (1)
5hp/208 volt/three phase disposer (Salvajor #500-CA-18-ARSS-LD).
Each school should get One (1) Hatco C-30 compact booster heater
interconnected to the dishmachine. Unit is recommended to be 480 volt three
phase, but is dependent on field conditions.
High schools may require Somat pulper system. Coordinate with FBISD on a
project by project basis.
Page 9 of 10
FBISD 11 40 00
Commercial Dishwashers (11 48 13)
Elementary and middle schools require One (1) Hobart Model No. CL44e
conveyor with vent cowls. 15 KW tank heater, single point connection 480 volt
three phase when available, drain tempering kit, table limit switch and vent fan
control switch. Chamber height to accommodate sheet pans. Unit to be
interconnected to adjacent booster heater.
High schools require One (1) Hobart Model No. CL64e conveyor with vent cowls.
15 KW tank heater, single point connection 480 volt three phase when available,
drain tempering kit, table limit switch and vent fan control switch. Chamber
height to accommodate sheet pans. Unit to be interconnected to adjacent
booster heater.
Page 10 of 10
FBISD 11 50 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Educational and Scientific Equipment)
Educational and Scientific Equipment (11 50 00)
Library Equipment (11 51 00)
Automated Book Storage and Retrieval Systems (11 51 13)
See below for Theft Detection System
Book Depositories (11 51 16) (Book Drop)
Provide complete stainless steel assembly for exterior book depositories.
Interior book drops are wood and constructed to match the circulation desk – this
is not a stand alone unit but fits under the circulation desk under a return slot for
books that fall into the drop.
Coordinate height of book drop with depressible book truck and circulation desk
Acceptable: Auth Florence Book or equal Depository Model # CCIIRL
Book drop slots inside library at circulation desk are part of Library Furnishings
(Division 12), not this Section
Book Theft Protection Equipment (11 51 19)
Security System:
3M Model 3800 or equal Direct Mounted Book Security Detection Gate

(Middle Schools)
3M Model 2302 or equal (High Schools)
Locate one Detection System at the main entrance/exit to the library
Also specify the additional equipment:
• One 3M Model 966 or equal in-counter book check at the circulation

desk
• Two 3M Model 2004 or equal desensitizers at the circulation desk
• One 3M Model 951 or equal desensitizer hand held unit
• One 3M Model 930 or equal desensitizer mobile unit
• One 3M or equal approved power line conditioner for the security
detection systems
Page 1 of 6
FBISD 11 50 00
Locate the security detection systems so that magnetic field does not interfere
with computers. 3M literature identifies this distance to be at least 7 feet for
optimum performance. Between 4 and 7 feet, a metal shelf may be required at
the computer terminal.
Computer terminals are not allowed within a distance less than 4 feet from the
closest detection panel. Verify with current 3M standards.
For library shelving, see Division 12, Library Furniture and Shelving.
Library Stack Systems (11 51 23) – NOT USED, refer to Educational Specifications and
Division 12 for Library Furnishing Requirements
Audio-Visual Equipment (11 52 00)
Projection Screens (11 52 13)
Manual projection screens and ceiling-mounted brackets/clips to be provided and

installed by Contractor. Coordinate with FBISD Vendor for Ceiling-Mounted Data
Projector installation. Marker boards shall be used in classrooms at projector
screen locations in lieu of projection screens. Please refer to the Ed Specs for
locations.
Acceptable manufacturer, Da-Lite or Draper “Star”
Motorized projection screen: Ceiling, recessed mount
Acceptable manufacturer, Da-Lite or Draper
All motorized screens to have a twist lock plug
Elementary School:
Cafetorium stage, provide motorized screen due to height (12’ tall x 10’
wide with extra 5’ drop).
Library, provide motorized screens due to height at library reading area

and one at small group study table/chairs area (each 70” x 70”).
All classrooms. Provide 5’ high white boards for data projectors located
adjacent to teacher’s workstation.
Middle School:
Page 2 of 6
FBISD 11 50 00
Cafetorium stage, provide motorized screen due to height (10’ wide x

160” tall with extra 6’ drop)
Computer labs: provide motorized screen, 10’ wide x 8’ tall
All classrooms. Provide 5’ high white boards for data projectors located
adjacent to teacher’s workstation.
Projection screen and CEILING-mounted bracket/clips to be provided and

installed by Contractor. Coordinate with third-party Ceiling-Mounted Data
Projector installer.
High School:
Stage, provide motorized screen, 20’ wide x 20’ tall, with 10% extra drop.
Design projection screen mounting to facilitate ease of maintenance
and/or replacement of parts or entirety. Projection screen motor to have
a twist lock plug. Provide lugs for lifting or lowering devices and for
attachment of safety harnesses and other devices.
CONSIDER PUTTING ON MOTORIZED SET
Manual pull-down screens (size per current FBISD Purchasing standard,

70” x 70”, verify) for data projector, etc. Screen to be located adjacent to
teacher’s workstation
Projection screen and ceiling-mounted bracket to be provided and

installed by Contractor. Coordinate with third-party Ceiling-Mounted Data
Projector installer.
Commons/Cafeteria, provide motorized screen, 10’ wide x 10’ tall
Projectors (11 52 16)
Data Projectors (ceiling-mounted), Refer to Division 27 as well as Current

Educational Specifications (Technology Requirements)
Players and Recorders (11 52 19)
Refer to other divisions for sound systems (Division 27)
Audio-Visual Equipment Supports (11 52 23)
Television Bracket
Page 3 of 6
FBISD 11 50 00
Bracket to accommodate a 32“ flat-screen television
Laboratory Equipment (11 53 00)
General:
Locate all equipment, including Owner-Furnished Safety Equipment, on plans, for

coordination with electrical as well as to ensure proper clearances
Lab Tables (supplied by lab casework supplier):
Tables are to be of wood construction, 4” square legs with epoxy resin tops
Acceptable manufacturer is:
Terrill Manufacturing Co. or equal
Eye Wash:
Provide “swing” eye wash fixture at counter-top laboratory application similar to

Bradley S19-270B. No hand-held eye wash
Emergency Shower:
Provide Combination Drench Shower and Eye/Face Wash Unit similar to Bradley
S19-310FW with plastic head and bowl.
Do not provide self-closing valves.
Provide contrasting floor color (i.e. different color vinyl tile) in approx. 9 SF (3 tiles
by 3 tiles square) space below emergency shower.
Provide floor drain at each emergency shower.
Contractor to provide drench shower tester, Bradley Model # S19-330ST or

equal.
Fire Blanket and Cabinet:
Owner provided, Contractor installed.
Page 4 of 6
FBISD 11 50 00
Architect to show detail of locations on construction documents so that

equipment is installed in order to coordinate fully with utilities, exiting and
ADA/TAS clearances and requirements.
Flinn Scientific, Model SE3006.
Glassware Drying Rack:
Contractor provided, Contractor installed.
Locate one above each prep room sink at MS and HS.
Provide model with attached drain and hose
Laboratory Fume Hoods (11 53 13) – RESERVE
Laboratory Equipment Washers (11 53 17)
Refer to Residential Equipment
Laboratory Refrigerators (11 53 23)
Refer to Residential Appliances for appliances used in Science Labs
Laboratory Freezers (11 53 26)
Refer to Residential Appliances for appliances used in Science Labs
Laboratory Controlled-Environment Cabinets (11 53 29)
Acid Storage and Flammable Storage: Owner provided; Contractor installed.
Flinn cabinets acceptable.
Do not vent either cabinet.
Acceptable to use flammable/acid storage combination cabinet
Emergency Safety Appliances (11 53 33) – NOT USED
Service Fittings and Accessories (11 53 43) – NOT USED
Biological Safety Cabinets (11 53 53)
Goggle Sanitizer: Owner provided, Contractor i nstalled.
Page 5 of 6
FBISD 11 50 00
Architect to show detail of locations on construction documents so that

equipment is installed in order to coordinate fully with utilities, exiting and
ADA/TAS clearances and requirements.
Design Basis: Flinn Scientific, Model SE1000 with Owner provided Flinn
Scientific, Model AP3309 goggles, fog free and vented.
Vocational Shop Equipment (11 57 00)
Equipment list is included within Educational Specifications
Page 6 of 6
FBISD 11 60 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Entertainment Equipment)
Entertainment Equipment (11 60 00)
Theater and Stage Equipment (11 61 00)
This section shall encompass some or all of the following sub divisions depending on the
school and the situation. One company shall be responsible for all work related to the
stage equipment, so that the systems shall be integrated with one another.
Recommended Theatrical Systems dealer and installers:
Texas Scenic Company, San Antonio, TX or equal
This contractor or his representative, fully knowledgeable and qualified in systems

operation, shall provide eight (8) hours of instruction to the Owner-designated personnel
on the use and operation of this System. Designated instruction times shall be arranged
through the Owner. One (1) hour of instruction required at Elementary School projects.
Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the installation,
and conform in all trades with all applicable local codes and with the National Electric
Code. Obtain all permits necessary for operation of any equipment by the Owner
WARRANTY
The Contractor shall guarantee all of the work that is performed under this
contract, including all materials, and workmanship, for a period of one (1) year
from the date of full acceptance of the work. Lamps for lighting fixtures shall be
guaranteed against premature failure for thirty (30) days after date of Substantial
Completion (excludes lamps left on continuously)
Acoustic Shells (11 61 13)
Goal:
To provide multi-purpose auditorium stages with concert hall like
acoustical reflection attributes while also providing a high end look and
feel to Concert Performances. The Acoustic Shell system reflects the
sound out to the audience and at the same time reflects sound from
performers on one side of the stage, to the other, allowing all performers
to better hear each other and therefore be in sync with each other.
General Equipment:
General Acoustic Shell Panel Construction:
Materials:
Page 1 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
3/16” Hardboard skin or 1/4” Veneer Plywood skin

(optional)
1-1/2” Paper Honeycomb panel core

Overall panel thickness 2”
Towers (side walls):
Construction and Materials:
Extruded aluminum frame, with steel connections

Self lubricating nylon hinges
Aluminum trim strip width, 4”
Tower widths available – 10’, 12’, 14’, Custom

6” casters and 6” leveling pads
Choose either electric air or wheeled tower mover
Ceiling Panels:
Construction and Materials:
Extruded aluminum frame, steel connections and hanger

arms
Self lubricating nylon hinges
Lighting to be integrated into ceilings

Quantity of fixtures based on design
Lighting Raceway to be integrated into shell design
Performance angle to be infinitely adjustable
Hanger Arms to be aligned with rigging lines, no set

positions
Hanger arm attaches with turnbuckle and full batten clamp
Pre Approved Manufacturer and Product:
Wenger Corporation, Owatonna, MN or equal

Diva series acoustical shells, 5 year Warranty
Page 2 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
Folding and Portable Stages and Pit Fillers (11 61 23)
Choral Risers:
Goal:
To provide multi-level standing surface, that is easily movable
from practice space to performance space, for standing choir
performances. Choral Risers are suitable for primary and
secondary schools.
General Product Specifications:
Fold down design, easy for one person to set up
Formed and welded steel construction, black Finish
18” wide steps
3 and 4 step models that easily will fit through standard doorway
Sturdy back rail with child-height crossbar
Optional Side rails

Signature Choral Risers, 5 year Warranty
Seating Risers
Goal:
To provide multi-level seating structures for, Band, Choirs, or
Orchestra performances for either on stage or in common
multipurpose areas
General Seated Riser Specifications:
Decks shall be
¾” solid exterior grade plywood with black slip resistant

overlay, OR
5/8” plywood core with manufacturer’s standard grey

carpet
Page 3 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
Deck sizes shall be:
3’x8’ or 3’x6’ and have 6 leg sockets locks

Heights shall be in standard 8”, 16”, 24”, 32”
Pie shape units are also available
Options required:
Moving carts, as required, to move and store decks
Rear and side railings as required for deck design

Versalite Seated Choral Risers, 5 year Warranty
Orchestra Pit Fillers
Goal:
To provide a stage extension, in front of the stage, or to extend
the stage over an orchestra pit. If over an orchestra pit, the pit
filler may need the option of lowering to the house level, to extend
seating closer to the stage, if there is no knee wall or a removable
knee wall.
General Equipment:
General Pit Filler Construction:
Brace and Beam construction so pit filler area under deck is more
open
General Product Specifications:
Decking shall be honey comb construction,
Deck shall include acoustically dampening properties
Deck shall be manufactured to connect in a simple manner to

stage lip
Height of pit filler shall not exceed 10’
Page 4 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
Deck Corners shall be constructed of glass filled nylon to reduce

shape edges
Basic system meets a uniform vertical load of 125 psf (57 kg.)
System can meet building code standards of L/360
Deck surface takes a point load of 500lb. on 2” caster w/o leaving

permanent marks

Strata Orchestra Pit Filler
Stage Rigging (11 61 33)
This section includes Dead Hung (non-moving) rigging standards, Counterweight

rigging standards, Motorized rigging standards, and Pipe Grids
General Rigging Equipment Standards:
All turnbuckles, clips, tracks, chains and other items of incidental

hardware shall be furnished plated or painted. Wire rope shall be
galvanized. Fasteners, chain, and other miscellaneous hardware shall be
either cadmium or zinc plated.
All materials used in this project shall be new, unused and of the latest
design. Refurbished materials are not permitted.
In order to establish minimum standards of safety, a minimum factor of 8

shall be used for all equipment and hardware used on this project. In
addition, the following factors shall be used:
Cables and fittings 8 Safety Factor

Cable bending ratio 30 times diameter
Tread pressures 500 lbs. for cast iron
1500 lbs. for nylatron
750 lbs. for nylatron injection molded
1500 lbs. for nylatron bar stock
1000 lbs. for steel
Max. fleet angle 1 ½ degrees
Steel 1/5 of yield
Bearings - Two times required load at full for 2000 hours
Page 5 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
Dead Hung Rigging
Goal:
To hang stationary equipment over stage. Items include: Curtains
(see Curtain section), Lighting (see lighting section), and Scenery
(empty) battens. These items do not “Fly” move up and down and
therefore do not require manual or motorized rigging. Dead hung
rigging will be needed in Elementary Schools, Middle Schools,
and some High Schools that do not have or are not scheduled to
have, “Fly Space”.
Pipe Battens:
o Pipe battens shall be 1-1/2" in diameter schedule 40 pipe.

o All battens shall be painted black to prevent rusting.
o Where splicing is required, a pin, 18" long and the same diameter as
the inside diameter as the pipe shall be used. This pin shall be held in
place with no less than four (4) rivets.
o Mark the center of each batten with a 1” wide yellow stripe
o Provide yellow PVC caps to cover the ends of each pipe batten.
Hanging/ Trim Chains:
• Chains shall be 1/4" grade 30 proof coil chain 30" long with a 1/4"
rated shackle.
• The threaded connector shall be rated at not less than 800 lbs.
capacity and shall have the rating stamped on each unit.
• Trim chains shall be installed on batten end of each support line,
every 10’ max spacing on single pipe batten.
Beam Clamps:
o Welded Steel construction

o Custom manufactured to fit the application
o Hardware used shall be grade 5 or better
Support Cables and Fittings:
o All support cables unless otherwise noted shall be 7 x 19 construction,

galvanized aircraft cable with a breaking strength of 7000 lbs.
o Clips shall be drop forged "Crosby" or "Malleable".
o There shall be two cable clips for each lift line tie-off.
o Pressed sleeve fittings shall be Nicopress.
o Eyes shall be formed over wire rope thimbles of correct sizes.
o All wire rope rigging shall be installed so as to prevent abrasion or
Page 6 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
rubbing of the wire rope against any part of the building construction
or other equipment

H&H Specialties, Inc., South El Monte, CA or equal
Pipe Grid:
Goal:
To provide a lighting grid for Studios and Black Box Theatres,
typically found in High Schools.
Equipment Description (see General Rigging Requirements Below):
Pipe Grid Spacing:
 Pipe grid to be planed out in 4’x4’ grid pattern.

 Pipes to be supported every 8’
 Pipe grid to start 2’6” max off the walls
Pipe batten:
 Pipe battens shall be 1-1/2" in diameter schedule 40 pipe.

 All battens shall be painted black to prevent rusting.
 Where splicing is required, a pin, 18" long and the same
diameter as the inside diameter as the pipe shall be used.
This pin shall be held in place with no less than four (4) rivets.
Grid Hanger:
Grid hanger designed to hang the pipe grid. Must support a 300
lbs, with a 5:1 safety factor
Grid Bracket:
Formed steel clamp with 2 – rated u-bolts, installed at each pipe

overlap.
Wall Flanges:
Are pinned inside pipe battens and secured to walls for grid
stability
Page 7 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
Walls, if not CMU, will need blocking installed prior to drywall

covering

H&H Specialties, Inc., South El Monte, CA or equal
Counterweight Rigging:
Goal:
To provide manual moving rigging to “Fly” sets (electrics, utilities,
and curtains), by means of a counter balanced Arbor/load system.
Typically found in High School Auditoriums. Final rigging package
to be programmed during budget phase.
Equipment Description (see General Rigging requirements):
Arbor:
 Single Purchase, with guide shoes. – Full travel required
 Double Purchase, with guide shoes – for minimal travel
 Arbor Tops and bottoms to be 5/16” ASTM-A36 Plate, with
5/8” Grade 5 bolts
 Arbor Rods to be ¾” round, 1018 cold rolled steel.
 Arbor weight to be cast iron or cut steel
Head Block:
• 12” dia Grey Iron, grooved for ¼” wire rope.

• Sealed tapered roller bearings.
• Safe working load of 1800lbs
Loft Block:
 8” dia. Nylon sheave, 5/8” dia shaft with sealed ball bearings.
 Safe Working load of 500 lbs.
 May include idler pulleys if underhung
Tension (Floor) Block:
 10” dia. Solid steel sheave, grooved for ¾” hand line

 Guide shoes
Page 8 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
Guide Wall
 Designed with wall battens every 5’ from floor to head block.

 Guides shall be aluminum J-bar
 Arbor stops top and bottom to be 2”x2”x 3/16” steel angle
secured to top and bottom of guide wall, with 2” of oak wood.
Hand line
¾” Sta-Set X
Rope Lock
Cast Iron, as supplied by H&H specialties or equal
Pipe Battens:
 Pipe battens shall be 1-1/2" in diameter schedule 40 pipe.

 All battens shall be painted black to prevent rusting.
 Where splicing is required, a pin, 18" long and the same
diameter as the inside diameter as the pipe shall be used.
This pin shall be held in place with no less than four (4) rivets.
 Mark the center of each batten with a 1” wide yellow stripe
 Provide yellow PVC caps to cover the ends of each pipe
batten.
Trim Chains:
• Chains shall be 1/4" grade 30 proof coil chain 30" long with a
1/4" rated shackle.
• The threaded connector shall be rated at not less than 800 lbs.
capacity and shall have the rating stamped on each unit.
• Trim chains shall be installed on batten end of each support
line, every 10’ max spacing on single pipe batten

In-Line counterweight rigging products
Motorized Rigging
Goal:
To provide motorized moving rigging to “Fly” sets (electrics,
utilities, and curtains). Typically found in High School
Page 9 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
Equipment Description (see also General Rigging requirements):
Line Shaft Set:
Capacity: 1,500 to 2,500lbs depending on load requirements
Speed: 18-20ft per min fixed speed
Travel: 4’ AFF to 1’ below grid or line shaft assembly
Frame: steel box frame to connect at least 2 drums together.
Shafts: Solid Steel, with Gear flange coupling for safety
Motor: Single motor, continuous duty, with integral gear box and
electric brake (SEW or NORD)
Voltage: 208v 3 phase or 480v 3 phase
Limit Switch: 2 – travel limits, 2 over travel limits
Drums: to be sized for project, cut for 3/16” cable
Motor control panel: Centralized, with manual overrides
Remote Pendant with 50’ cable
Computer controlled with preprogrammed presets available
Operator Panel:
The operator panel shall be in a 19” Panel, in the Stage

Managers Panel.
The face plate shall be a 1/8” anodized aluminum panel.
The operator panel will activate the winches and a key

switch will activate the system.
Provide "UP" and "DOWN" buttons for hold to run

operation of each winch.
All buttons will be engraved with purpose.
Provide an "EMERGENCY STOP" red mushroom type
Page 10 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
button.
The operator panel shall be incorporated into the stage

managers panel.

In-line motorized rigging products
Stage Curtains (11 61 43)
General Design Layout:
Elementary:
Front Setting, Provide the following:
• Valance Curtain – 3” side hems

• Bi-parting draw Front Curtain – ½ width side hem
• Added Fullness: 50%
• Fabric: Heavy Weight IFR Velour
• Color: Specified by Architect
Rear Setting, Provide the following:
• Bi-parting walk along Rear curtain – 12” side hem

• Bi Parting walk along Side curtains – 12” side hems
• Two pipe mounted Border curtains – 3” side hems
• Fabric: Medium Weight IFR Velour
• Color: Black
Middle Schools:

• Bi-parting draw Front Curtain – ½ width side hems
Page 11 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
• Bi-parting walk along Rear curtains – 12” side hems

• Side Curtains track mount with pivots – 12” side hems
• Two pipe mounted Border curtains – 3” side hems
• Fabric: Medium Weight IFR Velour
• Color: Black
High Schools:

• Bi-parting draw Front Curtain – ½ width side hems
• Tormentor legs, walk along – 6” side hems

• Borders – 3” side hems
• Concert Traveler, draw, – 12” side hems
• Mid-stage Traveler, draw – 12” side hems
• Rear Traveler, draw – 12” side hems
• Color: Black
Stage Drops, Provide the following:
• Sky Cyclorama – Seamless, Bleach white

• Black Scrim - Seamless
• White Scrim – Seamless
• Fullness: Sewn Flat, Pipe pocket in the bottom hem,
Grommets and Ties on top hem
Fabrics:
Heavy Weight IFR Fabric

KM Mills, Charisma IFR (Inherently Flame Retardant) or equal
Page 12 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
Medium Weight IFR Fabric

KM Mills, Plateau IFR (Inherently Flame Retardant) or equal
Sky Cyclorama: Seamless bleached white muslin (FR) as

supplied by Rose Brand.
Scrim: Seamless sharkstooth scrim (FR) as supplied by Rose

Brand or equal.
Curtain Traveler Tracks (see also dead hung rigging):
Tracks shall be by H&H Specialties or equal. Manufacturer’s

recommendations shall be followed on installation of all tracks and
related hardware shall be followed.
Straight track, curtains over 12’ tall shall be:

H&H Specialties or equal, #400 track, Draw or Walk Along as required
Straight Track, curtains under 12’ tall shall be:

Curved track, curtains over 12’ tall shall be:

H&H Specialties or equal, #300 track, Draw with pipe back bone
Curved Track, curtains under 12’ tall shall be:


Custom Sewn Stage Curtains
Stage Dimming and Control System (11 61 53)
Dimmer Racks:
o The installation rack shall be the Sensor as manufactured by

Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. The fully digital dimmer
rack shall consist of up to 120 dimmer module spaces.
o The dimmer racks shall house all dimmer modules, control
electronics, and branch circuit breakers. Provide module and breaker
quantities as indicated below. System shall have the performance
features that follow.
o Rack shall be UL Listed and labeled.
o Rack shall employ dead front construction of code gage steel.
Page 13 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
o Each rack must have a hinged locking door.

o Each rack must have an electrostatic air filter.
o Ventilation shall be by a low-noise fan activated by DMX level data.
o Each 48-module dimmer rack shall be provided with a keypad and
LCD display for rack configuration, backup and fault indication.
o Each rack shall maintain active scene for a user-programmable period
after loss of DMX-512 signal from console.
o Standard control format shall be USITT DMX-512. Dimmer rack CEM
must accept two independent DMX signals concurrently in a highest-
takes-precedence manner for each dimmer.
o Rack shall store a minimum of thirty-two user-programmable back-up
looks which may be activated in case of loss of control signal.
o Each dimmer must include discrete "boost" feature to allow over-
voltage output to compensate for voltage drop in branch wiring and
allow a true 120 volts at the fixture lamp or “trim” maximum voltage
output to lengthen lamp life.
o Each rack shall include a beacon which shall flash to indicate failures.
Dimmer Modules:
• Dimmer modules shall be plug-in type. No more than two dimmers

per module will be accepted.
• Modules shall be assembled of aluminum or steel. Dimmer modules
with housings manufactured of plastic or a flammable material will not
be accepted.
• Each dimmer module shall contain fully magnetic circuit breakers(s),
solid state switching module(s), choke(s) and connectors.
• Each dimmer must have the discreet capability to operate in a
dimmed or a non-dimmed mode. This function shall be selectable
from the control console or the rack-mounted keypad.
• Each dimmer circuit shall use solid state switching devices consisting
of two silicon controlled rectifiers in an inverse parallel configuration,
snubber network and all required gating circuitry on the high voltage
side of an integral opto-coupled control voltage isolator.
Dimmer Feedback System:
o Rack shall be provided with a feedback network to provide rack

performance data to the control console. The network shall provide
operational information which shall be displayed on the rack-mounted
LCD display and on the control console color monitor. A hand-held
remote does not meet this requirement.
o System shall annunciate DMX port errors at the rack and control
console.
Page 14 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
o System shall annunciate backup cue errors at the rack and control
console..
o System shall annunciate individual phase voltages and power
frequency at the rack and control console.
o System shall annunciate control link address and recorded error log
status indicators at the rack and control console.
o System shall annunciate panic status at the rack and control console.
o System shall annunciate airflow obstruction errors at the rack and
control console.
o System shall monitor cabinet temperature and annunciate over-
temperature at the rack and control console.
Control Electronics:
Control Electronics shall be plug-in module(s). A discrete keypad and

LCD display shall be provided for each rack section of 96 dimmers. The
control electronics shall provide the following functions:
• Thirty-two user programmable back-up looks shall be provided

in case of loss of control signal and may be recalled from the
rack keypad(s), remote station(s) and the control console.
• Dimmer multiplexing control: this optional feature allows each
dimmer to be switched into multiplex mode. This function shall
allow discrete control of two separate fixtures from one
dimmer. This shall be accomplished by plugging in a multi-
plexer at the fixture location and by use of fixtures capable of
multiplexing.
Control Console:
Elementary School:
Smart Fade 2496 as manufactured by Electronic Theatre

Controls, Inc. or equal
Middle School:
Element 40/250 as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls,

Inc. or equal with 2- Flat Screen Monitors
High School:
Ion1000 with 2x20 fader wing, as manufactured by Electronic

Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal with 2-17” Flat Screen Monitors
Page 15 of 16
FBISD 11 60 00
Electronic Theatre Controls, Middleton, WI or equal
Stage Lighting (11 61 63)
This section includes general (minimum quantity) fixture types for each venue.
As much as possible, all fixtures should use the same lamp. All fixtures must be
agency listed.
Elementary School
o 6 - ETC – Source Four Jr Ellipsoidals

o 18 – ETC – Source 4 Pars
o All Fixtures to have, 575w lamp, stage pin connector, safety cable,
and c-clamp
Middle School
o 16 – ETC Source 4 Ellipsoidal

o 16 – ETC Source 4 Fresnels
and c-clamp
High School
o 36 – ETC Source 4 Ellipsoidal

o 36 – ETC Source 4 Fresnels
and c-clamp
o 22 – Altman Spectra Cyc
Pre-Approved Manufacturer:
Electronic Theatre Controls, Middleton, WI or equal

Altman Lighting, New York, NY or equal
Page 16 of 16
FBISD 11 65 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Athletic and Recreational Equipment)
Athletic and Recreational Equipment (11 65 00)
Athletic Equipment (11 66 00)
Gymnasium Equipment (11 66 23)
Interior Basketball court goals
Elementary Schools:
Preferred: Porter Model or equal 312 Center-strut, Height

adjustable system for wall-mounted backstops, Manual operation,
Porter No. 00267-000 Fan Fiberglas Backboard with Backing
Plate for secondary courts, main court backboards to be ½”
tempered glass set in continuous vinyl rubber cushioned
aluminum frame with “Super Flex” goal. Porter No. 00201-H00
Front Mount Goal with Mounting Hardware and Net. If not wall
mounted, use appropriate equal Porter products.
Alternate product: Draper Model EZ-Fold SWD Wall Mounted

Stationary with Direct Mount Goal Brace, EZ-Fold 503086 Manual
Winch Height Adjuster, EZ-Fold A0018 Fan Fiberglas Backboard,
EZ-Fold A0572 Stationary Basketball Goal with Mounting
hardware and Net. If not wall mounted, use appropriate equal
Draper products.
Middle Schools:
Main court goals:
Porter No. 900 W Series “Clear Vu” (Model 90949-000)

forward fold pipe construction with Backboard Safety
Padding. Winch to be key switch operated. Verify model
numbers: Rectangular Glass No. 00208-000 Center-strut
with Safety Pad 00227-000, No. 10797-100 “Saf-Strap”
Safety Lock, No. 00706-000 Backstop Winch with No.
XELE 00791-112 key switch control, and No. 00243-500
“Super Flex” Goal with nylon net.
Page 1 of 6
FBISD 11 65 00
Side court goals:
Porter No. 90949-000 Forward Fold with Backboard Safety

Padding, Manual Operation, Rectangular Glass No.
00208-000 Center-Strut with Safety Pad 00227-000, No.
10797-100 “Saf-Strap” Safety Lock, No. 00243-500 “Super
Flex” Goal with nylon net.
If cost is an issue, the side court goals can be a Porter No.

216 with applicable Safety Pad.
High Schools:
Porter Model 90617-W00 Forward Fold dual pipe suspended

backstop with No. 00326-X00 backboard safety padding,
Rectangular Glass No. 00204-000 Pro-Strut with Safety Pad, No.
00223-000 “Power-Flex” Goals with nylon net, No. 00707-000
Electric Backstop Winch with No. XELE 00791-112 key switch
control and No. 10797-100 “Saf-Strap” Safety Lock.
Volleyball Equipment
All equipment to be Senoh or equal as distributed by Sports Imports or

equal (no substitutions). Inserts in floor to be detailed in construction
documents for secure installation. Provide at ES main court if stand-
alone PE room, and at MS and HS gyms. Provide poles, antennas, net,
Official’s Stand
Wall Pads
Color selected from standard line (NO CUSTOM COLORS)
Electrical and other devices shall not lie within pads (ESPECIALLY FIRE
EXTENGUISHER CABINETS)
Pad height shall be 6’ with bottom at 12” AFF (top at 7’-0”)
Elementary Schools:
Porter Model or equal No. 00560-0xx Hi NRG Saf-pad
Provide in PE room off of cafeteria along entire length of two end

walls (from side court line to side court line).
Page 2 of 6
FBISD 11 65 00
If stand-alone PE room, provide entire length of wall at each goal

provided
Middle School:
Porter Model or equal No. 00560-0xx Hi NRG Saf-pad
Provide in both gyms along the entire length of the two end walls
under goals (from side court line to side court line)
High Schools:
Porter Model or equal No. 00351-3XX
Provide in both gyms along the entire length of the two end walls
under MAIN goals. (from side court line to side court line)
Removable timer’s table. Provide one in each gym, middle school only. Provide
power mounted on bleachers or wall behind bleachers, NEVER in floor
Interior Scoreboards (11 66 43)
Acceptable manufacturer Spectrum or equal. No substitutions allowed.
Middle School Basketball
Locate scoreboards diagonal from each other, avoid sight line issues
Mount with bottom of scoreboard 12’ to 15’ above finished floor.
Provide similar to Model 5230. Provide current model that is 3’ tall x 10’
long, with space for mascot logo, large 14” clock and score, 10” period, all
digital, with possession indicators. Scores 0-199, pre-programmable
Double Bonus indicators, deluxe game horn and MSX control console
with LCD display and carrying case. (See MS Basketball Scoreboard
attached)
High School Basketball
Locate scoreboards diagonal from each other, avoid sight line issues
Provide similar to Model 5230 with space for mascot logo. (See HS
Basketball Scoreboard attached.)
Page 3 of 6
FBISD 11 65 00
Locate primary scoreboard control to right of scorer table, in corner of gym

toward the scorer table wall. Locate future scoreboard diagonally opposite
primary scoreboard location. ENSURE NO OSTRUCTIONS WITH GOALS IN
LOWERED OR RAISED POITSIONS
Gymnasium Dividers (11 66 53) – NOT USED
Recreational Equipment (11 67 00)
None typical in K-12, including: Bowling Alley, Shooting Range, Climbing Wall, Table
Games, and Game Room Equipment
Play Field Equipment and Structures (11 68 00)
Playground Equipment (11 68 13)
All playground equipment must be in compliance with Chapter 756 (Sub-Chapter

E) of the Texas Health and Safety Code:
http://www.statutes.legis.state.tx.us/Docs/HS/htm/HS.756.htm
AND Public Playground Safety Handbook, issued by the US Consumer Product

Safety Commission (CPSC)
http://www.cpsc.gov/cpscpub/pubs/325.pdf
Play Structures (11 68 16)
Exterior Court Athletic Equipment (11 68 23)
Exterior Basketball Court Goals (Elementary Schools Only)
Sports Play or equal Model 541-616 Aluminum Fan with Heavy Duty 4 ½”
OD Galvanized Steel Post, Double Strength Super Goal with Steel Chain
Net. Backboards to be removable.
Porter or equal Model 00274-000 post with Model 0291-000 back straps
and Model 00424-000 ground sleeves, concrete mounted.
Athletic Field Equipment (11 68 33)
Football/Soccer Goals
Middle Schools:
Page 4 of 6
FBISD 11 65 00
H-type. Porter or equal Model 00270-000 or equal mounted on

concrete footing with Model 00424-000 Ground sleeves and
outdoor upright pads. Galvanized finish.
High School Competition Field:
Provide Y-type. Porter or equal Model 00296-232 with Model

00275-000 outdoor ground sleeve (concrete mounted) and Model
90187-000 outdoor upright pad. Galvanized finish.
High school Practice field:
Provide H-type. Porter or equal Model 00281-232 with Model

00403-000 outdoor ground sleeves (concrete mounted) and Model
00069-003 outdoor upright pads. Galvanized finish.
Soccer Goal Nets
MS and HS: Porter or equal Model 298.
Baseball and Softball
MS does not use bases so no base sleeves are required
HS does require base sleeves for bases
Ensure all portions of seating are protected from foul balls (no direct line
of site to batter’s box)
Exterior Scoreboards (11 68 43)
Acceptable manufacturer is Spectrum or equal. No substitutions allowed.
For all below, provide controller connections at front (center) of Bleachers (in
weatherproof box) AND in Press Box
Middle School Football:
Locate with bottom of scoreboard 8’ above finished grade. Similar to

‘Youth’ Model 11010. Scoreboard to be 4’ tall x 10’ long. Board to have
large 15” digits, 99 minute clock, score 0-99 with instant posting, quarter
displays 1-4 for football and 1, 2, OT for soccer, deluxe game horn and
control console with carrying case
High School Baseball and Softball:
Page 5 of 6
FBISD 11 65 00
Provide similar to Model 9210
High School Football/Soccer/Track:
Provide similar to ‘Champion Designer Series’ Model 11124
Provide controller connections at front of bleachers and in press box
Page 6 of 6
FBISD 11 70 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Healthcare Equipment)
Healthcare Equipment (11 70 00)
Whirlpools (HS Field House and Athletics)
Owner Furnished and Installed (FF&E)
Locate on support structure provided by manufacturer with stair/ladder access
Depress slab 1 ½” under all units, with drain directly underneath EACH unit
Current approved manufacturer and model is:
Whitehall Manufacturing Inc., Model S-110-S or equivalent, 818.968.6681
Special Education Changing Table
Table to be provided for by Owner’s FFE but provide electrical (not within reach of the
student on the table) and provide adequate clearance for table.
Special Education Portable Hydraulic Lift
Portable Hydraulic Lift provided as FFE, Provide power
Special Education Restroom Handicapped Lift
Coordinate structural, lighting, HVAC, sprinkler (and all other ceiling mounted items) and
restroom fixture layout with handicapped lift system. Installer will provide a track layout
drawing for coordination. Lift manufacturer is Sure Hands or equal.
System has a ceiling-mounted track which must not be interrupted by any ceiling-
mounted item including cubicle curtain.
After walls are constructed, but before ceiling is framed, contact system installer. They
will hang misc. steel (unistrut) from the joists above with all-thread and provide the
appropriate ceiling penetrations for their hangers. Once the ceiling is installed, they will
return and install the ceiling-mounted track and the lift chair(s). Lift is supported by the
joists above (framing installed by lift manufacturer). NO ADDITIONAL STEEL
REQUIRED, however capacity must be provided
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 11 90 00
Division #11 – Equipment (Other Equipment)
Other Equipment (11 90 00)
Agricultural Equipment (11 92 00)
Reserve for future Ag Facilities
Includes Milkers (not needed), Stock Feeders, Stock Waterers, Agricultural Waste
Cleanup Equipment (need can be accommodated with good design practices)
Arts and Craft Equipment (11 95 00)
Kilns (11 95 13)
Provided and installed by contractor at Middle and High Schools
Skutt Model KM1227-3 (the suffix of ‘3’ indicates providing the Enviro-vent which
is the kiln exhaust system mounted on the BOTTOM of the kiln) with 4” metal
vent connection in wall venting DIRECTLY to exterior (similar to dryer vent)
Coordinate voltage with electrical engineer
Kiln available from:
Ceramic Store Inc. or equal
Supplier to provide complete assembly of kiln and accessories
Hard-wire kiln to manual disconnect, ensure DIRECT access
Provide EPO (emergency power off) by exit door
Provide general exhaust fan (with wall-mounted timer) within kiln room
(SEPARATE from Vent-A-Kiln)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 12 00 00
Division #12 – Furnishings (Introduction)
Division 12 (Furnishings) Intent:
This section relates to items provided by contractor (as well as by FBISD via FF&E budget), that
enhance the building interior. Most items fall under the category of items that would ‘fall out’ if
the building was ‘turned on its head’
1) General Requirements for Furnishings (This Section)

2) Art (12 10 00)
3) Window Treatments (12 20 00)
4) Casework (12 30 00)
5) Furnishings and Accessories (12 40 00)
6) Furniture (12 50 00)
7) Multiple Seating (12 60 00)
8) Other Furnishings (12 90 00)
General Requirements for Furnishings (12 00 00):
Operation and Maintenance of Furnishings (12 01 00)
Select durable products requiring low maintenance
Common Work Results for Furnishings (12 05 00)
Include in individual sections and refer to Section Introduction
Schedules for Furnishings (12 06 00)
Provide for Library Furniture
Not needed for mini-blinds, include info on window elevations, DO NOT RELY ON
General Notes
Commissioning of Furnishings (12 08 00) – NOT REQURIED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 12 10 00
Division #12 – Furnishings (Art)
Art (12 10 00)
Murals (12 11 00)
Gym Wall & Floor Graphics must be approved by Athletic Director
Allowance provided in contract for High Schools and Middle Schools
Gym floors – no graphics allowed due to ease of refinishing of floors
Wall Decorations (Paintings, Prints, Wall Hangings) (12 12 00) – by FF&E
Sculptures (12 14 00) – NOT USED
Art Glass (Etched, Stained) (12 17 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 12 20 00
Division #12 – Furnishings (Window Treatments)
Window Treatments (12 20 00)
Window Blinds (12 21 00)
General:
Provide mini blinds with 1” blades of High (Classic-8 gauge slats w/1-1/2” head
rail) or Medium (Classic-6 gauge slats w/1-1/2” head rail) quality
Provide blinds for all exterior windows. Refer to Educational Specifications and
Design Guidelines for additional information on spaces where mini-blinds are
required
FBISD prefers inside mounting. Detail the frame so that it has enough depth to
accommodate this. Separate blinds should be installed in each frame.
Blinds are typically installed on the private side of the window they are covering.
Also reference Division 8, Windows, for coordination of the window and door
frames with the blinds.
Horizontal Louver Blinds (Metal, Wood, Plastic) (12 21 13) – SEE ABOVE
Vertical Louver Blinds (Metal, Wood, Plastic) (12 21 16) – DO NOT USE
Roll-Down Blinds (12 21 23) – NOT USED
Black-Out Blinds (12 21 26)
Provide at LGI and/or Library spaces, as indicated in Ed Specs
Curtains and Drapes (12 22 00) – FF&E
Interior Shutters (12 23 00) – NOT USED
Window Shades (12 24 00) – NOT USED
Window Treatment Operating Hardware (12 25 00)
Consider for high windows in rooms where reduced lighting needed (Library or LGI)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 12 30 00
Division #12 – Furnishings (Casework)
Casework (12 30 00)
Manufactured Metal Casework (12 31 00) – NOT USED
Manufactured Wood Casework (12 32 00)
Manufactured Wood-Veneer-Faced Casework (12 32 13)
Lab Casework included below
Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Clad Casework (12 32 16)
Refer to Division 06 for construction information and details, this section for
information related to construction by a pre-fab shop
Hardware:
Drawer Slides – NO Euro-Style Drawer Slides. Provide Full Extension

Ball-Bearing Type – VERIFY
Hinges – NO European (Salice) Hinges allowed. Provide five-knuckle

overlay ONLY
Keyboard Trays – Articulating Type NOT REQUIRED. Provide Standard

Sliding Type sized for Keyboard AND Mouse. Provide at all spaces
designated on plans for computer workstations
Pencil Trays – Provide at all spaces on plans designated for standard

workstations
Shelf Standards and Brackets OR Dowel Pins?
Provide Label Holders on all File Drawers
Provide 3” grommets
Specialty Casework (12 35 00)
Commercial Kitchen Casework (12 35 39)
Refer to Division 11 for Food Service Equipment (11 40 00)
Page 1 of 4
FBISD 12 30 00
Educational/Library Casework (12 35 50)
Acceptable manufacturers are :
• Buckstaff
• Tesco Industries
• Estey (distributed by InterStor)
• Spacesaver
Coordinate selection of acceptable manufacturer(s) with Owner.
Ensure that shelving book stacks are supplied with top and end panels for rigidity
of the shelving system.
Book shelving is to be metal (CANTILEVER-TYPE) with plastic laminate or wood

(depending on price and design) top and end panels. Shelving that is over 7’ in
height can have a metal top if approved by Owner. Each shelf is to be supplied
with a ‘stop’ on each shelf (even on back to back shelving) to keep books from
falling between the shelving.
Computer carrels and shelving for computers is to be plastic laminate/wood

construction. See requirements for plastic laminate casework in Division 12,
Casework – Plastic Laminate-Faced.
Circulation desks are modular. Plastic laminate and wood construction. See
requirements for plastic laminate casework in Division 12, Casework – Plastic
Laminate-Faced.
Student tables, chairs and other furniture are in contract. Tables are to be of
wood construction with plastic laminate tops with wood edges. Chairs and other
furniture to be wood with durable fabric (may have to comply with fire codes).
Manufacturer is often Tesco.
Include dictionary stand, newspaper rack, depressible book carts and periodical
racks in contract. Do not provide an atlas case/stand.
Laboratory Casework (12 35 53)
MS Lab Casework to be plastic laminate with epoxy resin top with integral resin
sink. For requirements of construction, See Division 12 -“Casework- Plastic
Laminate-Faced”.
MS Prep room casework to be wood with epoxy resin top with integral resin sink.
Page 2 of 4
FBISD 12 30 00
MS student lab tables are to be supplied by lab casework supplier. They are to
be wood with epoxy resin tops. See Division 11, Lab Equipment.
HS Lab Casework to be wood with finish as selected by Owner and epoxy resin
tops with integral resin sinks.
All exposed surfaces to match in color as much as possible. Matching of finish

per room will be reviewed and approved by Architect and Owner.
Provide 5 knuckle stainless steel institutional heavy duty type hinge with straight
wings.
All upper cabinets to be 14” clear inside (to accommodate a binder).
Drawers to have ball bearing track drawer slides.
Drawer bodies to be minimum 3/8” thick Baltic birth, transparent sealed finish.
All drawers and file boxes to be maximum height, length and width and depth to
fit within casework frame to fully utilize storage space. Maximum ½” to ¾”
clearances allowed.
No cabinet is to be more than 42” in width; 36” is preferred.
Reinforce shelves that are 36” or more in width.
No single cabinet to be more than 21” in width.
All adjustable shelves to have a maximum tolerance gap width of 1/8”, typical.
All shelving to be full depth of cabinet, i.e. only ½” maximum back from any edge
for full utilization of space.
Shelf clips to be plastic and ‘locking’. They should be rated for minimum 500#
per shelf. One possible type is Collegedale Twin-Pin Shelf Support.
All casework within a room should be keyed the same.
Acceptable casework manufacturers: Hamilton Industries, Kewaunee Scientific,

Collegedale and Taylor Manufacturing.
Prep room shelving:
Shelving and shelving unit to be wood with finish as selected by Owner
Page 3 of 4
FBISD 12 30 00
No metal shelving allowed
Shelves to be wood, with lip all four sides to contain spills (including fixed
shelf)
Shelves to be adjustable but screwed in place for safety (minimum 2

opposite corners).
Plastic shelf support clips (more chemical resistant).
Display Casework (12 35 59) – NOT USED
Performing Arts Casework (12 35 83)
Band Uniform Storage
Band coat with trouser hanging underneath height = 44”

Hat box dimensions are 11 ½” wide, 8 ½” high and 11 ½” deep.
Shoe cubbies
Tuxedos hang like band coats.
Dresses hang 63” in height.
Music Instrument Storage
Verify quantities with FBISD Project Manager and Fine Arts Director
Approved Manufacturer: Wenger or equal
Music Library Storage
Provide Wenger or equal sliding music storage system, verify quantity

with FBISD Project Manager
Page 4 of 4
FBISD 12 40 00
Division #12 – Furnishings (Furnishings and Accessories)
Furnishings and Accessories (12 40 00)
Bath Furnishings (12 44 00)
Shower Curtains (12 44 16) (Refer to Toilet Accessories)
Rugs and Mats (12 48 00)
Entrance Floor Mats and Frames (12 48 13)
No inset or recessed types used
Owner to provide rug-type mat as part of FFE
Floor Mats (12 48 43) – FF&E
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 12 50 00
Division #12 – Furnishings (Furniture)
Furniture (12 50 00)
General:
Most items within this section are purchased directly by Fort Bend ISD Purchasing,
however, A/E to verify sizes and quantity while providing layouts for new spaces. Also
refer to Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines for additional information.
Office Furniture (12 51 00)
Seating (12 52 00)
Institutional Furniture (12 56 00)
Classroom Furniture (12 56 33)
Lecterns (12 56 39)
Library Furniture (12 56 51)
Laboratory Furniture (12 56 53)
Industrial Furniture (12 57 00)
Welding Benches (12 57 13)
Welding Screens (12 57 16)
Residential Furniture (12 58 00)
If required, for Life Skills, to be provided by FBISD
Systems Furniture (also known as ‘Cubicles’) (12 59 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 12 60 00
Division #12 – Furnishings (Multiple Seating)
Multiple Seating (12 60 00)
Fixed Audience Seating (12 61 00)
Upholstered Audience Seating (12 61 13)
Acceptable manufacturers:
American Seating Company “Stellar 220”

Irwin Seating Company “Citation”
American Desk “Continental”
Seating Concepts “Producer”
Provide floor-mounted upholstered seating unit with steel pedestals and center
standards
Seat is to remain in the ‘up’ position when not in use.

Armrests are to be plastic.
Do not provide desk tables or desk arms
Architect to ensure that adequate clear width is maintained between seat back
and seat in ‘down’ position as well as providing an aisle that allows for two
people to pass each other
Design to provide for accessible seating, including appropriate quantity of folding

arm rests at aisles. Ensure appropriate line of site (including horizontal and
vertical viewing angles) are provided at accessible seating
Molded-Plastic Audience Seating (12 61 16) – NOT USED
Portable Audience Seating (12 62 00)
General:
All below by FF&E. Info provided in this section (by FBISD Purchasing) allows
for proper layout of spaces
Folding Chairs (12 62 13) – FF&E
Interlocking Chairs (12 62 16) – FF&E
Stacking Chairs (12 62 19) – FF&E
Stadium and Arena Seating (12 63 00)
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 12 60 00
Stadium and Arena Bench Seating (12 63 13)
Aluminum, no numbers required
Stadium and Arena Seats (12 63 23)
Molded Plastic, numbers required at District Athletic Facilities ONLY
Booths and Tables (12 64 00) – FF&E
Multiple-Use Fixed Seating (12 65 00) – FF&E
Telescoping Stands (12 66 00)
Telescoping Bleachers (12 66 13)
In MS, provide bleachers on one side only of each gym. Back these up to each
other. In each gym, team seating, timer’s table, and all controls are on opposite
wall from bleachers.
In HS, provide bleachers on one side of practice gym. Place the bleachers on
the wall which backs up to the competition gym. Place the team seating, timer’s
table, and all controls on the wall opposite the bleachers. In the competition
gym, provide bleachers on both sides of the gym. Place the team seating,
timer’s table and all controls on the side of the gym furthest from the practice
gym adjacent.
Mount connections for controls in front of bleachers, no floor boxes
For HS: provide one removable timer’s table in each gym designed to mount in
bleacher deck sockets.
Acceptable manufacturers: Hussey Seating Company, Interkal, Inc. or Owner-

approved equal.
Steel frame construction with wood tread and riser and plastic seats (more
durable and more difficult to graffiti)
Coordinate school initials with seat layout.
For rows of 6 or more, provide non-friction motor (Roll-Eze). For rows of 5 or

less, provide fixed seating.
Allow partial opening with locking capability.
Each tiered row shall be fully enclosed at the footrest level.
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 12 60 00
Ensure that stairs are flush with seats.
Ensure that handrail will collapse with the bleacher and does not have to be
removed each time bleachers are closed.
Provide ADA/TAS required recoverable seating so that it can be pulled out and
used when no ADA seating is required.
Provide recoverable team seating in bleachers.
Provide access to underneath of bleachers for repair and maintenance.
Provide signage indicating that closed bleachers are not to be used for seating.
Seating is allowed only on fully extended bleachers (not partially extended or
closed bleachers).
Provide keyed switch for operation, spring loaded, limit switch. Keso or equal
Minimum row depth – 26”.
During design layout, ensure that there is adequate room for bleachers and a
person to sit and still allow referee or circulation in front of the bleachers at the
sidelines of the basketball main court. At the side courts, ensure that there is
enough room for the bleachers to be extended for some seating for PE and the
basketball goals and volleyball courts to still be utilized for PE.
Include a 5 year warranty and a demonstration of proper operation in the

specifications.
Seat and Table Assemblies (12 68 00) (Pedestal Tablet Arm Chairs)
NOT ALLOWED
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 12 90 00
Division #12 – Furnishings (Other Furnishings)
Other Furnishings (12 90 00)
Interior Planters and Artificial Plants (12 92 00) – NOT USED
Site Furnishings (12 93 00)
Bicycle Racks (12 93 13)
Refer to Educational Specifications for Quantity at each type of school
Bicycle Lockers (12 93 14) – NOT USED
Trash and Litter Receptors (12 93 23) – by FBISD
Manufactured Planters (12 93 33) – NOT USED
Site Seating and Tables (12 93 43)
Typical furnishings available to assist A/E with layout of spaces
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 13 00 00
Division #13 – Special Construction (Introduction)
DIVISION 13 INTENT:
This section provides manufacturer preferences, installation instructions, and other special
FBISD requirements for Special Construction
Table of Contents for Package 13:
1) General Requirements for Special Construction (This Section)

2) Special Facility Components (13 10 00)
3) Special Purpose Rooms (13 20 00)
4) Special Structures (13 30 00)
5) Integrated Construction (13 40 00)
6) Special Instrumentation (13 50 00)
General Requirements for Special Construction (13 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of Special Construction (13 01 00)
Consider maintenance costs when selecting materials and systems
Common Work Results for Special Construction (13 05 00)
Sound Control:
Architect shall utilize Acoustic Consultant for evaluation of all Fine Arts, Large
and Heavy Traffic Areas, including:
Band
Orchestra
Choir
Gymnasiums
Main Corridors
Black Box
Auditorium
Library
Practice Rooms/Ensemble
Copy of acoustic report from A/E’s consultant shall be provided to FBISD along
with Design Development Deliverable. Provide additional copy with 95%CD set,
confirming all original items have been complied with.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 13 00 00
Division #13 – Special Construction (Introduction)
LEED Requirements: All areas must meet minimum requirements for

sound control
Schedules for Special Construction (13 06 00)
Commissioning of Special Construction (13 08 00)
A/E’s Acoustical Consultant to perform testing of all areas noted above after
substantial completion and prior to occupancy
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 13 10 00
Division #13 – Special Construction (Special Facility Components)
Special Facility Components (13 10 00)
Swimming Pools (13 11 00)
RESERVE
Fountains (13 12 00) – DO NOT USE
Aquariums (13 13 00)
Provided by FF&E in High School Marine Science Labs
Tubs and Pools (13 17 00)
Refer to Division 11 for information on Whirlpools
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 13 20 00
Division #13 – Special Construction (Special Purpose Rooms)
Special Purpose Rooms (13 20 00)
Controlled Environment Rooms (13 21 00)
Cold Storage Rooms (13 21 26)
Included with Food Service in Division 11 (11 40 00)
Sound-Conditioned Rooms (13 21 48)
Not required, utilize good design practices when laying out spaces to
isolate/separate sounds
Special Activity Rooms (13 24 00)
Black Box Theater: Refer to Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines
Vaults (13 27 00) – NOT USED
Athletic and Recreational Special Construction (13 28 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 13 30 00
Division #13 – Special Construction (Special Structures)
Special Structures (13 30 00)
Fabric Structures (13 31 00) – DO NOT USE
Space Frames (13 32 00) – NOT USED
Fabricated Engineered Structures (13 34 00)
Glazed Structures (13 34 13) (including Greenhouses)
If provided, only acceptable manufacturer: Ludy Greenhouse Corp. or equal
Review submittal with Owner. Ensure designed for Southeast Texas climate
Grandstands and Bleachers (13 34 16)
Southern Bleacher Company

Sturdisteel
Safway Steel Products
Aluminum seating with steel support structure. Any splices in seating plank to be
fully supported.
Numbering to be used in some cases; consult with Owner. If provided,

numbering to be stamped on metal plates and riveted to seat.
Enclose underneath of bleachers (including under ramps and stair structures) up

to handrail height with chain link to prevent access under bleachers by public.
Allow for maintenance access with one lockable gate.
Pressbox:
Laminated glass windows with a securable awning type shutter over them
to guard against vandalism when not in use. However, shutter must not
restrict view of field during use.
Design for a cross-breeze for proper ventilation even when not in use, i.e.
low air flow area on one side/end and high air flow area on opposite
side/end
Post Frame Building Systems (13 34 18) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 13 30 00
Division #13 – Special Construction (Special Structures)
Metal Building Systems (13 34 19)
Provide schematic framing plan in design and construction documents. Do not

rely solely on performance specifications.
Provide portal framing where future expansion anticipated
Fabricated Structures (13 34 23)
Guard Shack:
Guard station should be sized minimum to accommodate ADA/TAS

requirements and clearances
Provide a concrete access drive for the security vehicle alongside one
side of the building with electrical accommodations for recharging the
vehicle
Provide ADA/TAS access to building and vehicle recharging area
Provide one – 2” empty conduit to building for future use.
Equipment Screening:
In some Authorities Having Jurisdiction, no mechanical equipment is to be

visible from 1000’ sight line in any direction. Verify requirements prior to
design of system. Only where there is no other available option can there
be roof screens or parapet walls to screen equipment. See Division 15,
Design Information.
If necessary, one option is the Envisor 2 by Cityscapes
Towers (13 36 00)
At high school practice area (parking lot) Band Tower to be located 25’ from the painted
side line to allow for percussion and drum majors, etc.
Height of tower shall be 25’
Provide a hose bib and power at band tower, if utilities are located reasonably nearby.
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 13 40 00
Division #13 – Special Construction (Integrated Construction)
Integrated Construction (13 40 00)
Building Modules (13 42 00) – NOT USED
Modular Mezzanines (13 44 00) – NOT USED
Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control (13 48 00)
MEP Equipment Vibration and Sound Isolation provided elsewhere
Radiation Protection (13 49 00) – NOT REQUIRED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 13 50 00
Division #13 – Special Construction (Special Instrumentation)
Special Instrumentation (13 50 00)
Meteorological Instrumentation (13 53 00)
General:
For use in Learning Buildings (Buildings that teach), tied to Boulding Automation
Systems for real-time monitoring
Refer to Division 25 for additional information
Refer to LEED Section ID (Innovation in Design) for additional information

on this Credit
Solar Instrumentation (13 53 13)
See above
Wind Instrumentation (13 53 23)
See above
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 14 00 00
Division #14 – Conveying Equipment (Introduction)
DIVISION 14 INTENT:
Purpose of this section is to provide performance criteria, and special detailing requirements, for
conveying systems (elevators) in new and existing Fort Bend ISD facilities.
Information is also included on limited-use lifts, HOWEVER, use of this equipment is strongly
discouraged. It is preferred for A/E to design facilities that minimize need for this type of
equipment by ensuring contiguous access to all areas, as well as utilizing current accessibility
standards to avoid need for conveying equipment.
Maintenance and periodic inspections are required for all conveying systems and minimizing
need for such equipment is imperative to minimizing Fort Bend ISD use of Operation and
Maintenance funds.
Information required to coordinate with other systems is included within this section, along with
links to other sections, where appropriate.
Intention is for this section to assist with competitive pricing on all equipment, rather than
outlining sole-source manufacturers.
1) General Requirements for Conveying Equipment (This Section)

2) Dumbwaiters – NOT USED
3) Elevators (14 20 00)
4) Escalators and Moving Walks – NOT USED
5) Lifts (14 40 00)
6) Turntables – NOT USED
7) Scaffolding – NOT USED
8) Other Conveying Equipment – NOT USED
*Note that no Standard Specifications are included within this Division*
Conveying Equipment (14 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of Conveying Equipment (14 01 00)
FBISD has existing contract for maintenance and inspection of all conveying
equipment, verify all designs with FBISD and their maintenance contractor prior
to fully incorporating into documents.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 14 00 00
Division #14 – Conveying Equipment (Introduction)
Common Work Results for Conveying Equipment (14 05 00)
Provide design that is 100% in compliance with current Texas Department of

Licensing and Regulation Chapter 754 for Elevators, Escalators, and Related
Equipment
Elevator consultant is not required, however, design confirmation by elevator

manufacturer is strongly recommended. Extensive revisions to architectural,
structural, and/or MEP during construction, due to lax in A/E coordination are not
acceptable, except those directly related to changes in regulations
Schedules for Conveying Equipment (14 06 00)
Not needed, unless multiple elevators needed (not typical for K-12)
Commissioning of Elevator Equipment (14 08 00)
Recommend to consider, in addition to State Inspections. Coordinate with LEED

Enhanced Commissioning requirements (when approved by FBISD Design
and Construction)
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 14 20 00
Division #14 – Conveying Systems (Elevators)
Elevators (14 20 00)
A/E may utilize Elevator Consultant to ensure full coordination with other disciplines (use
of this type of consultant not required, as noted within Section 14 00 00)
Emergency two-way communication device (tied to FBISD Police Department) to be

push button in lieu of handset
Each elevator to have dedicated phone line for 24 hour dial-in to police department
(verify phone number with FBISD Project Manager)
Police department to assign a building identification number for use in programming;

coordinate with FBISD Project Manager
State inspection certificate required by contractor to be forwarded to FBISD Project

Manager as soon as possible. Inspection and all re-inspection fees related to deficient
initial installation, to be paid by contractor. FBISD Design and Construction Department
will forward certificate (keep a copy) to FBISD Maintenance so that elevator is added to
their records. All subsequent annual inspection fees are paid by FBISD Facilities and
Maintenance.
Finishes shall be as follows:
VCT Floor, consider color and pattern to complement first floor corridor
Plastic laminate wall panels mounted over pre-finished steel panels (high
performance baked on coating)
Provide aluminum or stainless rails on three sides
Provide stainless steel frame and doors at corridors
Locate at central location for maximum convenience, access to all areas
Specify that programming to be non-proprietary
Call buttons and switches to be key-operated
No car position indicator lights required in hallways
Provide moving pads and support hooks
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 14 20 00
Division #14 – Conveying Systems (Elevators)
TDLR inspects all elevators and requires sump pump in pit with audio and visual high
water alarm
Recommended manufacturers:
No preference, consider all major domestic manufacturers
Electric Traction Elevators (14 21 00)
Verify application with FBISD. Consider for higher floor-to-floor conditions and for
facilities where space limited.
Hydraulic Elevators (14 24 00)
Verify application with FBISD, typical for most new facilities
Limited-Use/Limited-Application Elevators (14 26 00)
DO NOT USE
Custom Elevator Cabs and Doors (14 27 00)
Avoid use
Elevator Equipment and Controls (14 28 00)
Provide as required by State Inspector and current Elevator Requirements
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 14 40 00
Division #14 – Conveying Systems (Lifts)
Lifts (14 40 00)
Limited use only, A/E SHOULD NOT DESIGN for this equipment to be required in New
Construction on Fort Bend ISD Facilities
A/E ensure Variance is requested from Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation,
Architectural Barriers Division, for any proposed use. Initial Variance request will be
funded by FBISD, with subsequent requests or re-submittals paid for by A/E
People Lifts (Counter-Balance and Endless Belt types) (14 41 00) – NOT USED
Wheelchair Lifts (14 42 00)
Inclined Wheelchair Lifts (14 42 13) – DO NOT USE
Vertical Wheelchair Lifts (14 42 16)
Refer to information above concerning AVOIDING need for this equipment
Consider all approach and exit clearances when accommodating space for this
type of equipment. Most models allow for entry and exit on OPPOSITE sides of
unit, however, most manufacturers have versions where entrance and exit are
perpendicular (90 degree exit)
Platform Lifts (Orchestra and Stage Lifts) (14 43 00)
Avoid Need or Use, refer to above
Sidewalk Lifts (14 44 00) – NOT USED
Vehicle Lifts (14 45 00)
For use at District Transportation Facilities and CTE Auto Shops
Verify need with FBISD Project Manager, coordinate power requirements, revise
foundation to accommodate unit weight and loaded weight, provide accessible
disconnect near unit
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 20 05 13
Division #20 05 13 – Common Work Results
Division 20 Intent:
Included within division 20 sub sections are specific guidelines for materials and installation of plumbing
systems and equipment.
1.1 Coordination Drawings – Contractor shall prepare above ceiling coordination drawings for
efficient installation of different components and coordination for installation of products and
materials fabricated by each trade.
1.2 System Start-up – Special mechanical equipment such as chillers, towers, large pumps, oil
free compressors, vacuum pumps, etc. shall have initial start-up of equipment assigned to a
trained manufacturer’s representative who can check and report on items such as
installation, lubrication, alignment, etc. and sees that the equipment starts and operates
properly.
1.3 Access doors in walls or ceiling shall be 30” x 30” in size, unless specified otherwise or
space restricted.
1.4 Transition Fittings:
A. Transition Couplings – Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with piping to be joined.
B. Dielectric Fittings:
a. Dielectric Unions – Factory fabricated, union assembled, for 250 psig minimum
working pressure at 180 deg. F.
b. Dielectric Flanges – Factory fabricated, companion flange assembly, for 150 or 30
psig working pressure as required to suit system pressure.
c. Dielectric Flange Kits – Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include
flanges, full face or ring type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene
bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
d. Dielectric Couplings – Galvanized steel coupling with insert and non-corrosive,
thermos plastic lining; threaded ends, and 300 psig minimum working pressure at
225 deg F.
e. Dielectric Nipples – Electro plated steel nipple with insert and non-corrosive,
thermos-plastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 psig minimum
working pressure at 225 deg F.
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 21 00 00
Division #21 Fire Suppression (Introduction)
DIVISION 21 INTENT:
The fire suppression system will typically be by performance specification that will include
FBISD specific requirements, as noted within these Division 21 sections. A/E team will
incorporate the design elements into the documents and include the materials and installation
requirements in the specifications.
Information within this section shall be used by A/E to design and coordinate design and
construction of fire suppression systems and equipment in Fort Bend ISD new and renovated
facilities.
Separate sections have been prepared for all sub categories of work within this division,
including:
1) General Requirements for Fire Suppression (This Section)

2) Water Based Fire Suppression Systems (21 10 00)
3) Fire Extinguishing Systems (21 20 00)
4) Fire Pumps (21 30 00)
5) Fire Suppression Water Storage (21 40 00)
• All new facilities and additions/renovations shall have full automatic fire
suppression.
• Provide a composite fire protection plan in the construction documents to indicate
any special areas regarding types of protection or areas sensitive to architectural
design.
• Flow test shall be performed at proposed site prior to A/E design for evaluation of
supply and inclusion of special equipment (if needed) in the contract documents.
• Sprinkler piping that is exposed (such as in stairwells, etc.) to be designed such
that it is tight to a building element and is located minimum 8’ above finish floor
so that students do not hang on it. Review with Owner and detail routing of such
areas in construction documents.
• For small addition/renovations where fire water is not available and existing
building is not fully protected, fire protection may not be provided. Provide
information to FBISD project manager as to why system cannot be provided
including design/cost of alternatives.
• Consider dual level fire protection when designing and documenting areas (band
halls or auditoriums) where hanging ceiling elements or large bulkheads are
present. Include information on composite fire protection plans so subcontractor
considers during final design submittal.
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 21 00 00
• Fire protection submittals require review by Engineer and Architect. Engineer to

review for compliance with performance specification and design documents.
Architect to review for pipe routing and head locations (coordination with
architectural elements) as well as color/finish.
• Avoid need for prefinished (special color other than white) sprinkler heads,
however note as required in some areas (black box, auditorium).
• Engineer shall include design basis requirements such as:
o Design submittal shall include a flow test.
o Design spacing of sprinkler heads and selection sizes shall conform to
the requirement of NFPA 13 for the indicated occupancy.
o Uniform discharge density design shall be based on hydraulic calculations
utilizing the method outlined in NFPA 13. Density of discharge from
sprinkler heads shall conform to NFPA 13.
o Design and install the system so that no part will interfere with doors,
windows, heating, plumbing, or electrical equipment. Do not locate
sprinkler heads within 6 inches of lighting fixtures, HVAC diffusers and
other obstructions. Sprinkler piping cannot penetrate ductwork or lighting
fixtures. Provide additional heads under ducts, equipment where
required.
o The Contractor shall conform to the National Fire Protection Association's
Fire Code No. 13, latest edition. Special attention shall be given to Article
1-9, working plans. It shall be the Registered Fire Protection Engineer’s
responsibility to determine if any deficiency or deviations, such as an
inadequate water supply, or any other item which would materially affect
the acceptability of the system.
Fire Suppression (21 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of Fire Suppression (21 01 00)
• Require contractor to fill out and submit a “Material and test certificate” in
compliance with NFPA 13 – 10.10.0 AND receive fire marshal sign-off prior to
100% payment of underground portion of work.
• Require contractor to fill out and submit a “Material and test certificate” per
NFPA 13 – 16.1 AND receive fire marshal sign-off prior to payment of 100%
for above ground work.
• Require third party inspections prior to final payment.
• Require contractor to perform work as required to comply with third party
inspections.
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 21 00 00
Common Work Results for Fire Suppression (21 05 00)
See above
Schedules for Fire Suppression (21 06 00)
Not Required
Commissioning of Fire Suppression (21 08 00)
• The scope of commissioning shall include the third party inspections, site
verification of entire system, witness and verification of the “material and test
certificates”.
• Commissioning provider to coordinate and provide, licensed, third party
inspection prior to final payment. Inspection to include flow test and over
head inspection.
Instrumentation and Control for Fire-Suppression Systems (21 09 00)
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 21 10 00
Division #21 Fire Suppression (Water Based Fire Suppression Systems)
Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems (21 10 00)
Fire-Suppression Water –Service Piping (21 11 00)
Fire-Suppression Standpipes (21 12 00)
Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems (21 13 00)
• No flexible head type systems allowed.

• Provide concealed sprinkler heads in ‘public’ areas such as corridors, student
restrooms, commons, activity areas, locker rooms, etc.
• Provide semi-recessed sprinkler heads at classrooms, office and other staff occupied
spaces.
• Provide exposed sprinkler heads at all areas open to structure.
• Provide wire guards on heads in all mechanical rooms, gymnasiums, and other
areas where heads are subject to damage.
• Sprinkler heads do not need to be centered within acoustical ceiling tiles.
• Systems subject to freezing shall utilize antifreeze liquid. No dry pipe systems.
• All new construction shall use steel pipe. Renovation projects may consider CPVC,
only with FBISD approval in writing.
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 21 20 00
Division #21 Fire Suppression (Fire Extinguishing Systems)
Fire Extinguishing Systems (21 20 00)
General:
Some MDF or server rooms will require a fire extinguishing system. Coordinate with
FBISD for approved system and location.
Include third party inspection of completed systems in documents, re: 21 08 00.
Carbon-Dioxide Fire-Extinguishing Systems (21 21 00)
Clean-Agent Fire-Extinguishing Systems (21 22 00)
Provide FM 200 system in MDF or server rooms
Wet-Chemical Fire-Extinguishing Systems (21 23 00)
Dry-Chemical Fire-Extinguishing Systems (21 24 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 21 30 00
Division #21 Fire Suppression (Fire Pumps) & (Fire Suppression Water Storage)
Fire Pumps (21 30 00)
General:
Fire pumps: Aurora, Peerless, Fairbanks-Morse (UL listed, FM approved)
Fire pump controllers: Metron, Master (UL listed, FM approved).
Centrifugal Fire Pumps (21 31 00)
Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps (21 32 00)
Positive-Displacement Fire Pumps (21 33 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 21 40 00
Division #21 Fire Suppression (Fire Suppression Water Storage)
Fire-Suppression Water Storage (21 40 00)
Storage Tanks for Fire-Suppression Water (21 41 00) – No special considerations
END OF SECTION
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 22 00 00
Division #22 – Plumbing (Introduction)
Division 22 Intent:
Included within division 22 sub sections are specific guidelines for materials and installation of
plumbing systems and equipment.
Separate sections have been prepared for all sub-categories of work, including:
1) General Requirements for Plumbing (This Section)

2) Plumbing Piping and Pumps (22 10 00)
3) Plumbing Equipment (22 30 00)
4) Plumbing Fixtures (22 40 00)
5) Pool and Fountain Plumbing Systems (22 50 00)
6) Gas and Vacuum Systems (22 60 00)
Plumbing General Requirements:
• Architect/Engineer to ensure walls are deep enough to accommodate carriers without

excessive cutting of wall materials. This is to help ensure that excessive cracking in the wall
material does not occur.
• For gang restrooms, provide a chase that is accessible with a door.
• For restrooms with hard ceilings, provide a 24”x24” access panel effectively positioned at
“wet” wall for maintenance and inspection purposes.
• Provide restrooms with non-porous acoustical ceiling tile.
• If chase is not accessible, extend only one wall to deck, leaving one wall open for inspection
of chase.
• For water closet chase wall that is constructed of CMU, typically minimum depth is 24”.
• For lavatories and other fixtures chase walls that are constructed of CMU, typically minimum
depth is 18”.
• If a sink (single fixture) is not mounted in casework, typically provide a chase wall behind it
of minimum 16” if CMU or 6” stud to minimize cracking of materials.
• Design for a minimum of 18” of clear space around all equipment. This in addition to the
required service clearances recommended by the manufacturer.
• Specify that all necessary precautions shall be taken as required to prevent damage to the
roofing due to welding or cutting of pipe. Any damage shall be repaired by the roofing
contractor, payment of which will be made by the responsible party. Extent and nature of
repairs necessary will be as approved by Fort Bend ISD Construction Services Division.
• Coordinate location of plumbing fixtures with kitchen equipment layout.
• On renovation work, note there is to be no unused pipes, ducts, hangers or equipment left in
accessible areas.
Page 1 of 4
FBISD 22 00 00
• Require expansion loops where runs or piping cross expansion joints in building.
• Where possible, all clean outs shall be located in areas which allow maintenance access.
• Where possible, all piping to be concealed.
• Provide isolation valve in cold water main servicing kitchen. Ensure valve is easily
accessible.
• Provide isolation valves in main domestic water lines in building to isolate sections of the
building.
• If there is a rack of exposed piping in an area, devise a way to avoid balls being able to be
thrown on top of the piping.
• Establish a standard to mark or label the ceiling grid, in a permanent manner, showing
location of isolation valves, trap primers etc.
• Lab utility shut off systems shall be hard wired; systems using circuit boards are not
acceptable. All components of utility shut off system shall be located below ceiling (solenoid
valves, contactors, etc).
• No underground domestic water will be permitted.
Plumbing (22 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of Plumbing Piping and Pumps (22 01 00)
• Establish a training and demonstration requirement that is tied to contractor

payment applications.
• Any pumps and pump controllers shall have a video copy of the training for future
use.
Common Work Results for Plumbing (22 05 00)
• Water supply valves: ¼” to 2” size shall be UPC approved ball valves: Ball valves
shall be full port stainless steel ball and stem, with threaded connections.
• 2-1/2” and larger shall be ball or butterfly valves (butterfly valves shall be lug style
only): (When located above ceiling, provide easy access to horizontal stem).
Manufactured by Nibco or Keystone.
• Check valves: (through 2”) Spring loaded in-line check valve Nibco 480 series, or
Watts 600 series. (2-1/2” and larger) Nibco F908 series or Watts 410 series.
• Locate valves within 18” of ceiling so that they are within reach.
• Locate over accessible areas as practical.
• Coordinate with Owner an acceptable way of subtly marking the location of valves,
such as a thumbtack on an acoustical ceiling tile.
• Coordinate location with architectural features so that the valves are operable and
accessible.
Page 2 of 4
FBISD 22 00 00
• Backflow preventers: Recommended Manufacturer: Watts or Wilkins. Full line

sized, complete with air gaps, strainers, and unions at inlet, outlet and discharge.
Installed horizontally, max. 4’ AFF. All RPC backflow preventers to have air gap
fittings and shall be piped to floor drains. Backflow preventers located outside shall
be provided with a removable, insulated box for freeze protection.
• All exposed piping interior and exterior shall be painted. Interior color shall be
according to the adopted color codes and shall be appropriately labeled at interviews
in specified height letters. Piping exposed to view shall be painted to comply to color
scheme. Piping on roof or building exterior shall be painted with epoxy or
polyurethane industrial coating.
• Provide separate irrigation meter where allowed by local authorities.
• Provide separate water meter for cooling tower connection where allowed by local
authorities.
• At the time of the MEP punch list walk, plumbing contractor to demonstrate
accessibility and proper removal of every clean-out plug with the use of a special
tool. If a special tool IS required, three copies must be turned over to FBISD at
close-out.
• All plumbing piping shall be labeled to identify the system. Labels shall be applied to
piping in accessible spaces such as ceiling plenum, mechanical rooms and other
spaces not visible to building occupants but accessible to maintenance personnel.
Schedules for Plumbing (22 06 00)
No special considerations, although Schedules should be required in all documents with

enough information included so that FBISD can evaluate products, and review along
with A/E during Submittal Process
Plumbing Insulation (22 07 00)
• Heating water and domestic water piping to be insulated and labeled. Fiberglass
type insulation may be used for indoors. Insulation outdoors to be phenolic foam
with metal jacketing.
• Provide thermal pipe insulation on all piping carrying domestic hot water.
• Provide thermal pipe insulation on all cold water lines subject to freezing, main water
entry pipe for 50 linear feet within building and within exterior walls out to five feet
into plenum.
• Insulate all roof drains from the drain body to vertical downspout. Include all
horizontal roof drain piping, which occurs above the finished floor ceiling line.
• Also insulate sanitary drains receiving condensate.
• Insulate entire roof drain hangers, up to threaded rod.
Page 3 of 4
FBISD 22 00 00
• Insulate entire wall hydrant box, valve and piping in exterior walls.
• Provide an insulated enclosure for all backflow preventers, outdoors, above grade.
Similar to Hubbell “Lok Box” or Watts “WattsBox”.
• All insulation shall be asbestos free.
Commissioning of Plumbing (22 08 00)
• Commissioning of plumbing shall be included in the project specifications.

Specifications shall communicate the responsibilities of contractors and the exact
systems to be commissioned.
• Components and systems to be commissioned shall be directed by FBISD.
Instrumentation and Control for Plumbing (22 09 00)
• Control electric water heaters and circulation pumps through building control system,
using schedules, so equipment is enabled only when building is occupied.
• Monitor the leaving water temperature of water heaters.
• Control electric drinking fountain power through scheduling.
• Provide meter for cooling tower make-up water connected to building automation
system, for monitoring.
Page 4 of 4
FBISD 22 10 00
Division #22 – Plumbing (Plumbing Piping and Pumps)
Plumbing Piping and Pumps (22 10 00)
Facility Water Distribution (22 11 00)
Domestic Water Service:
• From meter to within 5’ of building: schedule 80 or C900 PVC.

• Entrance into building: ductile iron or type K copper, no mechanical joints
allowed under slab.
• Water entry shall be within building with shut off valve accessible from floor.
Water entry outside of building with a wall penetration above grade is not
acceptable.
• Arrange water service to enter building at a mechanical room. Verify water
pressure drop and determine the necessary requirements. Provide backflow
protection as required by AHJ. Locate backflow preventer is a readily
accessible location and provide floor and provide drain for leakage. Provide
freeze protection when located outdoors.
• Size underground domestic water, sanitary, and storm drainage to
accommodate future additions of approximately 15% additional floor area
without major revamp of the piping.
• A/E discuss grooved piping joining system for pipe over 2” with FBISD.
• Provide isolation valves at each fixture group and at main building sections.
Provide valves to isolate kitchen area. Provide isolation valves in main lines
to isolate sections of the building.
• Water lines shall not be run under slab, except for main entry with proper
sleeving.
• Provide Pro Press fittings.
• All water piping shall be tested at 1–½ times the working pressure or 150 psi
(whichever is higher) immediately prior to completion. Fort Bend ISD
Construction Services Division representative and Architects/Engineers
representative shall monitor and approve all test.
• Looped piping or under floor: Type K copper, no joints (for trap primers and
island case work only).
• Interior, Above Floor: Type L copper, lead-free solder. Specify wrought
copper fittings. Do not allow “tube pull” or “Tee drill” fittings.
• At instructional piping (water and gas) where used in science classrooms or
laboratories, or otherwise used by students, route the supply lines through
the storage or prep room and install electric control valves provide a separate
set for each individual teaching space. Provide controls adjacent to the
teacher’s station.
Page 1 of 4
FBISD 22 10 00
• Do not allow all-thread pipe nipples in any piping system.

• Threaded nipples less than ½” in diameter to be schedule 80.
• Minimize water piping to be installed in proximity of rooms housing telephone
equipment, fire alarm systems, transformers, or other electrical equipment.
Do not route water piping within, or above ceilings of these rooms.
• Connections of dissimilar metal piping shall be made using dielectric fittings.
• Roof mounted supports shall be compatible with roof system such as
“Portable Pipe Hangers” or equal. No wood supports.
Facility Potable-Water Storage Tanks (22 12 00)
Facility Sanitary Sewerage (22 13 00)
• PVC, schedule 40 pipe to be used below grade unless otherwise required by AHJ.
• Acid resistant piping shall be socket, fusion welded below and above grade except
where piping is accessible for maintenance and repair such as below sink, within
cabinets. Polypropylene below grade and PVDF above grade.
• Underground piping shall be bedded in clean bank sand, select fill or cement
stabilized sand.
• Provide ample number of clean-outs. All sanitary sewer lines shall be capable of
being cleaned/snaked out without removal of plumbing fixtures with integral traps.
Cleanouts shall be sized the same as the largest pipe serviced, up to 4”.
• Full line-sized, two-way, clean outs (up to 4” diameter) shall be provided for each run
inside the building at 75’ intervals or closer as required by code. Clean out covers
shall be flush with finished floor, brass or chrome plated bras threaded covers.
Exterior clean outs shall be full line sized spaced at 75’ intervals, two way type and
set in concrete 24” square by 6” thick. Entire installation shall be set at grade with
slot type threaded covers. Entire system shall be accessible for cleaning.
• Wall clean outs shall be extended to within 1 ½” of finished surface.
• Only above grade drainage or vent piping may have no hub connections.
• Floor drains, roof drains, and chair carriers: Smith, MiFab, Josam, or Zurn.
• Trap Primers: All trap seals will be protected by trap primers. Flush tube type or
lavatory tail piece type is preferred, electric primers second choice, Precision
Plumbing Products “Prime Rite” may be used if flush tube, lavatory or electric are not
in area where trap is located. Proseal “Trap Guard” inserts may not be used as the
primary means of protection.
Page 2 of 4
FBISD 22 10 00
• Do not route grease trap drain back under the building slab except as approved by
FBISD representatives. Extend as necessary outside to intercept building drain.
• At all restrooms (including single-occupancy, clinics, planting areas, custodial rooms,
mechanical rooms, etc., specify floor drains of 3”. Also provide floor drains under
emergency shower and eye wash installations. They shall not be installed where
sinks only are installed in cabinets, such as, workrooms, science and art rooms, or at
drinking fountains. All floor drains shall have trap primers.
• Lift stations shall not be used, except upon the express written consent of Fort Bend
ISD Construction Services Division and within the following guidelines:
Pumps shall be mounted on rails and have pull chains and automatic couplings
installed. Doors shall be made of aluminum plate and sized to facilitate pump
removal. Control panel junction boxes shall be located inside building. No electrical
connections or boxes shall be allowed in sump. All pump discharge piping shall be
extra heavy service weight cast iron. Check valves shall be installed above the
pumps. Pumps shall be activated by a float-ball system. Specify a minimum of two
pumps to be installed in the sump, and one identical pump furnished to Fort Bend
ISD Construction Services Division.
• Provide at least (2) schedule 40 PVC sleeves across drives to planting areas and
other islands for sprinkler piping. Sleeves shall be buried 18” below the finish grade,
extended 18” beyond the curb each side.
Facility Storm Drainage (22 14 00)
• PVC, schedule 40 pipe to be used below grade unless otherwise required by AHJ.
• Provide schedule 40 PVC sleeves across drives to planting areas and other islands
for sprinkler piping. Sleeves shall be buried 18” below the finish grade, extended 18”
beyond the curb each side.
• Provide bracing/restraints on all roof drain piping above grade at all changes of
direction and pipe size. Bracing and restraints to be clamps, rods, etc. as
recommended by pipe manuf. This requirement shall be included on the drawings.
• Overflow from roof drains shall not be discharged near any building entrance.
• Any clean out access shall be at grade.
General Service Compressed-Air Systems (22 15 00)
• Galvanized pipe shall be used

• Service drops to include dirt leg, regulator, dryer and ball valve
Page 3 of 4
FBISD 22 10 00
Page 4 of 4
FBISD 22 20 00
Division #22 – Plumbing (Natural Gas System)
Natural Gas System (22 20 00)
Natural Gas Distribution (22 20 10)
***(Note: Facility gas piping is located in division 23 in the 2004 format. It has been
given an “unassigned” number for gas piping to keep it in the traditional “plumbing”
division.)***
• Natural gas service run underground from the gas meter to the building shall be
wrapped steel pipe or polyethylene pipe with socket weld connection and copper
tracing wire (copper tracing wire shall be secured to piping where it exits grade and
tagged). Minimum depth of piping shall be 30” and shall be sloped to prevent
pockets. Provide a dirt leg at the lower end of each run.
• Gas piping run inside building shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe. Gas piping run
inside building shall be installed according to code. Provide sleeves on interior pipe
only as required by code.
• All gas piping 2-1/2” or larger shall have welded connections made with bevel-ended
pipe by certified welders.
• All ball valves shall be AGA or U.L. and City of Houston approved. Milwaukee
Butterball valves are acceptable for use, butterfly type valves are not acceptable.
• Piping under 2-1/2” in size shall be made with screwed malleable fittings.
• Pressure regulators shall be installed where required at the exterior of the building.
At each regulator requires a test tee with nipple and cap downstream, and unions
and gas cocks inlet side of regulator.
• Branch runs shall be made off the top of main lines. Horizontal lines shall pitch
toward the appliance and shall terminate with dirt leg and valve. Connections to
appliances shall be hard piped or approved UL connector.
• Gas meter shall be located in mechanical court located directly outside the main
mechanical room with a Rockwell plug type gas valve with grease fittings and handle
or wrench provided for emergency gas shut off. Protect meter and piping with heavy
pipe bollards.
• Gas piping on roof shall be supported at appropriate intervals to prevent sagging and
to prevent piping from resting directly on roof. All supports shall be manufactured for
the purpose, such as Portable Pipe Hangers and suitable for the roof type (no wood
supports). Support spacing shall be determined by the roof type and loading.
• Gas piping on roof shall be clearly identified using all weather, mechanically secured
labeling.
• At instructional piping (water and gas) where used in science classrooms or
laboratories, or otherwise used by students, route the supply lines through the
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 22 20 00
Division #22 – Plumbing (Natural Gas System)
storage or prep room and install electric control valves provide a separate set for
each individual teaching space. Provide controls adjacent to the teacher’s station.
• Do not allow all-thread pipe nipples in any piping system.
• Threaded nipples less than ½” in diameter to be schedule 80.
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 22 30 00
Division #22 – Plumbing (Plumbing Equipment)
Plumbing Equipment (22 30 00)
Domestic Water Softeners (22 31 00)
• Provide water softener for kitchen, HVAC/heating equipment and large commercial
type laundry equipment only. Do not locate softener so that is treats entire water
supply to building.
• Water softeners: All domestic hot water and cold water for kitchen shall be piped to
supply 0-grain water. All softeners shall utilize a three-valve bypass, installed prior to
the resin tank. Resin tank shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be
equipped with steel or bras multi-port diaphragm head. Brine tank shall be plastic or
fiberglass and shall incorporate dry-shelf salt storage. The system shall also provide
for automatic bypass during regeneration. Test cocks shall be provided on both inlet
and outlet sides of the system. All valves to be ball type.
• Locate water softener installation near an outside service entrance of the building for
easy access for maintenance. Provide area for salt storage.
• Provide a permanent storage cabinet on wall to contain logs and operation manual in
the same room as equipment.
Domestic Water Filtration Equipment (22 32 00)
Provide water filter “Aqua Pure” A717 filter or equal at all refrigerator wall boxes.
Electric Domestic Water Heaters (22 33 00)
• Domestic hot water heaters for kitchens shall be high efficiency units. The kitchen
water heater shall be standalone units and not be tied to the building domestic water
system. Provide duplex water heating system.
• All electric water heaters shall be 208 volt, only.
• Provide circulating domestic hot water return, pumped and controlled by aquastat, on
hot water runs in excess of 40 lineal feet of pipe length.
• Hot & cold water requirements: Faculty/staff restrooms, workrooms and lounges,
clinic, custodial rooms, student or faculty/staff showers, art and science prep rooms,
Special Education rooms, Pre-K, Kindergarten, First Grade multi-purpose rooms,
clinic and cafeteria kitchens. Provide hot and cold water mixing valve to hose bib in
service area by kitchen door. Also at hand washing lavatories as required by AHJ.
• Hot water temperatures: Toilet room, workroom, and other general use areas: 110
degrees, kitchen facilities other than hand lavatories and dish rinsing – 140 degrees.
Dish rinsing – 180 degrees, (by booster heater in kitchen).
• Where hot water is provided for hand washing or shower use, specify mixing valves.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 22 30 00
Division #22 – Plumbing (Plumbing Equipment)
• Provide hot water at custodial sinks, in the kitchen, clinic, staff restrooms, concession
areas and other food preparation areas such as kitchenettes.
• Instant water heaters may be considered for remote sinks/lavatories but must be
approved by FBISD prior to use.
• Provide only cold water to student restrooms, except if tempered water is required by
AHJ. Architect to review engineer’s drawings for coordination.
Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters (22 34 00)
• Domestic hot water heaters for kitchens shall be high efficiency units. The kitchen
water heater shall be standalone units and not be tied to the building domestic water
system. Provide duplex water heating system.
• Provide circulating domestic hot water return, pumped and controlled by aquastat, on
hot water runs in excess of 40 lineal feet of pipe length.
• Hot & cold water requirements: Faculty/staff restrooms, workrooms and lounges,
clinic, custodial rooms, student or faculty/staff showers, art and science prep rooms,
Special Education rooms, Pre-K, Kindergarten, First Grade multi-purpose rooms,
clinic and cafeteria kitchens. Provide hot and cold water mixing valve to hose bib in
service area by kitchen door. Also at all hand washing lavatories when required by
AHJ.
• Hot water temperatures: Toilet room, workroom, and other general use areas: 110
degrees, kitchen facilities other than hand lavatories and dish rinsing – 140 degrees.
Dish rinsing – 180 degrees, (by booster heater in kitchen).
• Where hot water is provided for hand washing or shower use, specify mixing valves.
• Provide hot water at custodial sinks, in the kitchen, clinic, staff restrooms, concession
areas and other food preparation areas such as kitchenettes.
Domestic Water Heat Exchangers (22 35 00)
No special considerations for Fort Bend ISD Projects, HOWEVER may be allowed, A/E
to provide suggested uses for FBISD approval prior to including within Design
Development Deliverables.
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 22 40 00
Division #22 – Plumbing (Plumbing Fixtures)
Plumbing Fixtures (22 40 00)
Commercial Plumbing Fixtures (22 42 00)
• Typically, wall-hung fixtures are used. Provide carriers for all wall-hung fixtures
• All fixtures of a type for the project to be of one manufacturer
Commercial Water Closets, Urinals and Bidets (22 42 13)
• Acceptable Manufacturers: American Standard, Crane, Kohler, or Eljer.

• Water Closets: Wall-mounted elongated vitreous china, siphon jet type, flush valve
actuated, with Sloan, Royal, Regal manually operated flush valve only with vacuum
breaker and screw driver stop. Extended flush pipe shall set the flush valve at 36”
above the finish floor, on the right-hand side, according to National Plumbing Code,
except at ADA water closets. (All wall hung fixtures shall have chair carriers).
• Toilet Seats: White plastic, open front, elongated, reinforced construction, without
covers. Benke or Bemis. At Kindergarten and lower grades specify closed front
• Urinals: Wall hung vitreous china, siphon jet type, flush valve actuated with Sloan-
Royal / Regal manually operated flush valve only with vacuum breaker and screw
driver stop, piped to the right-hand side, according to National Plumbing Code. (All
wall hung fixtures shall have chair carriers).
• Flush valves: Sloan, Royal or Regal 186 or 110 series with vandal resistant trim
Commercial Lavatories and Sinks (22 42 16)
• Acceptable Manufacturers: American Standard, Crane, Kohler, or Eljer.

• Lavatories: Deck mounted or wall hung at new schools, shall be vitreous china. (All
wall hung fixtures shall have chair carriers).
• Sinks in Elementary science rooms and art rooms: large, single compartment,
stainless steel type, drilled and fitted for goose neck Chicago faucets (with vacuum
breakers) at each end. (Outfit art room sinks with plaster traps, Wade W-5740 or
Josam 61070). (All wall hung fixtures shall have chair carriers). Plaster traps shall
be serviceable without removing from the system, and unions on inlet and outlet.
• Sinks in faculty workroom, main custodial rooms and other special-purpose rooms:
Stainless steel single or double compartment with goose neck Chicago faucet with
vacuum breaker. Discuss details in planning meetings. (All wall hung fixtures shall
have chair carriers).
• Secondary school science laboratory sinks: Epoxy sinks and countertops. (All wall
hung fixtures shall have chair carriers).
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 22 40 00
• Service Sinks: Mustee 24” x 24” x 36” according to space available, complete with
bumper guards, hose and hose bracket, and Chicago #897 or equal (with vacuum
breaker) service faucet, hose end spout, pail hook, top reinforcing bar and mounting
bracket. Floor mount sink with splash guards.
• All exposed traps and drains to be 17 gauge chrome plated brass, grid type
manufactured by Kohler or Chicago, McGuire or ZURN.
• Lavatory faucet supplies: 3/8” Chrome plated copper attached to a ½” IPS x 3/8”
flare chrome plated loose-key stop. All exposed chrome plated fittings polished.
• Solid Interceptors: Art room sinks only, Wade W-5740 or Josam 61070.
Commercial Faucets, Supplies and Trim (22 42 39)
• Hose bibs:
For interior applications; Chicago or T&S chrome plated with vacuum breaker,
shielded stem and loose key. Female, flanged threaded connection at wall.
Provide hose bib in each student restroom below lavatory, in each mechanical
space and any other spaces capable of wash down.
For exterior applications; Wade, Josam or Zurn, freeze resistant, 6” deep, wall
hydrant. Nickel bronze finish or as required by architect. The supply line shall
extend up within the insulated wall to a ball valve above the ceiling of the
adjacent room. The hose bib shall be recessed in a cast metal box. Engineer
shall review locations of hose bibs with Fort Bend ISD Construction Services
Division at Design Development meeting (provide at 80’ intervals min.).
• Kitchen faucets: Chicago or T & S hi-flow.
• Custodial sink faucets must have hose connections with vacuum breaker.
• Faucets: (Student restrooms) Three hole lavatory with Chicago #857-E12-
665PSHCP metering faucet with soft flow aerator self-closing or equal.
(Faculty/staff restrooms) Chicago 797A or equal.
• Gym showers mixing valves: Powers #432-2085, or comparable units mfg. by
Leonard, Chicago or Symmons. Unit shall be sized for capacity required. Install a
temperature gauge on tempered water, and on hot water supply lines. Locate mixing
valves in accessible locations but not where accessible to students. Also provide
unions, ball valves, and check valves at mixing valves for removal and servicing. No
electrical solenoids on water controls. Individual shower valves in wall shall be
Symmons, Temptrol, or Chicago 1762 with service stops.
• Whirlpool mixing valves: Same requirements as gym shower mixing valves (above)
except unit shall be sized to accommodate separate hot and cold valved supply lines
to whirlpool, a pipe size minimum of 1” at discharge.
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 22 40 00
• Lavatory faucet supplies: 3/8” Chrome plated copper attached to a ½” IPS x 3/8”
flare chrome plated loose-key stop. All exposed chrome plated fittings polished.
Commercial Plumbing Fixture General Requirements (22 42 99)
• At HS, provide hose bib at baseball and softball field home dugout. Connect to
irrigation system if no domestic water in close proximity.
• Provide a cut-off valve for each toilet room or other battery of fixtures, located above
the ceiling of the hallway near the entry door to the toilet or in adjacent mechanical
rooms. Back to back toilet rooms may share a shut off valve.
• Specify shock absorbers or air chambers, sized according to fixture units served, in
piping at appropriate locations to eliminate water hammer.
• Provide a box hydrant with vacuum break at the dumpster area.
• Provide a box hydrant mixing valve and floor drain with roll over curb near the
kitchen door for washing of garbage cans.
• Require area drain with sand trap, centered in dumpster pad. As required by AHJ
• Provide a wall box with filter at every refrigerator.
• Provide air gap fittings for dishwasher connections, as required.
Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures (22 43 00) – NOT USED
Emergency Plumbing Fixtures (22 45 00)
• Provide isolation valve for maintenance/repair. Locate isolation valve below ceiling if
there is space, if not, locate just above ceiling tile.
• Emergency showers and other fixtures shall have a flow switch connected to
indicator light and horn, in corridor, that will notify staff when shower is operated.
Security Plumbing Fixtures (22 46 00) – NOT USED
Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers (22 47 00)
• Drinking Fountains: Completely lead free, stainless steel cabinet, 8 gallon/hour

capacity, accessible, by Halsey-Taylor or Elkay. Access panels shall be removable
without dismantling unit. Provide chair carriers for all drinking fountains. Provide
water bottle filling stations in new drinking fountains.
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 23 00 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (Introduction)
DIVISION 23 INTENT:
Included within Division 23 sub sections are specific guidelines for materials and installation.
The engineering consultant is required to use the following table to acknowledge processing and
compliance to all subsections modified per FBISD specific standards or recommendation to the project
engineering specifications.
The consulting engineer is to further assure that all FBISD standards wording and concerns are
presented in al project engineering specification, manual and drawings.
SECTION CSI Description Compliance Acknowledgment (C)

23 00 10 MEP General Provisions
System design Requirements
System Standards for Existing
School
23 01 00 Operation and Maintenance
23 05 00 Common Work Results
23 05 93 Test and Balance
23 07 00 HVAC Insulation
23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC
23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control
23 21 00 HVAC Pumps
Cleaning and Hydronic Piping
systems
23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment
23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings

23 34 00 HVAC Fans
23 37 00 Air Outlets and inlets
23 41 00 Particulate Air Filtration
23 52 00 Heating Boilers
23 60 00 Central Cooling Equipment

23 64 00 Packaged Water Chillers
23 65 00 Cooling Towers
23 73 00 Indoor Air Handling Units
23 81 00 Decentralized Unitary HVAC
Page 1 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
1) General Requirements for HVAC (this section)

2) Facility Fuel Systems (23 10 00) NOT USED
3) HVAC Piping and Pumps (23 20 00)
4) HVAC Air Distribution (23 30 00)
5) HVAC Air Cleaning Devices (23 40 00)
6) Central Heating Equipment (23 50 00)
7) Central Cooling Equipment (23 60 00)
8) Central HVAC Equipment (23 70 00)
9) Decentralized HVAC Equipment (23 80 00)
Design Elements
MEP GENERAL PROVISIONS
• All mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems shall be designed by a licensed

engineer of the appropriate discipline, duly licensed by the State of Texas. Any
design or instruction for the purpose of causing the installation of electrical or
mechanical systems shall bear the seal and signature of the designing engineer, who
shall be recognized as the “engineer of record.” This requirement exists whether the
engineer is commissioned by contract directly with Fort Bend ISD, or as a consultant
to an architect who is commissioned to provide services. Notwithstanding the
contractual or professional relationship, the fiduciary responsibility of the engineer
who provides services intended for use on Fort Bend ISD facilities remains the same.
Architect will work with Fort Bend ISD to make a joint decision in the selection of
mechanical engineer.
• At the 50%, 75% and 90% stage of completion of construction documents, the
architect and his consultants shall schedule a review of all architectural, mechanical
and civil aspects with Fort Bend ISD Construction Services Division staff.
• Part I of the engineering presentation shall be a bound organized manual consisting
of the following:
o Codes, formulas, professional organization guidelines, accepted practices,
and all other criteria made the basis of the design of the individual system
incorporated into the project.
o Conclusions drawn showing calculations utilizing the criteria in item #1 for
each different system pertaining to HVAC, plumbing, sprinkler, electrical, or
site drainage, and/or any other defined discipline as may be applicable.
• The manual shall become a part of Fort Bend ISD permanent file for the project.
• Part II of the presentation shall be two unbound sets of near-completed engineering
drawings to be used by Fort Bend ISD Design and Construction staff in examining
the general configuration of the system. Under no circumstances shall the engineer
Page 2 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
and/or the architect relinquish any responsibility for the final design, cost, function,
performance, or lack of same, due to comments, instructions, directions or other
written or oral instructions by Fort Bend ISD Design and Construction personnel.
Should any conversation result in modification of the design or configuration of the
system, it shall be documented by letter, which shall conclude with a statement that
the architect/engineer is in complete accord with the modifications.
• The engineer attending the meeting shall be well versed in the system depicted on
the drawings and shall be prepared to answer technical questions regarding the
design and calculations of the systems. The A/E shall take meeting minutes and
provide a typewritten copy to the FBISD project manager.
• Design of all systems shall comply with current laws, rules, regulations, and
ordinances of federal, state, and local governmental entities. In unincorporated areas
the FBISD shall determine the appropriate codes and ordinances to utilize in the
design process. Any project in an extra-territorial jurisdiction is required to comply
with the same regulations and codes as if it were in that city.
• All products and materials specified shall be of current manufacture and verified as
being reasonably assured of continuation for at least the life expectancy of the
equipment.
• All products, materials, designs, or other entities forming the configuration of the
system shall have a well-established performance history.
• Products, and materials shall have a local representative, parts inventory and factory
authorized service.
HVAC Design Requirements:
• The engineer shall design a complete HVAC system for the facility in order to provide
occupant comfort as stipulated herein.
• The engineer shall calculate HVAC loads and air requirements for the overall facility
and each room or space within the facility. The engineer shall design an energy
efficient system, zoned per FBISD Design guidelines in conformance with current
ASHRAE air quality standards and applicable City, State and Federal codes having
jurisdiction. The air distribution system shall take into account factors affecting the
requirements of the HVAC system for all spaces, including classrooms, auditoriums,
cafeterias, kitchens, office suites, libraries, music suites, science laboratories,
dressing rooms, computer rooms, and other spaces. The different characteristics of
each, should determine the zoning and configuration of the system. System shall
comply with latest adopted International Energy Code.
• The following design conditions shall be used in designing the size and capacities of
the equipment:
Summer Winter
Page 3 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
Outside 97 Degrees Dry Bulb 20 Degrees
77 Degrees Wet Bulb
Room Design 73 Degrees (at 55% 71 Degrees
Relative Humidity)
The engineer shall exercise discretion in applying these principles in design of

cafeteria kitchens, science labs with significant fume exhaust, dressing rooms with
unique moisture conditions, and other conditions. Each issue shall be discussed and
passed on at the 50% staff review meeting.
• The Engineer shall specify that all mechanical equipment and routings shown on the
drawings is schematic, and prior to beginning any construction work, the mechanical
contractor shall furnish as part of the mechanical equipment submittals, a scaled
drawing of all proposed mechanical equipment, indicating accurate sizes and
characteristics of proposed equipment as well as clearances, piping routes, and
other detail as required to allow the engineer, architect, and Fort Bend ISD Design
and Construction Dept. the opportunity to approve the proposed layout and
equipment. If the arrangement is not acceptable, then the contractor shall modify the
proposed equipment layout and/or routing as required, in order to gain approval from
the Engineer, Architect and FBISD.
• The project engineer is to make periodic inspections to assure that properly installed
to specification.
SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
• HVAC Systems
o Air conditioning plants shall in general consist of energy efficient water-cooled
chillers. DX systems for small after hours use areas only.
o Heating shall in general consist of a natural gas-fired boiler providing
hydronic heating throughout the facility. Electric resistance heating should be
avoided when possible.
• Central Plant
o Locate cooling towers outside the facility as close as practical to the central
plant room within the building. Preferably this will be in a secured mechanical
or service yard providing both security as well as ample service access to the
tower.
o Chillers and associated pumps shall be located within the central plant room.
Provide proper service clearance around each chiller as well as service doors
to allow removal and replacement of the chillers.
Page 4 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
o Boilers and associated pumps shall be located in a separate room within the
central plant. Provide service doors allowing for future servicing and
removal/replacement of the boiler.
o Provide auxiliary piping connections in the central plant to facilitate easy
connection of temporary air-cooling or heating equipment to the hot
water/chilled water piping systems. Include the following:
• Design the connection points to be the full size of the piping system
and locate them to isolate the chiller/boiler yet allowing the system
pump(s) to provide full circulation through both the distribution system
and such temporary equipment as may be required.
• Connections should include valves at appropriate locations with blind
flanges.
o The Engineer shall only specify refrigerants that comply with all the current
refrigerant specifications of ASHRAE and the EPA.
o The Engineer of Record shall consider the use of a primary/secondary
pumping arrangement for chilled water systems with capacities greater than
400 tons, and if deemed appropriate incorporate into the design.
o The engineer of record shall determine whether the new chillers can unload
sufficiently to efficiently handle partial load conditions at night or on
weekends. If not a pony chiller shall be added.
o When partial load conditions indicate a pony chiller is necessary. Engineer
shall evaluate the use of an air cooled pony chiller. This evaluation shall
include a comparison of energy usage versus a water cooled pony chiller to
assist in FBISD’s decision as to which chiller is acceptable.
o Central plants with multiple chillers and cooling towers shall have
interconnects to allow cross flow between the different pieces of equipment.
o Provide isolation valve and strainer at each cooling tower basin to allow for
cleaning.
• Zoning
Auditoriums
ASHRAE recommendations shall be used in deterring outside air

requirements. In addition CO2 sensors shall be used to reduce the
amount of outside air when the occupancy is reduced within the space.
The engineer shall specify controls that allow for the Auditorium to be air
conditioned or heated after normal school hours, on weekends, or
holidays.
Administrative Areas
Page 5 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
All administrative areas shall be designed with a separate dx split system

to allow for operation of the HVAC system during periods when the
central plant is not in operation including after hours, weekends, or
extended periods of time when school is not in session. All other indoor
air quality and occupant comfort requirements shall be followed with
effective management of outside air.
Classrooms
Each classroom shall be served by one temperature zone.
Corridors
All corridors shall be heated and cooled per reference standards in the
Facility Design and Construction Standards.
Gymnasium
ASHRAE recommendations shall be used in deterring outside air

requirements. In addition CO2 sensors shall be used to reduce the
amount of outside air when the occupancy is reduced within the space.
The engineer shall specify controls that allow for the Auditorium to be air
conditioned or heated after normal school hours, on weekends, or
holidays. In gymnasiums with wood floors, humidity control must be
maintained year round.
Kitchens
Kitchens shall be conditioned spaces. Served by single zone unit.
Libraries
Humidity control must be maintained year round.
Locker Rooms/ Coaches Offices
All locker rooms and coaches offices shall be served by a single zone and
unit with O/A and humidity monitoring effective.
Natatoriums
All natatoriums shall be served by a system appropriately designed to

handle humidity control and condensation.
Page 6 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
Science Classrooms
Science classrooms shall be treated similarly to regular classroom except

when they contain laboratory fume hood exhaust systems and special
classroom exhaust systems. Pre-treated make up shall be provided to
compensate for the air exhausted through the fume hoods. The engineer
shall follow the FBSID Science Classroom Design Guidelines, the Texas
Safety Standards, and ASHRAE when designing air-conditioning and
exhaust systems for these classrooms. Biology, chemistry and art labs
are to have purge fans. Continuous 24 hour exhaust is required in
chemical storage rooms.
MDF Rooms
MDF rooms shall be air conditioned 24 hours/day, seven days/week, 365

days/year. Provide a direct expansion Liebert mini-mate unit/or equal for
this room and be delivered with exhaust fan over temperature control.
Temperature and humidity requirements shall maintain communication
rooms at an average of 75 +/- 3oF, with a relative non-condensing
humidity of <60%.
IDF Rooms
IDF rooms shall be air conditioned 24 hours/day, seven days/week, 365

days/year. Provide a direct expansion Liebert mini-mate unit/or equal for
this room and be delivered with exhaust fan over temperature control.
Temperature and humidity requirements shall maintain communication
rooms at an average of 75 +/- 3oF, with a relative non-condensing
humidity of <60%.
Field House
Field houses shall be designed using a separate HVAC system that will
allow them to operate independently from the central plant, except when
a primary/secondary loop allows for efficient use of the central plant for
partial loads.
• Pre-Treatment of Outside Air
o The Engineer shall specify a system to pre-treat the outside air introduced
into the building. The pre-treatment shall include dehumidification, tempering
and pre-filtering of all outside air.
Page 7 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
o Outside air intakes shall be located a minimum of 50 ft. away from bus
loading areas.
• Environmental Controls
o The Engineer shall specify a complete DDC control system for the operation
and control of the complete HVAC system. Refer to division 25 for further
information.
SYSTEM STANDARDIZATION FOR EXISTING AND NEW SCHOOLS
Existing Elementary, Middle and High Schools
The HVAC design for existing FBISD schools to be renovated shall contain the
following:
System Type
o Four pipe chilled water / hot water system with single zone air
handling units and, or variable air volume boxes. Hot water coils shall
be utilized for heating purposes where possible.
o Provide a combined AHU with a separate coil in the outside air make
up duct.
o DDC controls with remote central plant control and remote individual
classroom temperature monitoring. This is described more fully in
section 15955.
o Occupancy CO2 sensors shall be provided in places of assembly to
monitor the CO2 levels and assist the DDC controls in modulating the
volume of outside air required. As allowable by codes.
o Equipment
o Water-cooled chillers are preferred. However, if physical constraints
will not allow then packaged air-cooled, reciprocating or screw
chillers, each sized for 60% of the calculated heat load may be used.
Chillers shall be manufactured by Carrier, Trane. Centrifugal chillers
are to have Variable Frequency Drives and line reactors. Provide
factory start-up. Alternate manufacturers shall require the approval of
the Engineer/Owner prior to submission or substitution. Refer to
sections within Division 23 for more information.
o Single zone air-handlers and VAV boxes are preferred. However if
physical constraints will not allow this installation then four pipe unit
ventilators or fan and coil units with metal frame filters may be used
for retrofit applications.
Page 8 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
o All equipment shall comply with the local authorities’ noise ordinance
when in operation.
Salvage Rights
o The FBISD retains all salvage rights to any and all equipment and
refrigerant to be removed and replaced.
o If the FBISD does not desire to salvage any equipment, it shall be so
indicated on the contract documents and the General Contractor shall
have the responsibility of removing and properly disposing of all
equipment.
New Elementary, Middle and High Schools
System Type
o Water-cooled or air cooled, reciprocating, centrifugal, scroll or screw
chillers with single zone air handling units and VAV boxes with hot
water heating coils. Air-handling units and pumps shall be served by
Variable Frequency Drives.
o Provide one zone/VAV box per classroom with individual room
controls.
o Outside air shall be pre-treated by chilled water air handling units with
modulating outside air dampers.
o DDC controls with remote central plant control and remote individual
classroom temperature monitoring. This is described more fully in
section 15955.
o Occupancy CO2 sensors shall be provided in places of assembly to
monitor the CO2 levels and assist the DDC controls in modulating the
volume of outside air required. As allowed by code.
Equipment
a. Minimum two, water-cooled or air cooled chillers, each sized for 60%
of the calculated heat load. Chillers shall be manufactured by Carrier,
Trane. Selection process shall consider the operating efficiencies at
25%, 45% and 65% part load.
b. Provide factory start-up. Alternate manufacturers shall require the
approval of the Owner prior to submission or substitution.
c. Multi-zone or single zone air-handlers utilizing VAV boxes are
preferred.
d. All equipment shall comply with the local authority’s noise ordinance
when in operation.
• Must comply with current energy code.
Page 9 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
• Engineers are not allowed to approve product manufacturer substitutions

without Owner’s approval.
• Architect to carefully coordinate with Engineer to ensure that fire-rated
devices are being used only as required and that they coordinate with all
applicable codes and AHJ.
• Ensure coordination of architectural elements with mechanical, electrical and
other equipment to ensure that all elements and equipment are accessible.
• Locate mechanical and electrical equipment so that nothing straddles the
building expansion joint.
• Layout mechanical rooms to provide service access to each piece of
equipment.
• Design for a minimum of 24” of clear space around all equipment. This in
addition to the required service clearances recommended by the
manufacturer.
• Building Information Modeling (BIM) should be used where routing and space
limitations will have an impact on systems operations.
• In some AHJ, no mechanical equipment is to be visible from 1000’ sight line
in any direction. Verify requirements prior to design of system. Only where
there is no other available option are roof screens or parapet walls to screen
equipment allowable. Coordinate with Owner. See Division 13, Roof
Equipment Screens.
• All products and materials specified shall be of current manufacture and
verified as being reasonably assured of continuation for at least the life
expectancy of the equipment.
• All products, materials, designs, or other entities forming the configuration of
the system shall have a well-established performance history.
• Products and materials shall have a local representative, parts inventory and
factory authorized service.
• All products used in return air space to be UL listed for plenum use.
• Specify that all necessary precautions shall be taken as required to prevent
damage to the roofing due to welding or cutting of pipe. Any damage shall be
repaired by the roofing contractor, payment of which will be made by the
responsible party. Extent and nature of repairs necessary will be as
approved by Fort Bend ISD Construction Services Division.
• On renovation work, note there is to be no unused pipes, ducts, hangers or
equipment left in accessible areas.
Page 10 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
• The following paragraph shall appear in the contract documents at prominent

locations, shall be built into the overall project schedule and shall be strictly
enforced by the architect and engineer during construction:
No portion of the total contract will be declared substantially complete until
the automatic temperature control system has been demonstrated to be
complete and functioning as intended. The temperature control system will
be complete and functioning as intended when all of the space temperatures
are maintained at plus or minus two degrees of set point.
Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) (23 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of HVAC Systems (23 01 00)
• Building shall be kept broom clean prior to starting any mechanical equipment to
minimize dust in the system.
• Establish a training and demonstration requirement that is tied to contractor payment
applications.
• Operation and maintenance manuals (including start-up reports) shall be provided
prior to training/demonstration.
• Establish a standard to mark or label the ceiling grid, in a permanent manner,
showing location of isolation valves, trap primers etc.
Common Work Results for HVAC (23 05 00)
• Locate valves within 18” of ceiling so that they are within reach.
• All valves shall be clearly labeled.
• Locate valves over accessible areas as practical. Provide any access panels as
required for valves.
• Coordinate with Owner an acceptable way of subtly (but clearly) marking the location
of valves, such as a thumbtack on an acoustical ceiling tile.
• Coordinate location with architectural features so that the valves are operable and
accessible.
• Plug type gauge cocks shall not be allowed. Use ball valves.
• All exposed piping interior and exterior shall be painted. Interior color shall be
according to the adopted color codes and shall be appropriately labeled at interviews
in specified height letters. Piping exposed to view shall be painted to comply to color
scheme. Piping on roof/exterior shall be painted with epoxy or polyurethane
industrial coating.
Page 11 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
• Piping in central plant mechanical yard shall be epoxy painted or polyurethane

industrial coating applied in the appropriate color below. Insulated pipe will have the
insulation jacket painted and non-insulated pipe shall be properly prepared and
painted.
• Provide a framed copy of the chart below in the central plant for maintenance
personnel reference.
System Color
Chilled water from chiller Dark Blue (SW-4056)
Chilled water to chiller Light Blue (SW-4054)
Hot water from boiler Dark Red (SW-6871)
Hot water to boiler Light Red (SW-6858)
Condenser water from tower Light Green (SW-4069)
Condenser water to tower Dark Green (SW-4071)
Natural Gas Piping Safety Yellow (SW-4084)
Testing and Balancing for HVAC (23 05 93)
• The Testing, Adjusting and Balancing will be contracted and paid for directly by the
Owner and will be coordinated with all requirements of Division 23.
• The general contractor and appropriate sub-contractors shall turn over the completed
job to the TAB contractor before testing begins. The general contractor shall ensure
the system is fully operational, has been cleaned and new air filters installed in all
air-handling units prior to requesting the TAB contractor to perform his work.
• It shall be the responsibility of the general contractor and appropriate. Sub-
contractors to cooperate with the Owner’s TAB contractor in furnishing personnel
during the tab to make such adjustments and corrections specified by the Tab,
including but not limited to sheave changes.
• The general contractor to furnish two sets of reproducible test and balance reports
and shop drawings.
Schedules for HVAC (23 06 00) – No special considerations
HVAC Insulation (23 07 00)
• External insulation only on ducts, except as required for sound control.

• Do not apply insulation on the surface of the inside of mechanical room walls,
especially if room is used as a plenum return space. Provide insulation on
equipment instead.
Page 12 of 13
FBISD 23 00 00
• Chilled water pipe (inside the building) to be phenolic foam. Exterior chilled water
pipe may be insulated with polyisocyanurate insulation (fiberglass is not allowed).
• Condensate piping insulation in mechanical rooms shall be armaflex type.
• Non-asbestos or any other prohibited material.
Commissioning of HVAC (23 08 00)
• Include functional testing forms and procedures for HVAC control systems.
• Commissioning scope to include HVAC system, fume hoods and any
renewable/sustainable energy systems.
• Witness of pipe flushing/cleaning to be included in commissioning scope.
• Include full hydronic quality test of existing loops.
• Include full hydronic test and balance.
Instrumentation and Control for HVAC (23 09 00)
• MDF rooms to have 24 hour stand-alone cooling systems. IDF rooms are to have 24
hour ventilation with thermostatic control.
• See section 25 Building Automation systems for full BAS control specifications.
• Provide a “purge” type control button for additional ventilation in locker rooms when
there is a high volume of showers producing steam.
• The following paragraph shall appear in the contract documents at prominent
locations, shall be built into the overall project schedule and shall be strictly enforced
by the architect and engineer during construction:
No portion of the total contract will be declared substantially complete until the
automatic temperature control system has been demonstrated to be complete and
functioning as intended. The temperature control system will be complete and
functioning as intended when all of the space temperatures are maintained at plus or
minus two degrees of set point.
Instrumentation and Control for HVAC (23 09 00)

• Refer to Section 25 35 00 for other possible HVAC control specifications.
Page 13 of 13
FBISD 23 20 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating & Air-Conditioning (HVAC Piping and Pumps)
HVAC Piping and Pumps (23 20 00)
Hydronic Piping and Pumps (23 21 00)
• Provide auxiliary piping connections in the central plant to facilitate easy connection
of temporary air-cooled or heating equipment to the hot water/chilled water piping
systems. Include the following:
o Design the connection points to be the full size of the piping system and
locate them to isolate the chiller/boiler yet allowing the system pump(s) to
provide full circulation through both the distribution system and such
temporary equipment as may be required.
o Connections should include valves at appropriate locations with blind
flanges.
• Central plants with multiple chillers and cooling tower shall have interconnects to
allow cross flow between the different pieces of equipment.
• Roof mounted supports shall be compatible with roof system such as “Portable Pipe
Hangers” or equal. No wood supports.
• Underground Pipe shall be the pre-insulated type, as manufactured by Thermacor
Process Inc. Perma Pipe, or "approved equal." All sections shall be factory
fabricated to job dimensions with all fittings, anchors, and other accessories. Jackets
for pre-insulated piping, including fittings, shall be HDPE in accordance with ASTM
D1248, Type 3, Class CInsulation shall be rigid, 90-95% closed cell polyurethane
with a 2.5 to 3.5 pounds per cubic foot density and a coefficient of thermal
conductivity (K Factor) of .14 at 50 degree F or .17 at 75 degree F and conform to
HH-I-1751/4. All piping insulation shall be labeled as “non-asbestos insulation” at
point of access or use.
• Carrier pipe shall be standard weight, carbon steel, seamless or ERW, ASTM A-106,
ASTM A-53, Grade B
• Underground systems shall be buried in a trench not less than two (2) feet deeper
than the top of the pipe and not less than twelve inches wider than the combined
O.D. of all piping systems. All backfill material shall be cleaned bank sand to a
minimum thickness of 24 inches over the top of the jacket to meet H-20 highway
loading.
• All piping will be pressure tested for 150 psi for 48 hours prior to cover-up.
• A representative of the manufacturer shall be present during critical periods of
installation and testing, to verify that the installation is being made in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 23 20 00
CLEANING OF HYDRONIC AND CHILLED WATER PIPING SYSTEMS:
• General cleaning of piping systems. Purge pipe of construction debris and

contamination before placing the systems in service. Provide and install
temporary connections as required to clean, purge and circulate. Flush the
chilled and hot water systems utilizing the filter feeders.
• Install temporary strainers at the inlet of pumps and other equipment as
necessary where permanent strainers are not indicated. Keep strainers in
service until the equipment has been tested, then remove either entire
strainer or straining element only. Fit strainers with a line size blow down ball
valve and pipe to nearest drain. Blow down strainers, remove and clean as
frequently as necessary.
• Phase One: Initial flushing of system. Remove loose dirt, mill scale, weld
heads, rust and other deleterious substances without damage to system
components. Open valves, drains, vents and strainers at all system levels
during flushing procedures. Flush until “potable water clear” and particles
larger than 5 microns are removed.
• Connect dead-end supply and return headers, even if not shown on the
drawings, and provide terminal drains in bottom of pipe end caps or blind
flanges.
• Dispose of water in approved manner.
• Phase Two: Cleaning of Piping Systems. Remove, without chemical or
mechanical damage to any system component, adherent dirt (organic soil),
oil, grease, (hydrocarbons), welding and soldering flux, mill varnish, piping
components, rust (iron oxide) and other deleterious substances not removed
by initial flushing. Chemical shall be approved by district water treatment
provide prepping compound. Insert anti-foam compound as necessary.
Circulate for 48 hours or as recommended by the manufacture. Dispose of
water in approved manner. Flush system and replace with clean water.
Verify compatibility of chemicals used with existing chemical treatment
program on remodel projects.
• Phase Three: Final flushing and rinsing until “potable water clear” and
particles larger than 5 microns are removed. Operate valves to dislodge and
debris in valve body. Dispose of water in approved manner.
• Submit status report upon completion of each phase of work on each system.
• Special requirements, if any, are specified in the sections on each type of
piping or in the section on Water Treatment Systems.
• Owner’s representative or commissioning agent to be present to observe
cleaning of piping systems at each phase.
Seam and Condensate Piping and Pumps (23 22 00)
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 23 20 00
Refrigerant Piping (23 23 00)
Internal-Combustion Engine Piping (23 24 00)
HVAC Water Treatment (23 25 00)
HVAC water treatment by District supplier. Contractor to provide shot feeders, flow
indicators and taps for condenser water treatment system. Contractor to provide labor
and chemical to clean and flush all piping system. Contractor to coordinate with
treatment provider to be sure chemicals used are compatible with providers chemicals.
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 23 30 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC Air Distribution)
HVAC Air Distribution (23 30 00)
HVAC Ducts and Casings (23 31 00)
Provide access doors for cleaning ductwork before and after coils, filters, fans and
dampers. Locate doors so that the minimum numbers possible are used.
The following statement shall be included in contract documents: The Contractor shall
ensure that all ductwork either stored on site or installed in the building is thoroughly
sealed to protect against dirt and moisture until such time that the building is deemed by
the Owner to be adequately clean to allow for start-up of the associated air handling
equipment. Should ductwork not be sealed as specified, then the Contractor shall have
such ductwork professionally cleaned to an as-new condition at no cost to the owner.
Intake and Exhaust Louver Detail. Objective is to allow wind-blown water into ducts to
escape to building exterior. Detail to be included on drawings to indicate louver to duct
installation to achieve this objective. See example Louver Detail below, reference
Division 08 for additional information.
Air Plenums and Chases (23 32 00)
Air Duct Accessories (23 33 00)
HVAC Fans (23 34 00)
• HS Biology and Chemistry labs to have purge fans with local controls (timer).
• MS and HS Art rooms to have a general exhaust fan for odor control with local
controls (timer).
• Ventilation for kiln – see Division 10.
• MS and HS Prep rooms have general exhaust fan with high/low grilles interlocked
with air handling unit.
• HS Chemical storage rooms to have 24 hour continuous ventilation to building
exterior.
• Ventilation fans to be roof-mounted where possible.
• All outside air fans must be assessed for full function and control as a part of any
HVAC upgrade or replacement.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 23 30 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC Air Distribution)
Special Exhaust Systems (23 35 00)
Air Terminal Units (23 36 00)
Air Outlets and Inlets (23 37 00)
Specifications to note that radiation dampers are the responsibility of the mechanical
subcontractor
All louvers located above ceilings are to have sheet metal plenums. Plenums are to be
welded or soldiered and shall be watertight. Plenum bottoms also shall slope to louver
and the connection to the louver shall be watertight.
Ventilation Hoods (23 38 00)
Note: FBISD has a specific method of a plenum-to-louver connection. Detail and

direction to contractor’s required on contract documents. Detail below:
Page 2 of 2
Fort Bend ISD Construction Standards FBISD 23 40 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (Air Cleaning Devices)
HVAC Air Cleaning Devices (23 40 00)
Particulate Air Filtration (23 41 00)
Final air filters shall have a MERV 8 rating
FBISD requires flexibility in the filtration methods. Provide a steel filter frame that may
be used with roll type media and sized to accept 2” pleated filters.
Gas-Phase Air Filtration (23 42 00)
Electronic Air Cleaners (23 43 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 23 50 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating & Air-Conditioning (Central Heating Equipment)
Central Heating Equipment (23 50 00)
Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks (23 51 00)
Heating Boilers (23 52 00)
Provide auxiliary piping connections in the central plant to facilitate easy connection of
temporary air-cooled or heating equipment to the hot water/chilled water piping systems.
Include the following:
Design the connection points to be the full size of the piping system and locate
them to isolate the chiller/boiler yet allowing the system pump(s) to provide full
circulation through both the distribution system and such temporary equipment
as may be required.
Connections should include valves at appropriate locations with blind flanges.
Central plants with multiple chillers and cooling tower shall have interconnects to
Recommended Boiler manufacturers: Camus, Patterson-Kelley Sellers, Holman.
Heating Boiler Feed water Equipment (23 53 00)
Furnaces (23 54 00)
Fuel-Fired Heaters (23 55 00)
Solar Energy Heating Equipment (23 56 00)
Heat Exchangers for HVAC (23 57 00)
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 23 50 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating & Air-Conditioning (Central Heating Equipment)
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 23 60 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (Central Cooling Equipment)
Central Cooling Equipment (23 60 00)
Unless otherwise specified acceptable manufacturers for all 23 60 00 subsections of central cooling
equipment are Trane, Carrier, and McQuay.
Refrigerant Compressors (23 61 00)
Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units (23 62 00)
Refrigerant Condensers (23 63 00)
Locate all units at ground level (i.e. not on elevated racks) unless approved by Owner.
Packaged Water Chillers (23 64 00)
• Approved manufacturers are Carrier, Trane and McQuay.

• Multiple chillers and multiple cooling towers require cross-over capabilities.
• All campus central plants will use water-cooled chillers.
Design the connection points to be the full size of the piping system and locate them
to isolate the chiller/boiler yet allowing the system pump(s) to provide full circulation
through both the distribution system and such temporary equipment as may be
required.
• Provide analysis of premium efficiency air-cooled chillers in lieu of the minimum
(code compliant) efficiency water cooled chiller system for evaluation by FBISD.
• All cooling fins will be coated with anti-corrosive protectant.
Cooling Towers (23 65 00)
• Provide stainless steel construction for walls and basins.

• Architect to coordinate height of service yard wall with Owner. Typically Owner
prefers minimum 10’ in height for security reasons.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 23 60 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (Central Cooling Equipment)
• Verify height required with all applicable authorities and AHJ to ensure that
requirements are met.
• Provide stainless steel as primary material.
• Gear-driven, direct-drive or single, for greater than or equal 300 ton units.
• Refer to Division 3 for cooling tower supports.
• Belt drive for less than or equal to 300 ton units.
• Acceptable manufacturers are BAC, Marley, Evapco.
• Provide strainers with isolation valve on inlet and outlet at each cooling tower basin
to allow for cleaning. (Where possible, locate strainers on the building exterior with
downstream isolation valves).
• Multiple chillers and multiple cooling towers require cross-over capabilities.
Design the connection points to be the full size of the piping system and locate them
to isolate the chiller/boiler yet allowing the system pump(s) to provide full circulation
through both the distribution system and such temporary equipment as may be
required.
• Verify height required with all applicable authorities and AHJ to ensure that
requirements are met.
• All cooling tower electrical conduit will be “Plasti-Bond” covered with NEMA external
rated disconnect devices.
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 23 70 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (Central HVAC Equipment)
Central HVAC Equipment (23 70 00)
Thermal Storage (23 71 00) – No special considerations
Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment (23 72 00) – No special considerations
Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units (23 73 00)
• No roof-mounted equipment unless approved by Owner.

• During construction, temporary filters shall be maintained until Substantial
Completion.
• Building shall be kept broom clean prior to starting any mechanical equipment to
minimize dust in the system.
• Carrier, Temptrol, Thermal, Trane, are to be approved suppliers on the bid
documents provided all specifications are met. The Engineer of record may exclude
any of the alternate suppliers they deem unacceptable.
• Warranty shall include parts and labor for one year from substantial completion.
• Design with adequate clearance for servicing, cleaning, filter changing and coil pull
clearances.
• Furnish each unit with a durable, deep etched, 0.25" thick factory installed aluminum
identification plate, permanently mounted with the following information: Unit ID as
indicated on contract drawings, Serial Number, Model Number, CFM, SP, Motor HP,
Unit Power supply - V/PH/A, Supply fan type, Coil GPM and PD, Sales order #, and
Date unit manufactured.
• Unit Construction:
• Air unit shall be double wall construction, 2” thick insulated panels of
minimum 16 gauge exterior and 20 gauge interior galvanized steel.
• Panels must be removable without affecting structural integrity of the unit.
• Provide minimum 12 gauge galvanized steel base rails.
• 2” Insulated double wall hinged removable access doors with full perimeter
gaskets and steel door jams. Provide quarter turn cam lock latches. Provide
access doors on both sides of the unit at the upstream side off the coils,
filters, and motor/fan assembly.
• Provide 2” deflection internal spring isolation fan and motor assembly.
• Fan shafts to be solid steel.
• Bearings shall be re-greasable, 200,000 hour, ball or roller bearings. Extend
grease fittings to the drive side of the fan assembly.
• Provide TEFC (totally enclosed), premium efficiency motors mounted inside
the fan section.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 23 70 00
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (Central HVAC Equipment)
• Drives and belts must be sized for 175% of motor horsepower. Variable pitch
sheaves on motors. Provide replacement sheaves as required for final air
balance.
• Drives shall be two-belt.
• Provide 304 stainless steel, double walled, drain pan sloped in two directions.
• There shall be no standing water allowed inside the unit. Pans shall be
provided for hot and chilled water coils. Pans shall extend minimum 10”
down stream of the cooling coil.
• Provide 304 stainless steel coil casings tube supports and coil tracks.
• Coils are to be installed on tracks; disassembly of the unit removal is not
acceptable.
• Coils are to be not trapping, coil vents and drains are to be accessible outside
the units.
• Coils to be factory tested at minimum 300 psig.
• All penetrations thru the air unit shall be sealed with a grommet.
• FBISD requires flexibility in the filtration methods. Provide a steel filter frame
that may be used with roll type media and sized to accept 2” pleated filters
• Contractor will maintain all filters from start up through substantial completion; a
clean set of filters are to be installed when needed by Testing and Balancing.
• At substantial completion the units shall be clean inside and out and left in factory
new condition.
• Acceptable manufacturers are Carrier, Temptrol, Thermal, Trane and McQuay.
Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment (23 74 00)
Custom-Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment (23 75 00)
Evaporative Air-Cooling Equipment (23 76 00)
Page 2 of 2
Division #23 – Heating, Ventilating & Air-Conditioning (Decentralized HVAC Equip.) FBISD 23 80 00
Decentralized HVAC Equipment (23 80 00)
Decentralized Unitary HVAC Equipment (23 81 00)
• Approved manufactures are Trane, Carrier and Lennox.

• Provide at out buildings, field house and press boxes.
Convection Heating and Cooling Units (23 82 00)
Radiant Heating Units (23 83 00)
Humidity Control Equipment (23 84 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 25 00 00
Division #25 – Integrated Automation (Introduction)
DIVISION 25 INTENT (25 00 00)
Information within this section includes FBISD specific material and detail preferences with regards to
integrated automation. Certain design elements that are important to FBISD are included within this
section as well as system, performance, operation and check out.
The engineering consultant is required to use the following table to acknowledge processing and
compliance to all subsections modified per FBISD specific standards or recommendation to the project
engineering specifications.
The consulting engineer is to further assure that all FBISD standard wording and concerns are
presented in all project engineering specification, manual and drawings.
Section CSI Description Compliance
Acknowledgement(C)
25 00 00 General Requirements
System Design Requirements
25 01 00 Operating and Maintenance
250600 Schedule for Integrated Automation(IA)
25 07 00 Plumbing Insulation
25 08 00 Commissioning of IA
25 09 00 Instrumentation and Control
25 11 00 Facility Water Distribution
25 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewage
25 14 00 IA Local Controls
25 35 00 IA Instrumentation – HVAC Devises
25 36 00 IA Instrumentation – Electrical Devices
25 36 26 IA Instrumentation - Lighting
Page 1 of 10
FBISD 25 00 00
25 51 00 IA Control (IAC) of Facility Equipment
25 54 00 IAC of Plumbing Fixtures
25 56 00 IAC of Electrical Systems
25 58 00 IAC of Electric Safety and Security
25 91 00 (IAC) Sequences for Facility Equipment
25 93 00 IAC Sequences for Fire Suppression
25 94 00 IAC Sequences for Plumbing
25 95 00 IAC Sequences for HVAC
25 95 00 IAC Sequences for Lighting
1) General Requirements for Integrated Automation (This Section)

2) Integrated Automation Network Equipment (25 10 00)
3) Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices (25 30 00)
4) Integrated Automation Facility Controls (25 50 00)
5) Integrated Automation Control Sequences (25 90 00)
Note: The following sections are “unassigned” in the current CSI format:
• 25 20 00
• 25 40 00
• 25 60 00
• 25 70 00
• 25 80 00
General Design Requirements:
• Automated Logic (Installed by Houston Branch Office) is the only approved lighting and
building control system supplier and installer.
• Building control supplier and installer shall provide appropriate personnel for functional
testing procedures conducted by commissioning provider.
Page 2 of 10
FBISD 25 00 00
• The following paragraph shall appear in the contract documents at prominent locations, and
shall be strictly enforced by the architect and engineer during construction:
No portion of the total contract will be declared substantially complete until the automatic
temperature control system and lighting control system has been demonstrated to be complete
and functioning as intended. The temperature control system will be complete and functioning
as intended when all of the space temperatures are maintained at plus or minus two degrees of
set point.
• Contract documents shall include a requirement for the controls installer/supplier shall
participate in the third party commissioning process. The self-check-out and testing shall
still be required but after the contractor checks the system, functional testing conducted by
the commissioning agent shall be performed with the participation of the controls contractor.
• Humidity control shall be included in (but is not limited to) the following areas for new
construction:
o Fine Arts (Band, orchestra, choir, etc.)
o Uniform Storage
o Locker rooms (consider push button controlling a fan for use when showers are
active)
o Book storage rooms
o Library
o Cafeteria
o Auditorium
o Gymnasium
o Classrooms
Integrated Automation (25 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of Integrated Automation (25 01 00)
General:
• The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of DDC controllers
and a web-based operator interface. The facility shall be integrated into the existing
Automated Logic Fort Bend ISD District Wide Energy Management Server. All energy data,
food service monitoring, lighting controls and BAS HVAC alarms shall be provided and
commissioned as per district standards. Depict each mechanical system and building floor
Page 3 of 10
FBISD 25 00 00
plan by a point-and-click graphics. A web server with a network interface card shall gather
data from this system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web
browser on each PC connected to the network. Operators shall be able to perform all normal
operator functions through the web browser interface. If individual software seat licenses or
keys are required provide a minimum of 4 additional licenses to accommodate multiple
owner operators.
• Manufacturer shall provide a web-based BAS platform; the installing contractor shall provide
the new web-based software and software updates required for this project. Additionally the
installing contractor shall provide all computer related components (BAS web server –
reference specifications for hardware requirements) for the new software platform to function
in a peer-to-peer environment.
• The system shall directly control HVAC equipment as specified in Sequences of Operation.
Each zone controller shall provide occupied and unoccupied modes of operation by individual
zone. Furnish energy conservation features such as optimal start and stop, night setback,
request-based logic, and demand level adjustment of set points.
• System shall use the BACnet protocol for communication to the operator workstation or web
server and for communication between control modules.
• Data provided shall be further specified by Owner.
• BACnet I/F must be completely installed.
System Performance
• Performance Standards. System shall conform to the following minimum standards over network
connections. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer's recommended hardware and software for
operator workstation (server and browser for web-based systems).
• Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning points, PID
loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 6 sec.
• Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a binary object within 2 sec. Devices shall
begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec.
• Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the workstation within
15 sec.
• Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as
often as once every 5 sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under
control.
• Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute DDC PID control loops
at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select execution times consistent with the
mechanical process under control.
• Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Each workstation on the network shall receive alarms within 5 sec of
other workstations.
Page 4 of 10
FBISD 25 00 00
• Reporting Accuracy. System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy listed in Table 1.
• Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at set point within
tolerances listed in Table 2.
• Contractor will provide a clear plan for nuisance alarm management.
Table 1 Reporting Accuracy
Measured Variable Reported Accuracy
Space Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
Ducted Air ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
Outside Air ±1.0ºC (±2ºF)
Dew Point ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)
Water Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
Delta-T ±0.15ºC (±0.25ºF)
Relative Humidity ±3% RH
Water Flow ±2% of full scale
Airflow (terminal) ±10% of full scale (see Note 1)
Airflow (measuring stations) ±5% of full scale
Airflow (pressurized spaces) ±3% of full scale
Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)
Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)
Water Pressure ±2% of full scale (see Note 2)
Electrical (A, V, W, Power ±1% of reading (see Note 3)

Factor)
Carbon Monoxide (CO) ±5% of reading
Page 5 of 10
FBISD 25 00 00
Carbon Dioxide (CO 2) ±50 ppm
Note 1: 10% - 100% of scale

Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure
Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters
Table 2
Control Stability and Accuracy
Control Range of Medium

Controlled Variable
Accuracy
±50 Pa (±0.2 0-1.5 kPa (0-6 in. w.g.)
in. w.g.) -25 to 25 Pa (-0.1 to 0.1
Air Pressure
±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)
in. w.g.)
±10% of full
Airflow
scale
Space Temperature ±1.0ºC (±2.0ºF)
Duct Temperature ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)
Humidity ±5% RH
±10 kPa (±1.5 MPa (1-150 psi)
psi) 0-12.5 kPa (0-50 in. w.g.)
Fluid Pressure
±250 Pa (±1.0 differential
in. w.g.)
Common Work Results for Integrated Automation (25 05 00)
Refer to other subsections within 25 00 00
Schedules for Integrated Automation (25 06 00)
Provide schedule in construction documents for any low voltage lighting controls
Commissioning of Integrated Automation (25 08 00)
Page 6 of 10
FBISD 25 00 00
Control System Checkout and Testing
• Complete startup testing to verify operational control system before notifying Owner
of system demonstration. Provide Owner with schedule for startup testing. Owner
may have representative present during any or all startup testing.
• Calibrate and prepare for service each instrument, control, and accessory equipment
furnished under building controls package.
• Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground faults.
Verify that terminations are tight.
• Enable control systems and verify each input device's calibration. Calibrate each
device according to manufacturer's recommendations.
• Verify that binary output devices such as relays, solenoid valves, two-position
actuators and control valves, and magnetic starters, operate properly and that
normal positions are correct.
• Verify that analog output devices such as I/Ps and actuators are functional, that start
and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. Check
control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. Make
necessary adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel.
• Prepare a log documenting startup testing of each input and output device, with
technician's initials certifying each device has been tested and calibrated.
• Verify that system operates according to sequences of operation. Simulate and
observe each operational mode by overriding and varying inputs and schedules.
Tune PID loops and each control routine that requires tuning.
• Alarms and Interlocks.
• Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm.
• Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators
fail in the proper direction.
• Test interlock actions by simulating alarm conditions to check initiating value
of variable and interlock action.
• Provide and submit a “check-out/start-up” report prior to scheduling any
demonstrations or functional testing.
Control System Demonstration
• Prior to acceptance, perform the following performance tests to demonstrate system

operation and compliance with specification after and in addition to tests specified in
(Control System Checkout and Testing). Provide Engineer with log documenting
completion of startup tests.
Page 7 of 10
FBISD 25 00 00
•
Engineer or Commissioning Agent will be present to observe and review system
demonstration. Notify A/E and commissioning teams at least 10 days before system
demonstration begins.
• Demonstration shall follow process submitted and approved. Complete approved
checklists and forms for each system as part of system demonstration.
• Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation. Provide at least
two persons equipped with two-way communication. Demonstrate calibration and
response of any input and output points requested by Engineer/ Commissioning
agent. Provide and operate test equipment required to prove proper system
operation.
• Demonstrate compliance of system performance.
• Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through each operational
mode.
• Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface.
• Demonstrate each of the following.
• DDC loop response. Supply graphical trend data output showing each DDC
loop's response to a set point change representing an actuator position
change of at least 25% of full range. Trend sampling rate shall be from 10
seconds to 3 minutes, depending on loop speed. Each sample's trend data
shall show set point, actuator position, and controlled variable values.
Engineer will require further tuning of each loop that displays unreasonably
under- or over-damped control.
• Demand limiting. Supply trend data output showing demand-limiting algorithm
action. Trend data shall document action sampled each minute over at least a
30-minute period and shall show building kW, demand-limiting set point, and
status of set points and other affected equipment parameters.
• Building fire alarm system interface.
• Trend logs for each system. Trend data shall indicate set points, operating
points, valve positions, and other data as specified in the points list provided
with each sequence of operation.
• Full lighting controls interface including interlocks with other building systems.
• Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after
Contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to
successfully complete each test.
ACCEPTANCE
• After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of both
Engineer and Owner/commissioning agent, owner will accept control system as
meeting completion requirements. Engineer may exempt tests from completion
Page 8 of 10
FBISD 25 00 00
requirements that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond Contractor's

control. Engineer will provide written statement of each exempted test. Exempted
tests shall be performed as part of warranty.
• System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists
are submitted and approved.
CLEANING
• Each day clean up debris resulting from work. Remove packaging material as soon as
its contents have been removed. Collect waste and place in designated location.
• On completion of work in each area, clean work debris and equipment. Keep areas
free from dust, dirt, and debris.
• On completion of work, check equipment furnished under this section for paint
damage. Repair damaged factory-finished paint to match adjacent areas. Replace
deformed cabinets and enclosures with new material and repaint to match adjacent
areas.
TRAINING
• The contractor shall provide training to owner personnel in a laboratory classroom

environment. Each student shall be provided with a dedicated computer workstation
utilizing a simulated BAS software platform that is installed for this project. The
instructor’s shall have CEU accreditation for all training courses offered. Provide
documentation for this requirement in the initial BAS submittal. If contractor does not
have CEU instructor or offer these courses locally include cost for tuition, travel and
boarding to send students to manufacturer training facility. The owner shall not incur
any additional cost for training classes as listed below for the first 3 years. The
following training courses shall be conducted for 4 individuals on 4 separate
occasions each year for a 3-year period (12 classes total) following substantial
completion:
• Operator Overview – Consists of general system navigation, scheduling functions, set
point modifications and parameter adjustments.
• Advanced Topics Overview – Detailed analysis of trend setup/configuration, trend
historian, alarm setup, alarm actions (email, printing, etc.), point renaming, and detailed
analysis of equipment parameters.
• Program/Logic Manipulation – Modify system programs as needed for additions and
modifications.
Page 9 of 10
FBISD 25 00 00
• Graphic Manipulation – Modify system graphics as needed for additions and

modifications.
• Hardware Troubleshooting – Classroom setup shall have HVAC mock-up systems.
Operators shall be able to interact with this live system through the BAS utilized for this
project. Class will provide students the ability to identify and repair common problems
regularly encountered.
• Software Troubleshooting - Classroom setup shall have HVAC mock-up systems.
Operators shall be able to interact with this live system through the BAS utilized for this
project. Class will provide students the ability to identify and repair common issues that
can be utilized via software modifications.
• Central Plant Operation – At a minimum the instructor shall thoroughly explain different
types of central plant equipment and proper system modifications that can be made to
enhance system performance and energy savings.
• HVAC System Training – Objective of this class is to provide basic HVAC system
knowledge of various types of systems including types of air side distribution and water
side distribution. Topics such as thermodynamics, psychometrics, de-humidification, and
demand control ventilation shall be thoroughly explained.
• Provide BACnet training for all new installations.
Page 10 of 10
FBISD 25 10 00
Division #25 – Integrated Automation (Integrated Automation Network Equipment)
Integrated Automation Network Equipment (25 10 00)
Integrated Automation Network Devices (25 11 00)
No special considerations for Fort Bend ISD Projects
Integrated Automation Network Gateways (25 12 00)
Integrated Automation Control and Monitoring Network (25 13 00)
Integrated Automation Local Control Units (25 14 00)
General. Provide Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers

(AAC), Application Specific Controllers (ASC), and Smart Actuators (SA) as
required to achieve performance specified in Section 15900 Article 1.9 (System
Performance).
BACnet:
• Building Controllers (BCs). Each BC shall have demonstrated

interoperability during at least one BMA Interoperability Workshop and
shall substantially conform to BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
device profile as specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001, BACnet
Annex L.
• Advanced Application Controllers (AACs). Each AAC shall conform to
BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) device profile as
specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001, BACnet Annex L and shall be
listed as a certified B-AAC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL)
Product Listing.
• Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall conform to
BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC) device profile as
specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001, BACnet Annex L and shall be
listed as a certified B-ASC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL)
Product Listing.
• Smart Actuators (SAs). Each SA shall conform to BACnet Smart
Actuator (B-SA) device profile as specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135-
2001, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-SA in the
BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing.
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 25 10 00
• BACnet Communication:
 Each BC shall reside on or be connected to a BACnet network
using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol
and BACnet/IP addressing.
 BACnet routing shall be performed by BCs or other BACnet
device routers as necessary to connect BCs to networks of
AACs and ASCs.
 Each AAC and ASC shall reside on a BACnet network using
the ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
 Each SA shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET
or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
Communication:
• Service Port. Each controller shall provide a service communication

port for connection to a Portable Operator's Terminal. Connection
shall be extended to space temperature sensor ports where shown on
drawings.
• Signal Management. BC and ASC operating systems shall manage
input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers
to share real and virtual object information and to allow for central
monitoring and alarms.
• Data Sharing. Each BC and AAC shall share data as required with
each networked BC and AAC.
• Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment shall be controlled
by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of
communication failure. All I/O points specified for a piece of
equipment shall be integral to its controller. Provide stable and reliable
stand-alone control using default values or other method for values
normally read over the network.
Environment:
• Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient

conditions.
• Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be

mounted in waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -
29°C to 60°C (-20°F to 140°F).
• Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-
protective enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C
(32°F to 120°F).
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 25 10 00
Real-Time Clock:
• Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.
Serviceability:
• Controllers shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and

processor.
• Wires shall be connected to a field-removable modular terminal strip
or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
• Each BC and AAC shall continually check its processor and memory
circuit status and shall generate an alarm on abnormal operation.
System shall continuously check controller network and generate
alarm for each controller that fails to respond.
Memory:
• Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and

programming requirements.
• Each BC and AAC shall retain BIOS and application programming for
at least 72 hours in the event of power loss.
• Each ASC and SA shall use nonvolatile memory and shall retain BIOS
and application programming in the event of power loss. System shall
automatically download dynamic control parameters following power
loss.
Immunity to Power and Noise:
• Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal

voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%
nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise
of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
Transformer:
• ASC power supply shall be fused or current limiting and shall be rated
at a minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption.
Integrated Automation Software (25 15 00) – No Special Considerations
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 25 30 00
Division #25 – Integrated Automation
(Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices)
Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices (25 30 00)
Integrated Automation Instrumentation & Terminal Devices for Facility Equipment (25 31 00)
Integrated Automation Instrumentation & Terminal Devices for Conveying Equipment (25 32 00)
No special considerations. Refer to Division 14 for additional information concerning

these systems.
Integrated Automation Instrumentation & Terminal Devices for Fire Suppression (25 33 00)

these systems
Integrated Automation Instrumentation & Terminal Devices for Plumbing (25 34 00)

these systems
Integrated Automation Instrumentation & Terminal Devices for HVAC (25 35 00). Refer to
Section 23 09 00 for other possible HVAC Control Specifications
Motorized Control Dampers
• Type: Control dampers shall have linear flow characteristics and shall be
parallel- or opposed-blade type as specified below or as scheduled on
drawings.
A. Outdoor and return air mixing dampers and face-and-bypass dampers

shall be parallel-blade and shall direct airstreams toward each other.
B. Other modulating dampers shall be opposed-blade.
C. Two-position shutoff dampers shall be parallel- or opposed-blade with
blade and side seals.
• Frame: Damper frames shall be 2.38 mm (13 gauge) galvanized steel

channel or 3.175 mm (1/8 in.) extruded aluminum with reinforced corner
bracing.
• Blades: Damper blades shall not exceed 20 cm (8 in.) in width or 125 cm (48
in.) in length. Blades shall be suitable for medium velocity (10 m/s [2000 fpm])
performance. Blades shall be not less than 1.5875 mm (16 gauge).
Page 1 of 8
FBISD 25 30 00
• Shaft Bearings. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by

manufacturer for application, oil impregnated sintered bronze, or better.
• Seals. Blade edges and frame top and bottom shall have replaceable seals of
butyl rubber or neoprene. Side seals shall be spring-loaded stainless steel.
Blade seals shall leak no more than 50 L/s·m2 (10 cfm per ft. 2) at 1000 Pa
(4 in. w.g.) differential pressure. Blades shall be airfoil type suitable for wide-
open face velocity of 7.5 m/s (1500 fpm).
• Sections. Damper sections shall not exceed 125 cm - 150 cm (48 in. - 60 in.).
Each section shall have at least one damper actuator.
• Linkages. Dampers shall have exposed linkages.
Electric Damper and Valve Actuators
• Stall Protection. Mechanical or electronic stall protection shall prevent

actuator damage throughout the actuator's rotation.
• Spring-return Mechanism. Actuators used for power-failure and safety
applications shall have an internal mechanical spring-return mechanism or an
uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
• Signal and Range. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 Vdc or a 0-20
mA control signal and shall have a 2-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA operating range.
• Wiring. 24 Vac and 24 Vdc actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring.
• Manual Positioning. Operators shall be able to manually position each
actuator when the actuator is not powered. Non-spring-return actuators shall
have an external manual gear release. Spring-return actuators with more
than 7 N·m (60 in.-lb.) torque capacity shall have a manual crank.
Control Valves
• General. Select body and trim materials in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations for design conditions and service shown.
• Type. Provide two- or three-way control valves for two-position or modulating
service as shown.
Water Valves
• Valves providing two-position service shall be quick opening. Two-way valves

shall have replaceable disc or ball.
• Close-off (Differential) Pressure Rating. Valve actuator and trim shall provide
the following minimum close-off pressure ratings: Two-way: 100% of total
system (pump) head, Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports
A and B at design flow or 100% of total system (pump) head.
• Ports: Valves providing modulating service shall have equal % ports.
Page 2 of 8
FBISD 25 30 00
• Sizing: Two-position service: line size, Two-way modulating service: select

pressure drop equal to the greatest of twice the pressure drop through heat
exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between supply and return
mains, or 35 kPa (5 psi), Three-way modulating service: select pressure drop
equal to the smaller of twice the pressure drop through the coil exchanger
(load) or 35 kPa (5 psi).
• Fail Position: Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as follows
unless otherwise specified. Water zone valves: normally closed, Heating
coils in air handlers: normally closed, Chilled water control valves: normally
open and Other applications: as scheduled or as required by sequences of
operation.
Steam Valves
• Close-off (Differential) Pressure Rating. Valve actuator and trim shall provide
minimum close-off pressure rating equal to 150% of operating (inlet)
pressure.
• Ports. Valves providing modulating service shall have linear ports.
• Sizing: Two-position service: select pressure drop equal to 10%-20% of inlet
psig., Modulating service at 100 kPa (15 psig) or less: select pressure drop
equal to 80% of inlet psig., Modulating service at 101-350 kPa (16-50 psig):
select pressure drop equal to 50% of inlet psig., Modulating service at over
350 kPa (50 psig): select pressure drop as scheduled on drawings.
Binary Temperature Devices
• Low-Voltage Space Thermostats: Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24

V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation
heater, concealed set point adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) set point
range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.
• Line-Voltage Space Thermostats: Line-voltage space thermostats shall be
bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-
switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for
electrical rating, concealed set point adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) set
point range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.
• Low-Limit Thermostats: Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed,
vapor pressure type. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft.) long. Element shall
sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft.) section and shall respond to lowest
sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.
Temperature Sensors
Page 3 of 8
FBISD 25 30 00
• Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or

thermistor.
• Duct sensors shall be single point or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors
shall be a minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft.) in length per 1 m 2(10 ft. 2) of duct cross-
section.
• Immersion sensors shall have a separable stainless steel well. Well pressure
rating shall be consistent with system pressure it will be immersed in. Well
shall withstand pipe design flow velocities.
• Space sensors shall have set point adjustment, override switch, display, and
communication port as shown.
• Differential sensors shall be matched sensors for differential temperature
measurement.
Humidity Sensors
• Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-80%.

• Duct sensors shall have a sampling chamber.
• Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-95% RH and
shall be suitable for ambient conditions of -3 degrees C – 75 degrees C (25
degrees F – 170 degrees F)
• Humidity sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale annually.
• Combo device including temperature and humidity, and/or CO2.
Flow Switches
• Flow-proving switches shall be paddle (water service only) or differential

pressure type (air or water service) as shown. Switches shall be UL listed,
SPDT snap-acting, and pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum).
• Paddle switches shall have adjustable sensitivity and NEMA 1 enclosure
unless otherwise specified.
• Differential pressure switches shall have scale range and differential suitable
for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.
Relays
• Control Relays. Control relays shall be plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have
dust cover and LED "energized" indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and
coil voltage shall be suitable for application.
• Time Delay Relays. Time delay relays shall be solid-state plug-in type; UL
listed, and shall have adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable ±100%
from set point shown. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be
Page 4 of 8
FBISD 25 30 00
suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for relays not installed in
local control panel.
Override Timers
• Unless implemented in control software, override timers shall be spring-

wound line voltage, UL Listed, with contact rating and configuration required
by application. Provide 0-6 hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified.
Flush mount timer on local control panel face or where shown.
Current Transmitters
• AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current

transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4-20
mA two-wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A,
150 A, and 200 A, with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall
be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.
• Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be
UL/CSA recognized.
• Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.
Current Transformers
• AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely

encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.
• Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected
for ±1% accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.
• Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core
transformers for existing wiring installation.
Voltage Transmitters
• AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-

20 mA output with zero and span adjustment.
• Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 250-330
Vac, and 400-600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm
maximum burden.
• Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be
UL/CSA recognized at 600 Vac rating.
Page 5 of 8
FBISD 25 30 00
Voltage Transformers
• AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and

shall have built-in fuse protection.
• Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4°C-55°C (40°F-
130°F) and shall provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.
• Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or
plastic.
Power Monitors
• Power monitors shall be three-phase type and shall have three-phase

disconnect and shorting switch assembly, UL listed voltage transformers, and
UL listed split-core current transformers.
• Power monitors shall provide selectable output: rate pulse for kWh reading or
4-20 mA for kW reading. Power monitors shall operate with 5 A current inputs
and maximum error of ±2% at 1.0 power factor or ±2.5% at 0.5 power factor.
Current Switches
• Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable

trip current. Select switches to match application current and DDC system
output requirements.
Pressure Transducers
• Transducers shall have linear output signal and field-adjustable zero and
span.
• Continuous operating conditions of positive or negative pressure 50% greater
than calibrated span shall not damage transducer sensing elements.
• Water pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum
proof pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output,
suitable mounting provisions, and block and bleed valves.
• Water differential pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with
minimum proof pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Over-range limit (differential
pressure) and maximum static pressure shall be 2000 kPa (300 psi.)
Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and 5-
valve manifold.
Differential Pressure Switches
Page 6 of 8
FBISD 25 30 00
• Differential pressure switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT

snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) and shall have scale range
and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure
unless otherwise specified.
Pressure-Electric (PE) Switches
• PE switches shall be UL listed, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) or motor

control rated, metal or neoprene diaphragm actuated, operating pressure
rated for 0-175 kPa (0-25 psig), with calibrated scale minimum set point
range of 14-125 kPa (2-18 psig).
• Provide one- or two-stage switch action (SPDT, DPST, or DPDT) as

required by application.
• Switches shall be open type (panel-mounted). Exception: Switches
shall be enclosed type for remote installation. Enclosed type shall be
NEMA 1 unless otherwise specified.
• Each pneumatic signal line to PE switches shall have permanent
indicating gauge.
Local Control Panels
• Indoor control panels shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with

hinged door key-lock latch and removable sub-panels. A common key shall
open each control panel and sub-panel.
• Prewire internal and face-mounted device connections with color-coded
stranded conductors tie-wrapped or neatly installed in plastic troughs. Field
connection terminals shall be UL listed for 600 V service, individually
identified per control and interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field
wiring.
• Each local panel shall have a control power source power switch (on-off) with
overcurrent protection.
Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices for Electrical Systems (25 36 00)
• Provide a building electric meter that will send an analog signal representative of the
building KW usage to the B.A.S. Through the B.A.S. control module, the building
meter shall integrate the input and calculate the buildings KWH usage. The B.A.S.
control module shall show the current usage, monthly usage, year-to-date usage,
and time and date of the highest peak demand for the month and year. Demand
thresholds may be set to adjust set points and shed loads in order to reduce peak
consumption. The usage data shall be sent to the server and stored to be used by
Page 7 of 8
FBISD 25 30 00
the Districts M-Power energy tracking system. The building meter shall monitor for
surges and record such surges and notify operator of surges.
• Sub meter kitchen power and standalone buildings such as Extended Day.
Integrated Automation Instrumentation and Terminal Devices for Electronic Safety and Security
Systems (25 38 00)
Page 8 of 8
Division #25 – Integrated Automation (Integrated Automation Facility Controls) FBISD 25 50 00
Integrated Automation Facility Controls (25 50 00)
Integrated Automation Control of Facility Equipment (25 51 00)
Energy Efficiency Education Dashboard (EEED)
Controls contractor shall provide an Energy Efficiency Education Dashboard

(EEED) interactive display. It shall be the responsibility of Integrated Automation
Controls contractor to develop the graphics, screens and associated software to
accomplish the features listed in this narrative.
The Eco-Screen is an interactive tool to help educate the public on the green
features and energy efficiency of a facility. It uses the information gathered by the
building automation system to display the energy consumption and conditions of
the facility. Its dynamic graphics provide an exciting and powerful way to
showcase the “hidden” systems within a facility. It also helps to inform the public
about green buildings and sustainability.
The system shall feature easy to recognize icons that help user navigate through
each category with ease. Other features shall include tabs that show Usage,
Comparisons, Ways to Save, Learn More, How it Works, weather and facility
information:
The “Usage” tab shows the historical consumption of that type of energy
as well as the current demand. The date range for this information can be
easily selected by clicking the calendar icons. The Chart can be displayed
as a line graph or bar chart.
The “Compare” tab is used to show how many or much of a common item
it would take to equal the historical usage.
The “Ways to Save” tab shows the different things the user can do to
save that type of energy.
The “Learn More” tab goes further by pointing out additional interesting
facts about that type of energy.
The “How it Works” feature shows the details of the mechanical systems,
cooling system and Photo-Voltaic Solar Cells. These animated graphics
help the user to learn how these systems work by dividing the systems
into easy to understand parts and explaining the functionality and
purpose.
Page 1 of 4
The “Weather” icon shows current weather conditions and a two-day

forecast. On sites with their own weather station, detailed information
from the system is displayed.
The “School Information” icon is a feature that is used to highlight the

local district and campus news and information. This can be displayed in
a static bill board type screen or linked to the local campus web site.
Integrated Automation Control of Conveying Equipment (25 52 00)
Integrated Automation Control of Fire-Suppression Systems (25 53 00)
Integrated Automation Control of Plumbing (25 54 00)
• Provide a meter to be installed by plumbing contractor that will monitor cooling tower
make-up for review by energy management. Monitoring shall include the current flow
at gallons-per-minute, gallons used per month (user adjustable time duration) total
usage and alarm if excessive flow.
• Kitchen, Extended Day, and Irrigation shall be metered separately.
• Provide a meter to be installed by plumbing contractor that will monitor facility
domestic water usage for review by energy management. Monitoring shall include
the current flow at gallons-per-minute, gallons used per month (user adjustable time
duration) total usage and alarm if excessive flow.
• Provide a meter to be installed by plumbing contractor that will monitor irrigation
water usage for review by energy management. Monitoring shall include the current
flow at gallons-per-minute, gallons used per month (user adjustable time duration)
total usage and alarm if excessive flow.
• Provide a meter to be installed by plumbing contractor that will monitor natural gas
usage for review by energy management. Monitoring shall include the volume of gas
used per month (user adjustable time duration) total usage and alarm if excessive
flow. Kitchen to be metered separately.
• Control electric drinking fountain power through scheduling.
• Control electric, domestic water heaters through scheduling.
• Control domestic water heater circulation pumps via scheduling.
• Interlock with water softener to send alarms to energy management.
• BAS shall communicate and schedule irrigation controller.
Page 2 of 4
Integrated Automation Control of HVAC (25 55 00)
Communications with Third Party Equipment:
Any additional integral control systems included with the products integrated with
the work of this section shall be furnished with a BACnet interface for integration
into the Direct Digital Control System described in this section (reference
sequence of operations and points list for specifics). Those systems include:
o Chillers
o Boilers
o Dedicated outdoor air handlers
o Any stand-alone equipment
o Irrigation controls
Integrated Automation Control of Electrical Systems (25 56 00)
• Any additional integral control systems included in the electrical systems shall be
furnished with a BACnet interface for integration into the Direct Digital Control
Systems. Those systems include switchgear and low voltage lighting control system.
• Provide a building electric meter that will send an analog signal representative of the
building KW usage to the B.A.S. Through the B.A.S. control module, the building
meter shall integrate the input and calculate the buildings KWH usage. The B.A.S.
control module shall show the current usage, monthly usage, year-to-date usage,
and time and date of the highest peak demand for the month and year. Demand
thresholds may be set to adjust set points and shed loads in order to reduce peak
consumption. The usage data shall be sent to the server and stored to be used by
the Districts M-Power energy tracking system. The building meter shall monitor for
surges and record such surges and notify operator of surges.
• Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) equipment and any line filtering
equipment shall be monitored.
• Discuss monitoring of sub-systems to evaluate energy usage such as kitchen or
lighting during design phase. Monitoring of sub-systems may be part of LEED
scope.
• Kitchen, Extended Day, and Irrigation to be metered separately.
Integrated Automation Control of Communications Systems (25 57 00)
Page 3 of 4
Integrated Automation Control of Electronic Safety and Security Systems (25 58 00)
Interlock the building automation system with the fire alarm system and security system
for lighting control and HVAC Points to interlock include fire alarm activation, security
system activation, security system arming and security system disarming.
• Interlock to kitchen fire protection systems.
Page 4 of 4
Division #25 – Integrated Automation (Integrated Automation Control Sequences) FBISD 25 90 00
Integrated Automation Control Sequences (25 90 00)
Integrated Automation Control Sequences for Facility Equipment (25 91 00)
Freezer/Cooler Alarm
• Freezer temperature – AI
• Cooler temperature – AI
• Remote-bulb temperature sensors shall be mounted in both the freezer and
cooler. Alarms shall be sent to the computers, pagers, and/or text message
compatible cell phones designated by the Fort Bend ISD personnel when
either temperature rises above or falls below operator adjustable set points.
Building Shutdown (shelter in place)
• Shutdown switch status – dry contact - D
• A maintained mushroom type emergency local override button shall be
installed in the principal’s office or the administration area shall shut down the
HVAC system in case of emergency. Once pushed the button must be reset
to allow the HVAC system to resume normal operation. The final location of
the building shutdown is to be determined by Fort Bend ISD personnel
Chemical Injection Feeders:
Monitor amount of chemical being fed into the cooling tower system. Data point
will be used for display back at the B.A.S. computer.
Refrigerant Monitoring System

• An “ON ONLY” emergency switch will de-energize the chillers and initiate an
audible/visual alarm. The “ON ONLY” emergency switch will have to be
manually reset after it has been engaged.
• An “OFF ONLY” emergency switch will de-energize electrical equipment
within the central plant.
• The refrigerant sensor will energize the exhaust fan for emergency ventilation
and de-energize the chiller and electrical equipment in the central plant when
the concentration of refrigerant vapors exceeds the set percentage by the
UMC 94 section 1107.5.
• Refrigerant monitoring annunciation shall be installed at all entry points into
mechanical rooms.
Page 1 of 30
Irrigation Control
BAS system will interface with irrigation controller to allow FBISD to controls
scheduling and zoning of irrigation.
Integrated Automation Control Sequences for Conveying Equipment (25 92 00)
Integrated Automation Control Sequences for Fire-Suppression Systems (25 93 00)
• Interlock of fire suppression in IT and kitchen spaces are required and will be fully
specified by BAS and suppression contracts.
Integrated Automation Control Sequences for Plumbing (25 94 00)
Water meter
• Monitor and display current flow showing gallons per minute - AI

• Monitor total gallons used (trend) - AI
• Alarm - DI
Domestic water heater
• Start/stop – DO
• Leaving water temperature AI
• Status
Domestic water heating circulation pump
• Start/stop – DO
• Return water temperature – AI
• Status
Electric drinking fountain
• Start/stop - DO
• Status
Integrated Automation Control Sequences for HVAC (25 95 00)
VAV AIR HANDLER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Page 2 of 30
• Cold Deck temperature - AI

• Cold Deck Duct static pressure - AI
• Air handler fan status – current switch - DI
• Cold Deck high discharge static pressure - dry contacts – DI
• Chilled water valve –AO
• Pre Heat Hot water valve –AO
• Pre Heat Deck temperature - AI
• Fan speed control – AO
• Air handler fan start/stop – DO
• OA Damper control – AO
• OA Air Flow Station– AI
• Associated exhaust fan start/stop – DO
• Leaving air temperature – AI
AHU Activation
Each variable volume air handler shall be activated by a request to run from any
VAV box it serves.
OA Air Flow Station
The outside air flow station shall monitor outside air setpoints related to
temperature humidity or CO2 levels and modulate the return and outside air
dampers as necessary to maintain outside air volume within 10% of setpoint.
Fan Control
When the air handler is requested to run, the B.A.S. control module shall send
signal to the air handler inverter, which will energize the fan. A current switch
shall prove status to the Building Automation System (BAS) and alarm the central
site if the switch is not made within 20 seconds (operator adjustable). There
shall also be a 10 second (operator adjustable) de-bounce time to prevent
nuisance alarms from a bouncing switch. A run request shall be sent to the
Chilled Water System when the air-handling unit is active and cooling is required.
A run request shall be sent to the Heating Water System when the air-handling
unit is active and heating is required for pre-heat accommodations.
Page 3 of 30
Temperature Control
Averaging element type temperature sensors covering the entire length of the
cooling coil shall monitor the Cold Deck temperature.
The Cold Deck
Control shall be enabled after the first request for cooling is received for three
minutes from a VAV Box it serves as long as the outside air temperature is
greater than 45 degrees F. The number of cooling requests required, the delay
duration, and the outside air temperature lockout shall be operator adjustable.
When the Cold Deck control is enabled the BAS shall modulate the chilled water
control valve as required to maintain the Cold Deck temperature at a set point of
550F (operator adjustable) or as noted on the Air Handling Unit schedule on the
drawings or the operator shall be able to select that the Cold Deck set point shall
be reset based on cooling requests form the VAV Boxes it servers. The reset
based cooling request shall be between of 54degrees F and 57 degrees F based
on the number and the duration of the cooling requests. The cold deck set point
shall not change by more than 1/2 degree every three minutes with all
temperature, reset time, and rate of change values operator adjustable.
The pre-heat control shall be enabled as long as the outside air temperature is
less than 650F. When the pre-heat control is enabled the BAS shall modulate
the hot water control valve as required to maintain the pre-heat temperature at
set point. The outside air temperature reset schedule shall be a linear reset
schedule with the initial setpoints of a 65 degrees F hot deck at 35 degrees F
outside air temperature and 50 degrees F hot deck at 75 degrees F. All of the
values shall be operator adjustable. The hot deck set point shall not change by
more than 1 degree every five minutes with all temperature, reset time, and rate
of change values operator adjustable.
Air Volume Control
The B.A.S. control module shall receive an input from a static pressure sensors
located 2/3 down the longest, cooling duct runs. In response, the B.A.S. shall
select the static pressure sensor that is lowest as compared to the static
pressure set point and send a modulating signal to the variable speed drive,
which will adjust the fan speed to maintain the static pressure at a set point of
1.5" (operator adjustable) or as determined by the balancing contractor to be the
lowest setting required to allow the VAV Boxes to meet their air flow setpoints.
The B.A.S. shall monitor the position of all cooling dampers in the boxes that the
Page 4 of 30
air handler serves and the static pressure set point shall be reset based on
achieving a target damper position of 90%. There shall be a dead band of 5% to
prevent hunting of the reset program. The static pressure set point shall not
change by more than 1/8 inch every two minutes. The target damper position,
the reset time, the dead band, and the rate of change values shall be operator
adjustable. The static pressure reset strategy shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1.
Manual reset high static limit switches located in the discharge of the air handlers
cooling ducts shall de-energize the air-handling unit if static pressure exceeds
3.0" w.g. (locally adjustable) in the supply duct.
Air Volume Demand Control Ventilation

When the air handler is running it the occupied mode, the O.A. damper control
shall be enabled and a request to run shall be sent to the OAHU that supplies the
unit with outside air. The OA dampers minimum and maximum positions shall be
determined with the T.A.B. contractor to be the positions that allow the scheduled
minimum and maximum OA CFM. The system shall have the ability to perform a
“Purge Mode” at a scheduled time for a scheduled duration. The outside air
damper shall remain closed and the OAHU shall remain off even during a
scheduled occupancy time based on a global command from a shelter in place
(building shutdown) button activation or based on a summer mode schedule.
Associated Equipment
During the occupied time period a request to run shall be sent to the OAHU that
supply’s its outside air. The exhaust fans associated with the air handler shall
also be energized only during the occupied time period. The OAHU’s and
exhaust fans shall remain off even during the scheduled occupancy time based
on a global command from a shelter in place (building shutdown) button
activation or based on a summer mode schedule.
Equipment Off Conditions
When the air-handling unit is de-energized, its chilled water valve and hot water
valve shall be closed. The related exhaust fans shall be de-energized and the
request to run to the OAHU shall be canceled. While the units are off, if the OA
temperature falls below 34 degrees F (operator adjustable) the chilled water
valve and hot water valve shall be opened to 20% (adjustable) and the
secondary pumps shall run for freeze protection.
Page 5 of 30
TERMINAL UNIT SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

• Space temperature sensor – AI
• Hot water valve - AO
• Cold deck flow – velocity sensor – AI
• Outdoor air temperature - AI
• Cooling damper - AO
• Leaving air temperature –AI
• Space occupancy sensor – DI
• Space lighting relay(s) – DO
• Space lighting, local switches – DI (each switch)
Zone Occupancy
• Each Fan Powered Terminal Unit Box (FPTU) shall have an
occupancy/vacancy schedule, occupied heating/cooling setpoints and
unoccupied heating/cooling setpoints assigned to it. As the occupancy time
approaches, an optimum start/stop program shall calculate a start time based
on current space temperature verses the occupied heating or cooling set
point, assigned recovery rate, and outdoor air temperature -- all variables are
operator assignable from the central site. The FPTU control program shall
have the ability to learn its recovery rate whenever the operator enables the
learning feature.
• Once unit is operating within the “occupied” schedule, the space occupancy
sensor shall adjust temperature set point or air flow (as programmed per
owner’s instructions) based on space occupancy. When space is
unoccupied, according to occupancy sensor, unit air flow shall be reduced to
minimum.
• Terminal unit control module shall control space lighting switch legs through
line voltage relays. Once the space occupancy sensor is activated the
terminal unit will operate relays according to the local switch position. Local
switches shall be inputs to terminal unit control module. Typically, a
classroom will have two switch legs splitting light levels. Wire one of the
relays to fail closed so that a 50% light level will be maintained in the event of
control module failure.
Page 6 of 30
• Terminal unit control based on occupancy sensor may be disabled by owner

(time duration adjustable, 8 hr. max) for testing purposes. Occupancy control
shall resume at end of “override” time duration.
Temperature Control
When the zone becomes active, the FPTU controller shall determine, based on
the space temperature, whether heating or cooling is required. If cooling is
required, the cooling air damper shall be modulated open to its operator
adjustable maximum cooling CFM set point and a run signal shall be sent to the
air handling unit serving the FPTU to achieve a set point of 73 degrees in the
summer. As the space temperature returns to set point, the FPTU cooling air
damper shall modulate to its operator adjustable minimum cooling CFM set point
of 0 CFM. If heating is required, the terminal unit damper will be maintained at its
minimum CFM set point (adjustable). The hot water valve will be modulated to
maintain space temperature at the heating set point (adjustable) of 71 in the
winter
Unoccupied Control
During the unoccupied time period, the FPTU cooling damper shall be closed
(operator adjustable). If the space temperature reaches the operator adjustable
unoccupied setpoints of 55 degrees F heating and 95 degrees F cooling, the
required equipment shall be started and run to maintain the space temperature
within the set points.
SINGLE ZONE UNIT AHU CONTROL

• Space temperature – AI
• Discharge air temperature – AI
• Pre-heat/cool discharge air temperature - AI
• Chilled water valve – AO
• DX Cooling – As noted only DO
• Pre-Cool chilled water valve – AO
• Pre-heat hot water valve - AO
• Air handling unit fan start/stop - DO
Page 7 of 30
• Exhaust fan start/stop - DO

• Outdoor air damper – AO
• Return Air CO2 - AI
• Freeze Status - DI
Zone Occupancy
• The air-handling unit shall have an occupancy/vacancy schedule, occupied
heating/cooling setpoints and unoccupied heating/cooling setpoints assigned
to it. As the occupancy time approaches, an optimum start/stop program
shall calculate a start time based on current space temperature verses the
occupied heating or cooling setpoint, assigned recovery rate, and outside air
temperature -- all variables are operator assignable from the central site. The
air-handling unit control program shall have the ability to learn its recovery
rate whenever the operator enables the learning feature.
Fan Control
• When the calculated start time arrives, the B.A.S. shall send a signal to the
air handling unit starter and start the fan. A current switch shall prove status
to the B.A.S. and shall alarm at the central site if the switch is not made within
20 seconds (operator adjustable). There shall also be a 10 second (operator
adjustable) de-bounce time to prevent nuisance alarms from a bouncing
switch.
Fans shall remain on as last programmed, regardless of chilled water control
status.
Temperature Control
• A wall mounted space temperature sensor shall monitor the air temperature
in the space. The B.A.S. shall output separate signals to modulate the chilled
water and heating water control valve actuators in sequence to maintain the
space temperature within its operator adjustable heating and cooling
setpoints.
• In the event that an AHU has a supplemental DX cooling coil the DX cooling
shall only be utilized after main building run schedule has expired. The intent
is to save energy and central plant life cycle by utilizing DX cooling capacity
for after hours, administration utilization or library functionality purposes.

Page 8 of 30
unit with outside air. A CO2 sensors mounted in each return air stream shall
monitor the CO2 level in the return air to the AHU. The B.A.S. shall select the
highest level to modulate the OA damper. The B.A.S. shall modulate the outdoor
air damper from its minimum position to its maximum position as required to
maintain the CO2 level at between 850 ppm and 1100 ppm (all adjustable). The
OA dampers minimum and maximum positions shall be determined with the
T.A.B. contractor to be the positions that allow the scheduled minimum and
maximum OA CFM. The B.A.S. shall select the highest level when more than
one CO2 sensor is used to modulate the damper. The system shall have the
ability to perform a “Purge Mode” at a scheduled time for a scheduled duration.
The outside air damper shall remain closed even during a scheduled occupancy
time based on a global command from a shelter in place (building shutdown)
button activation or based on a summer mode schedule.
Unoccupied Control
If the space temperature reaches the operator adjustable unoccupied setpoints of
55 degrees F heating and 95 degrees F cooling, the required equipment shall be
started and run to maintain the space temperature within the setpoints.
The exhaust fans associated with the air handler shall also be energized only
during the occupied time period. The outside air dampers shall remain closed
and exhaust fans shall remain off, even during a scheduled occupancy time
based on a global command from a shelter in place (building shutdown) button

When the air-handling unit is de-energized, its chilled water valve, hot water
valve, and OA damper shall be closed. The related exhaust fans shall be de-
energized. While the units are off if the OA temperature falls below 34 degrees F
(operator adjustable) the chilled water valve and hot water valves shall be
opened to 20% (adjustable) and the secondary pumps shall run for freeze
protection.
SINGLE ZONE UNIT AHU WITH HUMIDITY CONTROL
• Space humidity – AI
Page 9 of 30
• Pre-heat/cool discharge air temperature - AI

• Pre-Cool chilled water valve – AO
• Pre-heat hot water valve - AO
• Air handling unit fan start/stop - DO
• Exhaust fan start/stop - DO
• Outdoor air damper – AO
• Return Air CO2 - AI
• Freeze Status - DI
Zone Occupancy
The air-handling unit shall have an occupancy/vacancy schedule, occupied
heating/cooling setpoints and unoccupied heating/cooling setpoints assigned to
it. As the occupancy time approaches, an optimum start/stop program shall
calculate a start time based on current space temperature verses the occupied
heating or cooling setpoint, assigned recovery rate, and outside air temperature -
- all variables are operator assignable from the central site. The air-handling unit
control program shall have the ability to learn its recovery rate whenever the
operator enables the learning feature.
Fan Control
When the calculated start time arrives, the B.A.S. shall send a signal to the air
handling unit starter and start the fan. A current switch shall prove status to the
B.A.S. and shall alarm at the central site if the switch is not made within 20
seconds (operator adjustable). There shall also be a 10 second (operator
adjustable) de-bounce time to prevent nuisance alarms from a bouncing switch.
Temperature Control
A wall mounted space temperature sensor shall monitor the air temperature in the
space. The B.A.S. shall output separate signals to modulate the chilled water and
heating water control valve actuators in sequence to maintain the space
temperature within its operator adjustable heating and cooling setpoints.
Page 10 of 30
In the event that an AHU has a supplemental DX cooling coil the DX cooling shall
only be utilized after main building run schedule has expired. The intent is to
save energy and central plant life cycle by utilizing DX cooling capacity for after
hours, administration utilization or library functionality purposes.

unit with outside air. A CO2 sensors mounted in each return air stream shall
monitor the CO2 level in the return air to the AHU. The B.A.S. shall select the
highest level to modulate the OA damper. The B.A.S. shall modulate the outdoor
air damper from its minimum position to its maximum position as required to
maintain the CO2 level at between 850 ppm and 1100 ppm (all adjustable). The
OA dampers minimum and maximum positions shall be determined with the
T.A.B. contractor to be the positions that allow the scheduled minimum and
maximum OA CFM. The B.A.S. shall select the highest level when more than
one CO2 sensor is used to modulate the damper. The system shall have the
ability to perform a “Purge Mode” at a scheduled time for a scheduled duration.
The outside air damper shall remain closed even during a scheduled occupancy
time based on a global command from a shelter in place (building shutdown)
button activation or based on a summer mode schedule.
Space Humidity Control

A space humidity sensor, monitored by the B.A.S., shall set the cooling coil
discharge air setpoint to 53degrees F (adjustable) and modulate the chilled water
valve to maintain the setpoint if the humidity rises above 62% (adjustable) and
continue until it falls by 5% (adjustable). Humidity control shall comply with IECC
2003. The B.A.S. shall modulate the hot water reheat valve to maintain the
space temperature between its heating and cooling setpoints. If the B.A.S.
control module is receiving a broadcast from the HW system that heating water is
not available (see Heating Water System sequence of operations) the chilled
water valve shall not be overridden until heating water is available.
Unoccupied Control
If the space temperature reaches the operator adjustable unoccupied setpoints of
55 degrees F heating and 95 degrees F cooling, the required equipment shall be
started and run to maintain the space temperature within the setpoints.
Page 11 of 30
The exhaust fans associated with the air handler shall also be energized only
during the occupied time period. The outside air dampers shall remain closed
and exhaust fans shall remain off, even during a scheduled occupancy time
based on a global command from a shelter in place (building shutdown) button

When the air-handling unit is de-energized, its chilled water valve, hot water
valve, and OA damper shall be closed. The related exhaust fans shall be de-
energized. While the units are off if the OA temperature falls below 34 degrees
F (operator adjustable) the chilled water valve and hot water valves shall be
opened to 20% (adjustable) and the secondary pumps shall run for freeze
protection.
Multi-Zone Air Handling Units (Existing Buildings – Not to be used in new construction)
1. AHU is to be started and stopped by the EMS/DDCS. On a call for unit
startup, open OA damper, and energize AHU fan and OA AHU fan. Modulate
3-way/2-way CHW control valve to maintain cold deck supply air temperate
setpoint (adjustable). When relative space humidity, based on humidity
sensors located in the AHU common return air, exceeds the setpoint
(adjustable), the CHW control valve shall be modulated open to provide
dehumidification. In the case of a central plant failure either winter or
summer close outside air damper and stop related exhaust.
2. The set point of the cold deck supply shall be reset, based on zone with
greatest cooling load.
3. Zone control: A temperature sensor in each zone shall be used to sequence
the zone damper and zone 2-way HW control valve to maintain space
temperature setpoint (adjustable).
4. A manual low temperature switch located in the mixed air, shall de-energize
the fans, close the OA damper, and close the CHW control valves on a fall in
mixed air temperature to 35 degrees.
5. When the unit is de-energized, stop both fans, close OA damper and close
CHW control valve to flow.
6. Monitor differential pressure switches across each fan. If unit is energized,
but air flow is not proven across each fan, stop both fans, and send alarm.
Page 12 of 30
• Space humidity – AI
• Pre-heat/cool discharge air temperature – AI
• Air handler fan status – current switch – DI
• Pre-Cooled chilled water valve – AO
• Pre-heat hot water valve – AO
• Hot water valve – AO
• Air handling unit fan start/stop – DO
• Exhaust fan start/stop – DO
• Outdoor air damper - AO
FAN COIL UNIT
• FCU fan status – current switch - DI
• Chilled water valve - AO
• Fan Coil unit fan start/stop - DO
• Space occupancy sensor - DI
Zone Occupancy
The fan coil unit shall have an occupancy/vacancy schedule, occupied cooling
set point and unoccupied cooling setpoint assigned to it. As the occupancy time
approaches, an optimum start/stop program shall calculate a start time based on
current space temperature verses the occupied cooling set point, assigned
recovery rate, and outside air temperature -- all variables are operator assignable
from the central site. The fan coil unit control program shall have the ability to
learn its recovery rate whenever the operator enables the learning feature.
Page 13 of 30
Fan Control
When the calculated start time arrives, the B.A.S. shall send a signal to the fan
coil unit starter and start the fan. A current switch shall prove status to the B.A.S.
and shall alarm at the central site if the switch is not made within 20 seconds
(operator adjustable). There shall also be a 10 second (operator adjustable)
de-bounce time to prevent nuisance alarms from a bouncing switch.
Temperature Control
A wall mounted space temperature sensor shall monitor the air temperature in
the space. The B.A.S. shall modulate the chilled water valve actuator to maintain
the space temperature within its operator adjustable cooling set point.
Unoccupied Control
During the unoccupied time period if the space temperature reaches the
unoccupied cooling set point, the required equipment shall be run to maintain the
space temperature within the operator adjustable unoccupied setpoints 95
degrees F cooling.
When the fan coil unit is de-energized, its chilled water valve shall be closed.
While the units are off if the OA temperature falls below 34 degrees F (operator
adjustable) the chilled water valve shall be opened and a secondary pump shall
run for freeze protection
OUTSIDE AIR HANDLING UNIT
• Supply air temperature – AI
• Preheat air temperature – AI
• Air handling unit fan status – current switch - DI
• Freeze alarm – freeze stat mounted upstream of CHW coil - DI
• CHW valve control - AO
• HW preheat valve control - AO
• Fan speed control – AO
• Outdoor air damper – DO
• Outdoor air handling unit start/stop - DO
• Leaving air temperature - AI
Page 14 of 30
Unit Activation
When the outdoor air handling unit is requested to run by an air handler it
serves, the Building Automation System (B.A.S.) will first open the
outdoor air damper and the actuator’s internal end switch will close when
the damper is open allowing the outdoor air unit to be started. The B.A.S.
will send a signal to the outdoor air handling unit inverter, which will start
the fan. A current switch will prove status to the B.A.S. and will alarm at
the central site if the switch is not made within 20 seconds (operator
adjustable). There will also be a 10 second (operator adjustable)
de-bounce time to prevent nuisance alarms from a bouncing switch. The
outdoor air damper will be fully open before the outdoor air handling unit
fan will be energized in either the hand or auto position.
Temperature Control
When outdoor air handling unit is active and heating is required a duct
temperature sensor mounted downstream of the preheat coil will
modulate preheat valve to maintain the operator adjustable discharge air
temperature setpoint of 52 degrees F. If cooling is required a duct
temperature sensor mounted in the unit's supply air stream will monitor
the unit's supply air temperature and modulate the chilled water valve to
maintain the operator adjustable discharge air temperature setpoint. The
operator shall be able to select if the supply air cooling setpoint will be
reset based on the outside air temperature or use an operator adjustable
setpoint of 55 degrees F. The outside air temperature reset schedule
shall be a linear reset schedule with initial setpoints of 58 degrees F
supply air at 60 degrees F outside air temperature and 55 degrees F
supply air at 75 degrees F. The preheat control shall be disabled if the
outside air temperature is greater than 55degrees F and the supply air
cooling control shall be disabled if the outside air temperature is less than
53 degrees F. All of the values shall be operator adjustable.
A manual reset freeze stat mounted in the discharge air stream of the
pre-heating coil will open the HW and CHW control valves, close the
outdoor air damper, de-energize the outdoor air unit fan, energize a
chilled water pump, the hot water pump and boiler (see heating water
sequence of operation), and alarm at the central site if the leaving air
temperature drops to 34 degrees F (locally adjustable). The freeze stat
must be manually reset once the temperature rises above the trip point.
Air Volume Control
Page 15 of 30
The B.A.S. control module will monitor the fan status of the AHU’s that
the OAHU serves. The TAB contractor will determine the speed required
by the OAHU to supply each AHU’s scheduled outside air CFM. The
B.A.S. will have an assigned speed for each AHU correlating to the
AHU’s outside air CFM that the OAHU serves. When the AHU is running
in the occupied mode the B.A.S. will add together the speed necessary
for the AHU’s that are running to determine the OAHU’s speed setpoint.
In response, the B.A.S. will send a signal to the variable speed drive,
which will adjust the fan speed to meet the speed setpoint.

When the outdoor air-handling unit is off, it’s chilled and heating water
valves will be closed and the outdoor air damper will also be closed. If
the outside air temperature drops below 34°F (operator adjustable), the
B.A.S. will open both chilled and hot water valves to the coils and the
pumps will run for freeze protection.
CHILLED WATER SYSTEM

• Building CHW supply temperature - AI
• Building CHW return temperature - AI
• Building CHW differential pressure - AI
• Decouple Loop temperature - AI
• Chiller amps/status, each chiller -AI
• Chiller CHW supply temperature, each chiller- AI
• Chiller alarm, each chiller - DI
• CHW pump status, each pump - DI
• CW pump status, each pump - DI
• SCHW pump status, each pump - DI
• Chiller start/stop, each chiller - DO
• SCHW pump start/stop, each pump – DO
• SCHW pump speed control - AO
Page 16 of 30
Chilled Water System Activation

• The chilled water system shall be activated by a request for cooling from any
unit it supplies with chilled water. The number of cooling requests required
and the length of time the requests must be received before activating the
plant shall be operator adjustable. The chilled water system shall be disabled
if the outside air temperature is less than 45°F (operator adjustable).
• When the chilled water system is active the lead secondary chilled water
pumps (SCHWP) shall be enabled. When the SCHWP is commanded to run
a current switch shall prove status to the B.A.S., which shall alarm at the
central site if the switch is not made within 20 seconds (adjustable). There
shall also be a 10 second (adjustable) de-bounce time to prevent nuisance
alarms from a bouncing switch. If the lead pump indicates a bad status
alarm the B.A.S. shall discontinue the start signal to the lead SCHWP and
energize the lag SCHWP to run. The lag SCHWP now becomes the lead
SCHWP. The SCHWP’s shall be lead-lag alternated weekly at an operator
adjustable time and day of the week by the BAS based upon accumulative
runtime.
Chiller Activation
• The chiller shall start and stop its dedicated chilled water pump (CHWP) and
condenser water pump (CWP). Flow switches in the chilled water and
condenser water lines wired in series with auxiliary contacts on the pump’s
starter will complete circuits to each chiller’s factory installed controller
proving that flows have been established. If the chiller alarm input closes
(indicating that the chiller has alarm), the BAS shall generate an alarm at the
central site computer, discontinue the start signal to the chiller and energize
the next chiller in sequence to run in the same manner as described above.
Chilled Water Temperature Control
• The chiller’s internal controls shall maintain its chilled water supply
temperature set point of 42°F (locally adjustable).
Chilled Water Demand Control
• A current sensor at each chiller shall monitor the amperage of each chiller.
The BAS shall also receive temperature inputs from sensors mounted in the
building’s common supply and return piping. If the enabled chiller or chillers
current load monitor indicates that the chiller or chillers are operating at
specified optimum efficiency and the building supply water temperature rises
greater than 3°F (adjustable) above set point for five (5) minutes (adjustable)
Page 17 of 30
the next chiller in sequence shall be enabled into operation by the above
described sequence.
• With more than one chiller operating, if the combined load decreases to 80%
(adjustable) capacity of one less chiller for fifteen (15) minutes (adjustable)
and the building supply water temperature is less than 3°F (adjustable) above
set point, a chiller shall be de-energized.
• For existing system all demand control sequencing will be reviewed by FBISD
prior to implementation.
Chilled Differential Pressure Control - SCHW Pumps
• A differential pressure sensor across the building chilled water supply and
return lines in the central plant mechanical room shall monitor building
differential pressure across the mains. The BAS shall modulate the speed of
the operating secondary chilled water pump to maintain the building chilled
water differential pressure at setpoint (adjustable). If the lead SCHWP is
operating at greater than 90% (adjustable) and the building differential
pressure is greater than 3 psi (adjustable) below setpoint for 5 minutes
(adjustable) the lag SCHWP shall be started in tandem with the lead pump.
The lag pump shall run until both pumps are operating at less than 30 %
(adjustable) for 5 minutes (adjustable) at which time the lag pump shall be
disabled.
• The B.A.S. shall monitor the position of all of the chilled water valves of the
units that the plant serves and the differential pressure setpoint shall be reset
based on achieving a target valve position of 90%. There shall be a dead
band of 5% to prevent hunting of the reset program. The chilled water flow
shall not change by more than 10 percent per minute. The target valve
position, the reset time, the dead band, and the rate of change values shall
be operator adjustable.
Freeze Protection
• When the outdoor air temperature drops to 34°F (adjustable) or below, the
BAS shall open the chilled water valves for flow through the coils for freeze
protection and the secondary chilled water pump system shall be activated to
run until the low ambient temperature ceases to exist.
COOLING TOWER CONTROL

• Tower CW supply temperature - AI
• Tower CW return temperature - AI
Page 18 of 30
• Tower Fan status, each fan - DI

• Vibration alarm, each fan - DI
• Tower Fan start/stop, each fan – DO
• Tower ISO valves, each tower - DO
• Tower Fan speed, each fan - AO
• CW Bypass Valve control – AO
• CW pump start/stop
• CW pump status
Cooling Tower Activation

• A cooling tower cell shall be activated by opening the tower ISO valves. The
operator shall have the option of maintaining the lead towers ISO valves open
at all times. The towers shall be lead-lag alternated weekly by the BAS
based upon accumulative runtime.
Condenser Water Temperature Control
• The condenser water supply temperature shall be maintained by modulating
the cooling tower dump valve, staging on/off the tower fans and modulating
the tower fan speed on the active towers to maintain set point. The operator
shall have the option of maintaining a fixed set point of 85 degrees F
(operator adjustable) or resetting the set point based on the outdoor air wet-
bulb temperature. The reset set point shall be 6 degrees F (adjustable)
above the outdoor air wet-bulb temperature down to a minimum of 65
degrees F (operator adjustable) and a maximum of 85 degrees F (operator
adjustable).
• If the condenser water supply temperature is below set point, the dump valve
shall be modulated open to the cooling tower basin. As the condenser water
supply temperature rises, a PID control loop shall modulate the dump valve
closed forcing the water over the top of the active tower. If the condenser
water temperature rises 2 degrees F (adjustable) above set point, the B.A.S.
start the lead cooling tower fan. A current switch shall prove status to the
B.A.S. and shall alarm at the central site if the switch is not made within 20
seconds (adjustable). There shall also be a 5 second (adjustable) de-bounce
time to prevent nuisance alarms from a bouncing switch. The B.A.S. shall
monitor a vibration switch mounted at each tower; the B.A.S. shall cancel the
Page 19 of 30
run request to that tower, automatically enable the remaining tower and alarm
the central site if the vibration switch detects a fault. The B.A.S. shall
modulate the cooling tower fan speed from 20 Hz (adjustable) to 60 Hz
(adjustable) to maintain the condenser water supply temperature at set point.
If the condenser water temperature continues to rise and more than one
tower is enabled the lag tower fan shall be energized and controlled in the
above manner.
Freeze Protection
BAS shall open the cooling tower bypass valves for flow for freeze protection
and the pump system shall be activated to run until the low ambient
temperature ceases to exist.
HEATING WATER SYSTEM

• Building HW supply temperature - AI
• Building HW return temperature - AI
• Boiler HW supply temperature, each boiler – AI
• HW pump status – current switch, each pump - DI
• Boiler status – dry contacts, each boiler- DI
• Boiler enable, each boiler - DO
• HW Pump enable, each pump - DO
Heating Water System Activation
• The heating water system shall be activated by a request for heating from
any equipment it supplies with heating water. The number of heating
requests required and the length of time the requests must be received
before activating the plant shall be operator adjustable. The heating water
system shall be disabled if the outside air temperature is greater than 65°F
(operator adjustable) unless heating water is required for dehumidification.
• When the heating water system is active a heating water pump shall be
enabled. When the HWP is commanded to run a current switch shall prove
status to the B.A.S., which shall alarm at the central site if the switch is not
made within 20 seconds (adjustable). There shall also be a 10 second
(adjustable) de-bounce time to prevent nuisance alarms from a bouncing
switch.
Page 20 of 30
• Whenever the heating water system is deactivated, the hot water pump shall
continue to run for 3 minutes (adjustable) to avoid excessive temperature
buildup in the boiler.
• The operator shall have the ability to disable any boiler in software which will
remove it for the sequence and prevent it from being enabled via the B.A.S.
• If the hot water supply temperature is less than 120°F (adjustable) or a HWP
status is not indicating a hot water pump is running the B.A.S. control module
shall broadcast that hot water is not available.
Heating Water System Control
• After the hot water pumping system status has been proven, the BAS shall
send a signal to enable the lead boiler to fire. A contact in each boiler control
panel shall provide status to the B.A.S. The hot water set point shall be
reset based on the outdoor air temperature between 180°F (adjustable) when
the outdoor air is at 25°F and 140°F (adjustable) when the outdoor air
temperature is 60°F. The BAS control module shall vary the percent load of
the condensing and non-condensing boilers to maintain the HW supply set
point.
• After an initial start-up delay of fifteen (15) minutes (adjustable), if the building
HW supply temperature is not less than set point by more than 5°F
(adjustable) and the building HW return temperature is greater than 130°F
(adjustable) for eight (8) minutes (adjustable) a boiler shall be disabled.
Once a boiler is disabled the B.A.S. shall delay of fifteen (15) minutes
(adjustable) and if the above criteria are met then another boiler shall be
disabled.
• Once boilers have been disabled, if the building HW supply temperature is
less than set point by more than 5°F (adjustable) or the building HW return
temperature is less than 120°F (adjustable) for five (5) minutes (adjustable)
the next boiler in sequence shall be enabled. Once a boiler is enabled the
B.A.S. shall delay of fifteen (15) minutes (adjustable) and if the above criteria
are met then another boiler shall be enabled until all of the boilers are
enabled.
• Provide meter for cooling tower make-up water connected to building
automation system for monitoring.
• The above boiler enable/disable sequence shall continue match the correct
number of boilers to the building load.
Page 21 of 30
• Low temperature control valves, supplied with the non-condensing boilers,

shall modulate to ensure each boilers hot water return temperature is
maintained at least 140°F.
Freeze Protection
BAS shall open the hot water valves for flow through the coils for freeze
protection. The hot water system shall be activated to run and the building
HW supply set point shall be set to 85°F (adjustable) while running the
condensing boiler only until the low ambient temperature ceases to exist or
the building start-up time arrives.
EXHAUST FANS
• Fan start/stop – DO
• Fan status – DI
• Interlock exhaust fans to run with AHU’s serving the same area and run when the
AHU’s are operating in the occupied mode with their OA Dampers open. The
exhaust fans shall remain off even during the scheduled occupancy time based on a
global command from a shelter in place (building shutdown) button or based on a
summer mode schedule.
• Fans controlled by local thermostat shall be monitored.
OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONS

• Outdoor air temperature – AI
• Outdoor air humidity – AI
• The sensors shall be mounted in an area on the North side of the building
where the representative temperature and humidity can be monitored, both
shall have sun shields. Based on the outside air temperature and humidity
the B.A.S. shall calculate the outdoor enthalpy, wet bulb, and dew point
temperatures. The outdoor air temperature and humidity shall be broadcast
as global information for use by the other control programs.
TIMED LOCAL OVERRIDE
• TLO momentary input - DI

• A momentary push button switch shall be located in the principal’s office and
shall activate the HVAC system (user defined equipment). Each time the
Page 22 of 30
momentary button is pushed the assigned equipment will be energized for

one hour (adjustable), up to a maximum of four hours (adjustable). If the
switch is pushed continuously for seven seconds (adjustable), the override
will be canceled.
IDF and MDF ROOMS
• The B.A.S shall monitor the space temperature in the IDF and MDF rooms.
The B.A.S shall report a high temperature alarm to the computers, pagers,
and/or text message compatible cell phones designated by the School district
personnel if the space temperature rises above 68°F (adjustable) for five (5)
minutes (adjustable).
• Independent HVAC Units must be installed in all MDF and IDF rooms.
• Monitor start/stop/status of each cooling unit.
UNIT HEATER
• Space temperature - AI
• UH start/stop and hot water valve open/close - DO
• A space temperature sensor shall monitor the air temperature in the space. If
the space temperature falls below 60 degrees F (operator adjustable) the Unit
Heater fan shall be energized and the hot water valve shall be opened. The
fan shall continue to run with the hot water valve open until the space
temperature rises by 4 degrees F (operator adjustable).
KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST AND SUPPLY FANS

• Fan start/stop – DO
• Fan status – DI
• Enable fans through scheduling. Fans will be controlled through local

switches but will be enabled through scheduling to allow fan shut down
remotely if left operational after staff leaves. The exhaust fans shall remain off
even during the scheduled occupancy time based on a global command from
a shelter in place (building shutdown) button.
• Must be interlocked with fire alarm and fire suppression systems.
Page 23 of 30
ROOF TOP PACKAGED UNIT (DX UNITS)

• Discharge Air temperature – AI
Zone Occupancy
• Each Dx unit will have an occupancy/vacancy schedule,
occupied heating/cooling setpoints, and unoccupied
heating/cooling setpoints assigned to it. As the occupancy
time approaches, an optimum start/stop program will calculate
a start time based on current return temperature versus the
occupied heating or cooling setpoint, assigned recovery rate,
and outdoor air temperature -- all variables are operator
assignable from the central site.
Space Temperature Control

• When the zone becomes occupied, the Dx unit controller will turn on
the fan. The Dx unit controller will determine, based on the return
temperature, whether heating or cooling is required.
• The return temperature will be monitored by a return air temperature
sensor. If cooling is required, a P.I.D. control loop will turn on its cool
stage as required to maintain the return /space temperature setpoint.
As the return /space temperature returns to setpoint, the cool stage
will be turned off.
• If heating is required, the existing room vav’s will control this setting.
Unoccupied Control
• During unoccupied periods, the Dx unit will be off. If the return
temperature reaches the unoccupied cooling setpoint, the
required equipment will be started and run as normal to
maintain the return temperature within these setpoints: 90 F
(adjustable) cooling -- typical.
Integrated Automation Control Sequences for Electrical Systems (25 96 00)
*For each FBISD project, whether new or existing project, a “Lighting control” meeting
shall be held.
NEW FACILITIES:
Classrooms shall be controlled through local HVAC terminal unit serving the
room. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensor shall be an input to terminal unit
Page 24 of 30
control module. Upon activation of occupancy sensor the terminal unit control
module shall operate relays that control room switch legs according to the local
switch position. The local switches shall be inputs to the terminal unit control
module. Provide dual level lighting by wiring lights in “checker board”
configuration paying particular attention to location of projector and projector
screen.
• Offices shall be controlled by ceiling mounted occupancy sensors with
local switch for override (located on strike side of door).
• Lobbies, corridors, exterior lighting, etc. shall be controlled through
low voltage lighting control panels (no local switches).
• Where building design incorporates day lighting, provide day lighting
controls.
• Common areas and corridors shall be wired to enable 50% reduction
in lighting level.
• Locker rooms, band halls, dance rooms and other spaces that house
activities that may occur after regular hours shall have a dedicated
lighting circuit and local keyed switch that is enabled through the low
voltage lighting system (LVLCS).
• Gymnasium lighting shall be controlled by switches (located in
lockable recessed cabinet in gym) that are enabled by the LVLCS.
Wire light fixtures to enable 50% reduction in lighting levels.
• Cafeteria lighting may be controlled by local switches enabled by
LVLCS. Wire light fixtures to enable 50% reduction in lighting levels.
• Kitchen lighting shall be switched by toggle switch enabled by LVLCS
located at staff entrance.
• Restroom lighting shall be controlled separately from corridor lighting
• Egress lighting shall be switched through LVLCS normally but
enabled through “generator transfer devices” located in mechanical
rooms in the event of power failure.
• Building should be “blacked out” with no night lights except for a light
directly over any/all burglar alarm key pads.
• Areas where lighting levels that are split 50% shall use a “checker
board” configuration where applicable. Avoid light fixtures with dual
ballasts.
• Keyed switches shall be Sargent brand with interchangeable cores.
• Add lights on intrusion alarm in areas near security cameras.
Override switches:
• Shall be a programmable input to the LVLCS.
• Shall be Sargent brand switches with interchangeable cores.
• Located in custodian office.
• Located in principal’s office.
• Shall be adjustable in time duration.
Page 25 of 30
• Provide an “exterior lighting” override switch in main electrical room.

• All override switches shall have engraved wall plates.
Exterior Lighting:
• Marquee sign is controlled separately by BAS.
• Canopies are controlled separately from security lighting.
• Security lighting (wall packs and soffit lighting) shall be controlled
separately on each building elevation. (North side controlled
separately from South side, etc..).
• Parking lot lighting shall be circuited and controlled by zones (Staff
parking, gym parking, auditorium parking, visitor parking, etc.)
• Circuit and control parking lot lighting with night lighting capability (A
single head or series of single heads in each zone that are controlled
separately from the zone to enable a night lighting scenario).
• Circuit parking lot lighting to enable 50% reduction in light level.
• Field lights will be enabled by the LVLCS and controlled through
keyed switches located in coach’s office or where coordinated with
athletic program. Field lighting control shall include a separate point
to allow remote activation of lights.
• Provide photo cell input to LVLCS.
• Field lights shall be enabled in a sequence with a short time delay
between light groups.
• Tennis court lighting shall be scheduled through BAS.
Interlocks:
• Interlock with fire alarm to enable all lighting upon activation.
• Interlock with security system to disable all lighting upon arming of
system.
• Interlock with security system to enable all lighting upon intruder
activation.
• Interlock with security system to enable partial lighting when system is
first disarmed. Enable 50% of common areas, kitchen, custodial,
gang restroom, fine arts, gym, locker room, admin, and other areas
that may need to be used at times other than student hours. Enable
the remaining lights 1 hour before students arrive until 1 hour after
they leave.
• Intent is to have three inputs from security system: armed, disarmed
and activated.
Existing Buildings:
• The extent of lighting controls is determined based on project

requirements. LVLCS or lighting contactors may be used.
Page 26 of 30
• Control of lighting contactors or LVLCS shall be incorporated into the

existing building management system “head end” to be accessed,
monitored and programmed through existing energy management
computers/equipment.
• Where classroom lighting is replaced, provide dual level lighting
controlled through local switches that are enabled through line voltage
occupancy sensors. Layout lighting in “checker board” pattern paying
particular attention to location of projector and projector screen.
• Incorporate new building design as much as possible.
• Existing line voltage switches may remain in use but will be enabled
by LVLCS or contactors. Determined through lighting control meeting
with FBISD.
• Provide interlocks with systems as noted in “New facility” design.
Override switches:
• Shall be a programmable input to the LVLCS or building management
system.
• Shall be Sargent brand switches with interchangeable cores.
• Located in custodian office.
• Located in principal’s office.
• Located at each security system key pad
• Shall be adjustable in time duration.
• Provide an “exterior lighting” override switch in main electrical room.
• All override switches shall have engraved wall plates.
MISCELLANEOUS LIGHTING CONTROL REQUIREMENTS:
• For areas with clerestory or floor-ceiling windows, provide a day light

harvesting scenario. Not necessarily a high tech dimming system.
• Provide a lighting control schedule on drawings. This schedule shall list the
lighting circuits to be controlled by relay and the groups in which the relays
belong. For example:
Lighting Circuit Relay Control Group

HA-1 LCA-1 A (interior)
HB-13,15,17 LCB-1 (contactor coil) Ext (parking light)
OR
Lighting Circuits Control group

HA-1, HA-3, HB-5, HC-6 A
Page 27 of 30
HB-13, 15, 17 Ext (Teacher’s lot night light)
Responsibility matrix for BAS contractor is as follows:
Description Division 25 Division 26

Engineering &
Design Furnish Review
Submittals Furnish Review
Equipment:
Relay Panels with
Relays Furnish & Install X
Distributed
Lighting
Controllers Furnish & Install X
Digital Switches Furnish & Install X
Standard
Switches X Furnish & Install
Ceiling Mount
Motion
Occupancy
Sensors Furnish & Install X
Wall Mount
Motion
Occupancy
Network
Repeaters Furnish & Install X
Light Level
Digital Input
Modules Furnish & Install X
Override
Switches Furnish & Install X
Distributed
Lighting
Controller Power
Wiring Furnish & Install X
Relay Panel
Power Wiring X Furnish & Install
All Low Voltage
Wiring Furnish & Install X
Programming Furnish X
Graphics Furnish X
Start Up & Furnish Assist
Page 28 of 30
Commissioning
Lighting sequence of operation:
Control groups
• A: 50% of lighting in common areas, 50% of lighting in corridors. Lighting circuits

for locker rooms, kitchen, custodian office, gang restrooms, gyms, fine arts area
and administration area (areas occupied at times after normal school hours).
• B: The remaining 50% of common areas, corridors etc.
• C: Switch leg that controls the normal switching of emergency lighting (through
GTD devices).
• D: North side security lighting.
• E: South sec. lighting.
• F: East sec. lighting.
• G: West sec. lighting.
• H: Staff parking 50%.
• I: Staff parking 50%
• J: Staff parking nightlight.
• Three control groups for each parking lot.
• K: Marquee sign
• L: Canopies
Separate each parking lot into different control groups based on the size of the
lot. In each parking group there is a 50% level and a night light circuit.
Wall packs and soffit lighting (security lighting) to be separated by the direction
building faces. Circuiting is broken up to north, west, east and south.
When security system is armed all interior lights go out, A, B and C. Exterior
groups H, I and L off 15 minutes (adj) after security system is armed.
When security is tripped all lighting groups are “on”.
Page 29 of 30
When security is disarmed AND the time is between 7:30 am and 5:00 pm, all
lights on, A, B and C.
When security is disarmed AND the time is between 5:01 pm and 7:29 am, group
A and C are on, group B is off.
When security is disarmed or armed, all exterior lights will operate according to
schedule.
When fire alarm is tripped, all lighting groups are “on”.
Integrated Automation Control Sequences for Communications Systems (25 97 00)
Integrated Automation Control Sequences for Electronic Safety &Security Systems (25 98 00)
Page 30 of 30
FBISD 26 00 00
Division #26 – Electrical (Introduction)
Division 26 Intent:
Included within Division 26 sub sections are specific guidelines for electrical materials and
installation.
1) Electrical General Requirements (This Section)

2) Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution (26 10 00) NOT USED
3) Low Voltage Electrical Transmission (26 20 00)
4) Facility Electrical Power Generating and Storing Equipment (26 30 00)
5) Electrical and Cathodic Protection (26 40 00)
6) Lighting (26 50 00)
General Requirements for Electrical:
At all locations where ceiling mounted data projectors are to be installed. Allow for three to four
adjacent ceiling tiles arranged perpendicular to the proposed projection screen location to be left
clear with no devices installed except for one 120v duplex receptacle. The tiles should
encompass the distance of 6 to12 feet from the projector screen. Provide dedicated circuit for
projectors, may put three projectors on circuit but don’t connect to classroom circuits. Warranty
begins at Substantial Completion for contracted work.
Electrical Requirements – Special
• HS Dance room: Provide one electrical receptacle mounted in the middle of the
mirror wall (at 18” AFF) in the HS Dance room. Provide one electrical receptacle on
either end of the mirror wall, adjacent to the mirror, as well.
• ES and MS Stage: Provide one electrical receptacle and microphone jack in the face
of the riser at the stage. See also Division 27, Sound Reinforcement System.
• HS Field house: Provide a doorbell at main entrance from school and one at main
entrance from fields (if different)
• Provide doorbell at kitchen delivery door (all schools).
• Provide doorbell at Extended Day main entrance.
• Provide surge and phase loss protection for all variable frequency drives.
• Provide conduit and cabling for connection of fire sprinkler vaults to fire alarm
system.
Electrical Service
• Underground electrical service preferred from main tie-in to transformer but this is
site specific, so coordinate with Owner.
• Primary duct bank for pad-mounted transformer is in contract.
Page 1 of 7
FBISD 26 00 00
• Avoid aerial secondary service to the building; coordinate with Owner.

• Locate transformer in as inconspicuous a location as possible. Verify location and
type (pad-mounted or pole-mounted, etc.) with Owner. Ensure air flow clearances as
required by Counterpoint Energy or local utility.
• Provide screening to minimum required by Owner and AHJ.
• Coordinate easements with Owner.
• Coordinate with local utility.
• See Division 33, Utility Services for more information.
• Locate mechanical and electrical equipment so that nothing straddles the building
expansion joint.
• Comply with all applicable codes, including Texas Energy Code.
Shop Equipment Requirements:
• HS Materials and Methods equipment list:

1 Mig Welder 240 volt, single phase, 60 amp
1 Unisaw 240 volt, 3 phase, 30 amp
1 Band Saw 240 volt, 3 phase, 20 amp
1 Belt Sander 240 volt, 3 phase, 20 amp
1 Grinder 240 volt, 3 phase, 20 amp
1 Drill Press 240 volt, 3 phase, 20 amp
1 Planer 240 volt, 3 phase, 60 amp
1 Joiner 240 volt, 3 phase, 20 amp
1 Abrasive Saw 240 volt, 3 phase, 30 amp
1 AC/DC Welder 240 volt, 3 phase, 60 amp
1 Radial Saw 240 volt, 3 phase, 20 amp
• MS Materials and Methods equipment list:
1 Band Saw 208 volt, single phase, 20 amp
1 Sander 208 volt, 3 phase, 20 amp
1 Grinder 208 volt, 3 phase, 20 amp
1 Drill Press 208 volt, single phase, 20 amp
1 Joiner 208 volt, single phase, 20 amp
2 additional pieces with floor mounted power:
1 table saw 208-230 volt, single phase, 14 amp
1 disc/belt sander 208-230 volt, 3 phase, 5 amp
• Provide 6 groups of 2 of overhead reels at shop work islands – 110 volt.
Conveying Systems
• See Division 14
• Provide lockable disconnect switch for car power and main power service
• Provide electrical power in elevator pit for sump pump, audio/visual devices and
service lighting
• Provide automatic recall for elevator interlocked with fire alarm system
• Comply with all applicable codes, AHJ and ADA/TAS requirements.
Page 2 of 7
FBISD 26 00 00
Electrical (26 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of Electrical Systems (26 01 00)
• Provide training/demonstration for 6hrs each for two people with video recording.
Demonstration to include:
Maintenance of equipment
Locations of equipment
Locations of in-ground junction boxes
Underground conduit
Lighting controls
Occupancy sensorsSpecialized or unique equipment
• Final copy of approved Operation/Maintenance manuals and record drawings shall

be submitted on storage device in pdf format.
Common Work Results for Electrical (26 05 00)
Hangers and Supports (26 05 29)
• Minimum required per NEC – no exceptions

• All supports to be perpendicular or parallel to the building structure; no odd
angles unless otherwise approved by Owner.
Underground Ducts and Raceways (26 05 43)
• Use locator tape 12” above conduits

• Provide three 4 inch conduit to MDF. One conduit for fiber optic cable is to
be located 48 inches below surface. Two conduits – one for telephone and
one spare – are to be located 36 inches below surface. Provide locator wire
and warning tape. Concrete cover not required. Stub up at wall.
• For conduits located underground to be used in the future, provide a concrete
marker 12”x12” directly above termination point.
• Maximum depth of typical conduit shall be code required depth.
Raceways and Boxes (26 05 33)
• Steel fittings only. No cast metal fittings.

• All floor boxes to be recessed and to have flush-mounted brass or stainless
steel cover. (Kitchen and other wet area are the exception.)
• For kitchen and wet areas provide a raised box 10” AFF.
Page 3 of 7
FBISD 26 00 00
• Provide spare 1 ½” conduit from MDF / IDF room to exterior marquee.

Provide pull string with identifying tag on each end.
• All disconnects, panel covers and starters in kitchen areas and adjacent to
cooling towers shall be stainless steel.
• MC cable is not the standard for FBISD. MC cable shall be used only as
approved, in writing by the school district, on a project to project basis. MC
cabling details and specification references should only be included on a
project when approved by FBISD.
• All penetrations of fire walls, barriers etc. shall be sealed and protected
according to all applicable codes.
Identification of Electrical Systems (26 05 53)
• Identify all equipment and circuit breakers.

• Identify all J-box covers with circuit numbers.
• On all device wall plates, on inside of plate, indicate panel and circuit number
feeding the device.
• All electrical panels shall have type written panel schedules with room
descriptions using actual room signage numbers, not the numbers on
architect’s drawings.
• Electrical systems shall be identified by painted junction boxes and covers
with the following scheme:
Lighting system: Yellow
Emergency power system: Red
120 power system: Blue
HVAC system power: Green
• Electrical panel identification shall include the following:
Panel Name
Voltage
Amperage
General description such as: “Lighting Area B” or “Power Area C”
Appropriately colored for emergency.
Feeder panel designation must be clearly identified.
Schedules for Electrical (26 06 00)
Commissioning of Electrical Systems (26 08 00)
• Commissioning includes review of drawings, submittals, site verification of system

and verification testing. Scope to include:
Electrical System
Lighting controls
Page 4 of 7
FBISD 26 00 00
Renewable energy systems

Review of training video.
• Commissioning authority to observe and document grounding resistance test.

• Confirm coordination study of building electrical distribution.
Instrumentation and Control for Electrical Systems (26 09 00)
• Provide contactors on electric water heaters to allow scheduling of water heaters.

• Route circulation pump circuits via lighting control panel for scheduling.
• Lighting controls
For each FBISD project that includes lighting controls whether new or existing
project, a “Lighting control” meeting shall be held. This may be a separate
meeting or part of another meeting.
Provide a lighting control schedule on drawings. This schedule shall list the
lighting circuits to be controlled by relay and the groups in which the relays
belong. For example:
Lighting Circuit Relay Control Group

HA-1 LCA-1 A (interior)
HB-13,15,17 LCB-1 (contactor coil) Ext (parking light)
OR
Lighting Circuits Control group

HA-1, HA-3, HB-5, HC-6 A
HB-13, 15, 17 Ext (Teacher’s lot night light)
• For areas with clerestory or floor to ceiling windows, provide a day lighting
scenario. Not necessarily a high tech dimming system.
• Recommended Manufactures: Watt Stopper, Luminaire, Lutra.
New Facilities:
• Classrooms and offices shall be controlled through line voltage occupancy
sensors (located in the ceiling). Provide dual level lighting controlled by local
switches enabled by occupancy sensor in classrooms. Wire lights in
“checker board” configuration paying particular attention to location of
projector and projector screen. Avoid dual ballast fixtures. Occupancy
sensors to be supplied by LVLCS vendor and connected to BAS for
monitoring and remote adjustment.
Page 5 of 7
FBISD 26 00 00
• Common areas, corridors, exterior lighting, etc. shall be controlled through

low voltage lighting control panels LVLCS (no local switches).
• Where building design incorporates day lighting, provide day lighting controls.
• Common areas and corridors shall be wired to enable 50% reduction in
lighting level.
• Locker rooms, band halls, dance rooms and other spaces that house
activities that may occur after regular hours shall have a local keyed switch
that is enabled through the low voltage lighting system (LVLCS).
• Gymnasium lighting shall be controlled by switches (located in lockable
recessed cabinet in gym) that are enabled by the LVLCS. Wire light fixtures
to enable 50% reduction in lighting levels.
• Kitchen lighting shall be switched by toggle switch, enabled by LVLCS,
located at staff entrance.
• Restroom lighting shall be controlled separately from corridor lighting
• Egress lighting shall be switched through LVLCS normally but enabled
through “generator transfer devices” located in mechanical rooms in the event
of power failure.
• Building should be “blacked out” with no night lights except for a light directly
over any/all burglar alarm key pads.
• Areas where lighting levels that are split 50% shall use a “checker board”
configuration where applicable. Avoid light fixtures with dual ballasts.
• Keyed switches shall be Sargent brand with interchangeable cores.
• Override switches:
1. Shall be a programmable input to the LVLCS.
2. Provide an “exterior lighting” override switch in main electrical room.
3. Located in custodian office to enable 100% lighting level.
4. Located in principal’s office to enable 100% lighting level.
5. Shall be adjustable duration (2 hours).
6. All override switches shall have engraved wall plates.
Exterior lighting:
1. Marquee sign is controlled separately. (See Division 32 for the
Marquee requirements)
2. Canopies are controlled separately from security lighting.
3. Security lighting (wall packs and soffit lighting) shall be controlled
separately on each building elevation. (North side controlled
separately from South side, etc...).
4. Parking lot lighting shall be circuited and controlled by zones (Staff
parking, gym parking, auditorium parking, visitor parking, etc.)
5. Field lights will be enabled by the LVLCS and controlled through
keyed switches located in coach’s office or where coordinated with
athletic program. Field lighting control shall include a separate point
to allow remote activation of lights.
6. Provide photo cell input to LVLCS.
Page 6 of 7
FBISD 26 00 00
7. All exterior lighting should be LED technology.
Interlocks:
1. Interlock with fire alarm to enable all lighting upon activation.
2. Interlock with security system to disable all lighting upon arming of
system.
3. Interlock with security system to enable all lighting upon intruder
activation.
4. Interlock with security system to enable partial lighting when system is
first disarmed.
Enable 50% of common areas, kitchen, custodial, gang restroom, fine
arts, gym, locker room, admin, and other areas that may need to be
used at times other than student hours. Enable the remaining lights 1
hour before students arrive until 1 hour after they leave.
5. Intent is to have three inputs from security system: armed, disarmed
and activated
Existing Buildings:
1. The extent of lighting controls is determined based on project needs.
LVLCS or lighting contactors may be used.
2. Control of lighting contactors or LVLCS shall be incorporated into the
existing building management system “head end” to be accessed,
monitored and programmed through existing energy management
computers/equipment.
3. Where classroom lighting is replaced, provide dual level lighting
controlled through local switches that are enabled through line voltage
occupancy sensors. Layout lighting in “checker board” pattern paying
particular attention to location of projector and projector screen.
4. Override switches:
a. Shall be a programmable input to the LVLCS.
b. Located in custodian office.
c. Located in principal’s office.
d. Shall be adjustable in time duration.
e. Provide “exterior lighting” override switch in main elec. room.
f. All override switches shall have engraved wall plates.
5. Existing line voltage switches may remain in use but will be enabled
by LVLCS or contactors. Determined through lighting control meeting
with FBISD.
6. Provide interlocks with systems as noted in “New facility” design.
7. Refer to Division 25 for BAS control. Lighting control – I/F to our front
end with control vender.
Page 7 of 7
Division #26 – Electrical (Low Voltage Electrical Transmission)
Low Voltage Electrical Transmission (Low Voltage defined as 600V and less) (26 20 00)
• Require a ground resistance test for grounding system at project completion.

• Require a breaker coordination study to set trip settings.
Low Voltage Overhead Electrical Power Systems (26 21 00)
Low Voltage Transformers (26 22 00)
• All transformers shall be harmonic mitigating transformers

• Acceptable manufacturers: PQI or Powersmith.
• All floor mounted transformers shall be located on 4” housekeeping pads.
Low Voltage Switchgear (26 23 00)
• Acceptable manufacturers:
Square D
General Electric
Siemens
Low Voltage Switchboards,Panelboards and Motor Control Centers (26 24 00)
Square D
General Electric
Siemens
• All disconnects, panel covers and starters in kitchen areas and adjacent to cooling
towers shall be stainless steel.
Enclosed Bus Assemblies (26 25 00)
Power Distribution Units (26 26 00)
Low Voltage Distribution Equipment (26 27 00)
Page 1 of 3
Wiring Devices (26 27 26)
• All devices shall be specification grade

Leviton
Pass and Seymour
Hubbell
Arrow Hart
Lutron (dimmers)
• Wiring device color shall be reviewed with the owner/architect and required local
codes and standards.
• Device wall plates shall be stainless steel.
• Devices shall be rated for 20 amps, minimum.
• Devices connected to emergency circuits shall be “red” in color.
Switches
• Key operated switches other than lighting shall accept a Sargent cylinder.
• Keyed switches for lighting shall be Hubbell HBL 1221 L only with “h” type key.
Receptacles
• Minimum two duplex receptacles at each teacher work station separated by 2”.
• Provide one duplex receptacle at each Kronos time clock (see attached drawing of
Kronos dimensions)
• Housekeeping receptacles minimum every 50’ minimum in corridors.
• No more than four computer work stations per 20 amps. Circuit.
• At severe and profound changing table provide two 120v. receptacles one at 18”AFF
and one at 6” BFC both can be on same circuit.
• At each identified copier location provide one 208/240, 30 amp. circuit and one 120v,
20 amp circuit.
• Provide minimum one duplex receptacle for each data drop (if there is a workstation
countertop, locate the electrical above the workstation surface. Generally this will be
at 42” AFF to avoid locating within a backsplash, etc. Coordinate with actual floor
plan.)
• Do not place more than four computer work stations per 20 amp circuit.
• Provide minimum two duplex receptacles at each “instructional workstation” (if there
is a workstation countertop, locate the electrical above the workstation surface.
Generally this will be at 42” AFF to avoid locating within a backsplash, etc.
Coordinate with actual floor plan.)
Page 2 of 3
Occupancy sensors
• Occupancy sensors shall be dual technology type and ceiling mounted. In offices,
storage, workrooms and other spaces that may require the ability to turn out lights
when occupied, provide a wall mounted toggle switch at door. Hubbell Omni-
DT2000.
• When using a low voltage lighting controls system, classroom occupancy sensors to
be provided by controls vendor and connected to BAS for monitoring and
adjustment.
Low Voltage Circuit Protective Devices (26 28 00)
Low Voltage Controllers (26 29 00)
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 26 30 00
Division #26– Electrical (Facility Electrical Power Generating & Storing Equipment)
Facility Electrical Power Generating and Storing Equipment (26 30 00)
Packaged Generator Assemblies (26 32 00)
• Acceptable Manufacturers:
Caterpillar
Kohler
Onan
• Generator “exercise” schedule shall be coordinated with FBISD for day and time.
• Generally provided at major campuses; coordinate with Owner.
• Natural gas only, if available. Use dual fuel generator only if required by AHJ.
Alternate fuel shall be propane. If located in undeveloped area and natural gas
service is cost prohibitive or not available, consider alternate source (propane,
diesel).
• Locate remote enunciator panel in main custodial office or Administration offices
• Provide emergency power for the following items.
• Building Intrusion Alarm Control Panel

• Building Access Control Panel and power supplies
• Video Surveillance Hard Drive Recorder
• Video Camera Power Supply
• Intercommunications Rack
• Egress lighting
• Kitchen refrigeration equipment and walk-in freezers/coolers
• MDF room
• Special education receptacles (two). One in each room.
• Clinic receptacles (two)
• Clinic refrigerator
• Fire alarm panel
• Telephone equipment
• Other life safety or security items not listed
• Testing: Generator shall be field tested with all building loads connected by factory
authorized representative. Test shall be witnessed by FBID and engineer.
• Training: Provide 4 hours training each, for four persons.
Transfer Switches (26 36 00)
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 26 30 00
Division #26– Electrical (Facility Electrical Power Generating & Storing Equipment)
ASCO
Caterpillar
Cummins Power Generation
GE
Zenith
Kohler
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 26 40 00
Division #26 – Electrical (Electrical and Cathodic Protection)
Electrical and Cathodic Protection (26 40 00)
Facility Lightning Protection (26 41 00)
RESERVE – No Special Requirements at this time, however lightning protection is

recommended on facilities where data storage equipment is anticipated (such as
Administration and/or Network Operation Centers)
Cathodic Protection (26 42 00)
Transient Voltage Suppression (26 43 00)
• Design a full facility Transient Voltage Suppression System. Including:
Main Service Entrance

Power distribution panels
Local equipment permanently fastened to building such as PA system, fire alarm
system, local sound systems, etc.
Surge protection including line and load reactors and filters.
• Provide additional voltage protection at Chillers
Liebert
Current Technology
MTE
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 26 50 00
Division #26– Electrical (Lighting)
Lighting (26 50 00)
• Design shall comply with Texas energy code.

• For projects located in Fort Bend County, verify the lighting zone and design exterior
lighting to comply with latest FB County lighting ordinance.
Interior Lighting (26 51 00)
• Lamps ballast combination shall be Phillips F32T8-25W ADV850 XEW ALTO II 1LP
with Advance Optanium IOP-2P32-SC - Univ with striation reduction circuitry or
equal.
• No U-lamps allowed.
• In all rooms with two entry/exit doors, provide 3-way switching for lighting.
• No parabolic fixtures; prismatic preferred.
• Provide T5/HO fluorescent lighting in gyms, with full wire guard protection.
• Prismatic lenses shall be .125” thick
• Generally no incandescent fixtures; coordinate with Owner.
• Provide dual level lighting in all classrooms and in areas with A/V equipment. District
prefers using a checkerboard circuiting pattern (preferred) or a pattern employing
every other row of fixtures on alternate circuits. Do not utilize dual-ballast fixtures
except as required by Energy Code or other codes and AHJ.
• Classroom lighting shall be based on performance. A/E team may present day
lighting schemes for review and approval.
• No lights located higher than 24 feet above finish floor so that maintenance can
reach them with their equipment. Discuss exceptions with Owner. Auditoriums and
clerestories should comply due to difficulty in changing these fixtures. The gym may
be an exception due only to UIL requirements.
• Auditorium lighting shall be designed to allow maintenance. Light fixtures shall be
located above aisles. Provide catwalk above ceiling to access all light fixtures.
• Coordinate lighting layout with respect to maintenance for future access. Coordinate
so lights aren’t located above anchored furniture in areas such as library, with
basketball goal structures in gyms, curtain tracks in cot area of clinic, etc…
• Provide a switched light over each cot in the clinic.
• Fluorescent lamps to be 4100K
• Display case lighting is to be circuited with the general lighting of the area in which
they are located and controlled by local switch.
• For theatrical lighting requirements at refer to division 11.
• All high bay lighting will be LED.
• All stairwell lighting will be LED.
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 26 50 00
Emergency Lighting (26 52 00)
• When required (if no emergency generator is provided in contract), provide a battery

back-up in one of the spaces regular light fixtures. Avoid the wall mounted “bug eye”
type fixture.
• Egress lighting, provide a generator transfer device for switching of emergency
circuits. GTD shall be located in a mechanical or electrical room, not in light fixtures.
Exit Signs (26 53 00)
• Provide LED exit signs
Specified Purpose Lighting (26 55 00)
Theatrical Lighting (26 55 61)
• Coordinate with division 11 for specific information on the theatrical and/or

stage lighting.
• Provide recessed bead lighting at HS stage (see Division 11) and at aisles in
high school auditoriums. Similar to Tivoli soft aisle lighting and Tivoli light
tube.
• Provide incandescent lighting at dressing room mirrors and Cole lighting “In
use” sign connected to dressing table receptacles.
Exterior Lighting (26 56 00)
Site Lighting (26 56 29)
• Match the parking lot lighting lamp color with the wall packs on the building.
• Lights located in exterior soffits are generally compact fluorescent.
• Use cut-off fixtures where applicable.
• Consider LED lighting. Provide photometric study if LED is proposed.
• If located within Fort Bend County, comply with Fort Bend County Lighting
Ordinance, if required.
• If building is lighted at night for architectural reasons, it shall be coordinated
with FBISD for approval. Review shall include architectural elevations.
Comply with Fort Bend County lighting ordinance.
Exterior Athletic Lighting (26 56 68)
• Prefer Pro Circuit or Musco.

• Light poles are to be outside the perimeter fence of baseball and softball
fields.
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 26 50 00
• Include glare shields.

• Consult Fort Bend County (if applicable) Lighting Ordinance; ensure
compliance.
• Sports lighting controls shall be set up so groups of lights can be sequenced
“on”.
General light levels
Design lighting levels in compliance with IESNA Guidelines where applicable.
Athletic facility lighting levels shall comply with UIL requirements.
Space Light level (foot candles)

Classrooms 40-50 fc
Flex spaces 30-40 fc
Libraries 30-40 fc
Offices 40-50 fc
Kitchen 50 fc (per Fort Bend Co. Health Department)
Dining and Commons 30-40 fc
Corridor / Storage 25-30 fc
Competition gyms 80 fc
Practice gyms (recreational purposes) 50 fc
Football/Soccer 30 (fewer than 2000) 50 (more than 2000)
Football/Soccer 20 (practice fields)
Baseball/Softball 50 (infield) 30 (outfield)
Tennis 50 fc
Track and Field 30 fc
Parking lot/sidewalks (in general) 1 fc
Parking lot (when security is an issue) 3 fc
***NOTE: A/E shall verify all light levels with FBISD Project Manager prior to finalizing design***
Page 3 of 3
FBISD Division 27 Specifications - (January 20, 2016 Update)
Fort Bend ISD

Division 27 Specifications 2016
1
Specification Sections Page

27 00 00 Communications
27 01 00 Operation and Maintenance of Communications Systems 4
27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications 10
27 06 00 Schedules for Communications 26
27 08 00 Commissioning of Communications 33
27 10 00 Structured Cabling
27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 35
27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 46
27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 51
27 16 00 Communications Connecting Cords, Devices, and Adaptors 57
27 20 00 Data Communications
27 21 00 Data Communications Network equipment 63
27 22 00 Data Communications Hardware 63
27 24 00 Data Communications Peripheral Data equipment 63
27 25 00 Data Communications Software 63
27 26 00 Data Communications Programming and Integration Services 64
27 30 00 Voice Communications
27 31 00 Voice Communications Switching and Routing Equipment 65
27 32 00 Voice Communications Terminal Equipment 65
27 33 00 Voice Communications Messaging 65
27 34 00 Call Accounting 65
27 35 00 Call Management 65
27 40 00 Audio-Video (AV) Communications
27 41 00 AV Systems 66
27 42 00 Electronic Digital Systems 68
27 50 00 Distribution Communications and Monitoring Equipment
27 51 00 Distributed AV Communications System 70
2
27 53 00 Distributed Systems 71
3
27 00 00 Communications
27 01 00 Operation and Maintenance of Communications Systems
A. GENERAL
1. References
a. Responsibility of the Electrical and Technology contractor to meet all the requirements of this
specification.
b. Refers to all sections under the 27 01 XX header
2. Definitions
a. RCDD – Registered Communications Distribution Designer
b. FBISD – Fort Bend Independent School District
c. ITS – Information Technology System
d. TDMM – Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
e. BICSI – Building Industry Consulting Service International
f. TIA – Telecommunications Industry Association
g. EIA – Electronic Industries Alliance
h. ANSI – American National Standards Institute
i. NEC – National Electrical Code
j. NESC – National Electrical Safety Code
k. RFI – Request For Information
l. SCS – Structured Cabling System
m. POE – Point Of Entry
n. PoE – Power Over Ethernet
o. LAN – Local Area Network
p. WAN – Wide Area Network
q. OSP – Outside Plant
r. UTP – Unshielded Twisted Pair
s. MDF – Main Distribution Frame
t. IDF – Intermediate Distribution Frame
u. TO – Telecommunications Outlets
v. Media – Copper or fiber used to provide a signal transmission path
w. Backbone – Cabling system connecting MDF and IDF areas to one another
x. Horizontal – Cabling system connecting MDF/IDF to TO locations
y. Cabinet – Floor/Wall mounted enclosure designed to house rack mounted equipment
z. Rack – Floor/Wall mounted open structure designed for rack mounted equipment
aa. Channel – End to end transmission between two points where equipment is to be connected
bb. Link – All horizontal cabling from TO to termination point (does not include patch cables)
cc. Contractor – Successful bidder engaged to provide work for this specification
3. Description
a. Operation and Maintenance Manual formats and documents to be included in each section.
b. Manual will be in 6 sections as broken down in the 5 below sections (27.01.10, 20, 30, 40, 50)
with the last section being as built prints and test reports.
4. Related Documents
a. Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section.
b. Follow TIA/EIA-568-B, TIA/EIA-569-A, and TIA/EIA-606-B Standards
4
c. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A for grounding

d. Comply with NEC codes
e. Utilize BICSI TDMM Guidelines
5. Submittals
a. Provide qualifications and certificates with bid
b. Provide unit pricing and alternates with bid
c. Provide product submittals before construction
d. Provide point of contact personnel contact information pre-construction and keep information
up to date throughout project
e. Shop drawings must have RCDD stamp on them before submitting for approval
6. Quality Assurance
a. Installed copper and hardware by a Panduit Certified Installer
b. Installed fiber and connectors by a Corning LANscape Network Preferred Expert Installer
c. Full time RCDD on staff at time of installation and stamped on all drawings.
d. Minimum (2) BICSI certified installers with ITS training
7. Coordination and Responsibilities
a. All RFI and change orders go to designer and FBISD
b. Contractors RCDD to attend project meetings and perform weekly site observations
c. Contractor must obtain and provide warranty certificates within 30 days of project completion
d. Contractor to provide test results, operation, and maintenance manuals to FBISD within 30
days of completion of project
e. Drawings (Hard and Electronic copies) are due within 30 days of project completion
f. Training on operations and maintenance must be scheduled and completed with 30 days of
project completion
8. Delivery, Storage, and Handling
a. Comply with manufacture specifications
b. Test all products to be as manufacture specified before installation
9. Conditions
a. Do not deliver or install specified equipment until spaces are enclosed and weather tight being
dry and all work above is complete.
10. Warranty
a. Copper and Hardware to be installed by a Panduit Certified Installer, registered with Panduit,
and a Certification Plus System Warranty Certificate providing a 25 year warranty for material
and performance to FBISD.
b. Fiber and its connectivity to be installed by LANscape Network Preferred Expert Installer,
registered with Corning Cabling Systems, and a LANscape Solutions Extended Warranty
Program providing a 25 year warranty on fiber optic cabling solutions to FBISD.
c. Project Warranty for workmanship is a minimum of 2 years.
11. Maintenance
a. Training to be provided to FBISD personnel prior to taking over responsibility of equipment
installed and within 30 days of project completion.
27 01 10 Operation and Maintenance of Structured Cabling and Enclosures
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit (copper system)
b. Corning (fiber system)
5
2. Description
a. Section 27.10.00 of manual to include product information and maintenance procedures for all
equipment used in this section per manufacture specifications.
3. Specifications
a. As provided by product manufacture.
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. After installation of all products instruct FBISD on the operation and maintenance of the
product in accordance to the manufacture specifications.
2. Continuity
a. Maintain continuity of manual for all sections of this specification covering the operation and
maintenance of all installed products to comply with manufacture specifications.
3. Tolerances
a. In accordance to manufacture specifications to achieve 25 year warranty from product
manufacture while complying with but not limited to TIA/EIA-568-B, TIA/EIA-569-B, and
TIA/EIA-606-B.
4. Testing
a. In accordance to manufacture specifications in order to achieve 25 year warranty from product
TIA/EIA-606-B.
b. Submit final test report to FBISD as part of the submittal process.
5. Adjustments
a. Any adjustments to the installed products that are needed to maintain the manufacture
extended warranties must be listed in the manual and dually noted to FBISD personnel.
6. Review
a. All aspects of manual must be reviewed with the Engineer and FBISD personnel prior to
completion and turnover of the product to FBISD.
7. Documentation
a. All utilized product cut sheets to be provided within manual along with any operation or
maintenance procedures that are required by product manufacture.
8. Acceptance
a. Review, observation, assistance, and actions by the Engineer and FBISD shall not be
construed as undertaking supervisory control of the work or of methods and means employed
by the contractor. The Engineer and FBISD review and observation activities shall not relieve
the contractor from the responsibilities of these Contract Documents.
b. The fact that the Engineer and FBISD does not make early discovery of faulty or omitted work
shall not bar FBISD from subsequently rejecting this work and withholding payment until the
contractor makes the necessary corrections.
c. Regardless of when discovery and rejection are made, and regardless of when the contractor
is ordered to correct such work, the contractor shall have no claim against the Engineer or
FBISD for an increase in the Subcontract price, or for any payment on account of increased
cost, damage, or loss.
27 01 20 Operation and Maintenance of Data Communications
A. PRODUCTS
6
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit (copper system)
b. Corning (fiber system)
2. Description
3. Specifications
a. As provided by product manufacture.
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
TIA/EIA-606-B.
4. Testing
a. In accordance to manufacture specifications in order to achieve 25 year warranty from product
TIA/EIA-606-B.
b. Submit final test report to FBISD as part of submittal process.
5. Adjustments
extended warranties must be listed in the manual and noted to FBISD personnel.
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 01 30 Operation and Maintenance of Voice Communications

7
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
2. Description
3. Specifications
a. As provided by product manufacture
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
TIA/EIA-606-B.
4. Testing
TIA/EIA-606-B.
5. Adjustments
extended warranties must be listed in the manual and noted for FBISD personnel.
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 01 40 Operation and Maintenance of Audio-Video Communications
A. PRODUCTS
8
1. Manufacture
a. RapidRun
2. Description
3. Specifications
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 01 50 Operation and Maintenance of Distributed Communications and Monitoring
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. VBrick
2. Description
9
3. Specifications
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
a. Per manufacture specifications
4. Testing
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications

A. GENERAL
1. References
specification.
2. Definitions
10

j. RFI – Request For Information
k. SCS – Structured Cabling System
l. POE – Point Of Entry
m. PoE – Power Over Ethernet
n. LAN – Local Area Network
o. WAN – Wide Area Network
p. OSP – Outside Plant
q. UTP – Unshielded Twisted Pair
r. MDF – Main Distribution Frame
s. IDF – Intermediate Distribution Frame
t. TO – Telecommunications Outlets
u. TBB – Telecommunications Bonding Backbone
v. TGB - Telecommunications Grounding Busbar
w. TMGB – Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar
x. GE – Grounding Equalizer
y. Media – Copper or fiber used to provide a signal transmission path
z. Backbone – Cabling system connecting MDF and IDF areas to one another
aa. Horizontal – Cabling system connecting MDF/IDF to TO locations
bb. Cabinet – Floor/Wall mounted enclosure designed to house rack mounted equipment
cc. Rack – Floor/Wall mounted open structure designed for rack mounted equipment
dd. Channel – End to end transmission between two points where equipment is to be connected
ee. Link – All horizontal cabling from TO to termination point (does not include patch cables)
ff. Contractor – Successful bidder engaged to provide work for this specification
3. Description
a. The Contractor shall perform all work according to Federal, State, and local codes, rules,
regulations, and ordinances governing the work, and as fully part of the specifications as if
herein repeated or hereto attached. If the Contractor should note items in the drawings or the
specifications, construction of which would be code violations, promptly call them to the
attention of FBISD’s representative in writing. Where the requirements of other sections of the
specifications are more stringent than applicable codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances, the
specifications shall apply.
b. This work consists of, but is not limited to, communications service connections, horizontal and
backbone cabling, bonding/grounding for all, pathways with support/ hangers/ trays/ ducts/
raceways, and identification of all.
a. TIA/EIA-526-7 - Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable
Plant – OFSTP-7 (August 1998)
b. TIA/EIA-526- 14-A - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode
c. Fiber Cable Plant – OFSTP-14 (August 1998)
d. TIA/EIA-568-B 1.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1:
General Requirements (August 2001)
e. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
f. Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components
11
g. TIA/EIA-568-B.2-4 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2:

Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components (June 2002)
h. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
i. TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard (April 2002)
j. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces
k. TIA/EIA-569-A-7 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
l. Pathways and Spaces (December 2001)
m. TIA/EIA-598-B - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding (December 2001)
n. TIA/EIA-606-A - Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure
(May 2002)
o. J-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
p. Requirements for Telecommunications (October 2002)
q. TIA/EIA-758- 1 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard (April
1999)
r. TIA 942 Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers
s. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2- 10; Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ω
Augmented Category 6 Cabling
t. ANSI/TIA 455-78-B-2002; Optical Fibers – Part 1-40: Measurement Methods
u. and Test Procedures – Attenuation
v. ANSI/TIA 598-C-2005; Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
w. ANSI/TIA 569-B-2004; Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces
x. TIA/TSB 140-2004; Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and
y. Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems
z. ISO/IEC 11801 A1: 2002 – Information Technology – Generic Cabling For Customer Premises
aa. National Electrical Code
bb. ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568 - Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling
cc. BICSI - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 13th Edition.
5. Submittals
a. Installed copper and hardware by a Panduit Certified Installer
b. Installed fiber and connectors by a Corning LANscape Network Preferred Expert Installer
c. Full time RCDD on staff at time of installation and stamped on all drawings.
d. Minimum (2) BICSI certified installers with ITS training
12
project completion
a. Comply with all manufacture specifications
9. Conditions
dry and all work above is complete.
10. Warranty
c. Project Warranty for workmanship is a minimum of 2 years.
11. Maintenance
installed and within 30 days of project completion.
27 05 05 Selective Demolition for Communications
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. As per FBISD approval
2. Description
a. To be used on selected site elements with pre-demolition meeting at site
b. Some selected demolition items may require remove and re-install at a later time
c. Salvage existing items to be reused or recycled
3. Specifications
a. As per item manufacture specifications in conjunction with section specifications
b. Contractor to submit a list of items to be savaged and delivered to FBISD and those that are to
be recycled
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. All work to be done in accordance with product manufacture specifications
b. Adhere to each items provisioning section specifications
c. Before and after photos are required for all work to be completed
2. Continuity
a. To be used in conjunction with all sections of Division 27 when demolition is to occur
b. Work to be coordinated with other trades in the area to not damage items removed
3. Tolerances
a. No removed materials are to be disposed of
b. All items are to be recycled or secured for reuse
4. Testing
13
a. All items to be reused are to be tested according to each items division, section, and testing
procedures
b. Before and after photos to accompany test results
c. All items left in place are to be labeled according to section 27.05.53
5. Adjustments
6. Review
a. All aspects of demolition and recovery must be reviewed with the Engineer and FBISD
personnel prior to completion and turnover of the product to FBISD.
7. Documentation
maintenance procedures that are required by product manufacture
8. Acceptance
cost, damage, or loss
27 05 13 Communications Services
27 05 13.13 Dial Tone Services
27 05 13.23 T1 Services
27 05 13.33 DSL Services
27 05 13.43 Cable Services
27 05 13.53 Satellite Services
27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems
B. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
b. FBISD approved equivalent
2. Description
a. This section refers to grounding and bonding of all products under section 27 including but not
limited to structured cabling, data communications, voice communications, AV
communications, distribution communications, and monitoring equipment.
b. Establish a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone that includes an earth ground source and
Busbars.
14
3. Specifications
a. TMGB – One per MDF with label - #2 AWG insulated conductor or larger from ground rod to
Busbar Part # GB4B0612TPI-1
b. TGB – One per IDF with label - #2 AWG insulated conductor or larger from ground rod
(building ground) to Busbar Part # GB2B0306TPI-1
c. RGEJ – Equipment Jumper Kit – Qty (3) installed per rack Part # GJS66OU
d. RGS – Grounding Strip Kit – Qty (1) installed per rack attached to Busbar with #6 AWG
insulated conductor Part # RGS134-1Y
e. All metal components in MDF/IDF shall be grounded with #6 AWG insulated conductor or
larger and terminated on both ends with a long barrel 2 hole lug Part # LCC6-14JAWH-L
f. See related documents in this section 27.05.00
C. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. All work to be done in accordance with the manufacture specifications and any local relevant
codes.
b. All bonding conductors to be labeled on both ends.
2. Continuity
a. All bonding conductors should be uninterrupted between the designation points of termination.
3. Tolerances
a. No conductors should come in direct contact with any data cable.
b. No continuity test shall have a resistance greater than 1Ω.
4. Testing
a. All conductors shall be tested to be within tolerance at every connection point.
b. Meet TIA-942, TIA-607-B, EIA-310, IEEE Std 1100, UL and CSA specifications and comply
with NEC code specifications
5. Adjustments
6. Review
a. Busbar location must be presented to FBISD for approval before installation.
b. All aspects of installation must be reviewed with the Engineer and FBISD personnel prior to
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
15
27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
2. Description
a. Pathways shall be free from obstruction and any items that may cause harm to the cabling
installation or installed.
b. Proper clearance from all interference to data transmission must be taken into consideration
when planning out pathway.
c. Any penetrations caused do to pathway route shall be sealed according to ASTM E814
(UL1479) and adhere to fire rating presented in building code.
d. No tie wrap is to be left behind
3. Specifications
a. Each type of pathway is specified in the following sections.
b. Different media types and colors are to be secured and separated within pathways.
c. Only Velcro is approved for the securing communications cabling (NO TIE WRAPS).
d. All associated sections and specifications must be adhered to.
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
codes.
b. Proper planning with other trades and project engineer for above ceiling clearances is
mandatory for the success of the installation.
2. Continuity
a. See also Division 26 specifications
b. Any pathway that consists of metal must be properly grounded.
3. Tolerances
a. Installed per manufacture specifications and TIA-569-B, TIA-568-C, TIA-607, and ANSI/NFPA
70 standards and codes
4. Testing
a. All pathways are subject to the review and acceptance within this specification by project
engineer and or FBISD.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
a. All aspects of installation must be reviewed with the Engineer and FBISD personnel prior to
7. Documentation
9. Acceptance
16
27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
2. Description
a. Hangers and support are for the installation of all communications media types.
3. Specifications
a. J-Mod – JMJH2-X20 2” hook for bracket system
b. Mounting brackets come in multiple configurations for multiple applications and must be
secured to the structure having a capacity to handle 30% growth without exceeding maximum
capacity.
c. J-Mod support must not be spaced any further than 5’ apart and only Velcro is approved for
securing cables to hooks
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. The use of grid wire to hang or support any portion of a pathway is not permitted.
b. Contractor shall use a separate hanger or support for each media type or color when using a
Panduit J-Mod system.
2. Continuity
a. Contractor to coordinate with other trades and services for placement and capacity
considerations.
3. Tolerances
a. Installed per manufacture specifications and TIA-569-C, TIA-568-C, TIA-607, and ANSI/NFPA
70 standards and codes
4. Testing
a. All hangers and support are subject to the review and acceptance within this specification by
project engineer and or FBISD.
8. Adjustments
b. Any adjustments to the installed products that are needed to maintain the manufacture
extended warranties must be listed in the manual and noted to FBISD personnel
5. Review
9. Documentation
b. All utilized product cut sheets to be provided within manual along with any operation or
10. Acceptance
17
27 05 33 Conduits and Back Boxes for Communications Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. As approved by FBISD
2. Description
a. This specification section covers the metallic conduits and back boxes for the support of the
communications cabling in sheetrock walls, on concrete walls, in concrete floor, along bottom
of racks, and above ceiling.
3. Specifications
a. ¾” minimum size requirement
b. Pull boxes shall be a minimum of every 100’ on conduit runs and no conduit run shall have
more than (2) 90 degree sweeps or total sweeps over 180 degrees.
c. All must have bushing either molded or locked onto conduit
d. Adhere to Panduit cable minimum bending radius for conduit bends (4 times the cable
diameter)
e. Support at 8’ on center minimum and within 1’ of direction change, enclosure, or back box.
f. Back box minimum 4” by 4” (double gang) by 2.5” deep with a single gang reducer.
B. EXECUTION
10. Workmanship
codes.
b. Proper planning with other trades and project engineer for above ceiling clearances and
MDF/IDF room installations is mandatory for the success of the installation.
1. Continuity
a. In conjunction with specifications section 26 and other sections within 27.
2. Tolerances
a. Material to be UL listed and approved
b. Comply with NEMA TC-3-04, FB1-03
c. Conduit to be in accordance to NEC and not less than ¾” inch
d. Conduits must have molded or locking bushing insulating entry and maintain the minimum
separation distance from other power as specified by BICSI
3. Testing
a. All conduit and back boxes are subject to the review and acceptance within this specification
by project engineer and or FBISD.
4. Adjustments
18
6. Review
11. Documentation
11. Acceptance
27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communications Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
b. Chatsworth
2. Description
a. Wire Tray – Wyr-Grid Overhead Cable Tray System complete with mounting brackets,
waterfalls, splice connectors, and solid support to be used in specified above ceiling
applications. Size trays according to manufacture fill requirement specifications allowing for a
30% growth.
b. Ladder Tray – Universal Cable Runway System with Runway Elevation Kit when connecting to
rack as well as any needed accessories to support from ceiling or wall. Size trays according to
manufacture fill requirement specifications allowing for a 30% growth.
c. Fiber Tray – 4x4 FiberRunner Routing System complete with covers, mounts, junctions,
coupler, angle fittings, cross fittings, end cap, down spout, trumpet, spill outs, adapters, and
brackets as needed to have a complete system from room entry to fiber box. Must have bend
radius control on all turns. Size trays according to manufacture fill requirement specifications
allowing for a 30% growth.
3. Specifications
a. Wire trays above ceiling in specified locations consist of WG12BL10 (minimum size) and any
needed additional hardware to have a complete end to end system with solid support
connections to building. (No grid wire is to be used) Size trays according to manufacture fill
requirement specifications allowing for a 30% growth.
b. Ladder tray inside MDF/IDF to consist of 10250-712 (minimum size), elevation kit to be 10506-
706 (minimum size), and any needed additional hardware to have a complete end to end
system with solid support connections to building. (No grid wire is to be used) Size trays
according to manufacture fill requirement specifications allowing for a 30% growth
c. Fiber tray inside MDF/IDF to consist of FR4X4YL6 (minimum size) and any needed additional
hardware to have a complete end to end system within the IDF/MDF. (No grid wire is to be
19
used) Size trays according to manufacture fill requirement specifications allowing for a 30%
growth.
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. All material to be installed according to manufacture specifications.
b. No grid wire to be used to support any cable trays.
2. Continuity
a. Trays are to be used in locations where cabling crosses the over an area that has a solid
ceiling and is not traveling within a solid conduit.
3. Tolerances
a. Material to be UL listed and approved
b. All trays to be designed and installed with 30% growth in mind
c. No grid wire to be used to support trays
d. All installed trays must meet manufacture maximum support strength
4. Testing
a. Trays to be tested for manufactures specified maximum support strength.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
completion and turnover of the product to FBISD
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
c. Regardless of when discovery and rejection are made, and regardless of when the contractor is
ordered to correct such work, the contractor shall have no claim against the Engineer or FBISD
for an increase in the Subcontract price, or for any payment on account of increased cost,
damage, or loss
27 05 37 Fire Stopping for Communications Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Specified Technologies Inc.(STI)
b. SpecSeal Fire Stop Products (SSP)
2. Description
a. Fire rated pathways into IDF/MDF shall use EZ-Path
b. Large openings due to wire or basket pathways through firewalls the use of fire stop pillows is
recommended
20
c. All fire wall penetrations are to be sleeved with grommets on sleeve and putty around sleeve at
penetration point and in sleeve after cable installation is complete.
3. Specifications
a. IDF/MDF firewall entry to be EZ-PATH Series 33 EZD33FWS (minimum) to be sized according
to manufacture specifications allowing for a minimum of 30% growth.
b. All sleeves, sized according to TIA maximum fill requirements, shall have fire stop putty
SSP100 or SSP28 sealing all gaps in penetrations.
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. All equipment installed according to manufacture specifications and within Panduit maximum
fill requirements.
2. Continuity
a. Meet hardware and cabling specified requirements according to NFPA 70, NFPA 101, and TIA-
569 specifications
3. Tolerances
a. Must pass fire code and testing according to NFPA
4. Testing
a. To be conducted by General Contractor and Building Inspector as well as Fire Marshall to be
within code.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 05 39 Surface Raceways for Communications Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
2. Description
21
a. Non-Metallic – will be a minimum 1” x ½” and colored to match wall attached to and to be used
with Mini-Com surface mount boxes
3. Specifications
a. Non-Metallic raceway will be LD-5WH8-A (minimum size) or larger depending on the number
of cables that will reside within and in conjunction with CBX4WH-AY (minimum) surface mount
box to house connections
b. Raceway to use all needed fittings so there is no exposed or visible cable within the room
c. Raceway to be attached to walls with adhesive as well as screws with anchors
d. When installing horizontally the latch side is to be on top
e. Raceway sized according to TIA-569 fill requirements and allow for additional 30% growth
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. Install as specified above in a clean and straight manner
2. Continuity
a. Adhere to manufacture recommendations as well as TIA-569 standards for fill ratios
3. Tolerances
a. Allow for an additional 30% growth to the already installed capacity and adhere to fill ratios
according to TIA standards.
4. Testing
a. Raceway subject to inspection by FBISD personnel in accordance to above specifications as
well as TIA-569 standards.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
22
2. Description
a. Underground PVC to be schedule 40 or 80 ridged
b. Hand Hole – 15”x20”x10”(minimum) with 2” conduit
c. Pull Box – 15”x26”x18”(minimum) with (2) 4” conduits
d. Manhole – 5’x7’x7’(minimum) up to (6) 4” conduit, 6’x10’x7’(minimum) up to (12) 4” conduits,
shall have pulling eyes on either side of hole, cable racking on sides(no more than 4’ apart),
and no less than (1) sump hole
3. Specifications
a. Underground PVC to be schedule 40 or 80 ridged using standards set forth by UL65, ASTM
F512, NEMA TC(2, 3, 6, 8, & 9)
b. All pipe to have metal detectable tape attached to and labeling at exposure points.
c. All unused ducts to be sealed with reusable plugs
d. All labeling of pipes to be ORANGE in color with markers above ground indicating route
e. All holes to have #2 bare copper conductor neatly installed around the hole and connected
outside hole to ground rod.
f. All ducts should contain a 1000# (minimum) mule tape continuous from end to end
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. Adhere to all building, construction, state, and local codes when installing ducts and raceways
underground
b. Identify all holes, boxes, and covers with proper labeling per section 27.05.53
c. Use non-metallic duct when possible as well as precast holes and boxes
d. Conform and work with other utilities in the area before and during design and construction
phases
2. Continuity
a. Must stick to one manufacture throughout entire underground duct or raceway system
3. Tolerances
a. Any mixed use of products must be approved by FBISD before installation
4. Testing
a. Ducts to be pressure tested for water leaks
b. Rod ducts with mandrel ¼” smaller than internal diameter of duct
c. Grounds to be tested per section 27.05.26
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
23
27 05 46 Utility Poles for Communications Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
a. May be joint use for power and communications (low voltage)
3. Specifications
a. All attachments must follow the NESC and be grounded per NEC 250
b. Pole attachments to be on the same side of pole, perpendicular, and no closer than 6” to one
another
c. Maintain the 40” (minimum) safety space between the power and communications cables
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. Messengers are to be bonded according to NESC utilizing pole grounds
b. Adhere to attachment strength requirements and separation distances as well as ground
clearances and road crossing codes
c. Clearances and bonding are for the safety of the anyone utilizing the area
2. Continuity
a. When multiple utilities are to attach to pole coordination efforts are to be made and cleared
through FBISD
3. Tolerances
a. No attached cable shall be lower than 10’ from final grade at the lowest point
b. Adhere to code requirements for road clearances when crossing any drive area
c. No cable is to be attached higher than 30’ above final grade
d. Cables should be properly secured to the pole and not with tie wraps or wire
4. Testing
a. Attachments are to meet NEC, NESC, and local code requirements for tension strengths and
clearances between services and final grade
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
24
27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. FBISD Approved
2. Description
a. Identification of but not limited to (facilities, underground elements, conduits, trays, ground
wires, racks, jacks, circuits, boxes, cables, fibers, etc.)
b. Label is to be ¾” white nylon with black letters wrap around type for fiber, cable, and ground
wire
c. Label is to be ¾” white nylon with black letters for racks, boxes, and ground bars
d. Label is to be 3/8” white nylon with black letters type for outlets, panels, and adapters
3. Specifications
a. Conduit Intrabuilding – labeled on both ends indicating to and from Room
b. Conduit Interbuilding – labeled on both ends indicating to and from Building and Room
c. Ground/Bond – labeled on both ends indicating Busbar and other attachment location
d. Copper/Fiber Cable Intrabuilding - labeled on both ends indicating to and from Room and
Pair/Fiber count
e. Copper/Fiber Cable Interbuilding - labeled on both ends indicating to and from Building and
Room as well as Pair/Fiber count
f. Patch Panel – labeled as PP(and 2 digit rack unit # according to top left corner), ports on panel
shall be factory labeled from 1-48 above ports and Room # of jack location labeled below port
g. Rack/Cabinet – labeled as R(and number)
h. Station Cable – Room number refers to MDF/IDF
ROOM # - RACK # - RACK UNIT # of panel : PORT # of panel
- R - :
i. Communications Outlet – Room number refers to MDF/IDF
ROOM # - RACK # - RACK UNIT # of panel : PORT # of panel
- R - :
j. Data Center - Cables in Data Center should have local information and termination information
on both ends.(from  to)
RACK # - RACK UNIT # of panel : PORT #
Front/Back
R - :
(Example, R01F-30:05 / R12B-41:02) (Rack 01 Front - Rack Unit 30: Port 05 to Rack 12 Back – Rack Unit 41: Port 02)
B. EXECUTION
25
1. Workmanship
a. All identification is to be machine generated labels
b. No hand written labels will be accepted
2. Continuity
a. Work with Engineer and FBISD to determine room numbers (do not mark up using building
plan room numbers)
b. Test results and labeling should match identification
3. Tolerances
a. Any test results that do not match this naming convention will be asked to be reproduced
4. Testing
a. Test results from cables should match this labeling scheme
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 06 00 Schedules for Communications

A. GENERAL
1. References
a. Per section 27 01 00
2. Definitions
3. Description
a. The Contractor shall review the project construction schedule, as published by the General
Contractor, and shall meet that schedule.
b. The Contractor shall create a construction schedule for his/her work and be responsible to see
that it falls within the Electrical Contractor's schedule and the General Contractor's project
construction schedule. He/she shall submit his/her construction schedule to the Engineer and
the General Contractor for approval, included shall be his/her estimate of the number of staff
that will be working on the project.
26
c. Any deviations from the schedule will require approval from the Project Manager.
d. No additional compensation will be considered or granted for "Red, Overnight or Express"
deliveries and "over/premium" time pay to meet the schedule.
a. 27 08 00 Commissioning of Communications
5. Submittals
a. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel available for doing the work required in a
timely manner such that they will meet the project completion schedule.
b. The Contractor shall work the hours set forth by the General Contractor. Any deviation must be
approved by the Project Manager.
9. Conditions
10. Warranty
11. Maintenance
27 06 10 Schedules for Structured Cabling and Enclosures
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
3. Specifications
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. The Contractor shall schedule sufficient staff to perform the work required in the amount of
time allotted.
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
a. The Contractor shall schedule sufficient time and staff to perform the testing required in
the amount of time allotted.
b. The Contractor shall perform system tests as soon as an area is completed.
27
c. The Contractor shall provide a schedule indicating when testing is to be done and
submit schedule to the General Contractor, FBISD, and Engineer five (5) days before
commencing.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
a. The Contractor shall supply the documents required as scheduled, but in no case later than
(thirty) 30 days after acceptance of the project.
8. Acceptance
a. After the Contractor is satisfied that all work has been completed per the contract, they shall
schedule an acceptance walk through with the Project Manager and FBISD. The acceptance
document will be signed at that walk through turning responsibility of the system over to the
FBISD.
b. The Contractor shall meet the General Contractors Project Construction Schedule and have
the work completed, tested and Owner "Acceptance Document" signed by General Contractors
Completion date.
c. The Contractor shall schedule the acceptance walk through with the Project Manager no later
than five (5) days after his/her work has been completed.
d. The Contractor shall advise the Project Manager when the work is completed, and schedule
the acceptance walk through with at least three (3) days advance notice.
27 06 20 Schedules for Data Communications
C. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
3. Specifications
D. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
time allotted.
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
28
commencing.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
FBISD.
Completion date.
27 06 30 Schedules for Voice Communications
E. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
3. Specifications
F. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
time allotted.
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
29
commencing.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
FBISD.
Completion date.
27 06 37 Schedules for Fire Stopping
C. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
3. Specifications
D. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
time allotted.
approved by the Project Manager
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
c. The Contractor shall provide a schedule indicating when testing is to be done and submit
schedule to the General Contractor, FBISD, and Engineer five (5) days before commencing
30
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
(thirty) 30 days after acceptance of the project
8. Acceptance
FBISD.
Completion date.
the acceptance walk through with at least three (3) days advance notice
27 06 40 Schedules for Audio-Video Communications
G. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
3. Specifications
H. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
time allotted.
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
commencing.
5. Adjustments
31
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
FBISD.
Completion date.
27 06 50 Schedules for Distributed Communications and Monitoring
I. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
3. Specifications
J. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
time allotted.
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
commencing.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
32
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
FBISD.
Completion date.
27 08 00 Commissioning of Communications
A. GENERAL
1. References
a. Specification sections 27.10.xx through 27.53.xx
2. Definitions
a. N/A
3. Description
a. The requirement s of this section apply to the commissioning of all sections of Division 27
specifications
b. The commissioning of each section is specified in the schedule sections 27.06.xx above
4. Related Specifications
a. Specification sections 27.10.xx through 27.53.xx
5. Submittals
a. The commissioning process pertaining to each system will be provided to FBISD for review
and approval prior to commencement of work.
b. The commissioning process requires review of submittals that pertain to each system that is
commissioned.
a. Per section 27.10.xx through 27.53.xx
a. It is the Contractors’ responsibility to incorporate the commissioning of each system into the
submitted schedules for each.
9. Conditions
10. Warranty
11. Maintenance
33
B. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
3. Specifications
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
a. Requires inspection throughout construction process according to schedules
b. A pre-functional checklist must be prepared by Contractor and used to document installation
then submitted to FBISD for review and approval.
c. All testing specified by manufacture will be incorporated into the project schedule and notice
sent to FBISD no less than 7 calendar days before commencement.
d. The Contractor is to provide labor, material, and test equipment required by the manufacture to
do performance testing for all products installed at no additional cost to FBISD.
5. Adjustments
a. Any adjustment, repair, or replacement to meet manufacture specifications will be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor.
6. Review
a. All documentation shall be reviewed and approved by FBISD before commissioning of
equipment is considered complete.
b. Competent factory authorized personnel is to provide training to FBISD on the operation and
maintenance of all installed components within Division 27 Specifications.
7. Documentation
a. All sections to be commissioned require documentation of the installation and testing.
8. Acceptance
34
27 10 00 Structured Cabling
27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings
A. GENERAL
1. References
specification.
2. Definitions
3. Description
a. This section covers the products to be used and the manner of execution concerning entrance
protection; cabinet’s, racks, and enclosures; termination blocks, and patch panels; cable
management, and ladder racks; as well as rack mounted power, and protection.
b. Minimum room sizes are as follows : MDF to be 150 square feet and IDF to be 80 square feet
a. This section relates to 27.05.00
b. Adhere to TIA-568-B, TIA-569-B, ANSI-607-A, NFPA 70 with all installations in this section
35
5. Submittals
a. Full time RCDD on staff at time of installation and stamped on all drawings.
b. Minimum (2) BICSI certified installers with ITS training on job
project completion
9. Conditions
dry and all work above is complete
10. Warranty
c. Project Warranty for workmanship is a minimum of 2 years
11. Maintenance
installed and within 30 days of project completion
36
37
MDF
Typical Design
P110JTW
P110JTW
LISTED
42X6
LISTED
42X6
A
A
RACK 1 RACK 2 RACK 3 RACK 4
drawn by :
Frank Pannell
filename : date : sheet : revision :
MDF Top View 4/29/2015 1 of 2 1.0
38
MDF
IDF Outlet Location
Typical Design
OM3 Fiber Cat 5 25pr Voice Cat 6 Data Cat 6 WAP

Cat 6 Camera
tatch tanel Cwa92U Iorizontal agr baC2
Voice tatch tanel

1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
Adapter tanel CAt6WAv5L/Z

FE
/t245988.L
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
Switch must be in off "O" position to Install/Remove power supply. Switch must be in off "O" position to Install/Remove power supply.
Fastener must be fully enaged prior to operating power supply. Fastener must be fully enaged prior to operating power supply.
6 6 6 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
/amera tatch tanel

INPUT OK INPUT OK
7 7 7 7
FAN OK FAN OK
OUTPUT FAIL OUTPUT FAIL 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
8 8 8 8
/LS/h Switch /tt48CaW.LY

9 9 9 9
INPUT INPUT
100-240 V~ 100-240 V~
12-5 A 12-5 A
50/60 Hz 1000AC 50/60 Hz 1000AC
10 10 10 10
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
11 Catalyst 11 11 11
4510R
2 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
12 12 12 12
WAt tatch tanel

3
13 13 13 13
/tt48CaW.LY
14 14 14 14
Vertical agr bwV10

5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
15 15 15 15
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
6
16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17
5ata tatch tanels

8
18 18 18 18
9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
19 19 19 19
FAN
STATUS
/tt48CaW.LY
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
FLEX-SLOT 10
20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25
Text
26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29
30
31
30
31
30
31
30
31
Set of outlets for back side of each rack
32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33
t5U’s 34
35
34
35
34
35
34
35
36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37
1U 38
39
38
39
38
39
38
39
TrippLite UtS 1U 40
41
40
41
40
41
40
41
2U
42 42 42 42
43 43 43 43
2U 44
45
44
45
44
45
44
45
(2) L6-30 & (2) 5-15
39
IDF
Typical Design
10'-0"
8'-0"
RACK 1 RACK 2
2'-6"
drawn by :
Frank Pannell
filename : date : sheet : revision :
IDF Top View 4/29/2015 1 of 2 1.0
40
27 11 13 Communications Entrance Protection
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Circa
b. Porta Systems
c. FBISD approved equivalent
2. Description
a. This section covers the equipment and accessories installed to protect the facilities from any
harm that may be caused from outside the structure.
3. Specifications
a. All copper cables entering the facility must have proper grounding and fuse links, which meet
ANSI-607-A, NEC NFPA 70, TIA-606-A, TIA-569-B, TIA-568-B, and are UL 497 listed.
b. All OSP cable is to terminate within 50’ of building entrance and have surge protection with
proper grounding.
c. Building entrance conduits shall have caps that are tested to be water tight
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. Contractor is responsible for providing and installation of the correct number and type of
building entrance protected blocks, connectors, fuses, and grounding hardware.
b. All blocks and protectors are to be labeled according to section 27.05.53
2. Continuity
a. This section works in conjunction with the building grounding system as well other
specifications with section 27.
3. Tolerances
a. Grounding requires a minimum of #6 AWG copper bonding conductor to tie directly to
TGB/TMGB or ground rod
4. Testing
a. No continuity test on grounds shall have a resistance greater than 1Ω.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
41
27 11 16 Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames, and Enclosures
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit (MDF/IDF)
b. Hoffman (small IDF)
2. Description
a. This section covers the minimum requirements for the cabinets, racks, and enclosures that will
reside in the MDF, IDF, and Data Center.
b. All listed specifications are minimums and quantity is subject to change as needs are assessed
3. Specifications
a. MDF – (4) R2P racks, with (5) NRV10 and (5) NRD10 (to be on each side of each rack
minimum), (4) NMF2 (to be at top of each rack), racks shall be bolted to floor with anchors, (4)
10250-712 (minimum size) with elevation kit 10506-706 (minimum size), (4) RGS134-1Y
attached to Busbar with #6 AWG insulated conductor (to be installed on each rack)
b. IDF – R2P rack, with (2) NRV10 and (2) NRD10 (to be on each side of the rack minimum), (1)
NMF2 (to be at top of each rack), racks shall be bolted to floor with anchors, (1) 10250-712
(minimum size) with elevation kit 10506-706 (minimum size), (1) RGS134-1Y attached to
Busbar with #6 AWG insulated conductor (to be installed on each rack)
c. Small IDF (cabinet or rack options)
1) PZC12S for wall cabinet solution, (1) RGRB19Y attached to TGB (or building ground) with
#6 AWG insulated conductor (to be installed on each rack)
2) E19SWMC12U24 for wall rack solution, , (1) RGRB19Y attached to TGB (or building ground)
with #6 AWG insulated conductor (to be installed on each rack)
d. Data Center – CN2NU cabinet as needed for add ins, CN12NU for new install applications
when both side panels are needed
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. Install racks, cabinets, and enclosures according to manufacture standard practices
b. Adhere to local and NEC codes as well as ANSI and TIA standards
2. Continuity
a. Adhere to specifications in this section in conjunction with 27.01.10, 27.01.20, 27.05.26,
27.05.36, 27.05.53, 27.06.10, and 27.06.20.
3. Tolerances
a. No continuity test on the ground shall have a resistance greater than 1Ω.
4. Testing
a. All cabinets, racks, and enclosures are to be bonded and grounded according to ANSI-607-A,
NEC NFPA 70, TIA-606-A, TIA-569-B, TIA-568-B, and are UL 497 listed.
b. Racks to be a minimum of 36” from the base plate to the front and back wall, or other obstacles
that may exist in the room
5. Adjustments
42
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 11 19 Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
2. Description
a. This section covers the minimum requirements for termination blocks and patch panel
installations.
3. Specifications
a. Termination Block – P110KB1004Y 100 pair 110 block kit with P110JTW-X trough (to be
installed on ¾” fire rated plywood)
b. Patch Panel – CPP48FMWBLY rack mounted 48 port panel numbered 1-48 with SRB19D5BL
strain relief and NMF2 manager
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. Terminal blocks are to be placed in specified location, leveled, while not obstructing other
trades and installation locations
b. Patch panels are to be placed in specified locations, when 48 port switches are used panels
are to go between each switch
2. Continuity
a. To be labeled according to 27.05.53
b. Terminal wall blocks are to be located near telco demark when it exists
3. Tolerances
a. No space on rack is to be wasted or unused between panels and managers
4. Testing
a. All cabling terminated on blocks are to be tested for continuity
b. Patch panels and managers are to be checked for a minimum of 4 screws each when attached
to the rack and screws not being stripped out
5. Adjustments
43
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 11 23 Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
2. Description
a. This section covers the installation of the ladder rack and the vertical and horizontal mangers
b. The specifications list the minimums of each
3. Specifications
a. Horizontal Manager – NMF2 manager 2u and a minimum of (1) per 48 port panel
b. Vertical Manager – NRD10 manager 10” and a minimum of (1) on each side of rack
c. Ladder Rack - 10250-712 (minimum width) cut to fit between wall and rack, with elevation kit
10506-706 (minimum height), also grounded per 27.05.26
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. All managers are to be bolted to the rack per manufacture specifications
b. The ladder rack shall be cut to fit the area as required and be grounded according to section
27.05.26 in this document
2. Continuity
a. All racks will have horizontal and vertical managers as well as ladder rack connecting to wall.
b. Grounding for ladder rack is specified in section 27.05.26
3. Tolerances
a. All minimums must be met and addition equipment may be required if specified
b. No continuity test on the ground shall have a resistance greater than 1Ω.
4. Testing
a. Managers are to be checked for a minimum of 4 screws each when attached to the rack and
screws not being stripped out
44
b. Ladder rack grounded to be tested according to section 27.05.26

5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 11 26 Communications Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Tripp Lite
2. Description
a. Each 19” rack (EIA-310-E) within the IDF/MDF will contain a PDU and UPS to accommodate
the IT infrastructure that resides within each rack plus a 30% growth and have NEMA approved
grounding per manufacture specifications.
b. PDU/UPS selection determined by port density of IDF/MDF or as approved by FBISD Engineer
3. Specifications
a. PDU (Power Distribution Unit)
1)
PDUMH30HV19NET - 5/5.8kW Single-Phase Switched PDU, 208/240V Outlets (8-C13 & 6-
C19), L6-30P, 15ft Cord, 2U Rack-Mount
2) PDUMH15NET - TAA-Compliant 1.4kW Single-Phase Switched PDU, 15A 120V, Outlets (16
5-15R), 5-15P, 10ft Cord, 1U Vertical
b. UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
1) SU6000RT4UTF - SmartOnline 200-240V (factory 208v) 6kVA 5.4kW On-Line Double-
Conversion UPS, Extended Run, SNMP, Webcard, 6U Rack/Tower, USB, DB9 Serial,
Bypass Switch; Output for unit is (4) 5-15R; (8) 5-15/20R; (2) L6-20R; (2) L6-30R; WITH
SNMPWEBCARD - SNMP Webcard, Remote Monitoring/Control, SmartPro or SmartOnline
UPS Systems (Firmware version 12.04.0048 or higher)
2) SU1500RTXLCD2U - SmartOnline 100-127V 1.5kVA 1.35kW On-Line Double-Conversion
UPS, Extended Run, SNMP, Webcard, 2U Rack/Tower, LCD display, USB, DB9 Serial,
1500VA 1350W NEMA 5-15P input, 6 NEMA 5-15R outlets
45
c. Power outlets to meet power requirements per rack will be mounted at the bottom back side of
the rack and piping will not interfere or come into contact with any infrastructure cabling. Racks
should have a minimum of 36” clearance from the wall on the back side.
1) Qty (2) Dedicated NEMA L6-30P (208v-30amp twist lock) from Generator Power Source
2) Qty (1) NEMA 5-15 duplex outlet from Generator Power Source
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. Installation of PDU and UPS per manufacture specifications
b. Outlets and piping should not obstruct the use of wire management or cable installation
according to TIA-568-B standards.
2. Continuity
a. Outlets should adhere to wiring compatibility of UPS and PDU.
3. Tolerances
a. PDU tested to UL 60950-1 and RoHS compliant
b. UPS tested to UL1778 and RoHS compliant, IEC61000-4-5 B Surge Immunity
c. Outlets piping must allow room for wire manager doors to open and comply with the following
codes and specifications: TIA-607-A, TIA-606-A, TIA-568-B, NEMA, NEC, and UL.
4. Testing
a. All equipment must meet specifications and be tested to manufacture ratings
b. Outlets must meet NEC code, labeling requirements of UL 969, and tested to be working on
emergency generator power to handle a 70% load minimum.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
a. All utilized product cut sheets to be provided in closeout documents along with any operation or
8. Acceptance
c. Regardless of when discovery and rejection are made, and regardless of when the contractor is
ordered to correct such work, the contractor shall have no claim against the Engineer or FBISD
for an increase in the Subcontract price, or for any payment on account of increased cost,
damage, or loss.
27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling

A. GENERAL
1. References
46
specification.
2. Definitions
3. Description
a. This section covers the installation of copper, fiber, coax, and service backbone cabling
a. This section relates to sections 27.01.10, 27.05.26, 27.05.53, and other sub sections within
27.11.xx
5. Submittals
b. Minimum (2) BICSI certified installers with ITS training
47

project completion
9. Conditions
10. Warranty
11. Maintenance
27 13 13 Communications Copper Backbone Cabling
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
b. Superior Essex
c. Circa
2. Description
a. The copper backbone will go from all IDF locations back to the MDF and terminate on a 24 port
patch panel on both ends
b. All cabling inside building must be plenum rated
c. Any cabling exposed to outside elements or traveling below ground level must be OSP and
terminate once entering the building within 50’ as well as be grounded per 27.05.26
3. Specifications
a. Premise - PUP5525WH-UY 25 Pair Plenum from IDF to MDF and terminate on DP245E88TGY
at both ends with port 24 having pairs 24 and 25 terminated there
b. OSP – 04-097-31 25 Pair Direct Burial from IDF to MDF and terminated on 1880ENM1-25 with
4B6FS-240e 5pin surge protection modules for all 25 pair (to be used for any outside or under
grade level applications)(proper grounding is required)
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. All OSP cables must adhere to ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 specifications
48
b. Locations are to be verified with Engineer and FBISD

2. Continuity
a. Backbone cabling to comply with sections 27.01.10, 27.05.28, 27.06.10,and 27.11.19
b. Block and termination locations must be verified with Engineer and FBISD
3. Tolerances
a. Comply with TIA-568-C and associated section 27 sections
b. No continuity test on grounds shall have a resistance greater than 1Ω.
4. Testing
a. All pairs and grounds shall have a continuity test and documentation of tests
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 13 13.13 Communications Copper Cable Splicing and Terminations
27 13 23 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
b. Corning (equivalent)
2. Description
a. This section covers the installation of backbone fiber from MDF to IDF locations
3. Specifications
a. Premise – FOPPX12Y OM3 Multi-Mode 12 fiber armored from MDF to IDF locations
terminated with FLCDMCXAQY LC connectors (use fan out kit as needed) in FRME2U
enclosure (minimum) with FAP6WAQDLCZ on both ends
b. OSP – FOWNX12 OM3 Multi-Mode 12 fiber shielded from MDF to IDF locations terminated
with FLCDMCXAQY LC connectors (use fan out kit FO12CB as needed) in FRME2U enclosure
(minimum) with FAP6WAQDLCZ on both ends (to be used for any outside or under grade level
applications)(proper grounding is required)
49
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. Backbone fiber is to be continuous from MDF to IDF and terminated with LC connectors
b. All OSP fiber is to be grounded according to ANSI/TIA/NEC specifications
2. Continuity
a. Associated with specification sections 27.05.26, 27.05.28, 27.05.43, 27.05.46, 27.05.53,
27.06.10, 27.11.13, and 27.11.09
3. Tolerances
a. Fiber tests must be within manufacture specifications to be accepted by FBISD
b. No continuity test on grounds shall have a resistance greater than 1Ω.
4. Testing
a. Fiber to be tested before and after installation to ensure proper installation procedures
b. All fiber is to be certified to manufacture specifications and certificates are to be presented to
FBISD for 25 year warranty
c. No continuity test on grounds shall have a resistance greater than 1Ω.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 13 23.13 Communications Optical Fiber Splicing and Terminations
27 13 33 Communications Coaxial Backbone Cabling
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a.
2. Description
a.
3. Specifications
a.
50
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a.
2. Continuity
a.
3. Tolerances
a.
4. Testing
a.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 13 33.13 Communications Coaxial Splicing and Terminations
27 13 43 Communications Services Cabling
27 13 43.13 Dial Tone Services Cabling
27 13 43.23 T1 Services Cabling
27 13 43.33 DSL Services Cabling
27 13 43.43 Cable Services Cabling
27 13 43.53 Satellite Services Cabling
27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling

A. GENERAL
1. References
51
specification.
2. Definitions
s. IR – Infrared and Radio Frequency
t. MDF – Main Distribution Frame
u. IDF – Intermediate Distribution Frame
v. TO – Telecommunications Outlets
w. Media – Copper or fiber used to provide a signal transmission path
x. Backbone – Cabling system connecting MDF and IDF areas to one another
y. Horizontal – Cabling system connecting MDF/IDF to TO locations
z. Cabinet – Floor/Wall mounted enclosure designed to house rack mounted equipment
aa. Rack – Floor/Wall mounted open structure designed for rack mounted equipment
bb. Channel – End to end transmission between two points where equipment is to be connected
cc. Link – All horizontal cabling from TO to termination point (does not include patch cables)
dd. Contractor – Successful bidder engaged to provide work for this specification
3. Description
a. This section refers to the installation of voice, data, AV, paging, RF, and antenna horizontal
cabling.
a. This section relates to sections 27.01.XX, 27.11.XX, 27.05.XX, and 27.11.XX
5. Submittals
52

project completion
9. Conditions
10. Warranty
11. Maintenance
27 15 01 Communications Horizontal Cabling Applications
27 15 01.16 Voice Communications Horizontal Cabling

a. Use section 27.15.13 and 27.15.43 for specification of material for voice applications
27 15 01.19 Data Communications Horizontal Cabling

a. Use section 27.15.13 for specification of material for applications of data communications
requiring copper
b. Use section 27.15.23 and 27.15.43 for specification of material for applications of data
communications requiring fiber
27 15 01.23 Audio-Video Communications Horizontal Cabling

a. Use section 27.15.43, 27.16.13 and 27.40.00 for specification of material for applications
of AV communications requiring cabling
27 15 01.46 Paging Communications Horizontal Cabling

a. Use section 27.51.00 for specification of material for applications of paging
communications requiring cabling
27 15 01.49 Intermediate/Radio Frequency Communications Horizontal Cabling

a. Use section 27.53.00 for specification of material for applications of IR communications
requiring cabling
53
27 15 01.53 Antennas Communications Horizontal Cabling

a. Use section 27.53.00 for specification of material for applications of data communications
requiring copper
27 15 13 Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
2. Description
a. This section covers the material and installation of horizontal copper cabling for voice and data
applications.
3. Specifications
a. Premise - PUP6004BU-UY Cat 6 cable from MDF/IDF to outlet terminated on
CJ688TGBU(voice/data), CJ688TGGR(WAP), or CJ688TGOR(camera)
b. OSP/Below Grade – PUO6C04BL-U Cat 6 OSP from consolidation point through conduit to
outlet terminated on CJ688TGBU(voice/data), CJ688TGGR(WAP), CJ699TGOR(camera), or
IAEBH6(wet area), (Must not travel further than 50’ from exited conduit in plenum areas)
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. Installation to meet manufacture and TIA-568-C.2 specifications
b. Any consolidation or termination point above the ceiling is to be marked on the ceiling grid with
a machined label per section 27.05.53
2. Continuity
a. Associated with sections 27.01.00, 27.05.00, 27.06.00, 27.10.00, and 27.16.00
3. Tolerances
a. No cable is to be spliced
b. Maintain specification clearances from interference items
4. Testing
a. Cables with connections are to be certified to manufacture specifications and be accompanied
by manufacture warranty
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
54
27 15 23 Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
b. Corning
2. Description
a. Not standard for horizontal applications
3. Specifications
a. If needed adhere to section 27.13.23 specifications and size fiber accordingly
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. See 27.13.23
2. Continuity
a. See 27.13.23
3. Tolerances
a. See 27.13.23
4. Testing
a. See 27.13.23
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 15 33 Communications Coaxial Horizontal Cabling
55
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a.
2. Description
a.
3. Specifications
a.
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a.
2. Continuity
a.
3. Tolerances
a.
4. Testing
a.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 15 43 Communications Faceplates and Connectors
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
2. Description
a. This section refers to the faceplates and connectors used for communications outlets
3. Specifications
56
a. Voice/Data – CJ688TGBU placed in CFPE4WHY(sheetrock), CBX4WH-A(surface) plate with

10’ service loop of cable and labeled according to 27.05.53
b. WAP – CJ688TGGR placed in CBX2WH-A box with 25’ service loop of cable and labeled
according to 27.05.53 on box and ceiling grid
c. Camera – CJ688TGOR placed in CBX4WH-A(surface) box with 25’ service loop of cable and
labeled according to 27.05.53 on box and ceiling grid
d. OSP/Below Grade – IAEBH6 placed in CBX4WH-A(surface) box with 10’ service loop of cable
and labeled according to 27.05.53 on box
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. All plates are to be installed level with no voids showing
b. Adhere to color codes specified above
2. Continuity
a. Work with other trades that may be installing back boxes to install plates level without voids
b. In conjunction with section 27.01.00, 27.05.33, 27.05.39, 27.05.53, and 27.06.00
c. Color codes are for cable, connector, and cord
3. Tolerances
a. Outlets are to be level, labeled, secured, and certified, no exceptions
4. Testing
a. All connections must pass cable certification
b. Outlets will be tested to be level
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 16 00 Communications Connecting Cords, Devices, and Adapters

A. GENERAL
1. References
57
specification.
b. Refers to all sections under the 27.11.XX, 27.13.XX, and 27.15.XX header
2. Definitions
s. IR – Infrared and Radio Frequency
t. MDF – Main Distribution Frame
u. IDF – Intermediate Distribution Frame
v. TO – Telecommunications Outlets
w. Media – Copper or fiber used to provide a signal transmission path
x. Backbone – Cabling system connecting MDF and IDF areas to one another
y. Horizontal – Cabling system connecting MDF/IDF to TO locations
z. Cabinet – Floor/Wall mounted enclosure designed to house rack mounted equipment
aa. Rack – Floor/Wall mounted open structure designed for rack mounted equipment
bb. Channel – End to end transmission between two points where equipment is to be connected
cc. Link – All horizontal cabling from TO to termination point (does not include patch cables)
dd. Contractor – Successful bidder engaged to provide work for this specification
3. Description
a. This section refers to the parts and installation of patch cords, converters, adapters, and
custom cables
a. Other specifications associated with this section are 27.11.XX, 27.13.XX, and 27.15.XX
5. Submittals
58

project completion
9. Conditions
10. Warranty
11. Maintenance
27 16 13 Communications Custom Cable Assemblies
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. RapidRun
2. Description
a. This section covers the material and installation of AV assemblies
3. Specifications
a.
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a.
2. Continuity
a.
3. Tolerances
a.
4. Testing
a.
5. Adjustments
59
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 16 16 Communications Media Converters, Adapters, and Transceivers
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a.
2. Description
a.
3. Specifications
a.
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a.
2. Continuity
a.
3. Tolerances
a.
4. Testing
a.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
60
8. Acceptance
27 16 19 Communications Patch Cords, Station Cords, and Cross Connect Wire
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. Panduit
b. Corning Equivalent (for fiber)
2. Description
a. This section covers the material and installation of the patch cables for copper and fiber
3. Specifications
a. Copper – UTPSP10BUY(voice/data), UTPSP25GRY(WAP), UTPSP25ORY(camera) on outlet
side, use same colors and lengths are determined as needed per MDF/IDF
b. Fiber – FXE10-10M3Y(MM), F9E10—10M3Y(SM) these are minimum lengths, patch length is
determined as needed per MDF/IDF
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a. All cables are to be sized to fit neatly within the wire management areas
b. Use caution and adhere to copper and fiber maximum bending radiuses
2. Continuity
a. Patch cables residing in Data Center are to be labeled on both end according to 27.05.53
3. Tolerances
a. Be cautious of fiber placement in reference to the copper placement, keep them separated
4. Testing
a. Patch cables are to be tested before and after installation
b. If patch cable is installed at time of cable installation the complete Link is to be tested
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
61
8. Acceptance
62
27 20 00 Data Communications
27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment
27 21 13 Data Communications Firewalls
27 21 16 Data Communications Routers, CSU/DSU, Multiplexers, Codecs, and Modems
27 21 26 Data Communications Network Management
27 21 29 Data Communications Switches and Hubs
27 21 33 Data Communications Wireless Access Points
27 22 00 Data Communications Hardware

27 22 13 Data Communications Mainframes
27 22 16 Data Communications Storage and Backup
27 22 19 Data Communications Servers
27 22 23 Data Communications Desktops
27 22 26 Data Communications Laptops
27 22 29 Data Communications Handhelds
27 24 00 Data Communications Peripheral Data Equipment

27 24 13 Printers
27 24 16 Scanners
27 24 19 External Drives
27 24 23 Audio-Video Devices
27 24 26 Virtual Reality Equipment
27 24 29 Disaster Recovery Equipment
27 25 00 Data Communications Software

27 25 13 Virus Protection Software
27 25 16 Application Suites
27 25 19 Email Software
63
27 25 23 Graphics/Multimedia Software
27 25 26 Customer Relationship Management Software
27 25 29 Operating System Software
27 25 33 Database Software
27 25 37 Virtual Private Network Software
27 25 39 Internet Conferencing Software
27 26 00 Data Communications Programming and Integration Services

27 26 13 Web Development
27 26 16 Database Development
27 26 19 Application Development
27 26 23 Network Integration Requirements
27 26 26 Data Communications Integration Requirements
64
27 30 00 Voice Communications
27 31 00 Voice Communications Switching and Routing Equipment
27 31 13 PBX/ Key Systems
27 31 23 Internet Protocol Voice Switches
27 32 00 Voice Communications Terminal Equipment

27 32 13 Telephone Sets
27 32 16 Wireless Transceivers
27 32 23 Elevator Telephones
27 32 26 Ring-Down Emergency Telephones
27 32 29 Facsimiles and Modems
27 32 36 TTY Equipment
27 32 43 Radio Communications Equipment
27 33 00 Voice Communications Messaging

27 33 16 Voice Mail and Auto Attendant
27 33 23 Interactive Voice Response
27 33 26 Facsimile Servers
27 34 00 Call Accounting
27 34 13 Toll Fraud Equipment and Software
27 34 16 Tele-management Software
27 35 00 Call Management
27 35 13 Digital Voice Announcers
27 35 16 Automatic Call Distributors
27 35 19 Call Status and Management Displays
27 35 23 Dedicated 911 Systems
65
27 40 00 Audio-Video (AV) Communications

27 41 00 Audio-Video Systems
A. GENERAL
1. References
a.
2. Definitions
a.
3. Description
a.
a.
5. Submittals
a.
a.
a.
a.
9. Conditions
a.
10. Warranty
a.
11. Maintenance
a.
27 41 13 Architecturally Integrated Audio-Video Equipment
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
a. RapidRun
2. Description
a.
3. Specifications
a.
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
a.
2. Continuity
a.
3. Tolerances
66
a.
4. Testing
a.
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
67
27 41 16 Integrated Audio-Video Systems and Equipment
27 41 16.28 Integrated AV Systems and Equipment for Conference Rooms
27 41 16.29 Integrated AV Systems and Equipment for Board Rooms
27 41 16.51 Integrated AV Systems and Equipment for Classrooms
27 41 16.61 Integrated AV Systems and Equipment for Theaters
27 41 16.62 Integrated AV Systems and Equipment for Auditoriums
27 41 16.63 Integrated AV Systems and Equipment for Stadiums and Arenas
27 41 19 Portable Audio-Video Equipment
27 41 23 Audio-Video Accessories
27 41 33 Master Antenna Television Systems
27 41 43 Audio-Video Conferencing
27 42 00 Electronic Digital Systems

A. GENERAL
1. References
a.
2. Definitions
a.
3. Description
a.
a.
5. Submittals
a.
a.
a.
a.
9. Conditions
a.
10. Warranty
a.
11. Maintenance
a.
68
27 42 13 Point of Sale Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
3. Specifications
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
27 42 19 Public Information Systems
A. PRODUCTS
1. Manufacture
2. Description
3. Specifications
B. EXECUTION
1. Workmanship
2. Continuity
3. Tolerances
4. Testing
5. Adjustments
6. Review
7. Documentation
8. Acceptance
69
27 50 00 Distributed Communications and Monitoring Systems

27 51 00 Distributed Audio-Video Communications Systems
A. GENERAL
1. References
a.
2. Definitions
a.
3. Description
a.
a.
5. Submittals
a.
a.
a.
a.
9. Conditions
a.
10. Warranty
a.
11. Maintenance
a.
70
27 51 13 Paging Systems
27 51 13.13 Overhead Paging Systems
27 51 16 Public Address Systems
27 51 23 Intercommunications and Program Systems
27 51 23.20 Commercial Intercommunications and Program Systems
27 51 23.50 Educational Intercommunications and Program Systems
27 51 26 Assistive Listening Systems
27 53 00 Distributed Systems
27 53 13 Clock Systems
27 53 13.13 Wireless Clock Systems
27 53 16 Infrared and Radio Frequency Tracking Systems
27 53 19 Internal Cellular, Paging, and Antenna Systems
71
FBISD 28 00 00
Division #28 – Electronic Safety and Security (Introduction)
DIVISION 28 INTENT:
Included within Division 28 sub sections are specific guidelines for materials and installation of
Safety and Security systems, components, and equipment within new and existing Fort Bend
ISD facilities.
1) General Requirements for Electronic Safety and Security (This Section)

2) Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection (28 10 00)
3) Electronic Surveillance (28 20 00)
4) Electronic Detection and Alarm (28 30 00)
5) Electronic Monitoring and Control (28 40 00) – NOT USED
**IMPORTANT: During design phase of project the A/E team shall have a meeting with “Safe
and Secure Schools” department and FBISD Facilities for review of Security, Access Control,
and CCTV design. This meeting is mandatory.**
Electronic Safety and Security (28 00 00)
Contractor’s Qualifications:
 Minimum of 5 years experience in security industry.

 Certified by manufacturer for sales and service of equipment.
 Provide 24 hour support, 7 days a week within 2 hours during normal
business day and 4 hours during non-business hours.
 Licensed in the state of Texas
 Registered through Texas School Safety Center
Contractor shall pay for all applicable permits.
Submittals:
Product data: Submit data showing electrical characteristics and connection

requirements.
Operation and maintenance: Submit instructions for operation and performing

trouble shooting procedures.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 28 00 00
Division #28 – Electronic Safety and Security (Introduction)
Record drawings: Electronic, pdf, record drawings will be required for final
closeout. Close out drawings must include final installed locations, model
numbers and serial numbers of all installed equipment. Include this requirement
for all division 28 systems.
Operation and Maintenance of Electronic Safety and Security (28 01 00)
Specifications shall include 8 hours of training each, for two persons, on each system.
Training/demonstration shall be on site with manufacturer’s representative.
Training/demonstration shall include a “user’s manual” written for the school personnel
on site, for operation of the systems.
Provide a test report showing the system has been 100% tested and functioning prior to
scheduling of training/demonstration.
Operation and maintenance manuals, along with record drawings, to be turned over prior
to training/demonstration.
Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security (28 05 00)
All cabling to be supported from structure using bridal rings or j-hooks connected
to building steel at 5’ intervals. Each system shall have its own supports.
Provide spare conduits at bulk heads, furr downs and at hard ceiling areas
separating sections of buildings. Intent is to provide a future cabling pathway
through inaccessible areas.
All cabling related to security system shall be orange in color.
Schedules for Electronic Safety and Security (28 06 00) – Not required
Commissioning of Electronic Safety and Security (28 08 00)
Commissioning is required for these systems and includes review of submittals, site
verification of installation, witness and verification of the systems
Page 2 of 2
Division #28 – Electronic Safety & Security (Access Control & Intrusion Detection) FBISD 28 10 00
Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection (28 10 00)
• **Mandatory design review meeting shall be held with “Safe and Secure
Schools” department and FBISD Facilities**
• Design of system is by FBISD and current vendor.
• Intrusion detection system manufactured by Ademco or approved system.
Coordinate with FBISD for current vendor.
• Typically system is to provide motion detectors at all entrances, computer labs and
any potential points of access such as windows. If there is a means for persons to
access roof such as canopies located near mechanical yard walls, provide motion
detectors at second floor windows. Provide door contacts at roof hatches and at
exterior mechanical room doors.
• System should be designed during construction documents, so that an appropriate
Allowance amount can be established. Design of system to be coordinated with
FBISD.
• Provide coverage for computer labs and other areas as determined by Owner in plan
review.
• Conduit to support Building Intrusion Alarm System to be provided by electrical
subcontractor or General Contractor. This conduit is NOT part of the Allowance.
• Coordinate with Building Access System. See Division 28 13 00, Building Access
System for location of keypads. In general, provide keypads at same locations as
card readers for building access system listed above and others as determined by
Owner in plan review.
• Electronic, pdf, as-built drawings will be required for final closeout. Close out
drawings must include final installed locations, model numbers and serial numbers of
all installed equipment. Include this requirement for all division 28 systems.
• Requirements for addition/renovation projects:
o Maintain a fully functional system in unaffected areas.
o Remove all abandoned equipment and return to owner.
o Remove all abandoned cabling, patch surfaces.
o Prior to commencement of work, a system test shall be performed to
document condition of system. This shall be part of construction contract.
o At substantial completion a system test shall be performed to
demonstrate system is in the same condition as prior to construction.
Access Control (28 13 00) and Intrusion Detection (28 16 00)
• Design of system is by FBISD and current vendor.

• System will be by Allowance. General Contractor to contract directly with current
vendor
• System manufactured by Win DSX or approved system. Coordinate with FBISD for
current vendor.
• Locate master control panel in MDF room and sub-panels in IDF rooms.
Page 1 of 4
• Requires data drop and emergency power at control panel.

• Card readers require a backbox. Contractor to stub ½” conduit from lay-in ceiling to
location of reader.
• Ensure card reader will cover single gang back box.
• Provide card readers at the following locations. If “(Keypad)” is indicated, also locate
a keypad for the building intrusion alarm system for ability to arm/disarm the system
at that location:
Elementary School:
• Exterior kitchen entrance (Keypad)

• Front entrance to building (Keypad)
• Security Vestibule doors
• Nearest entrance to staff parking lot/bus loading area (use two if separate
entrances)
• MDF and IDF rooms
• Vault rooms
• All exterior doors.
• At administration area, on door that leads to main corridor and Lobby areas.
• Records room.
• Testing materials room.
• Audio/visual storage room.
• Book room.
• Computer Rooms
Middle School:

• Nearest entrance to staff parking lot/bus loading area
• Nearest entrance to athletic fields from gyms and fine arts area(Keypad)
• Vault rooms
• At administration area, on door that leads to main corridor and Lobby areas
• Records room.
• Book room.
• Computer Rooms
Page 2 of 4
High School:

• Nearest entrance to staff parking lot/bus loading area
• Custodial entrance if different from kitchen entrance (Keypad)
• Nearest entrance to athletic fields (Keypad)
• Nearest entrance to fine arts area (Keypad)
• Bus loading area, adjacent to commons
• Field house main entry (Keypad)
• Chemical storage room
• Vault rooms
• At administration area, on door that leads to main corridor and Lobby areas
• Records room.
• Book room.
• Computer Rooms
Other Requirements:
• Provide electric panic devices (electric latch retracting) on all exterior doors at each
card reader so loss of power will not leave doors unsecured.
• Only locks for interior security vestibule shall fail open at loss of power or in the event
of fire alarm. The interior security vestibule doors shall have panic hardware to allow
exit at any time.
• Designate a “secondary student access point” at all secondary schools. At
secondary access point provide an audio/visual intercom similar to Aiphone AX-DVF
entrance module connected to reception area with remote, door hardware release.
• The security vestibule locks shall be released through a hard wired button at the
reception desk and through a pendant worn radio frequency button.
• Provide a “panic button” at reception area connected to security system that will alert
FBISD police.
• On MDF and IDF doors with card readers, provide electric strike. Electric strike to be
provided by hardware supplier. General Contractor to coordinate hardware prep with
door frame and adjacent building construction. Electric strike cannot be used in an
unprotected (weather-wise) location.
Page 3 of 4
• Conduit to support Building Access System to be provided by electrical subcontractor

or General Contractor. This conduit is NOT part of the Allowance.
Page 4 of 4
Division #28 – Electronic Safety and Security (Electronic Surveillance) FBISD 28 20 00
Electronic Surveillance (28 20 00)
• Mandatory design meeting shall be held between FBISD, Safe and Secure Schools,
current vendor, FBISD Facilities and A/E team.
• As-built drawings will be required for final closeout. Close out drawings must Include
final installed locations and model numbers of all installed equipment.
• As built drawings for the electronic surveillance systems must now include model
number, serial number and installed location for each CCTV camera.
• CCTV vendor shall be responsible for all public notice postings as required by Texas
Administrative Code. Signs to be provided by FBISD.
Video Surveillance (28 23 00)
• Provide in ES, MS and HS.

• Design of system FBISD and current vendor.
• System will be by Allowance. System should be designed during construction
documents, so that the Allowance amount can be established. General Contractor to
contract directly with current vendor.
• Conduit to support Building Video Surveillance System to be provided by electrical
subcontractor or General Contractor. This conduit is NOT part of the Allowance.
• Typically FBISD uses a hard drive recorder/server and other equipment as needed to
support cameras provided. FBISD FFE to provide computer monitor (to be
determined during design).
• Locate video hard drive recorder/server in MDF/IDF rooms.
• Requires data drop and emergency power at hard drive location.
• Digital recorders/server shall support minimum 16 cameras per device.
• Generally, elementary schools receive 50-75 cameras but actual count will be
determined by final design.
• Generally, secondary schools receive 100-150 cameras but actual count will be
determined by design.
• Generally, high Schools receive 125 -200 cameras but actual count will be
determined by design.
• All cameras are fixed cameras unless otherwise noted.
• Provide cameras at the following locations:
High Schools:
View all entrances / exits.

View secondary student entrance
Front Office
View restrooms entrances & water fountains.
View long hallways.
Second floor hallways (that are open to first floor).
Page 1 of 3
Main campus hallways (first and second floors).

Isolated areas.
View stairwell landings.
View common areas.
Outside areas.
Inside areas.
View bus loading and unloading area.
Parent drop off and pick up.
Students parking area
Staff parking area
Additional loading and unloading areas (band, agriculture, sports, etc.).
Kitchen delivery area and serving areas.
Secondary hallways
Athletic field house
Schools perimeter
Starting with remote or isolated areas first.
Middle Schools:
View all entrances / exits.

View secondary student entrance
Front Office
View restroom entrances.
View long hallways.
Second floor hallways (that are open to first floor).
Main campus hallways (first and second floors).
View stairwell landings.
View common areas.
Outside areas.
Inside areas.
View bus loading and unloading.
Additional loading and unloading areas (band, sports, etc.).
Kitchen delivery area and serving areas
Secondary hallways.
School perimeter.
Starting with remote and isolated areas
Staff parking
Elementary Schools:
View all entrances / exits

Front Office
Playgrounds.
Page 2 of 3
Bus loading and unloading.

Portable buildings.
Delivery area by kitchen and serving areas
Any additional loading and unloading areas.
Building Perimeter
Starting with remote and isolated areas
Parking areas
Electronic Personal Protection Systems (28 26 00)
Page 3 of 3
Division #28 – Electronic Safety and Security (Electronic Detection and Alarm) FBISD 28 30 00
Electronic Detection and Alarm (28 30 00)
Fire Detection and Alarm (28 31 00)
Fire Alarm System:
• Director of Facilities or designee to assign a building identification number for

use in programming of the system.
• Approved manufacturers are Silent Knight, SK Series systems with a
minimum of two expander modules; no substitutions. IFP 1000 system used
for high school or other facility with extensive number of devices.
• All power supplies shall have integral surge protection
• Provide line isolator modules (SK-150) to isolate circuits. Provide at following
locations at a minimum:
o Main panel
o At line to temporary buildings
o At line to out buildings
o (1) spare
• System to be per all applicable codes and AHJ.
• Locate main fire alarm panel in main administration area; coordinate location
with Owner during construction document preparation. Coordinate location
with AHJ. Locate remote enunciator panel in second floor administration
area, if applicable, and other areas as required by AHJ.
• Coordinate location of strobes with the marker boards and casework. Often,
the heights interfere.
• Coordinate with hardware as follows:
 Mag lock interlocks with fire alarm.
 Magnetic hold open interlocks with fire alarm (if door is located within a
fire-rated construction and is fire-rated).
• Provide STI alarm covers on all pull stations.
• Provide STI protective covers on all signaling devices in public areas and
play areas.
• In schools, locate a smoke detector with an STI stopper protective cover
within each student restroom. Locate the device so that it is as inaccessible
as possible from the students, i.e. not over a toilet or lavatory or other device
that could be used to climb up on to reach the detector.
• Provide a laminated, framed list of operating instructions for school personnel
located adjacent to panel.
• Provide laminated and framed 11”x17” floor plan with room numbers (used on
building signage) that identifies device type and location.
No special requirements for any section listed below:
Radiation Detection and Alarm (28 32 00)
Page 1 of 2
Division #28 – Electronic Safety and Security (Electronic Detection and Alarm) FBISD 28 30 00
Fuel Gas Detection and Alarm (28 33 00)
Fuel Oil Detection and Alarm (28 34 00)
Refrigerant Detection and Alarm (28 35 00)
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 31 00 00
Division #31 – Earthwork (Introduction)
DIVISION 31 INTENT:
Purpose of this section is to identify Fort Bend ISD preferences related to site and building pad
earthwork, including minimum requirements not specifically addressed by Geotechnical
engineer. In all cases, however, recommendations of Geotechnical will supersede any
requirements noted herein by FBISD.
This division has been separated into sub-divisions as follows:
1) Division 31 (Earthwork) Intent and Introduction (This Section)

2) Site Clearing (31 10 00)
3) Earth Moving (31 20 00)
4) Earthwork Methods (31 30 00)
5) Shoring and Underpinning (31 40 00)
6) Excavation Support and Protection (31 50 00)
7) Special Foundations and Load Bearing Elements (31 60 00)
8) Tunneling and Mining (31 70 00) – NOT USED
Earthwork (31 00 00)
Maintenance of Earthwork (31 01 00) – NOT USED
Common Work Results for Earthwork (31 05 00)
Consider drought conditions when designing foundations and other earthwork,

including coordination with irrigation so that soil immediately adjacent to building
structure and other major site elements can be stabilized.
Coordinate above with soils engineer, considering Potential Vertical Rise (PVR)
AND vertical fall of native and imported soils
Schedules for Earthwork (31 06 00) – NOT USED
Commissioning of Earthwork (31 08 00) – NOT USED
Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring of Earthwork (31 09 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 31 10 00
Division #31 – Earthwork (Site Clearing)
Site Clearing (31 10 00)
Clearing and Grubbing (31 11 00)
Remove vegetation, debris and rubbish from top soil. Clear under growth, brush and
dead wood from site without disturbing sub-soil. Remove tree stumps, main root ball and
root system to a depth of 24 inches below finished sub-grade elevation. Fill excavations
with select fill and compact to minimum 90% standard proctor density.
Reference geotechnical report for filling excavations under future finished floor.
Selective Clearing (31 12 00)
Provide clearing in selected areas as directed by FBISD, coordinate with LEED

requirements
Selective Tree and Shrub Removal and Trimming (31 13 00)
Protect living trees identified to remain by FBISD and located 3 feet or more outside
intersection of side slopes and original ground line. Minimize site clearing by retaining all
trees possible if over 4 inches in diameter and of acceptable type. Provide a minimum of
10 feet between trees to remain for maintenance and mowing
Trim bottom (low-hanging) limbs on trees to remain, up to 8’ above proposed final grade.
Trim to occur once prior to work commencing, and a second time prior to substantial
completion.
Clear all underbrush and protect plants other than trees designated by FBISD to remain.
Trim tree branches on trees to remain as directed by FBISD.
Earth Stripping and Stockpiling (31 14 00)
Top soil shall be stripped and stockpiled in a location approved by FBISD. Top soil shall
be spread over all areas receiving sod and/or hydro-mulch seeding. Establish a stand of
grass with no areas of erosion before final acceptance by FBISD.
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 31 20 00
Division #31 – Earthwork (Earth Moving)
Earth Moving (31 20 00)
Off-Gassing Mitigation (31 21 00) – NOT USED
Grading (31 22 00)
Finished grade including sod, soil, mulch and/or bedding materials shall not cover weep
holes. Areas adjacent to buildings, landscaping or other areas shall sheet flow AWAY
from the building at a minimum 2% grade for the first 10 feet with no standing water
Grading around buildings including walkways shall be coordinated with the architect and
FBISD prior to installation of landscape materials.
Grading in grass areas shall be at a minimum grade of 1% grade. Swale ditches shall be
graded at a minimum grade of 0.5% grade. Final grades in grass areas and swales shall
be approved by the FBISD prior to landscaping to insure positive drainage to the
drainage system.
Excavation and Fill (31 23 00)
Comply with OSHA regulations and State of Texas law concerning excavation, trenching
and shoring
Provide sheeting, shoring and bracing necessary to protect excavations and existing
utilities during all phase of the project
All fill shall be engineered per the recommendations of the geotechnical report
Embankments (31 24 00)
Follow the geotechnical report recommendations for all embankment construction
Erosion and Sedimentation Controls (31 25 00)
Provide Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan complying with federal regulations.
Contractor shall be responsible for documentation and submission of all required state,
and federal forms. Contractor shall be responsible for construction, implementation,
maintenance & inspection of the erosion & sediment controls, storm water management
plans, waste collection & disposal, off-site vehicle tracking & other practices.
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 31 30 00
Division #31 – Earthwork (Earthwork Methods)
Earthwork Methods (31 30 00)
Soil Treatment (31 31 00) – NOT USED
Soil Stabilization (31 32 00)
Follow the geotechnical investigation report recommendations for all soil stabilization
Rock Stabilization (31 33 00) – NOT USED
Soil Reinforcement (31 34 00) – NOT USED
Slope Protection (31 35 00)
All slopes 4:1 or steeper shall be protected using hydro mulch seeding methods
following the requirements of Section 32 18 23 Athletic Surfacing-Natural Field Sport
Surfacing or the local governing authority.
Consider the use of solid sod (staked) or Flexterra for slopes exceeding 4:1
Gabions (31 36 00) – NOT USED
Riprap (31 37 00)
Rip rap material for erosion protection shall conform to Fort Bend County Flood Control
District Standard Specifications or other local governing authority design requirements
Provide riprap or concreted slope paving erosion protection at storm sewer connections
to detention ponds or drainage channels. Rip rap shall be a minimum 18 inches thick
with 6 inches of top soil, filling all voids in the rip rap. Establish grass growth on the top
soil using hydro mulch seeding with Bermuda grass and/or rye grass. Concrete slope
paving shall be a minimum of 5” thick with #3 bars on 12” centers.
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 31 40 00
Division #31 – Earthwork (Shoring and Underpinning)
Shoring and Underpinning (31 40 00)
Fort Bend ISD has no special considerations at this time regarding the following sub-sections:
Shoring (31 41 00)
Concrete Raising (31 43 00)
Vibroflotation and Densification (31 45 00)
Needle Beams (31 46 00)
Underpinning (31 48 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 31 50 00
Division #31 – Earthwork (Excavation Support and Protection)
Excavation Support and Protection (31 50 00)
Fort Bend ISD has no special considerations at this time for sub-sections listed below:
Anchor Tiebacks (31 51 00)
Cofferdams (31 52 00)
Cribbing and Walers (31 53 00)
Ground Freezing (31 54 00)
Slurry Walls (31 56 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 31 60 00
Division #31 – Earthwork (Special Foundations & Load Bearing Elements)
Special Foundations and Load-Bearing Elements (31 60 00)
Fort Bend ISD has no current considerations regarding the following sub-sections:
Driven Piles (31 62 00)
Bored Piles (31 63 00)
Caissons (31 64 00)
Special Foundations (31 66 00)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 32 00 00
Division #32 – Exterior Improvements (Introduction)
Division 32 Intent:
Purpose of this section is to provide design and performance criteria for all above-grade exterior
improvements, including Surface Paving, Fences, and Walls.
Also included within this section are design, construction and performance criteria for
Landscaping and Irrigation. It is intended for Irrigation to be part of these standards rather than
providing standard specification section
Contents of Division 32 have been split into sub-sections for convenience, as follows:
1) General Requirements for Exterior Improvements (This Section)

2) Bases, Ballasts, and Paving (32 10 00)
3) Site Improvements (32 30 00)
4) Wetlands (32 70 00)
5) Irrigation (32 80 00)
6) Planting (32 90 00)
Exterior Improvements (32 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of Exterior Improvements (32 01 00)
Common Work Results for Exterior Improvements (32 05 00)
Consider potential for objects to become windborne (during hurricanes or other storms)
when designing, detailing, and specifying materials within this section
Schedules for Exterior Improvements (32 06 00)
Consider for Irrigation and Landscaping, including caliper sizes
Commissioning of Exterior Improvements (32 08 00)
Not required
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 32 10 00
Division #32 – Exterior Improvements (Bases, Ballasts, and Paving)
Bases, Ballasts, and Paving (32 10 00)
Base Courses (32 11 00)
Follow geotechnical report recommendations for limestone (or other rock base)
thickness, size (gradation), and type
Flexible Paving (32 12 00)
Follow geotechnical report recommendations for hot-mix asphaltic concrete pavement

thickness and type
Rigid Paving (32 13 00)
Follow geotechnical report recommendations for concrete pavement thickness,

compressive strength and steel reinforcing. Use minimum 3,500 psi for concrete
pavement
Unit Paving (32 14 00)
No special considerations, reserve
Aggregate Surfacing (32 15 00) – NOT USED
Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks, and Driveways (32 16 00)
Provide 6 inch concrete (3,000 psi) curbs at all drives and parking lot areas. Curbs shall
have a minimum 5 foot radius to prevent damage by vehicles. Review all curb radius
adjacent to public right-of-way with FBISD traffic engineer.
No extruded curb construction allowed
Continuous 6” concrete curbs not required where vegetated drainage swale system
provided (refer to LEED Sections)
Curbs in fire lanes shall be painted following local authority requirements exactly. Where
none exist, provide red curbs with “No Parking” and “Fire Lane” alternated, 20’ spacing.
Indicate recommended locations for fire lanes on architectural site plan as well as
dimensional site plan
Refer to LEED Sections for additional information on designated parking for low-
emission, electric, and car-pool vehicles
Page 1 of 5
FBISD 32 10 00
Provide concrete (3,000 psi) for sidewalks with a minimum thickness of 4.5 inches and
reinforced with #3 bars at 12 inches on centers both ways (no welded wire fabric
allowed)
Paving Specialties (32 17 00) – NOT USED
Athletic and Recreational Surfacing (32 18 00)
Synthetic Grass Surfacing (32 18 13)
** District-Wide Athletic Facilities Only: Provide in-filled synthetic turf system that
is specifically suited for the type of athletic competition proposed. The system
may contain a rubber granule fill or a combination sand-rubber granule fill. The
pile fiber may be made of polyethylene, polypropylene, nylon or a combination of
these materials. The primary backing of the synthetic turf shall resist tearing and
heat degradation and the secondary backing shall be coated with polyurethane
or latex to lock in the fiber in the primary backing.
The synthetic turf shall be capable of draining rapidly after a heavy rainfall with
minimum 10 inch/hour permeability.
The synthetic turf system shall be suitable for inlaid and/or tufted permanent field
markings
Synthetic Resilient Surfacing (32 18 16) – Not Used
Athletic Surfacing (32 18 23)
Baseball Field Surfacing (32 18 23.13)
Provide 6 inch thick red dog cinders 60/40 mix for high school
baseball/softball fields warning tracks.
Provide 6 inch deep infield topping mix as supplied by ABC Sports Turf
(281-493-3327), Fielders Choice, Inc. (713-466-9200) or Living Earth
Technologies (281-499-5641). Provide a 25% mixture of “Red Improved
Diamond Pro” infield conditioner in the top 2 inches of the infield topping.
Natural Baseball Field Surfacing – Refer to above
Synthetic Baseball Field Surfacing – Not Used
Field Sport Surfacing – Not Used
Page 2 of 5
FBISD 32 10 00
Natural Field Sport Surfacing (32 18 23.26)
Athletic fields shall have a minimum 6 inches of top soil material, subject
to approval of FBISD Grounds/Maintenance.
Laser-grade fields to elevations shown on drawings prior to seeding.

FBISD Design and Construction Department will coordinate with FBISD
Grounds/Maintenance to participate in a punch list walk through prior to
acceptance of the final grading of top soil.
Athletic fields (competition and practice) shall be hydro mulch seeded.

Summer and spring seed application shall be Panama Bermuda grass
seed; fall and winter seed application shall be Panama Bermuda grass
seed with perennial rye grass seed in 50/50 mix.
Athletic fields shall be completed one year prior to Substantial Completion

of the new buildings. FBISD Grounds/Maintenance shall be involved in
Substantial Completion acceptance of the athletic fields. Special
emphasis will be placed on removal of debris and proper grading for
drainage. Maintenance of athletic fields will be turned over to FBISD after
completion of punch list items for grounds and fields. A separate
Substantial Completion certificate may be issued for the athletic fields
prior to acceptance of the remainder of the entire project.
Synthetic Field Sport Surfacing (Refer to 32 18 13 Synthetic Grass Surfacing)
Running Track Surfacing – NOT USED
Natural Running Track Surfacing (31 18 23.36)
Provide cinder track surfacing if directed by FBISD, middle schools only
Synthetic Running Track Surfacing (31 18 23.39)
Provide polyurethane base mat surface with black structural spray coat
13 mm thickness for high school athletic track surfacing.
Provide sub-grade soil stabilization following the geotechnical report

recommendations. Ensure separate soil borings are obtained for track
areas, do not utilize geotechnical reports from previous projects of
adjacent locations on site.
Page 3 of 5
FBISD 32 10 00
Provide full depth curbs around the perimeter of the athletic track with
concrete curb abutments at curves.
Provide limestone base and asphalt pavement section for the athletic
track following the geotechnical report and track design consultant
recommendations.
Provide field events conforming to UIL requirements. Provide concrete

(not asphalt) runways with synthetic track surfacing for long jump/triple
jump and pole vault facilities.
Recreational Court Surfacing (32 18 23.43)
Provide playground surfaces 12 inches thick as manufactured by the

following companies:
“Woodcarpet” and Dura-Line geotextile fabric from Zeager Bros,

Inc. 800-346-8524
Fibar (Hardwood material only-not system) from Total Recreation

Products 800-392-9909
Novus Cushion of Wood, pure virgin hardwood fiber from

Kraftsman 800-451-4869
Kiddie Cushion (Hardwood material only) from Living Earth

Technologies Co. 281-499-5641
Bio-Carpet, cypress hardwood from Super Mulch, Inc. 770-772-

9499
Provide border of black interlocking plastic timbers made of UV stable

rotomolded plastic with rounded corners. Timbers to be a minimum of 4
feet lengths and made of 3/16 inch double walled plastic for rigidity.
Provide a 10 year warranty. Stakes shall be made of 18-30 inch
galvanized steel with tampered and/or rounded and capped ends.
Provide prefabricated ramps to be used to ramp into playground areas.
Tennis Court Surfacing – See below
Natural Tennis Court Surfacing – NOT USED
Synthetic Tennis Court Surfacing (32 18 23.59)
Page 4 of 5
FBISD 32 10 00
Provide even-textured acrylic surface system for post-tensioned concrete

tennis courts as manufactured by California Products Corp. or Laykold
Recreational Sports Surfacing. Court color shall be dark green with
surrounding area to be red. All line markings to be white.
Refer to section 32 31 00 for information regarding fence construction,

Educational Specifications and Design Guidelines for configurations,
sizes, and locations
Page 5 of 5
FBISD 32 30 00
Division #32 – Exterior Improvements (Site Improvements)
Site Improvements (32 30 00)
Fences and Gates (32 31 00)
Gate Operators (32 31 11)
Generally NOT USED, however, coordinate with FBISD for uses on Auxiliary Facilities such as
Transportation, Ag Science, or Safe and Secure (Police) facilities where security and enhanced
site access control are required
At locations where gate is more than 300’ from facility, recommend using solar power operator
with battery, however, this may be contradictory with FBISD access control requirements.
Verify needs and security requirements with FBISD Project Manager and Safe and Secure
Schools Director.
Chain Link Fences and Gates (32 31 13)
Recreational Court Fences and Gates (32 31 13.23)
Consider heights based on security and visibility needs
Tennis Court Fences and Gates (32 31 13.26)
Provide commercial grade galvanized fabric, 9 gage, 1-3/4” mesh with double knuckle, top and
bottom for 10 feet high fence. Corner and line posts shall be a minimum 4 inch, Schedule 40
galvanized steel. Top and middle rail shall be a minimum 1-5/8 “, Schedule 40 galvanized steel
pipe. Provide 9 gauge tension wire at bottom of fence fabric.
Tennis Court Wind Breaker (32 31 13.29)
Provide 9 foot windscreen with wind flaps for 10 foot high fences with open area at bottom (for
drainage and to prevent direct contact with ground, deterring premature deterioration)
Provide windscreens with wind flaps for baseball and softball the same size as the outfield
fences with approximately 6 inches open area at the bottom. Provide windscreen at curve of
outfield fence (corner to corner). Lisco or equal.
Page 1 of 4
FBISD 32 30 00
Chain Link Backstops (32 31 13.33)
Provide 5.563 inch O.D. galvanized steel end posts and 4.00 inch O.D. galvanized steel line
posts, 1-5/8 inch O.D. horizontal rails at 6 feet on centers for 18 feet high backstops for baseball
and softball fields. Backstop post piers shall be 6 feet deep (+ 3 inches bottom cover), 18 inch
diameter and be reinforced with 4- #3 verticals and #3 stirrups at 24 inch on center, Top of
concrete shall be 2 inches below finish grade.
All posts/pipes, including and especially horizontal members, should be arranged to avoid press
box windows
Size backstops so that no portion of baseball or softball bleachers are in direct site line of
batter’s box without chain link protection
Welded Wire Fences and Gates (32 31 16) - NOT USED
Expanded Metal Fences and Gates (32 31 17) - NOT USED
Aluminum Fencing:
Dimensions between supports shall be no further than 8’
Provide only standard heights, no custom components allowed
Steel Fencing:
Pre-finished aluminum is preferred over steel except where high abuse is expected, durability is
needed
Decorative Metal Fences and Gates (32 31 19) - NOT USED
Plastic Fences and Gates (32 31 23) - NOT USED
Wire Fences and Gates (32 31 26) - NOT USED
Wood Fences and Gates (32 31 29)
Generally NOT USED unless requested by Jurisdictional Agency
Page 2 of 4
FBISD 32 30 00
Composite Fences and Gates (32 31 32) - NOT USED
Retaining Walls (32 32 00) – RESERVE
Fabricated Bridges (32 34 00) – NOT USED
Fabricated Pedestrian Bridges (32 34 13) – RESERVE, No Current Special Considerations
Screening Devices (32 35 00) - NOT USED
Screens and Louvers (32 35 13) - NOT USED

Sound Barriers (32 35 16) - NOT USED
Manufactured Site Specialties (32 39 00) - NOT USED
Manufactured Metal Bollards (32 39 13)
Consider for use at Main Entry, subject to approval of FBISD Project Manager.
All other areas provide concrete filled galvanized steel pipe, removable where appropriate for
maintenance access. Provide welded steel angle cleat for FBISD-provided padlock.
Marquee Sign (32 40 00)
New School Marquee signs shall include the following equipment requirements:
Double Faced 32 MM Amber Marquee
Display Dimensions: 3’H x 8’L
Rear Lighted Sign Dimensions: 2’H x 8’L
Electronic Display Features: 24x72 Pixel Pitch
Minimum Character Size: 3- Lines of 7” Character with 17 Characters per line
Maximum Character Size: 1-Lines of 30” Character with 4 Character per line
Color Capability: 256 shades
Page 3 of 4
FBISD 32 30 00
Graphics Capabilities: Text, Animations, Logos, Multiple Fonts, Moving Messages, Advertising,
Time and Temp
Communications: Wireless Operation by Software (Computer Not Included)
Display Dimming: 16 Levels of Brightness
Display Cabinet: Reinforced Weather Resistant Aluminum
Guarantee: 5 year Parts Warranty
Warranty: 1 year on-site service and labor
Installation of marquee to include ground monument structure in concrete footing as per

stamped drawing, hoisting and attaching the complete marquee and lighted sign, internal
electrical hookup inside of marquee, test and training.
Does include: Removing old marquee, basic clean-up of area, permitting and stamped
engineered drawing
Electrical Prevision to change the breaker in the existing panel inside the school building to a
two-pole breaker allowing for 240vac hookup. This was done to eliminate the voltage drop issue
due to the 600’ electrical run to the sign from the electrical panel.
Install disconnect at sign per NEC
Electrical- Bore and install conduit for 600’ run including #8 Wire, 20amp, 208v circuit, ¾”
conduit inside building, 1” conduit outside to sign, breaker, disconnect at sign, labor and
materials needed to complete
Page 4 of 4
FBISD 32 70 00
Division #32 – Exterior Improvements (Wetlands)
Wetlands (32 70 00) – NOT USED
Constructed Wetlands (32 71 00) - NOT USED
Wetlands Restoration (32 72 00) - NOT USED
Reserve for LEED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 32 80 00
Division #32 – Exterior Improvements (Irrigation)
Irrigation (32 80 00)
Refer to LEED Sections for additional information, specifically regarding use of

rainwater catchment for irrigation use, as well as requirements/recommendations for
reducing irrigation demand
Irrigation Pumps (32 82 00)
Provide prefabricated skid mounted irrigation pump system with cycle stop control valve
and cycle sensor as manufactured by W. C. Smith Manufacturing, Inc., or equal.
Provide master valve, tied to Irrigation Controller, to shut off system. On some
controllers, this is tied to pump. If pump not required, pump ‘on’ signal would open
master valve (valve fail closed)
Planting Irrigation (32 84 00)
Drip Irrigation (32 84 14)
Provide buried line bubbler irrigation at trees in lieu of sprinkler heads.
Underground Sprinklers (32 84 23)
Provide irrigation for competition football field at middle schools but not for
practice fields.
Provide irrigation for competition football, softball and baseball fields and one
football practice field and one practice soccer field at high schools. Additional
fields are not irrigated unless directed by FBISD.
Irrigation system shall be reviewed prior to any cover-up. Architect, Irrigation

Consultant (if used), FBISD Design and Construction Department and
Grounds/Maintenance Department personnel shall attend.
Irrigation Piping:
Shall be Schedule 40 at all supply lines, no 1 ¼” piping allowed
Schedule 80 piping allowed only at piping from control valves to heads
Irrigation Piping Connections:
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 32 80 00
Division #32 – Exterior Improvements (Irrigation)
CHRISTY’S RED-HOT BLUE GLUE, or approved equal. Use a

compatible primer recommended by the solvent cement manufacturer.
Provide lockable cage/covers for above ground back-flow devices
Provide irrigation controller that is internet-ready, to allow for remote-access

control by FBISD Grounds and Maintenance, with over-ride control and
monitoring through Building Automation System (refer to Division 25 for
additional information)
Controller, valves, and flow sensors to be by same manufacturer.
Controllers:
Provide Rain Bird ESP-LXME with Network Communication Cartridge and

integral water-conserving technology, in weather-proof enclosure located
in service yard or other area that does not require FBISD Grounds to
enter building. Provide data connection so that controller can be
monitored/overridden remotely (Rain Bird IQv2 Central Control)
http://www.rainbird.com/ESPLXseries/downloads/bro_ESP-
LXSeriesControllers.pdf
http://www.rainbird.com/ESPLXseries/downloads/bro_IQv2Central
Control.pdf
Note that on existing buildings, Rain Bird ESP-MC is likely provided,

which will still require data connection so that remote control and
monitoring is possible (via Rain Bird IVx2 Central Control or Maxicom 2)
http://www.rainbird.com/documents/turf/ts_ESP-MC.pdf
http://www.rainbird.com/documents/turf/bro_maxicom2.pdf
Agricultural Irrigation (32 86 00) – NOT USED
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 32 90 00
Division #32 – Exterior Improvements (Planting)
Planting (32 90 00)
Refer to LEED Sections for additional information regarding recommended

locations and types
Balance LEED requirements and recommendations included within this section with City
Standards. Where recommended species do not align, schedule Pre-Development
Meeting with AHJ to review alternatives
Planting Preparation (32 91 00)
Soil Preparation (32 91 13)
Hold surface grading down 2” at all areas set to receive sod. Provide 6” of
organic material under all areas. This may not be native soils, especially in
locations where high clay-content soils are present
Planting Soil Stabilization (32 91 16) – No special requirements
Landscape Grading (32 91 19) – No special requirements
Turfs and Grasses (32 92 00)
Hydro-Mulching (32 92 13)
Refer to 32 18 23 Athletic Surfacing-Natural Field Sport Surfacing for hydro

mulching requirements.
Plugging (32 92 16) - NOT USED
Seeding (32 92 19)
Refer to 32 18 23 Athletic Surfacing-Natural Field Sport Surfacing for seeding

requirements.
Sodding (32 92 23)
Consideration should be given to solid rolled sod for the competition athletic
fields for high schools in order to establish ground cover in a shorter period of
time. Rolled sod shall be Tifway 419 hybrid Bermuda grass field grown, not less
than 10 months prior to harvest. Rolls shall be 42 inches wide and 50 feet long
Page 1 of 3
FBISD 32 90 00
and harvested not more than 18 to 24 hours prior to installation. Maintain sod
areas for a minimum of 60 days after installation to insure normal, vigorous and
healthy growth of sod.
Sprigging (32 92 26)
Consideration should be given to sprigging the competition athletic fields for high
schools in order to establish ground cover in a shorter period of time. Sprigs shall
be common Bermuda or Tifway 419 hybrid Bermuda grass not less than 2 years
old cut to 2-1/2 inches in height and spread at a rate of 25 bushels per 1000
square feet. Maintain sprigged areas for a minimum period of 60 days after
planting to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of grasses.
Plants (32 93 00)
Planting beds shall be a minimized and located typically only at the front
entrance. Beds should have a 12 inch concrete mow strip adjacent to lawn
areas. Final elevation of planting beds shall be several inches below building
weep holes.
Provide a 2 feet wide concrete strip in front of all parking spaces which are
bordered by shrubs. Plant shrub center 3 feet away from the strip edge t provide
enough space for the car to overhang the curb and allow the shrub to be trimmed
while a car is parked.
Ground Covers (32 93 13) - NOT USED
Shrubs (32 93 33)
Coordinate with FBISD on required xeriscape planting with Texas native plants
and drought tolerant planting. Regardless of drought tolerance any shrub which
has berries, is poisonous in any way, or has sharp thorns or leaves should not be
specified.
Trees (32 93 43)
Trees shall be located 5’ more than mature drip line from buildings (Example:
Mature Live Oak Tree, 30 years old, has drip line of 30’ from center, therefore
must be planted 35’ from nearest structure)
Page 2 of 3
FBISD 32 90 00
INDICATE TREES ON SITE PLANS (ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL, AND

LANDSCAPING) WITH MATURE DRIP LINES (NOT DIAGRAMATIC SIZE
TYPICALLY FOUND ON LANDSCAPING PLANS), FOR COORDINATION WITH
UTILITIES AND ABOVE GRADE STRUCTURES
Mature Tree is considered to be 30 years old for most varieties
DO NOT consider Bradford Pears
Consider tree species that require less water, and are drought resistant.
Refer to Texas Forest Service website below for recommended tree species in
Fort Bend County. DO NOT INTRODUCE TREE SPECIES THAT ARE NOT
RECOMMENDED FOR USE ON FORT BEND COUNTY.
http://texastreeplanting.tamu.edu/
Submit sample of soil to Texas Agricultural Extension Service along with

recommended tree species prior to finalizing landscape plans, for verification of
tree viability.
Refer to Section 32 00 00 for additional information concerning first year

maintenance of all plantings (including trees and shrubs). Generally, landscape
installer shall be responsible for initial placement, initial trim, and one additional
trim within first year.
Planting Accessories (32 94 00)
Landscape Edging (32 94 13)
Utilize where decomposed granite used
Landscape Timbers (32 94 16) – NOT USED
Landscape Surfacing (32 94 19) – NOT USED
Planters (32 94 33) – NOT USED
Tree Grates (32 94 43) and Tree Grids (32 94 46) – Avoid Use
Transplanting (32 96 00) - NOT USED
Page 3 of 3
FBISD 33 00 00
Division #33 – Utilities (Introduction)
DIVISION 33 INTENT (33 00 00)
Purpose of this Division is to provide FBISD specific materials, procedures and testing with
regard to water distribution systems, sanitary sewer collection and drainage systems, and storm
water drainage systems.
All categories of work within this Division have been sub-divided as follows, for convenience:
1) Division 33 (Utilities) Introduction (This Section)

2) Water Utilities (33 10 00)
3) Wells (33 20 00)
4) Sanitary Sewerage Utilities (33 30 00)
5) Storm Drainage Utilities (33 40 00)
All Sub-Divisions below should be considered NOT USED. Refer to other sections (MEP)
1) Fuel Distribution Utilities (33 50 00) – Refer to 22 20 00

2) Hydronic and Steam Energy Utilities (33 60 00) – Refer to 23 20 0
3) Electric Utilities (33 70 00) – Refer to Division 26
4) Communications Utilities (33 80 00) – Refer to Division 27
Utilities (33 00 00)
Operation and Maintenance of Utilities (33 01 00) – No special considerations
Common Work Results for Utilities (33 05 00) – No special considerations, except for those
listed within Sub-Divisions
Schedules for Utilities (33 06 00) – No need anticipated, no special considerations
Commissioning of Utilities (33 08 00)
Coordinate with LEED Section for information related to Enhanced Commissioning

of Building Systems (where approved by FBISD Project Manager)
Instrumentation and Control for Utilities (33 09 00) – No special considerations
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 33 10 00
Division #33 – Utilities (Water Utilities)
Water Utilities (33 10 00)
Water Utility Distribution Piping (33 11 00)
Provide poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, DR-18, Class 150, AWWA C900 or C905, for
domestic or fire lines 4 inches and larger
Provide poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, Schedule 40 with schedule 80 fittings for water
lines 3 inches and smaller
Provide bedding and backfill for all water lines following appropriate AHJ requirements
Water Utility Distribution Equipment (33 12 00)
Provide underground fire vault with double check valve assembly unless not allowed by
local City or MUD. Provide gravity drainage of vault to prevent holding water in vault. Set
top of vault slightly above surrounding grade (1” to 2”) and pour a two foot wide mow
strip around perimeter for ease of maintenance. Provide 2” conduit to building (nearest
mechanical room) to allow for installation of tamper-flow and/or meter.
Most governing entities require an above ground RPZ backflow for domestic service.
Fire service can usually be served by a vault structure. FBISD does not require an
enclosure or cage around any above ground RPZ structure.
Provide separate meters for domestic water service, cooling tower, and irrigation unless
not allowed by local authority. Coordinate with other metering requirements, as
identified in Division 25 (Building Automation Systems)
Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution (33 13 00) – Provide testing and disinfecting for all water
lines per AHJ requirements
Water Utility Storage Tanks (33 16 00)
If required, A/E shall provide design calculations, documents and coordinate

equipment/material selection with FBISD.
Refer to LEED Section and Division 21 (Plumbing) for design information regarding
above and/or underground storage of rainwater for use with non-potable water system
(grey water and/or irrigation)
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 33 20 00
Division #33 – Utilities (Wells)
Wells (33 20 00)
Water Supply Wells (33 21 00)
Irrigation wells should be considered for use on high schools only. No interconnect will
be allowed between irrigation well and domestic service. Coordinate design with FBISD
and obtain all applicable approvals from governing authorities.
Test Wells (33 22 00) – NOT USED
Extraction Wells (33 23 00) – NOT USED
Monitoring Wells (33 24 00) – NOT USED
Recharge Wells (33 25 00) – NOT USED
Relief Wells (33 26 00) – NOT USED
Well Abandonment (33 29 00) – NOT USED
Page 1 of 1
FBISD 33 30 00
Division #33 – Utilities (Sanitary Sewerage Utilities)
Sanitary Sewerage Utilities (33 30 00)
Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping (33 31 00)
Match proposed MEP pipe type and size from connection at building to first manhole
structure (typically MEP provides utilities 5’ outside building).
Provide poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, Schedule 40 with rubber gasket joints for sanitary
sewers 6 inches and smaller.
Provide poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, SDR 35 with rubber gasket joints for sanitary
sewers 8 inches and larger.
Provide cement-stabilized sand bed and backfill for all sanitary sewer piping. Confirm
City or County requirements.
Provide mandrel and air testing of all sanitary sewer lines following City or MUD
requirements. All sanitary sewer lines shall be inspected via camera.
Wastewater Utility Pumping Stations (33 32 00)
If required, the A/E shall provide design calculation, documents and coordinate
equipment selection with FBISD.
Low Pressure Utility Sewerage (33 33 00) – NOT USED
Sanitary Utility Sewerage Force Mains (33 34 00)
Provide poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) pipe DR-18, Class 150, AWWA C900or C905 for
sanitary sewer force mains.
Utility Septic Tanks (33 36 00)
Septic tank/drain field sewer systems are generally not acceptable to FBISD.
Sanitary Utility Sewerage Structures (33 39 00)
Sanitary sewer manholes shall be precast concrete structures with water tight adaptors
of a type compatible with pipe materials being used. Sanitary manholes interiors shall be
sealed using with Raven Liner 405 or Thane Coat. All sanitary sewer manholes shall be
vacuum tested.
Sanitary cleanouts shall be installed so that they open in the direction opposite to the
flow of the waste water. Cleanouts shall have an air tight mechanical plug. All cleanouts
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 33 30 00
Division #33 – Utilities (Sanitary Sewerage Utilities)
shall be traffic duty. Cleanouts in grassed areas shall have a 6” concrete collar poured
around cleanout. Cleanouts shall be set to match finished grades and not cause an
obstruction for mowing equipment.
Page 2 of 2
FBISD 33 40 00
Division #33 – Utilities (Storm Drainage Utilities)
Storm Drainage Utilities (33 40 00)
Storm Utility Drainage Piping (33 41 00)
Match proposed MEP pipe type and size from connection at building (typically 5’ outside
building) to first inlet or manhole structure. No Fernco couplings allowed.
Provide corrugated high density polyethylene pipe (HDPE) with smooth interior with
gasket joints for storm sewers 12 inches and larger for site drainage.
Provide poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) pipe having a SDR of 35 with gasket joints for storm
sewers 10 inches or less for site drainage.
Provide reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) meeting ASTM C-76, Class III with bell and
spigot rubber gasket joints in public right-of-way and/or connections to public storm
sewer systems.
Provide cement sand bedding and backfill for all storm sewer pipe following City or
County requirements.
Culverts (33 42 00)
Provide reinforced concrete pipe for culverts, meeting the same requirements as noted
above in 33 41 00
Culverts located within 30 feet of public right-of way shall have minimum 6:1 safety end
treatments. Culverts larger than 30 inch diameter shall have safety pipe runners. Steel
reinforcing bars cast into safety ends are not acceptable
Provide cement sand bedding and backfill for culverts following City or County
requirements
Storm Utility Water Drains (33 44 00)
Provide two outfall points drains from enclosed or semi-enclosed court yards so that
area does not pond water. Size pipes in court yards for the 100 year storm event to
main storm sewer trunk line.
Storm Utility Drainage Pumps (33 45 00)
Storm pump stations are generally discouraged by FBISD. If required, the A/E shall
provide design calculations, documents and coordinate equipment selection with FBISD.
Page 1 of 2
FBISD 33 40 00
Division #33 – Utilities (Storm Drainage Utilities)
Subdrainage (33 46 00)
Provide corrugated high density polyethylene (HDPE) double wall perforated sub-drain
pipe with perforations at 45 degrees, “F” configuration. Provide aggregate drainage
media and geotextile filter fabric encasement.
Ponds and Reservoirs (33 47 00)
Detention ponds shall be designed and approved by the governing County, Drainage
District, or City
Side slopes on detention ponds shall not exceed 4:1 slope and shall be protected from
erosion with solid sod or hydro mulch seeding. Solid sod on side slopes shall be staked
until root growth is established.
Consider the use of solid sod or Flexterra® Flexible Growth Medium™ throughout entire
pond and four foot outside pond to control erosion
Where underground detention required, consider over-sizing capacity so that static

water level is possible, for use by irrigation system. Refer to LEED Sections for
additional information
Storm Drainage Structures (33 49 00)
Storm sewer manholes and inlets shall be precast concrete structures. Fill inlet bottom
with concrete and slope to ensure positive drainage from inlet to storm sewer line.
Brick manholes may be used if approved by A/E when setting structures on existing
utility lines. Brick structures must be mortared inside and out.
Provide concrete mow strips around all inlets located in grass areas. Concrete shall
extend 24 inches from each side of the inlet.
Provide slotted type cast iron grates for inlets with openings approximately 1-5/16”x6-
5/8” and similar in design to Model V5630 by East Jordon Iron Works or FBISD
approved alternate.
Page 2 of 2

Construction Standards Rev.3

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Construction Standards Rev.3

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

JANUARY 28, 2016

Rev Description Date Revised By Approved Approved By

Construction Standards Revision Procedure

Division 02 - Existing Conditions

Division 06 - Wood, Plastic, Composites

Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection

Division 13 - Special Construction

Division 14 - Conveying Systems

Division 25 - Building Automation

Division 28 - Safety and Security

Division 32 - Exterior Improvements

1.01.1 FBISD Construction Standard Modification Log

Page 1 of 1 MODULE: GENERAL

DGCS Modification # Submission Date:

Org. #: _________ School Name: __________________________________ BP #:

Page 1 of 1 MODULE: DG&CS Revision

Revision Date: TASK/DOCUMENT:

(January 20, 2016 Update)

1) General Requirements for Division 02 (This Section)

Include information on scheduling of phases (durations, coordination with campus

02 01 00 Maintenance of Existing Conditions – NOT USED

02 05 00 Common Work Results for Existing Conditions – NOT USED

02 06 00 Schedules for Existing Conditions – NOT USED

(January 20, 2016 Update)

Assessment (02 20 00)

Surveys (02 21 00)

Include in drawings (Site, Boundary and Survey, Archeological and Historical)

Existing Condition Assessment (02 22 00)

Include if available (Movement and Vibration, Acoustic, Traffic, Accessibility)

Environmental Assessment (02 24 00)

Existing Material Assessment (02 25 00)

Include if relevant to completion of current scope of work

Hazardous Material Assessment (02 26 00)

Include (abatement and remediation protocols included in 02 80 00):

(January 20, 2016 Update)

SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS (02 30 00)

Geophysical Investigations (02 31 00) – NOT USED

Geotechnical Investigations (02 32 00)

Conducted by FBISD vendor, add to drawings and specs to ensure coordination

Add entire report, including any supplements and/or addenda

(January 20, 2016 Update)

DEMOLITION AND STRUCTURE MOVING (02 40 00)

Provide detailed Demolition plans in contract documents, including photos

Demolition (02 41 00)

Selective Site Demolition (02 41 13)

Structure Demolition (02 41 16)

Selective Demolition (02 41 19)

Selective Historic Demolition (02 41 91)

Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials (02 42 00)

Includes Deconstruction and Salvage, Removal of elements from historic facilities

Structure Moving (02 43 00) – RARE, RESERVE

(January 20, 2016 Update)

SITE REMEDIATION (02 50 00)

Physical Decontamination (02 51 00)

General – Most Types excluded

Surface Cleaning Decontamination (02 51 29) and Surface Removal Decontamination

Includes mildew, bird excrement, sand/soil, and others, removed by high

All below not anticipated on FBISD projects:

Chemical Decontamination (02 52 00)

Thermal Decontamination (02 53 00)

Biological Decontamination (02 54 00)

Remediation Soil Stabilization (02 55 00)

Site Containment (02 56 00)

Org. #: _ School Name: __________________________ BP #: